Skip to main content

Full text of "The life and works of Christopher Dock, America's pioneer writer on education : with a translation of his works into the English language"

See other formats 


f[.  /P^^U^U^^^y 


FROM    THE   LIBRARY   OF 

REV.    LOUIS    FITZGERALD    BENSON.   D.  D. 

BEQUEATHED   BY   HIM   TO 

THE   LIBRARY   OF 

PRINCETON  THEOLOGICAL   SEMINARY 


J***-  Sc 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2012  with  funding  from 

Princeton  Theological  Seminary  Library 


http://archive.org/details/lifeworksOOdock 


the  life  and  works  of 
Christopher  Dock 


ONLY  1000  COPIES  OF  THIS  WORK 
HAVE  BEEN  PRINTED,  OF  WHICH  THIS  IS 

No.    Qi 


THE 

V 


Life  and  Works 


of  * 


CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

America's  Pioneer  Writer  on  Education 


A  TRANSLATION  OF  HIS  WORKS 
INTO  THE  ENGLISH  LANGUAGE 


BY 

MARTIN  G.  BRUMBAUGH,  Ph.D.,  LL.D 

Superintendent  of  Schools,  Philadelphia 


WITH  AN  INTRODUCTION 
BY 

Hon.  SAMUEL  W.  PENNYPACKER,  LL.D. 

Ex-Governor  of  the  Commonwealth  of  Pennsylvania 


PHILADELPHIA  &  LONDON 

J.  B.  LIPPINCOTT   COMPANY 

I908 


Copyright,  1908 
By  J.  B.  Lippincott  Company 


Published  May,  1908 


Printed  by  J.  B.  Lippincott  Company 
The  Washington  Square  Press,  Philadelphia,  U.  S.  At 


INTRODUCTION 

Twenty-five  years  ago  the  name  of  Christopher 
Dock,  the  pious  schoolmaster  on  the  Skippack,  was 
unknown  to  the  reading  world,  and  the  light  of  local 
fame,  extending  from  Germantown  to  Goshenhop- 
pen,  which  in  the  eighteenth  century  gave  a  genial 
glow  to  his  life,  had  faded  to  an  almost  imper- 
ceptible ember.  To-day  it  is  no  exaggeration  to  say 
that  any  treatise  upon  pedagogy  which  should  omit 
recognition  of  his  important  labors  would  be  re- 
garded as  a  failure,  and  his  reputation  as  a  leader 
in  educational  development  in  America  is  univer- 
sally recognized. 

Many  learned  authors  have  vied  with  each  other 
in  doing  homage  to  the  memory  of  one  so  worthy. 
To  have  written  the  earliest  American  book  upon 
the  subject  of  school  teaching  is  a  fact  sufficient  in 
itself  sooner  or  later  to  attract  the  attention  of  men 
of  letters,  but  that  fact  is  much  emphasized  when 
the  study  of  his  essay  discloses  that  he  was  far  in 
advance  of  his  time  and  that  in  his  methods  of 
teaching  and  of  enforcing  discipline  he  forecast 
what  more  recent  experience  has  proven  to  be 
correct. 

Moreover,  he  was  virtuous  in  life,  sweet  in  dis- 
position and  lovable  in  character,  so  that  when  the 
simple  people  who  surrounded  him,  grown  to  ma- 
turity, sought  to  impress  upon  their  children  an 
example  of  modest  merit,  they  ever  recurred  to  the 
conduct  of  the  pious  Schoolmaster. 


INTRODUCTION 


Recently  the  Mennonites  of  Pennsylvania  have 
been  introduced  into  modern  literature  in  a  ro- 
mance, the  motive  of  which  is  an  effort  to  show  their 
disregard  for  learning.  It  is  rather  remarkable  that 
the  dawn  of  our  science  of  pedagogy  and  the  most 
extensive  literary  production  of  the  American  colo- 
nies were  both  due  to  the  efforts  of  these  interesting 
people.  Dr.  Martin  G.  Brumbaugh,  the  able  Super- 
intendent of  the  public  schools  of  Philadelphia, 
has  assumed  the  congenial  task  of  gathering  into 
this  volume  all  of  the  works  of  Dock,  in  order  that 
they  may  have  a  wider  circulation  among  the  read- 
ing public.  It  is  fortunate  for  the  future  fame  of 
the  venerable  Schoolmaster  that  his  accomplishment 
has  been  appreciated  by  one  so  entirely  capable  of 
doing  him  justice  and  whose  industry  has  left  no 
source  of  information  uninvestigated. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

I.     Introduction 3 

II.     Life  of  Christopher  Dock  11 

III.     The  Schul-Ordnung 27 

IY.     Translation  of  the  Schul -Ordnung 89 

V.     Geistliches  Magazien — Four  Numbers 159 

VI.     Translation  of  the  Geistliches  Magazien 191 

VII.     Schriften  with  Translation 239 

VIII.     Hymns  with  Translation 255 


LIST   OF   ILLUSTRATIONS 


PA.GB 

Bench  and  Table  used  by  Dock  in  his  School  in 
Germantown 14 

Table  used  by  Dock  in  his  School  in  Gebmantown    14 

Title  Page  of  Second  Edition  of  the  Schul-Ordnung    16 

Two  of  Dock's  Manuscript  Hymns 18 

The  Alphabet  Schriften 240,  248 

The  Peace  Schriften , .  249 

The  Penitential  Schriften 250 

The  Prayer  Schriften 251 

Specimen  of  Pupil's  Schriften,  by  Jacob  Harley  .  252 


LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


THE   LIFE   OF 

CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

To  the  sturdy  German  stock  that  came  to  the 
Colony  of  Pennsylvania  in  the  first  half  of  the 
eighteenth  century  we  are  indebted  for  more  of  the 
initial  influences  that  have  made  for  the  progress 
and  prestige  of  our  American  civilization  than  many 
historians  record  or  know.  By  a  strange  perversity 
they  have  accepted  one  from  another  the  traditional 
misconception  of  these  people  for  which  Benjamin 
Franklin  and  Provost  William  Smith  are  largely 
responsible.  It  is  the  exception,  not  the  rule,  to  find 
among  historians  and  chroniclers,  a  rare  spirit, 
imbued  with  insight  and  sympathy,  who  patiently 
investigates  the  actual  conditions  of  this  Pennsyl- 
vania-German civilization  and  records  its  virtues  as 
well  as  its  frailties.  Such  a  rare  and  gifted  his- 
torian is  the  Honorable  Samuel  W.  Pemrypacker, 
ex-Governor  of  the  Commonwealth  and  President 
of  its  Historical  Society. 

To  Governor  Pennypacker  many  of  the  younger 
men,  who  love,  as  he  does,  the  great  Commonwealth, 
are  indebted  for  inspiration,  guidance  and  knowl- 
edge concerning  life  in  Colonial  Pennsylvania.  To 
him  the  writer  gratefully  acknowledges  his  indebt- 
edness for  a  first  acquaintance  and  for  many  facts 
that  have  to  do  with  the  simple  but  significant  life 

and  work  of  Pennsylvania's  pioneer  author-edu- 

11 


12        THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

cator, — "the  pious  Schoolmaster  on  the  Skippack," 
Christopher  Dock.1 

Dock's  birthplace  in  Germany  is  unknown. 
Some  tune  between  1710  and  1714,  he  came  to  Penn- 
sylvania, attracted  no  doubt  by  the  religious  free- 
dom enjoyed  here  by  his  brethren  of  the  Mennonite 
faith.  To  this  religious  body  he  was  early  attached 
and  in  its  communion  he  lived  and  died.  He  prob- 
ably came  here  to  farm.  But  his  pious  spirit  was 
early  concerned  for  the  better  education  of  the  chil- 
dren of  his  German  neighbors.  He  was  encouraged 
to  teach  by  Christopher  Saur  and  other  leaders 
among  the  Germans  of  Colonial  Pennsylvania. 

Of  his  education  and  career  in  Germany  no  reli- 
able data  can  now  be  given.  There  is  a  tradition 
that  he  had  been  drafted  into  the  Army  and  that  he 
was  discharged  because  of  his  religious  convictions, 
which  led  him  to  refuse  to  bear  arms. 

Not  later  than  1718,  Governor  Pennypacker 
thinks  in  1714,  Dock  opened  a  school  among  the 
Mennonites  on  the  Skippack  in  what  is  now  Mont- 
gomery County.  He  believed  he  was  divinely  called 
to  teach;  and,  although  the  compensation  was  ex- 
ceedingly meagre,  he  continued  this  school  for  ten 
years.  At  the  expiration  of  this  period  he  engaged 
in  farming.  On  September  28,  1735,  he  purchased 
of  the  Penns  for  £15  10s.  a  tract  of  100  acres  in  Sal- 
ford  Township,  now  Montgomery  County.  Upon 
this  tract  he  lived  for  many  years. 

On  February  22,  1702,  Matthias  Van  Bebber,  a 

1  Hon.  Samuel  W.  Pennypacker's  Historical  and  Biographical  Sketches, 
Philadelphia,  1883. 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK        13 

Dutch  merchant,  who  came  to  Germantown  in  1687, 
secured  from  Penn  by  letters  patent  a  tract  of  land 
containing  about  six  thousand  one  hundred  and 
sixty-six  acres.  This  is  the  famous  Bebber 's  Town- 
ship which  in  1731  became  the  possession  of  Hen- 
drick  Pannebecker.2  By  deed,  dated  June  8,  1717, 
Van  Bebber  conveyed  to  seven  trustees  one  hundred 
acres  of  this  ground,  stipulating  therein  that  "it 
shall  be  lawful  for  all  and  every  the  inhabitants  of 
the  aboves'd  Bebber's  Township  to  build  a  school 
house,  and  fence  in  a  sufficient  burying  place  upon 
the  herein  granted  one  hundred  acres  of  land  there 
to  have  their  children  and  those  of  their  respective 
families  taught  and  instructed,  and  to  bury  their 
dead."  This  Van  Bebber  did  in  consideration  of 
"the  true  love  and  singular  effection  he  the  said 
Matthias  Van  Bebber  bears  to  them  and  all  theirs." 
These  provisions,  as  Governor  Pennypacker  points 
out,  are  "without  precedent  in  our  Annals,  and  have 
never  been  followed  elsewhere." 

The  school  thus  provided  was  conducted  by  Chris- 
topher Dock,  and  it  was  here  in  1750  that  he  wrote 
the  Schul-ordnung,  and  in  1764  the  several  articles 
that  Saur  published  in  the  Geistliches  Magasien.  It 
is  significant  to  note  that  Saur  solicited  contribu- 
tions for  his  Magazien  from  few  American  authors. 
Two  alone  were  regarded  by  the  great  printer  as 
possessing  the  necessary  qualifications  to  produce 
articles  of  sufficient  worth  for  this  important  pub- 


2  For  a  most  interesting  sketch  of  this  township  see  the  article 
Bebber's  Township  and  the  Dutch  Patroons  of  Pennsylvania  by  Hon.  S.  W. 
Pennypacker,  in  The  Pennsylvania  Magazine,  Vol.  xxxi,  No.  121. 


14        THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

lication.  One  of  these  was  Dock;  the  other,  Alex- 
ander Mack,  a  Bishop  of  the  Dunker  Church  in 
Germantown  and  a  man  of  rare  piety  and  literary 
power.  It  is  probable  that  Mack,  like  the  younger 
Saur,  was  a  pupil  in  Dock's  school  in  Germantown. 

During  the  ten  years  devoted  to  farming  Dock 
could  not  wholly  neglect  the  children.  For  at  least 
four  summers,  in  sessions  of  three  months  each,  he 
taught  school  in  Germantown.  His  school  was  con- 
ducted in  the  old  log  meeting  house  of  the  Mennon- 
ites,  the  ground  for  which  was  deeded  by  Arnold 
Von  Vossen  February  10,  1702-3,  to  Jan  Neuss,  on 
behalf  of  the  Mennonites.3  The  teaching  of  this 
school  had  far-reaching  consequences.  Here  Dock 
enrolled  among  his  pupils  the  only  son  of  the  great 
printer  to  the  Germans  of  Colonial  America,  Chris- 
topher Saur.  Young  Saur,  who  was  born  in  1721, 
was  then  in  his  teens.  The  method  of  Dock  attracted 
the  attention  of  the  elder  Saur,  who  as  early  as  1749, 
impressed  by  the  great  skill  and  ability  of  his  son's 
teacher,  urged  Dock  to  write  a  treatise  on  his 
method  of  organizing  and  conducting  a  school.4 
This  treatise  Saur  wished  to  publish  for  the  guid- 
ance of  less  gifted  teachers  and  of  parents  who  by 
knowing  how  a  good  school  is  conducted  might  the 
better  bring  up  their  own  children. 

Dock  was  averse  to  the  suggestion,  holding  that 
it  was  sinful  to  do  anything  for  his  own  praise, 
credit  or  elevation.     Saur  then  resorted  to  diplo- 

8  Hon.  Samuel  W.  Pennypacker,  The  Settlement  of  Germantown, 
Philadelphia,  1899. 

*  See  the  writer's  History  of  The  Brethren  in  Europe  and  Americaf 
Mount  Morris,  111.,  1899. 


BENCH   AND  TABLE   USED   BY   DOCK  IN   HIS  SCHOOL  IN   GERMANTOWN 


TABLE  USED   BY  DOCK  IN   HIS  SCHOOL  IN  GERMANTOWN 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK        15 

macy.  He  wrote  to  Dock's  warm  friend,  Dielman 
Kolb,  a  prominent  Mennonite  minister,  urging  the 
importance  of  his  request  and  submitting  a  series  of 
questions  on  school  administration  which  he  desired 
Dock  to  answer.  Through  the  influence  of  Kolb 
the  modest  teacher  was  led  to  make  reply  to  these 
questions.  The  manuscript  of  the  Schul-ordnung 
resulted. 

Dock  completed  the  Schul-ordnung  August  8, 
1750.  The  manuscript  was  given  to  Saur  with  the 
stipulation  that  it  was  not  to  be  published  during 
the  lifetime  of  the  author.  For  nearly  a  score  of 
years  the  manuscript  lay  unused.  In  1758,  the  elder 
Saur  died,  and  his  son,  Dock's  pupil,  succeeded  to 
the  large  publishing  interests  of  his  father. 

Finally,  in  1769,  some  "  friends  of  the  common 
good"  succeeded  in  overcoming  the  author's  scru- 
ples and  secured  his  consent  to  its  publication.  This 
was,  no  doubt,  an  easier  task  after  Saur  had  pub- 
lished in  the  Geistliches  Magazien  a  number  of  arti- 
cles written  by  Dock.  But  alas !  the  manuscript,  so 
long  unused,  was  nowhere  to  be  f ound.  Saur  feared 
it  had  been  sold  along  with  some  waste  paper. 
People  began  to  intimate  that  Saur  really  did  not 
wish  to  publish  it  and  had  purposely  put  it  away. 
Saur  advertised  its  loss  in  his  newspaper  and  offered 
a  reward  for  its  return.  Dock,  with  characteristic 
modesty,  sent  a  messenger  to  Saur  to  say  "that  I 
should  not  trouble  myself  about  the  writing,  it  had 
never  been  my  opinion  that  it  ought  to  be  printed  in 
my  lifetime,  and  so  I  am  very  well  pleased  that  it 
has  been  lost. ' '   After  more  than  a  year  had  elapsed, 


16        THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Saur  found  the  manuscript  in  a  place  where  he  and 
his  employees  had  thoroughly  searched  and  it  was 
at  once  published  in  the  f  orm  in  which  it  is  herein 
reproduced. 

The  demand  for  the  pamphlet  was  so  great  that  a 
second  edition  was  printed  in  the  same  year — 1770. 
A  copy  of  this  second  edition  is  in  the  Library  of  the 
German  Society  of  Philadelphia  and  the  title  page 
is  reproduced  herewith.  The  copy  of  the  first  edi- 
tion from  which  the  reproduction  in  this  volume  was 
made  is  in  the  library  of  the  writer. 

The  German  Mennonites  of  Ohio,  in  1861,  re- 
printed the  second  edition  at  the  office  of  their 
church  paper,  "The  Gospel  Visitor,"  at  Columbia 
in  that  State.  Governor  Pennypacker  records  in  his 
"Historical  and  Biographical  Sketches"  the  fol- 
lowing interesting  incident  attending  the  publica- 
tion of  this  third  edition  in  the  German  language : 
"A  careless  printer,  who  was  setting  type  by 
candle  light,  knocked  over  his  candle,  and  burned 
up  one  of  the  leaves  of  the  original.  The  work  was 
stopped  because  the  committee  having  the  matter 
in  charge  could  find  no  other  copy.  Finally,  in 
despair,  they  wrote  to  Mr.  A.  H.  Cassel,  of  Har- 
leysville,  Pa.,  who,  without  hesitation,  took  the 
needed  leaf  from  his  copy  and  sent  it  to  them  by 
mail.  Mirdbile  dictu!  It  was  scrupulously  cared 
for  and  speedily  returned.  It  is  difficult  to  deter- 
mine which  is  the  more  admirable,  the  confiding  sim- 
plicity of  a  book  lover  who  willingly  ran  such  a  risk 
of  making  his  own  copy  imperfect,  or  the  Roman 
integrity  which,  being  once  in  the  possession  of  the 


eine 

QinfältiQt  unD  (jrünMid)  at\qefa^t« 

/7-    i/A 


\, 


©mimten  Detttiitf)  fcorgeftelt  tmrD,  auf  iKtdje 

SSeipe  Die  Sin&er  nidjt  nur  tu  Denen  in  ©d)u< 

len  geraoijtrttdjen  Ce^ren  befttm  angebrd^t/ 

folgern  a  art)  in  Der  gef)re  Der  (Sottfefu}^u 

tvef?l  unwtitfyut  n>erDen  mögen, 

2fu$  Öcbe  ?u  Dem  menfcMtcften  föcfJ;(cd}t  aufgebt  Durcft  Dm 
moljfcrfa&rnen  unD  lang  geübten  ©c&u(troi#ö# 

£()riftOJ){)  .S)DCf- 


Unt>  Duvcß  einige  3reunt>e  t>eö  gemeine»  heften« 
Dem  2>tutf  übergeben,   , 


Sie  3i!>ei)te  Edition; 


^(gTetmanto  von:         0         £ 
©ewucft««»au  .finden  6ep  (S&riflopfc  @mu>  1770. 


TITLE  PAGE  OF  SECOND  EDITION 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK        17 

only  leaf  necessary  to  complete  a  mutilated  copy, 
firmly  resisted  temptation." 

The  first  translation  into  English  was  made  by 
Governor  Pennypacker  and  appears  in  the  above 
recited  volume  under  the  caption,  "  Christopher 
Dock,  the  Pious  Schoolmaster  on  the  Skippack,  and 
His  Works."  This  present  volume  is  the  next 
attempt  to  give  the  modern  student  an  insight  into 
the  rare  spirit  of  this  unique  teacher.  It  is,  more- 
over, the  first  time  that  all  of  Dock's  literary  re- 
mains, with  translations,  have  been  collected  and 
published. 

Dock  was  not  only  a  great  teacher  and  author 
of  pedagogical  works,  but  he  was  the  composer  of 
many  beautiful  hymns.  These  will  be  found  in  the 
volume ;  and,  to  reveal  his  skill  as  a  penman  as  well 
as  his  accomplishments  as  a  hymn-writer,  I  here- 
with reproduce  one  of  the  most  beautiful  of  his 
existing  manuscripts. 

The  elder  Saur  was  an  ardent  admirer  of  Dock's 
teaching  ability.  When  he  found  that  Dock  ob- 
jected to  the  publication  of  the  Schul-ordnung  until 
after  the  writer's  death,  Saur  formulated  a  plan  to 
pay  tribute  to  Dock's  worth  in  a  manner  not  offen- 
sive to  the  religious  convictions  of  the  pious  school- 
master. This  resulted  in  Saur  publishing  in  his 
almanac  for  1752  an  article  in  the  form  of  a  dia- 
logue. In  this  article  Saur,  in  discussing  with  a 
" Newcomer"  the  advantages  of  life  in  the  Colony 
of  Pennsylvania,  pays  high  tribute  to  two  great 
teachers  whom  he  knew  intimately.  Although  the 
names  of  these  teachers  are  not  given,  Saur  clearly 

2 


18        THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

had  in  mind  Ludwig  Hoecker  and  Christopher 
Dock.  Hoecker  was  an  intimate  friend  of  Saur, 
worshipped  with  him  in  the  Dunker  congregation 
in  Germantown,  and  regretted  Hoecker 's  removal 
to  Ephrata  in  1748.  The  following  extract  from  the 
Almanac  gives  Saur's  estimate  of  these  two  really 
great  teachers  of  the  Germans  in  Colonial  Pennsyl- 
vania : 

"New-Comer.  A  matter  that  is  of  very  great  importance 
to  me  is,  that,  in  Germany,  one  is  able  to  send  his  children 
to  school  to  have  them  instructed  in  reading  and  writing.  Here 
it  is  well  nigh  impossible  to  get  such  instruction;  especially, 
where  people  live  so  far  apart.  0,  how  fortunate  are  they  who 
have  access  to  a  good  teacher  by  whom  the  children  are  well 
taught  and  trained! 

"Inhabitant.  It  is  true.  On  that  account  many  children 
living  on  our  frontiers  grow  up  like  trees.  But  since  the  con- 
ditions are  such  that  few  people  live  in  cities  and  villages  as 
they  do  in  Germany,  it  is  natural  that  one  meets  with  certain 
inconveniences.  Where  is  there  a  place  in  this  world  where 
one  does  not  meet  with  some  objectionable  features  during  his 
natural  life  ? 

11  New-Comer.  But  this  is  an  exceptional  want,  for  if 
children  are  thus  brought  up  in  ignorance  it  is  an  injury  to 
their  soul's  welfare, — an  eternal  injury. 

"Inhabitant.  That  is  true,  but,  alas,  how  few  good  school- 
masters there  are !  I  myself  have  had  many  and  known  many, 
but  few  good  ones  have  I  seen.  Yet,  I  remember  two,  in  my 
life-time,  who  had  many  good  qualities.  The  one  spent  most 
of  his  time  in  secret  prayer  and  heartfelt  sighing  that  God 
might  direct  and  keep  the  hearts  and  minds  of  his  pupils.  He 
taught  them  their  letters  faithfully.  He  observed  also  their 
natural  dispositions.  If  he  found  the  child  ambitious,  he  would 
praise  it  so  that  it  learned  its  lessons  fairly  well.  He  would 
promise  that  it  should  yet  lead  the  class,  but  he  asked  God 


SPECIMEN  OF  DOCKS  MSS. 


U*i<y  6-*t/   ******     <*r*     J(**r*  9{-,t</+** /J-*-//*t<<*r*T.    +.<./* S+Tt  £-4 <*rt  /£*»"<■»   OH^ 


Ü^Z/zf 


<&~%?£/^%/y/  V-Ä-  -'-/"  ^-J  f/~>?  ■  'j 

-  &Zjj£y&.~P^-^~z~  .'-'^.../../^^v-A  ~~A, 


SPECIMEN  OF  I »im  K 


MS.« 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK        19 

to  take  the  Devil's  haughtiness  out  of  the  child's  heart,  to 
convert  it  and  give  it  the  lowly  spirit  of  Jesus.  After  it  had 
reached  the  head  of  the  class  he  would  tell  it  alone  and  in 
private  that  haughtiness  came  from  the  Devil,  but  humility 
was  a  quality  of  Christ's  spirit  for  which  the  child  should 
frequently  and  heartily  join  him  in  prayer  to  God.  Thus  he 
kept  such  children  in  his  love.  To  those  who  were  miserly  he 
frequently  gave  a  penny  when  they  studied  diligently  and  if 
they  admired  their  gift  he  would  tell  them  that  money  was  the 
root  of  all  evil,  pointing  out  examples  to  them.  He  described 
for  them  deceptive  riches  and  the  subsequent  disappointment 
if  man  is  not  rich  in  godly  things.  To  the  voluptuous  and 
1 '  Lecker-Maüler " x  he  sometimes  gave  a  sugar  pretzel,  when 
they  learned  well.  But  he  also  told  them  that  luxuriousness 
was  a  sin,  that  those  who  belonged  to  Christ  crucified  the  flesh 
with  its  lusts  and  evil  desires.  He  impressed  them  so  earnestly 
with  these  maxims  that  almost  all  the  pupils  loved  him.  If 
any  failed  in  the  performance  of  duty,  he  would  say:  'I  no 
longer  love  you,'  (Ich  habe  dich  nicht  mehr  Lieb).  Then  they 
wept  until  he  comforted  them.  The  ill-intentioned,  who  were 
not  affected  by  the  promise  of  a  penny  or  a  cooky,  he  threat- 
ened with  whipping.  These  then  studied  out  of  fear.  With 
some  he  had  to  use  the  rod,  but  in  each  case  he  endeavored, 
first  of  all,  to  win  their  favor  and  thus  secure  obedience  through 
love  that  they  might  not  only  learn  their  letters,  but  that  they 
might  be  able  to  seek,  find  and  know  Jesus  Himself. 

"I  remember  still  another  one  who,  out  of  the  love  of  God, 
loved  his  pupils  as  if  they  all  were  his  own  children.  They, 
in  turn,  loved  him  dearly.  Whenever  he  was  obliged  to  reprove 
the  children  for  ill-behavior,  he  did  so  with  grievous  words 
coming  from  his  wounded  heart,  so  that  he  frequently  softened 
their  hearts ;  and  when  they  were  about  to  cry,  tears  crept  into 
his  eyes.  He  studied  out  many  plans  so  that  he  might  not  need 
to  resort  to  the  rod.  On  going  to  and  from  school  the  children 
went  quietly  and  orderly  without  stopping  to  play,  loiter  and 


Sweet-toothed,  dainty-mouthed. 


20        THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

quarrel.  The  children  of  the  poor  he  taught  as  willingly  with- 
out pay  as  he  taught  others  for  pay.  Those  who  learned  to 
write,  he  induced  to  correspond  with  one  another.  The  pupils 
were  required  to  show  him  the  letters  and  he  pointed  out  for 
them  the  places  where  improvements  should  be  made.  He  also 
told  them  that  this  was  no  ordinary  matter.  For  those  who 
could  not  compose  a  letter,  he  set  copies  so  that  they  might 
apply  their  minds  to  good  thoughts  for  the  improvement  of 
their  souls.  He  regarded  it  indifferently  whether  he  received 
the  tuition  fees  or  not  and  did  not  treasure  up  for  himself 
anything  but  a  good  name  and  a  clear  conscience. 

" New-Comer.  Such  Schoolmasters  are  few  in  number,  and 
here  in  the  woods  one  must  be  satisfied  if  only  they  teach  the 
children  to  read  and  write;  and  it  is  very  deplorable  that, 
during  the  winter  in  severe  weather,  young  and  tender  children 
cannot  well  be  sent  to  schools  a  great  distance  from  home.  In 
the  summer  time  one  needs  the  children  at  home  to  work,  and 
here  in  the  woods  the  schools  are  closed  during  the  summer.  I 
have  often  thought  that  this  was  a  great  need  in  this  land  and 
I  know  of  no  remedy  to  suggest." 

In  1738  Dock  gave  up  his  farm  and  returned  to 
teaching.  The  remainder  of  his  life,  thirty-three 
years,  he  devoted  to  his  pupils.  He  opened  two 
schools,  one  in  Skippack  and  one  in  Sallf  ord.  These 
he  taught  three  days  each  alternately.  He  encour- 
aged the  pupils  in  each  school  to  write  letters  to  the 
pupils  in  the  other  school.  These  letters  usually 
took  the  form  of  questions  relating  to  some  incident 
in  the  Bible.  Dock  acted  as  letter  carrier  between 
the  schools.  This  was  one  of  his  devices  to  promote 
constructive  language  exercises  by  his  pupils — a 
practice  that  has  found  many  imitators. 

Dock  has  given  by  indirection  the  only  adequate 
picture  of  a  colonial  school.     It  is  not  difficult  to 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK        21 

construct  from  his  writings  a  picture  of  life  among 
the  Germans  of  Penn's  Colony.  One  can  vision  the 
children  busy  at  home,  preparing  for  the  day's 
duties;  their  march  over  hill  and  valley  to  the 
school ;  their  entrance ;  the  routine  of  the  day's  work 
with  the  teacher;  and  their  hearty  " good-night"  as 
they  turn  again  to  their  homes ;  the  round  of  even- 
ing duties,  and  their  weary  footsteps  as  they  move 
half  asleep  to  their  rest.  One  can  vision  their  con- 
duct in  the  home,  on  the  street,  in  church  and  at  all 
places  where  a  child  might  be  seen.  In  this  multi- 
form detail  of  child  life  he  points  out  in  simple 
precepts  right  conduct  and  proper  behavior.  And 
in  all  this  he  steadfastly  holds  up  the  religious  life 
as  the  goal  of  all  study,  the  perfection  of  all 
learning. 

The  writing  of  illuminated  texts  was  common 
among  the  Germans  of  Colonial  Pennsylvania.  For 
this  work  Dock  was  peculiarly  gifted,  and  the  writ- 
ing of  these  Schriften  was  a  prominent  feature  of 
his  school  exercises.  To  this  work  of  skill  with 
his  quill  pen  he  added  the  additional  ability  of 
drawing  in  colors  or  writing  with  ink  designs  of 
birds  and  flowers.  These  designs  were  used  as  re- 
wards for  meritorious  work  on  the  part  of  his 
pupils.  To  possess  one  of  these  evidences  of  the 
teacher's  favor  was  the  ambition  of  many  of  Dock's 
pupils. 

In  the  list  of  Schriften  found  in  this  volume  I 
have  included  all  that  are  known  to  be  from  the 
pen  of  Dock.  One,  by  his  pupil,  Jacob  Harley,  is 
included  to  show  the  result  of  Dock's  teaching. 


22        THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

These  Schriften  were  written  in  sets.  They  con- 
stituted the  earliest  recorded  mottoes  used  to  adorn 
the  walls  of  a  schoolroom.  In  Dock's  school  more 
than  twenty-five  of  these  Schriften  were  so  dis- 
played. They  were  also  used  to  adorn  the  walls  of 
the  homes  of  his  pupils,  as  well  as  to  serve  as  "copy" 
for  the  writing  lessons.  They  are  usually  produced 
in  many  colors.  Unfortunately  the  reproductions 
cannot  show  the  artistic  blending  of  colors  found  on 
the  originals.  With  one  exception  the  originals 
here  reproduced  are  in  the  possession  of  the  writer. 
The  exception  is  part  of  the  " Alphabet  Schrift," 
which  may  be  seen  in  the  rooms  of  the  Pennsylvania 
Historical  Society.  The  preservation  of  these  rare 
and  curious  manuscripts  is  due  to  the  foresight  and 
industry  of  Abraham  H.  Cassel,  whose  father  was 
a  pupil  in  Dock's  school. 

In  the  translation  care  has  been  exercised  to 
render  as  literally  as  possible  the  meaning  of  the 
author.  For  this  reason  the  English  text  is  not  in- 
frequently broken  and  archaic.  This  is  especially 
true  in  the  translation  of  the  poems.  It  was  thought 
that  the  reader  would  prefer  to  approach  as  nearly 
as  possible  the  spirit  of  the  author.  In  this  literal 
rendering  of  the  text  grateful  acknowledgment  is 
made  to  Miss  Harriet  Boewig,  of  Philadelphia,  and 
to  Dr.  S.  E.  Weber,  of  Cortland,  1ST.  Y.  Their  un- 
selfish devotion  to  a  theme  they  loved  made  easier 
my  labors  in  editing  this  pioneer  schoolmaster's 
pious  and  practical  works. 

Dock  had  two  daughters,  Margaret,  wife  of 
Henry  Stryckers,  of  Salford,  and  Catherine,  wife 


THE  LIFE  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK        23 

of  Peter  Jansen,  of  Skippack.  The  death  of  his 
wife  and  the  marriage  of  his  daughters  left  him 
alone  in  his  old  age.  He  then  made  his  home  with 
Heinrich  Kassel,  a  Mennonite  farmer  on  the  Skip- 
pack.  It  was  Dock's  custom  each  evening  after  dis- 
missing his  pupils  to  remain  in  his  schoolroom  to 
pray.  With  the  roll  of  his  pupils  spread  before 
him,  he  would  kneel  and  ask  God  to  forgive  him  for 
any  act  of  injustice  or  of  neglect  toward  any  pupil 
in  his  school.  He  also  asked,  as  he  pronounced  each 
pupil's  name,  that  God  would  help  him  on  the 
morrow  to  do  the  best  things  for  each  one. 

One  evening  in  the  autumn  of  1771,  he  did  not 
return  from  his  school  at  the  usual  time.  A  search 
was  made  and  he  was  found  in  his  schoolroom  on 
his  knees — dead.  Thus  ended  in  prayer  for  his  pupils 
a  life  singularly  sweet  and  unselfishly  given  to  the 
welfare  of  those  whom  he  believed  God  had  divinely 
appointed  him  to  teach. 

M.  G.  BRUMBAUGH. 

Philadelphia,  Jan.  18,  1907. 


THE   SCHUL-ORDNUNG 

FACSIMILE   REPRODUCTION   OF  THE 
FIRST  EDITION  OF  1770 


Cine 

Sinfaftige  unb  grünbttdj  abgefaßte 


r&nutfg 


/ 


darinnen  fceutftdj  uorgefteft  roirb,  aufweise 

2Se$e  Me  Ätabw  nicfot  nur  in  benen  in  @c§u* 

(en  gei&bnudjen  Cefjren  befrens  angebracht, 

fonbern  <m$  to  ber  £ef)re  ber  ©ottfefigfeit 

tt?of?I  unterrichtet  tverfcen  infcgen. 

2luö  £iebc  ju  t>em  menf#'d)en  ©efefrfeebt  auföcfalt  &uk&  ta 
n)o5fcrfat>mcn  unt>  (ang  gcubfm  ©c&ultwfftoj 

Sbrtftopb  ©ocf. 

tlnb  burcfc  einige  5«unbe  beg  gemeinen  SSetfen* 
bein  2>rutf  übergeben. 


(Efctmantowit: 


©ebrucft  unbju  futben  ben  ^riftoj?^  6«ur>  1770. 


ß  KX  KX  K*  K»  KM  K£  Ä»  K»  KX  K»  K^  Pf 

aSorre&e  U$  <Dvucfcv$. 

beliebtet  £efer! 

|5©  ift  unftreitig  eine  ber  groften  <pfTi#ten 
melt&e  Eifern  unb  Q3ovgefe^te  ju  befolgen 
baben,  ibre  ftinoer  unb  Untergebene  gott* 
lieb  au  etjieben  unb  ju  regieren,  welches  ailerbing* 
unfern  groften  Sfeifj  unb  ©orgfaft  etfotbert  auf 
eine  &tven  ja  btenfat&e  SBeife:  23ot  erft,  fotlen  mir 
fte  anfeilen  aß  tfjettte  <Pf<mber  bte  unö  toon  ©Ort 
vertrauet  jtnb,  ttic&t  ba£  mit  nut  mit  tynen  fpielen, 
unb  unfete  tWc&licOe^go^ud^eit  an  tbnen  t)abeit 
foüen,  fonbern  baß  mir  allen  5le$an*un>enbenfdjuls 
big  ftnb,  fte  aufhieben  in  bet  3ud)t  unb  Otmafyt 
«ung  jum  £<£rw,  (£pbef.  6, 4.  gemignnffenbe,  bafs 
mir  won  allem  wa$  uns  anwerttauet  iff,  auefj  wets 
<Hed)enfd&afft  geben  muffen,  sann  welcbem  tritt 
gegeben  tft  (meldjetlen  es  auepifr)  bey  bem  wirö 
«tan  aud>  trief  fud>en.£uc.  tx,4&  @tn  gottfeliget 
ilebrer  febreibt,  baf?  Altern  an  tbren  Turnern  ti( 
£>&lle  unb  ben  £tmmel  wetbieuen  ( onnen,  je  nam- 
bem  fte  fotcf>e  ergeben.  £>ierau  geboret  bann  jtveo^ 
tens  nicht  nur  etne  äufferlicbe  (Srrmabmmg :  Xlidyt 
fo  meine  Kinbcr,  tt>ut  ttiebt  fo  ribel,  wie  ber  alte 
«prfefter  (?li  fbät,  1  25um  ©am.  i,  X3.  *c.  auc& 
titelt  ein  ftztrt  janef en  ober  fcblagen,  ate  moburefr 
li^  £inber  nur  jum  Sow  geredet  metben,  fonbern 
eine  ernfte  (Ermabnung  jum  £>(£rw,  mit  geboriger 
Sättigung  mann  bie  Stmabnungen  niept  binläng* 
Ud)  (tub  bag  S85fe  äu  untetbruefen,  unb  unumgang« 

21  -L  W 


30       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

35  o  r  v  e  b  e. 

(ttfj  ein  guter  SBanbel  in  ber  ©ottfettgfett;  Dann 
böfe  (Stempel  «werben  mebtvate  alle  gute  @rm<u> 
ttungen  erbauen  fonnen.  S^inber  föm  fcbarff  auf 
bie,  welrpe  ibnen  twrgefe(?t  ftnb,  es  feoen  Altern, 
Cebt=  ober  ©cfyulmeifier.  £>ier  nun  Keinem  v>on  &en 
deinen  ju  ärgern,  welches  mit  fo  bober  ©trajfe  be= 
legt  i(t,  tyWtfy  18,  6:  io.  etforbert  e$2)rittens,  ein 
unermubetes  ©e6ät  t»or  4tct>  felbft  unb  vor  tue  an* 
vertrauere  «pfänber,  to$  ®Ott  boa)  fein  (dtbeym 
baju  geben  wolle/  tofi  folcfye  ju  feinen  obren  erjo= 
<jen  werben  mögen:  2)ann  ob  wir  aucf)  allen 5le$ 
anmenbeteu,  ba$  ©ute  buret)  gute  Srmabnungen 
in  unfere^ugenb  ju  pflanzen/  unb  burdj  forgfäffc 
ge  3udjt  Ju  BegiefTen,  fo  muß  bod)  ©Ott  ba$  ©es 
benen  baju.  geben,  fonft  wirb  boep  nid)t$  braufn 
bann  wir  rennen  unfern  Äinbern  bod)  feine  anbere 
Jperßeit  geben,  ©Ott  aber  tan  eö  tbun;  wir  fotlen 
berbalben  ernftud)  bet)  ibm  barum  anfjalten  mitei= 
nem  tag  unb  nädjtigem  baten  unb  ffeben,  unb  wann 
btefes  einmal  tot  £auptwercf  unb  boebfter  3(e$ 
aller  Altern  unb  93orgefefcten  würbe,  ibre  ^inber 
unb  5(imertraute  fo  ju  ©Otte^  dljren  ju  ergeben, 
unb  eä  mit  Urnen  fo  ju  matten  toU  ber£>(£tr  fcpbn 
im  alten  iSunb  es  benrutbern3frael  auferfegtbats 
te,  5-,'Sutt)  2Dtof  6,  \>.  6.7.  uttö  btefe  XPorte  bteicb 
bit  tyutt  gebiete  folt  bu  $u  <oeti$eit  »ernten,  unb 
folt  (ie  bemeit  "&inbew  emfebarffe»/  unb  bavoti 
tebeu  warnt  bu  ttt  bemem  t^aufe  (i^efJ  ober  auf 
bem  EDege  gefrefi/  warnt  bu  bicbitteberiegeft  0? 
bet  auffrefretf.  <5o  würbe  man  in  wenig  Rubren 
eine  gan$  anbere  SBelt  feben.  Unb  ob  es  fd)onnid)t 
in  ber  Altern  SCdacbt  tft  t&ren  ^inbem  neue  £ers 
#en  ju  fdjaffen,  fo  würbe  iljre  Arbeit  botb  niebtun* 
gefegnet  bleiben,  fonbern  ®£>tt  würbe  aud)  toi 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  31 

03  o  r  r  e  b  e. 

©ebeoen  $u  i&remSletf  fc^encecn,  unb  folte  cö  t)et> 
client  tOtem  Sfetßunb  benen  beilfamen  3ücfjtigun= 
gen  ber  ©nabe  ©Dtteö  obngeacptet,  bennodj  ben 
einigen  mi|ratben,  fo  batten  fte  botb  t()te  <5eelen 
gerettet  3m  natürlichen  £eben  gebt  eg  gemetnig* 
lief)  fo,  n>ie  eine  ipaufiljaltung  eingerichtet  i\t, 
unb  \x>a$  Ijauptfadjftd)  in  berfelben  getrieben  wirb, 
e$  fen  orbentllct),  ober  unorbentltcfj,  ba$  wirb  man 
feben,  to$  e$  benen  fttnbem  i^te  ganfce  Gebens* 
Seit  einigermaßen  anfanget/  baber  ber  tveife  <5as 
lomon  wobl  fagen  mag  im  2x  (Jap.  feiner  «oprüdje 
to,  6.  n?ie  matt  emeit  Änabert  gewettet/  (o  la* 
ßet  et:  ntd>t  b«voit  wem*  er  alt  voitb.  ©ölte  nirljt 
aud)  eben  fo  wobl  totel  gutes,  unb  befotberltcbes 
jum  SHetcf)  ©Dtteg  unb  Einpflanzung  ber©Dtte&* 
furcht  bon  Sugeub  auf  f  onnen  in  fte  etngepflan&et 
werben?  wamttlmen  bet)  allen  ©elegenljeiten  bte 
£after  toerbaßt  unb  abfdjeultd),  t>k  Xugenben  unb 
bte  ©ottfeltgfeit  hingegen,  in  gebubrenber  £>ocfc 
acbtmtgtoorgefteft  würbe?  ©aber  folten  (Eltern  be* 
fonberö  barauf  feljen  ju  waö  tor  ©efellfcbaften  fte 
ibre  SUnber  unb  9lnbefol)fene  geben  laffen,  unb 
l)auptfäd)ltcf)  toat  fte  toor  (5d)ulmeifter  toor  fofr&e 
annebmen,  benn  was  fte  toon  benfelbtgen  feben  unb 
b6ren,  präget  ftcfj  gar  tief  in  ibre  Jarte  ©emutfjer 
ein. 

2)tefe$  fjatte  mein  geliebter  23ater  wobl  etngefe* 
fjen,unb  f)<xtUHf)it  fd)on  vor  frbier  jwanfcig  Sauren 
ein  Verlangen,  1>a$  boeb  biefem  SDtangef  fo  totel 
möglich,  mochte  abgebolffen  werben,  unb  weil  ibm 
ein  foleber  5DTatm  begannt  war,  ber  gewipltcij  toon 
ganzem  iperfcen  ftrljs  lieffe  angelegen  feon  ber  gim 
ber  35efte!»  ju  fudjen  nacb  ©eel  unb  £etb,  ober  ber 
äuffern  Ceftre  nad),  unb  tk  ©ottfeltgfeit  jugletdj 

St  3  fo 


32       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

05  e  t  x  c  (  e, 

fb  triel  moglidj  ware  mit  einzuflößen,  un(  fid)  nadj 
Dem  SKatf)  (es  STpoftelö  qpauli  Jit  *,  r>.  7.  aliens 
falben  ju  einem  guten  23orbi{(  (argeftellet  Ijat, 
un(  aud)  toon  ©Ott  mit  befon(ere<Baben  l)ier*u 
ausgerüftet  war,  fo  war  er  r>erlangen(  etwas  fcprift* 
Jidjes  »on  feiner  <5djul=Dr(mmg  ju  fjaben,  um  es 
(utdj  t>en  ©rucf  befant  ju  marten,  (amit  fidj  aud) 
an(ere  <5d)ulmeifter,  (enen  es  (arum  ju  tljun  tft, 
tfjre  Mincer  wol)l  anjufftljren,  un(  felbft  (ie  ®at>e 
ntd>t  fo  reicfofid)  tjaben,  Darinnen  etwas  finden  m&* 
gen,  pap  fie  nodj  beffer  unterrichtet  werben,  un( 
<w(ere,  (enen  es  fo  gleichgültig,  ift,  op  fie  pie  &i\u 
(er  etwas  lernen  o(er  ntd)t,  wann  fie  nur  ü)r  ©el( 
Ijaben,  foldjes  ju  einer  SSefdjämung  (ienen  möge, 
wann  fie  feljen,  Pap  Pie  Altern  Porp  aud)  wtjfen 
wie  eine  wobj  eingerichtete  <5dmle  foil  gefu^ret 
wer(en,  un(  (aim  en(ud)  aud)  Pie  QEltern  feloft  ju 
berieten,  wie  man  mit  (en  £m(etn  ju  »erfahren 
f>at  (ie  man  gerne  was  gutes  lernen  wolte,  weif 
(om  »tele  Altern  fjiei*  <m  £an(e  if>re  Äinber  Sftotf) 
fcalber  felbft  lernen  muffen,  (un(  nod)\riele  es  lieber 
tbun  folten,  als  iljre  £m(er  ju  folcben  (Scbulmeiftern 
fcf)icfen,  (ie  mit  einem  fafterfjaften  heften  bewerft 
ftn(,)  bkfi  un(  nod)  mefjr  an(erc  SSetradjtungen 
Ijaben  (ami  meinen  geliebten  23ater  (af)in  bewo= 
gen  an  einen  feiner  guten  5reun(eju  fdjretbett,wie 
in  folgenPem  Briefe  ju  crfer>en. 

©o  lieffe  fid)S  (aim  audj  (amafs  (er  wertlje 
Steuitb  £>ocf  gefallen  fold)  SBercf  auszufertigen, 
(a  es  aber  fertig  war,  fönte  er  fidj  ntdjt  entfcglief* 
fen  es  (em  2)rucf  ju  übergeben,  aus  einer  gewiffen 
«SlePigfett,  (aß  es  m6d)te  angefel)en  wer(en  aid 
wolte  er  fid)  eine  (?f)ten=<5äule  aufrichten,  un( 
mod)te  i(;in  auiu<5d)a(en  gereichen,  un( urn  folcfter 

Urfacöe 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  33 

2*  o  x  t  e  b  e. 

ttrfamemegen  wolte  er  nidjt,  Jn^  es  benfeinem  £e* 
ben  folte  gebrucft  werben,  unb  fo  blieb  ei  neunje* 
ben  3abre  liegen,  bis  enblim  einige  SBobfwunfmer 
beö  gemeinen  heften,  tijn  mftänbig  batmen  ju  ver* 
willigen/  to$  ei  in  ben  2)rucf  mömte  gegeben  wer= 
ben ;  welmes  er  bann  julefct  getba«,  «nb  w«rbe  bie* 
fe  ©grifft  im  vorigen  3a(jr  jum  brocfen  «berge« 
ben.  tlnb  nac^bem  im  ei  gelefen,  «nb  vieles  23ers 
gnngen  barinnen  gefunben,  verfpracf)  tdj  ei  j«  brn« 
<t en ;  ebe  im  es  aber  in  bie  Arbeit  nehmen  fönte, 
w«rbe  ei  verlegt,  to$  im  es  nid^t  wieber  ju  jwben 
w«fte,«nb  meinete,  es  wäre  etwanvor  toeip  90a« 
pier  verkauft  worben,  weswegen  im  es  in  ber  £eU 
tung  befant  mamte  nnb  eine  35elobn«ng  baranf 
fetye,  wer  mirs  wieber  brdc^te,  nnb  t>a  ftd)S  (ange 
«imt  ftnben  motte,  fo  feblete  es  ben  einigen  nimt  an 
argen  ©ebancfen,  als  tyatte  td)  etmaS  barinnen  ge* 
funben  bas  mir  ntdjt  gefallen,  «nb  fy&tte  ei  mit 
Sletfs  auf  He  <5eüe  geräumt:  2>iefeS  mufte  im  fo 
eine  geraume  geit  trafen,  «nb  fyatte  nichts  jumei« 
«er  SKemtfertigung  als  mein  gutes  ©ewtffen.  2>er 
Slutbor  biefer  <5mrifft  aber  mar  barüber  nimt  vers 
legen  to$  feine  ©ctjrifft  nimt  in  ben  ©rucf  t ommen 
folte;  fonbem  ttofrete  mim  mit  einer  'Sottfmaft- 
bte  et  mir  fagen  ließe,  üa$  ta)  mim  nimt  befünts 
mern  folte  wegen  bent  QSerluft  folder  <5djrifFt,  ei 
mate  niemabls  fein  ©inn  gewefen,  M$  ei  ben  feU 
nem  Ceben  in  "örucf  fommen  folte,  unb  fo  ware  er 
gar  wof)l  ju  frieben,  baß  es  verfobren  ware.  S)a 
im  aber  wie  ei  fmeinet,  meine  <5cbmam  lange  ge= 
nug  getragen  batte,  fo  ftmbe  jtdj  tief?  @cbrift  voie* 
ber,  an  einem  folmen  Ort,  wo  im  unb  meine  £eute 
juvor  mancbmabl  forgfältig  gefucyt  batten,  obne 
etwas  bavon  ju  feben,  nadjbem  fte  über  ein  3abr 
21 4  verlobren 


34       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

S3  6  1 1 1  &  t 

berfofjren  gewefen,  unb  affo  Ija&e  icf>  nun  feinen 
fernem  5luffd)ub  machen  wollen,  (entern  übergebe 
fie  t>tr  lieber  Cefer,  fo  wie  fte  ber  aufrichtige,  alien 
QKenfc&en  wofjl  wunfefjenbe  2Urtf)or  aufgefegt  t;at, 
3u  aller  «üfienfdjen  heften,  benen  es  in  bie  jbanbe 
tommen  mag/  unb  ftdjs  bajn  woden  bienen  lajfen, 
unb  tft  fwffentucfj  Hin  ©c()abe  gefc&efjen,  baf*  es 
fo  lange  friHe  gelegen  f)at>  Sann  es  wäre,  wann 
es  bamaf)ls  gebrückt  worben,  »telleidjt  bet)  beiten 
meiften  bengelegt  unb  wrgeffen  worben,  ba$  man 
ju  biefer  3ett  wenig  me^r.banon  wufte/  H  es  botfj 
3u  unjerer  Qett  gewtßlictj  fo  notbig,  ober  noep  n&s 
tfjtgee  ift,afs  jemaftfsjmwr:  Sann  bie  (Srfatjrung 
erweist  es,  to$  wie  baS  (Jnbe  btefeS  SBeft  Hauffs 
(tri)  nähert,  fo  nimmt  and)  bie  <5orgloftgfett  um 
Das  ©ute  uberfjanb,  unb  bie  SDttnfc&en  geraten  m 
göttuepen  Singen,  unb  nüfcliefyen  Unterric&tungen 
in  eine  folate  ©leicogüttlgfeit,  als  es  wofjl  faum  in 
benen  Seiten  Vloä  mag  gewefen  fep,  »on  twefcoen 
es  f)ei$t:  fteaebtetens  mebr.  Unb  man  ftet)et  fafl 
allerwegen,  i>(\$  unenbmfj  mefjr  5le$  angewenbet 
wirb,  tu  £tnber  in  ber  ©leid)ftettung  ber  SBelt, 
unb  unnützen  Singen  m  unterrichten,  als  in  nüfcfi= 
d)en,unb  jur  ©ottfeltgreitretfcenben  Verrichtungen. 
Saß  bann  btefeS  rleine  SBercf  feinen  erwünfefc 
ten  Qweef ,  woju  es  ju  ertf  tft  verlangt,  unb  Don  beut 
Sluttwt  toerfaffet  worben,  erlangen  mftge,  unb  ta 
es  lange  ausgeblieben,  bann  um  fo  ttiel  fotg'fälte 
ger  möge  angewenbet  werten,  iflbas  ber&ltcfye  wün* 
feben  eures  getreuen  unb  aUerStöenfcoen  ipenlwön* 
fdjenben  Sreunbes, 

<Zf)ti#oM  <5aur, 

Gttvmamonm  ben  n  SKcrfc  1770, 

maß 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG 


2fttJag  jit  HwfettiguttQ  fciefes  25öcblciit8. 

greuttt)    £)ielman  $otö, 

^@  tfl  mit  fcbön  manchmal  in  Den  ©eDancfen  gcfcg^n/  »er# 
gangen,  unD  wieDerfommetv  nebmlicb,  Dag  Du  mir  folieft 
einmal  wann  Du  %t\t  ^a(l  auffcbretbcn/  5öie  2Jrt  unD 
SBeife ;  wie  Der  greunD  ©ocf  @cbule  bdlt  ?  26ie  er  Die  ÄinDcr 
in  Dte  (Schule  aufnimmt?  2Gfe  er  mit  DerfebieDenen;  aucb  »er* 
fd)ieDene3ucf)t  bait?  2Bte  er  itemitgreunDiicbfeit  unD  Siebe  trac* 
firt/  Dag  fie  il>n  (ieb  i)ahn,  unD  fürchten  ?  5öaß  jte  einanDer  lieb 
baben.  Sludb  t>on  ibrem  SSrief *  2Gecbfel  miteinanDer.  2ßie  er  jte 
t)om  @c&n>dien  jurCgtilfe-gewöbnet?  2ßie  er  fie  mit  ©cbam  ge* 
wobnet  Da£  fte  fleißig  (ernen  ?  2lueb  tt)ie  er  ibnen  f mDliebe  SSilDer 
mmafykt,  Damit  fie  |teb  üben  ?  3fa  (gumma :  &  ware  mir  lieb/ 
wann  Du  mir  eö  furß/  oDer  umfldnDtidv  befcbriebefl::  auf  folcbe 
2ßeife,Da§/manner  etwafolte  auf?  Der  Seit  geben/  man  eine  Q3e* 
febreibung  »on  Üjm  maeben  forme:  t^^if^  ©Ott  jum  *}3ret)f?/  tbeil* 
andern  ©cbulmeitfern  jur  Üebre;  unD  Denen  sftacbfommenDen  jum 
Unterriebt;  tt>ie  eine  Sugentxfonne  wobl  erjogen  unD  gelernet  wer* 
titn*  SÖJelcbeS  wobl  tvebrt  ifl/  Dag  man  e$  Drucfe7  zt  fei;  mit  fei* 
«er  Bewilligung  noeb  top  feinem  Seben/  oDer  bernaeb :  wenigjfenS 
möcbte  tcb  e$  nacb  ^eutfepfanb  fcbicfen;  wann  erö  niebt  gern  bet) 
SeibeS  «Seben  geDrucft  fdbe.  3$  haitui  t)or  ttmt  wiebtigeä/  wei* 
len  t>iel  Daran  gelegen  tft/  wie  Die  3ugenD  im  Buebftaben  unö 
©ottetffurebt  unterwfefen  wirD,  «SGeil  Du  niebt  Die  geDer  gebrau* 
eben  fontefi/  babe  icb  Dieb  gerne  fcerfebonet;  nun  aber  folt  Du  feine 
€ntfebu(Digung  baben/  atö  wann  Du  franef  biß»  3*  babe  nur 
etlicbe  ^Juncten  gehielDet/  Die  mir  fo  eben  |inD  eingefallen :  Du  Wirft 
eS  umjtdnDlicb  macben;  unD  id)  Dencfe,  e$  fei)  fein  ^uneft  feinet 
Betragend  mit  #inDem  unD  Sllten,  Der  niebt  anmerefenä  wertb 
fep.  2Bomit  id)  Dieb  unD  Deine  grau  &erfclic&  grüfie :  unD  bleibe 
eucl)  mit  SMenft  in  iitbt  »erbunDen. 
©ermantown/  Den  3Un  2iug.  1750.        Cbritfopb  ©aur. 


31  r 


93or* 


36       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


<gottfort>,  t><n  8ten2tuguft  17^0. 

SSorennnerung  i>$  §8etfafier^- 

Salutem,  tkbxvcttl)Qt  $retmfc* 

|3t  gegenwärtigen  geilen  beridjfe,  bag  ic&  fieutegewiffer 
k  Urfad)  wegen,  Den  greunb  S.  £.  $u  befuc&en  binge* 
nötiget  worben,  welder  intr  ju  erFennen  gegeben: 
baf?if)mnemlid)  ein  ©treiben  t?on  greunb  <£briftopl) 
©aurju  ftanbenfommen;  DcrQn&aft  Defien  fei)  überhaupt,  we* 
gen  meiner  (gd)ul*Uebung,  fca§  er  gerne  gewi|Te9?ad)rid)t  Gatte: 
Q3on  ber  2lrt  unb  SBeife,  wie  rd>  nic&c  nur  Die  £inber  aufnehme; 
fonDern  auc{>,  wie  id)  bi£fjer  pre  Siegel  tinD  örbnung  unter  tynen 
eingerichtet.  @o  bat  fiel)  greunb  Sielmann  gegen. mid)  alfo  er* 
Fldrt :  baj?  er  bem  greunb  @aur  ju  (ieb  gerne  folefre  Srebeö  *  33ejeu* 
gung  erweifen  wolte;  weilen  if)m  aber  meine  ©c&uUUebungen 
triebt  in  allen  ©tücfen  beFant  fepen,  un^  belegen  nidjt  in  feinem 
Sßermögen  tfunbe  folgern  39egeljren  ©enüge  ju  tfcun;  wie  e$  t>on 
greunb  <gaur  an  ihn  begehret,  2lß  bat  greunb  Sielmann  an 
mid)  begehret/  id)  folte  biefe  Stürbe  t)k  ihm  auferlegt  fei),  auf  mei* 
ne  ©cfcuftem  nehmen,  tmb  greunb  <5aur  auf  fein  25egel)ren  %ta<b* 
rieb*  geben :  SJBelcfreä  id)  greunb  ©aur,  unb  greunb  Sielmann 
ju  (ieb  nid)t  ganfc  abfd)fagen  fan;  jebod)  befinbe  id)  Bigfaüö  »er* 
fd)iebene  (gcbwürigFciten,  worüber  ic()  mid)  t>or()er  etwaä  erf Ka> 
ren  muß. 

<2Baö  anbelangt  Dagjenige  ju  berichten,  xsai  greunb  (gaur  an 
gr,  Stefmann,  unb  gr.  Sielmann  an  mid;  begehrt,  fold;e$  fönte 
ju  einem  ^Ijeil  oljnfd;wer  tf)un,  weilen  mir  meine  tägliche  Uebung 
mit  ber  3ugenD  beffer  befannt,  al$  einem  anDetn.  Sie  @d)Wie* 
rigfeit  aber  bie  id)  DifjfalS  hierüber  beftnbe,  i(l  biefe:  Sa£  e$  X*a* 
Durd)  iat>  Slnfe&en  haben  würbe,  alö  ob  id)  mir  felbft  t>or,  ober 
bey  ber  2Gert,ein  2lnfef)en,2lttejiatum,unDftincfenbe£^n(Sdu^ 
le  aufrichten  wolte,  welches  mir,  wann  e$  in  Der  ^^at  fo  wäre/ 
tor  ©Ott  unD  allen  frommen  ©jriften  <£erfjen  ganfc  Feine  £f)re, 
fonbern  Dielmebr  ©pott  unb"  ©d)anbe.  üerbiciiet,  unb  mir  auc{>  ju 
meiner  ©eelen  £et)l  unb  ©eligfeit  nid)t  nüfjlid)  fepn  Fönte.    <£* 

ware 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  37 

»    X    3    X    * 

ware  nur  gutter  vor  Die  ©gen <  Siebe:  2lber,  t>aö  (aflebe*  ££3{9t 
ferne  von  mir  fet)n.  UnD  weilen  fcfeon  gar  vi.el  fromme  £er$en  von 
Diefem  Sväuber  überfallen,  worDurcfefteverloferen/  wajs  fteDurc&Die 
©naDe  ©ötteS  erarbeitet  batttn.  3a  felbfl  Der  roctfe  (Salomon, 
Der  feinet  gleichen  ntc&t  featte  in  SBefSfeeit/  Sveicfetfeunv  @fer  unt> 
£errlid)feit/  tt»efcf)c^  er  alles  Don  @Ott  erlangete  burcfeS  ©ebdt; 
tinb  nocb  mefer  ate  er  gebeten,  (gumma :  er  roar  Durd)  ©öttlicfee 
©rleucfetung  inSrfantniß,  ^eisfeeit  unb  Q3erflanb  bermafftrifeod), 
fommen/  DaS  feinet  gfeicfeen  nfefet  war/  er  grunete  wie  Die  55dume 
an  Den  Gaffer  *$$acfeen.  S3on  feiner  ^eisfeeit/  unD  was  er  8a« 
buret)  gewürefet/  finDet  |tcf>  nad>  ber  Jdnge  }u  lefen  im  i  Q5ud)  bvc 
£ön.  öow  3ten  bi§  ju  gnbebeS  ipten  Capites.  3ebocfenad)bero 
ficfe  ©alomo  Dure!)  Die  Eigenliebe  überwinben  featlaflfen/foift  jwat 
biefer  fcfedne  $8aum  annocfe  in  <2fereunb£errlicfef eit  Da  gefknbeh: 
aber  Die  Eigenliebe  hat  Dure!)  ifjre  3$rutfe  fo  vM  Raupen  *9?effec 
ausgebrütet,  bag  viefe  »on  ©alomonis  erften  grüßten  Daburd) 
ftnD  weltf  worben;  welcfeeS  ©Ott  übel  gefallen;  als  ju  lefen  1 2> 
ber  Könige  im  1 1  &ap. 

S)iefeS  tjlin  allen  meinen  Verrichtungen  unt>  Uebungen  mit  bet 
Sfugenb/  baS  fefewerefie  ©ewiefet  welkes  mir  auf  Dem  £w^en  liegte 
unb  alles  Überwiegetwas  ftefetbar  if},  eSfeabe  tarnen  wie  eSwoße: 
nemfief),  m  kfy  meine  $au§feaftung  regieren  unb  füferen  möge/ bag 
td)  DermaleinS  aus  ©naben  ein  gut  3eugni§  unb  Slfteftatum  er* 
langen  möge/  von  Dem  groffen  Wirten  ber  ©c&aafe,  welcher  mit 
in  bie  z&  Safer  lang  bit  jungen  Jammergen  vertraut/  wiewofel  fle 
mir  febon  36  Safer  anvertrauet/  burd>  einen  QSeruff  ben  niemanb 
beffer  weiß  als  iefe;  weilen  id;  aber  feier  ju  Sanb  biefen  SSeruf  jefeett 
Safer  bereit  gefegt/  worüber  id)  auch  in  wdferenber  get*  bk  ftxa* 
fenbe  £anb  ©OtreS  gefüfelef/  t>ie  mir  Dod)  ©Ott  fct>  S)antf  big* 
feer  jum  beften  gebienet;  ber  $grr  wolle  eS  in  ©naben  überfefeen 
was  iefe  in  folefeer  Seit  verfäumet  an  ber  Sugenb. 

<2BaS  nun  ferner  baS  an  mid)  verlangte  Q$egeferen  betrifft;  fo 
flef>e  id)  feierinnen  wie  meinem  tieften  ^feal/  wo  ein  feofeeS  ©ebür* 
ge  vorlieget/  welcfeeS  tcb  bejleigen  foil/  fo/  Da§  iefe  meiner  (SeitS 
viel  lieber  in  biefem  %feal/  in  ber  ginfamfeit;  bie  wenige  ^age 
Des  Gebens  jubringen  wolte;  wanS  nad)  ©ötteS  Tillen  gefdjefem 
fönt;;  als  biefen  Q5erg  $u  fttiszn.  3d)  feoffe/  Der  greunD  wirb 
mid)  begreifen  ßnnert.  SBeilen  kfe  aber  Den  greunD  in  feinem 
©efereibenfo  vermercEe;  Dag  eS  ifem  überhaupt  inbieferSacfeeum 

Die 


38       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

•    X   4  -X    • 

bfe  S&re  ©OfteS/  unt>  um  eine  gute  Sluferjiefjung  ber  3ugenb  ju 
t(>un  iff/  fo  fan  unb  will  tct>  mid)  nidt>t  wegern/  nad)  bem  SD?aa£ 
meiner  geringen  ©aben  mit  belauf  ragen;  maä  in  meinem  Q3ermd* 
gen  i(i.  ^nfonberbeit/  weilen  ic{)  Diefe  tferblicbe  glitte  bativ  boc& 
i|W  ©öttbefant/  tvannicb  jte  abfegen  mu§.  2ld)!eä  folte  ja  billig 
allen  #>?enfd)en  Ijöcbft  angelegen  fepn/  bie  gljre  ®üfte«/unb  Da$ 
allgemeine  SBefte  Der  €0?enfd)cn  ju  beförDern ;  wefcfyeä  un$  Ijier  in 
Seit/  unb  aud)  in  gwigfeit  glücffelig  mad;en  fan.  #ier$u  werben 
wir  ja  in  £.  ©grifft  fö  ernftlid)  an  Dielen  Orten  ermahnet,  jd) 
will  nur  ber  Äürfce  nacb  ()ier  anfügen  traö  unö  Der  £.  SlpojM 
kernte  foieDon  in  feinen  <3d)rifften nacbgelaflen  jurSeljre  i  ^Jet.4; 
D.  io.  ii.  mit  biefen  Porten:  Unb  Dienet  einanber/ ein  )'eglid;er 
mit  ber  ©abe  Die  er  empfangen  t>at,  ate  bk  guten  $at#alter  ber 
mancherlei)  ©naben  ©aben  ©OtfeS.  @o  jemanb  rebet/  ba$  er$ 
reoe  aß  ©Otfeä  2ßort.  @o  jemanb  ein  Stmt  f>at/  Da$  erä  tbue 
ate  au$  bem  Vermögen/  Das  ©Ott  barreicbet;  auf  Dag  in  allen 
Singen  ©Ott  gepriefen  werbe  burcf)  3£fum  (Sljrift/  welchem  fep 
gfrre  unb  ©ewalt  t)on  gwigfeit  ju  gwigfeit/  2(men. 

©efiebter  greunb/  biefe  SSermabmjng  beö  2(potfete  wrpflidjtet 
micb  jum  ^Sreiö  ©Otteä  aud)  meinem  sftdcbften  ju  Dienen  mit  bet 
©abe  bte  tdb  »on  &ött  empfangen  foabe,  fo  fern  id)  aud)  ate  efn 
treuer  £auf?l)alter  töt  ©Ott  erfunben  werben  trill;  welches  wie 
oben  gemelbt/  bat  aorgeflecfte  Siel  iß  wornad)  icb  mid)feljne/unö 
folcDeö  ju  erlangen  mir  lieber  few  wirb/  ate  aüeö  m$  fcbtbar  ijt, 
SDieweilen  mir  bewuft/  ba$  id)  auö  unb  t>on  mir  felbfi  nichts  t>er* 
mag  auö  eigenen  Ärdften  ju  tbun  bat  wefentlid)  gut  ift/  ofrne 
©Otteö  gndbtge  £ulffe  unb  SSepffanb/  unb  feineö  #♦  ©eitfe* 
Äraftunb  ©tdrcfe/  unb  baß  alle  meine  bellen  SOESercfe  unfcoHfom* 
men  ftnb/  fo  gebe  icb  biefe  meine  bijfter  geführte  @d)uhUebung 
mit  ber  Sfugenb  auf  folgenbe  Sonbition,  fage  id>  übergebe  eä  fo 
an  btn  greunb/  fünbet  er  ttmü  Darinnen  Daö  jur  £bre  ©ötttä 
unb  ju  Sluferbauung  unb  sftußen  Deä  gemeinen  heften  gereichen 
fan;  fo  will  td&/  baß  e$  ber  greunb  gleicfjfate  an  feinen  bebörigen 
Ort  beftdtfigen  foil/  unb  ®Ott  geben,  waS.©Qtte*  tft.^Jf.  1 1  u 
t).  i.  Sind)  tfefte  ferner  alfo/  fo  ber  greunb  annod)  bei;  meiner 
£ebenö  <3df  mir  unb  meinen  ©cbülern  einige  nüfclidje  Slnweifung/ 
(woDurcl)  Die  £fjre  ©OfteS  beforbert  werben  fönte)  anjeigenwilf, 
fo  bin  id)  meiner  (SeiW/  fo  willig  ate  fd;ülbig/  Dajfelbe  in  £iebe 
anjunebmen. 

Um 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  39 

$    X    5    X    « 

Um  nun  ju  De$  SreunD  SMefmannä  feinem  Q3ege5ren  an  mi# 
ju  gelangen,  fönte  icbtogleicb  DenSJnfang  machen;  oftne  etwas  fon* 
jlen  weitem  SSericbt  su  t()un:  weilen  aber  Der  greunD  (Sferißopf) 
©aur  an  Sielmann  begebet/  Don  allem  Q5trt$t  ju  f)aben,  aud) 
son  Dem  35riefwecbfel  Der  ©cbüler  gegen  einanber;  fo  mug  ic& 
SreunD  ©aur  hierüber  cinta.  QSorbericbt  tfeun/  Damit  wanneö  an 
fold>eo  93uncften  fommt^er  einen  2luffd)lug  pat>on  bat. 

SftacfcDeme  idb/  wie  oben  gemelDet:  Die  ©d)ul  auf  ©cfcipbacfr 
wekbe  id)  seben  3af>r  beDienet/  auf  ©eit  gefefjet,  \\t\i  jeljen  Safer 
auf  Dem  £anD  gewönnet/  unD  nacf)  meinem  geringen  33erm6gett 
Lauren  Slrbeit  getfean,  fo  Ijaben  ftc^  in  Der3eitt>erfd)ieDene©ele* 
genfoeiten  jum  ©cfcul&alten  feer^orgetfean,  unD  bet)  mir  Digfaltö 
angefügt;  big  c$  enblicb  wieDer  Daju  gefommen,  Dag  id)  in  Denen 
-bepDen  ^aunfdjipS  ©cbipbad)  unD  ©olforD,  in  jeglicher  <£aun* 
fc&ip  wöcbentlicfr  Drep  ^ag  ©cfoul  gebalten,  Siemeilen  mir  abet 
Daö  ©ehalten  in  Diefem  £anD  fcbon  t>orl)er  befanf  war/  Dag  e$ 
mit  anDerS  Damit  bereit  ate  in  ^eutfcblanD/  Da  Die  ©d&ule  auf 
folgen  Pfeifern  Met/  Die  Der  gemeine  Öftann  nid)t  wobl  umfloffen 
fan,  wann  kfy  mir  Dann  ju  ©emütfe  fufjrete/  Die  ^füd^ten  welc&e 
Diefer  Q$erujf  in  fii)  t)&lt,  utjt>  id)  mir  aud)  Den  emften  Q3orfa£  ge* 
fajfrt/  Diefen  9)flid)ten  treulieb  nacbjuleben,  faf>e  aber  audj  Dentier« 
Dorbenen  guftanD  Der  3ugenD  an/  unD  Die  Diele  2iergernifie  Dießt 
StGelt/  woDurd)  Die  3>ugenD  DerDorben  unD  geärgert  wirb  »on  Den 
Otiten/ unD  betrachtete  Dameben  meine  eigene  UnwürDigfeit;au<fr 
fcinwieDer  Die  ungkicbe^icbtigFeit  Der  gltern  in  Der  ÄinDergucbt, 
Da  einige/  mit  Sef>r  unD  £eben;  tfrrer  5\hiDer  $epl  unD  ©eligfeit 
t)on  ganzem  £er£en  fucOen,  unD  allen  gleig  anwenDen/  Die  Sfjre 
®öttt$f  unD  Das  #ei;l  iforer  5finDer  ju  beförDern.  Sa  hingegen 
aber  anDere  gan£  contra  mit  &for  unD  Üeben  (Int):  ibren  5?inbem 
mit  böfen  Rempeln  Dorgefjen;  woDurc^  e$  Dabin  fommen  fan, 
Dag  nid}t  nur  jwifeben  Dem  ©cfculmeifler/  unD  jtinbern  Diefer  un* 
gleicben  ivtnDer  Suc&t/  fo  fern  er  anDerä  feinen  Q3eruff  treu  unD 
aufrichtig  öor  ®Ott  unD  9)?enfd)en  fuljren  will/  aud)  ungleichen 
€m(tunD  3ud)t*9iutl)en  führen  unD  gebrauchen  mug;  woraus 
Dann  fogleicf)  Dem  ©dnilmeifter  Diefer  9?ame  jugeeignet  wirD/  er 
gebe  nacb  ©unfb er  l)alte Da$  eine  itinD  harter/  als Dad  anDere; 
welcher  aud)  in  Der  tyat  ©ewifienS  fyalben  um  Degwegen  tfeutt 
mug/  Damit  Die  ÄinDer  guter  2lrt/  niebt  t)on  Den  Ämbern  böferSIrt 
WDorben  werben,   ©en(len  ift  eö  fre9tic&  eineö  ©c^ulmeifter* 

mm, 


40       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

*  X   «  X  » 

*Pf!id)t,  unpartbetfifd)  ju  fepn,  unt)  nicfttt  nacb  @unf!  unb  Strife 
J>en  ju  wrricbten/  Da6  arme  SBettef  *5?inD  m  ©rinD/  Üumpen  unD 
$dug  wann  eSfonft guter  2irt/  oDer  fid>  untcrmetfcn  laffenwill/muf? 
ibm  fo  lieb  im  (wann  er  aucb  fcbon  in  Diefem  Sieben  feinen  <}>fen* 
Hing  t>at>or  befommen  fofte/)  als  Deö  9Jeicben,woöon  ereinereid)* 
(icbe  SSefobnung  in  Diefem  Jeben  ju  gegarten ;  De*  armen  5?in* 
Deä  reiebe  Q3e(obnung  folgt  in  jenem  Sieben.  (Summa/  e$  folte  ju 
wdtlduffig  fatten;  alle  *})fJid)ten  ju  befebreiben/  fo  einem  @d;ul 
meifter  obliegen,  treulieb  an  Der  3ugenD  ausüben ;  aber  noeb 
tteitldujftiger  tft  e$  ju  befebreiben,  atte  2ßiDermdrtigfeiten  Die  ibn 
belegen  ju  #au§  befueben/  wann  er  gerne  feinen  ^fliebten  ge* 
mag  bauSbalten  will.  211$  icb  DiefeS  alles  in  grwdgung  genom* 
men,  fo  babe  icb  fd)on  voraus  gefeben/ folte  unD  wolte  id)  etwas  er* 
baulicbeS  auSricbten  an  Der  3ugenD;  Dag  es  mir  D$falStdglid)unb 
tfunDficb  böcbtf  nötbig  wdre;  mit  Söaüi'D  meine  2lugen  aufjubeben 
ju  Den  bergen  um  £ülffe/  *})f.  izi,  fo  fern  id)  etwas  in  Diefem 
gu(lanD/  wie  eS  nun  jur  3eit  in  Der  SOßelt  flebet  auSricbten  wolüe 
ium  $rei§  ©OfteS/  unD  Der  3fugenD  ibrem  bejfen/  unD  alfo  babe 
id)  midj  wieDer  in  Diefe  2Jrbeit  gejMlt/  unD  biSber  Darinnen  geftan* 
ten;  id)  wünfebte  jwar;  Dag  icb  eS  weiter  bdtte  bringen  fonnert/ 
boeb  babe  aueb  Urfacb/  Dem  großen  ©Ott  berfclid)  ju  DantfenDafj 
et  mir  gebolffen/  Da§  icb  eS  fo  weit  bringen  f  önnen. 

2ßaö  nun  greunD  ©aurS  erfte  grag  betrifft/  nebmlicb/  wie  icb 
DieÄinDer  jur  @d)ulaufnebme?  (golcbeS  gefebiebet  auf  folgenDe 
SBeife.  (Srftlid)  wirb  eS  t)on  Den  anDern  (gcbülern  bewillfommt 
mit  reiebung  Der  #anD,  bann  wirDeS  Don  mir  gefragt/  ob  es  aueb 
fleijfig  lernen  unDgeborfam  fet>n  wolle?  wann  es mir  Mnn  folcbeS 
Derfpricbt:  fo  wirD  ibm  Dann  fcorgefteüt  wie  eS  ftcb  fcerbalten  muß/ 
unD  wann  er  Das  21 $5  (£  orDentlicb  nacb  einanDerfagen/  unD  aucb 
in  Der  ^Jrobe  alle  verlangte  SBudjftyben  mit  Dem  geigfinger  weifen 
fan;  fo  tbut  man  ibn  int  2lb.  <2Bann  er  Dabin  f  ommt/  fo  iff  ibm 
Der  Q3ater  einen  Pfenning  fcbufDig/ unD  Die  Butter  muß  ibmjwei) 
<£r>er  baefen  t)or  feinen  §lei§;  unD  folebe  55elobnung  wirD  ibm 
wann  eS  weiter/  nemlicb  in  Die  Sflamtn  tommt,  u.  f.  w.  2ßann 
eS  aber  ins  lefen  fommt/  fo  bin  icb  ibm  (tvann  eS  fleiffig  geler* 
net/  unD  in  fofeber  geit/  Die  ibm  beftimmt  wirD  Unf )  ein 
Seugnig  fcbulbig;  unD  am  erften  'Sag/ als  DiefeS  5?inD  jur  (gcbul 
!ommt;  fo  befömt  eS  einen  gettul/  worauf  nur  Diefe  geile  tfebet: 
( SWffiS;  einen  ^3enö* )  Di^fen  3«tul  befomt  c^/  Dag  eö  w  ©*«' 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  41 

#6   X   7   X   * 

iß  aufgenommen  als  ein  (Schüfen  barneben  »irb  i&m  aber  au$ 
wrgefieft:  fo  ferne  e$  trag  im  lernen/  ober  fonfi  ungeborfam  fepn 
»urbe/  folgen  5?inbern  »ürbe  t^r  Seugnif?  »ieber  genommen/ 
vomn  fte  |tcb  aucb  ferner/  in  feinem  ©tuet  unter»eifen  laflfen  rooU 
Im  unD  fiorrig  verbleiben/  folebe  »erben  altbann  t>or  allen  ©d)ü* 
lertv  t>or  faul  unD  untüchtig  au$geruffen;  unb  ibnen  gefagt/  bafj 
folebe  in  eine  anDere  febarffe  3ucbt*©cbule  getreten:  aföbann 
frage  tcb  bat  5?inb  nocbmafjfö/  ob  e$  fleiffig  unb  gefjorfam  (epn 
»ill?  n?ann  e$  bann  folcbeS  mit  3a  beantwortet:  fo  jrige  icbibw 
ben  Ort  »o  ti  fid)  nieberfefcen  foil/  ifi  e$  ein  Änab/  fo  frage  ic& 
unter  ben  ©ebuljungen:  tjleö  ein  SÖ?dgblein/  fo  frage  id)  unter 
benen  SOJdgbcben:  »efebeö  fid)  unter  allen  biefeS  neuen  ©ebul* 
ÄinbeS  annebmen/  unb  eö  lebren  unb  unter»eifen  »ill?  naefcbeme 
nun  ba$  Äinb  fremb  ober  befanf/  ober  nacb  bem  2lnfel)en/  ange- 
nebm  ober  niebt  angenebmau$fiebet,nacbbem  offenbaren  ficbauc& 
öffrerö  fciel  ober  »enig  Die  berauö  treten/  um  bat  Äinb  ju  lernen; 
finben  fid)  feine  freiwillige/  fo  frage  id):  »er  um  eine  93orfd)rifo 
ober  <2)ogef/  folc&e  unb  folcbe  Seit  bai  Äinb  untermeifen  »ill? 
bann  fehlet  tf  niebt  (eiebt-  3)iefe$  fo  Diel  jur  sftacbricfo  »ie  icfr 
bie  Äinber  jur  ©ebul  aufnebme. 
Sernerer  Sßericbt  »egen  Ö3erfammlung  ber  Äinber  jur  ©cfcuL 

©o  gefcbiefcet  biefe  QJerfammlung  foldjergefialt/  »eilen  einige 
bier  ju  lanb  einen  fernen  2Beg/  einige  aber  nabe  jur  ©cbule  b& 
ben/  fo/  ba§  bk  ©cbüler  nidftf  fo  gleicb  auf  befiimmte  &it  unb 
©locfenfcblag  bepfammen  fetjn  fönnen/  alt  »ie  an  bmm  Orten 
»o  bie  SOJenfdjen  in  einer  <Btabt  ober  5Dorff  bepfammen  »obnen. 
©o  ifi  bk  Sßeife  unb  QSerorbnung/  ba§  bk  erfien;  mnn  iljrer 
etlicbe  bet)fammen  finb/  alle  bie  im^efiament  (efen  f6nnen;  fiel)  auf 
zm  Q5ancf  nieberfefcen  >  jeboeb  bie  Änaben  befonbertf  auf  eine 
SBancf/  unb  bk  SOtögbfein  aucb  befonbetf.  Senen  »irb  (og(eid> 
tin  dapitil  aus  bem  %efiament  ju  lefen  aufgegeben/  »efcbeS  ji^ 
unüberlernet  ber  Dvepfjc  nacb  lefen/  in  »dbrenber  £eit  (treibe  icb 
tfjnen  doo  »elcbe  nun  ibren  QJerö  obne  gebier  gelefen,  bie  fefjen 
fieb  an  bk  ^afcl  unb  febreiben/  bk  aber  gefeblet/  muffen  »ieber  ju* 
rücf  fieb  ju  unterft  an  bk  S5ancf  fe/jen.  3>n  »dbrenber  £tit  »a$ 
ton  ©cbülern  fomt/  feßt  fieb  ju  unterfi  an  bk  Q3ancf;  »a§  fieb 
»ie  gemeiDf/  fret)  maebt  fe^t  fid)  an  bie  ^afel/  folcbeS  continuireC 
big  (je  alle  bepfammen;  »er  bat  Uhu  überbleibt  auf  ber  $8ancf> 
bai  ifi  ein  fauler  ©c&üler. 

<22ann 


42       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


•  X    8    X   • 

2Gann  fie  bann  bepjammen  jtnbunb  Pifttirt,  ob  fie  tfcb  gewafcbe« 

unb  gefdmmt,  fo  wirb  ibnm  ein  9#orgen*@efang  ober  ein^falm 

ju  fingen  aufgegeben,  unb  mit  ibnen  gefangen  unb  gebdtet;  aud) 

fo  t>ict  t^nen  begreijfftcb  fan  eingepflanzt  werben,  über  ba$  ©ebdt 

bet  #£rrn,  unb  jeben  ©ebott  (nacb  bm  &abcnio  ©ö%%  mit* 

getbeilet)  begwegen  eine  Erinnerung  unb  ©rnta&minjj  an  ffe  getban» 

&mtn  gang  Keinen,  werben  Purge  ©ebdflein  unb  ©prüd;e  por* 

gefprocben.    @o  Die!  jur  $?acbricbt  wegen  QSerfammfung  ber 

©cbüler.  3ebocb  bienet  wegen  bem  ©ebdt  nocb  biefe  ©rflarung: 

^Beilen  i)ie(e  3vinber  nat  fie  ju  #aug  Por  ©ebdter  gelernet,  nur 

mit  balben  2Gorten,  unb  in  folcber  ©efebwinbigfeit  auSfprecben, 

infonberbett  ba$  Q}ater<obet  Unfer  ^ater,  welcbe  ©ebatö>3orm 

ber  «£©r  3<£fu$  feine  jünger  gelebret,  unb  alleö  in  |td)  begreiffit 

ton  QiOtt  5u  erbitten,  toat  unt  an  Setbunb  (Seel  mkbig  iff.  21IS 

fcabe  im  ©ebraueb  folcbeS  ©ebdt  fnienb  ihm  felbft  porjufprecben, 

welcbeS  fie  aüefammt  Fnienb  mir  (aut  nacbfprecben.    9?acb  per* 

ticbteter  ©efang  unb  @ebdt$*Uebung;  begeben  ftcb  bkjtniQm  fo 

febreiben,  ivieDcr  an  fofd;e  Uebung.    diejenigen  aber,  fo  nid)t  im 

$efkment  bei)  ©ammlung  ber  igcbul  mit  lefen  fönnen,  f>ahm 

t>ie  Seit  über  Srift  gebabt  ibre  Section  ju  lernen,  folebe  werben  fo 

gleid)  nacb  Derricbtetem  ©ebdt  porgenommen,  ibre  Section  aufeu* 

fagem  2Beld;e  bann  ibre  Section  wobl  f önnen,  bie  befommen  mit 

treiben  eine  o  auf  bk  #anb,  big  i(t  bag  Sieben,  bag  er  nid;tö 

gefeblt:  bk  aber  ibre  Section  nicbt  fertig  fonnen,  fo,  bag  bie  3eb* 

ler  über  3  geloffen  fmb,  foldbe  werben  jurücf  gewiefen,  urn  bie  Sec* 

tionnoeb  befitf  ju  fernen,  big  bk  f (einen  alle  aufgefagt  baben: 

f ommt  bann  ein  folcber  unb  unb  febfet  lieber  fo  Piel  alt  3  fo 

wirb  et  nur  mit  biefem  2ßort  geojfenbabret  an  bk  ©cbüler,  ba$ 

ber  3  gefeblt:  fo  rufen  ade  über  ibn  aus,  ftaull  unb  alöbann 

tt)irb  fein  9?ame  aufgefebrieben.    Sßetrift  nun  biefeö  ein  ftinb,  e8 

mag  aueb  fonft  pon  9?atur  fepn,  baß  e«  bie  9vutbe  fürd)tet  ober 

nicbt  fürd;tet,  fo  weig  idb  boeb  aus  grfabrung,  baß  tiefer  blofle 

©c&all  ber  ftinber  ibnen  weber  tbut,  unb  (ie  mebr  jum  lernen  an 

treibet,  alt  wann  reb  ibm  allejeit  bk  Üvurtje  Porbalten  unb  gebrau* 

eben  würbe.    SSBann  bann  folebeö  Äinb,  in  folebem  gnll  greunbe 

in  ber  ©ebufe  \)at  bie  eö  lernen  f  önnen  unb  wollen,  bie  wirb  eS 

fleißiger  befueben,  alö  jupor.  Jöie  Urfacb  itf  biefe:  wirb  fein  $to 

me  nid)t  auögetban  beö  Qlage^  big  bie  ©ebuf  ju  €nbe,  fo  babeti 

bie  ©cbüler  grepb^'f/  M  faulen  ©cbülerö  Hainen  aueb  aufjiu 

fftml 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  43 

«   X    ii    )(  & 

ftyreftttt  unt)  mit wi(& -öau§  ju  nehmen;  finfcef  ftd^S  aber:  bag 
Da$  ÄtnD  fünftig  feine  Section  wobf  fan,  fö  roirb  fein  Siamc  aber* 
mablS  Den  @d;ü(ern  befant  gemach  unD  ju  erfennen  gegeben: 
Dag  eä  feine  action  wobl  gefönt  babe,  unt)  nicbtS  gefebfet.  2tffc 
Dann  ruften  fte  8 (ei (fig!  über  i'bnaug.  2bann  DiefeS  gefebeben: 
fo  wirDfein  Partie  an  Der  faulen  ©ebüler^afel  auSgelofdjes* 
unt)  Die  vorige  ?D?ifietbat  fft  »ergeben. 

2Caö  Die  5?inDer  betrifft  fo  im  bucbflabieren  (Int):  folebe  wefr 
Den  aud)  tag(id)  auf  Die  Qirobe  gebellt  liegen  Der  Sluäfpracb. 
2Bcfcfre/  ob  (k  wobl  im  bucbflabieren  bep  Dem  SJuffagen,  wo  eitt 
<2I5ovt  mebr  alö  eine  @p(be  bat/  alles  im  auäfprecben  nacbbolen  müfc 
fen,  fo  finDet  ftcbS  Dod)  juweiten  i\\  Der  *}}robe,  Dag  fte/  ob  jte 
wobl  Die  Q3ud?|laben  orDentfid)  wiffen  ju  nennen,  aber  wegen  öte 
manglung  Der  Siuöfpvadb  niebt  fobalD  an$  lefenfonnen  gefegt  wer* 
Den.  3u  Dem  3wcf  De|lo  eber  $u  fommen;  fo  mug  Da$  ÄinDfet* 
ne  Section  noebmabtö  repetieren;  unD  folcbeS  gefd>iebet  auf  folgen* 
De  2irt.  ©aö  ÄinD  gibt  mir  Dae  £ßud):  3d)  bud;flabicre/  unD  e$ 
mug  auöfprecben:  fan  tt  aber  niebt  gefcbwinD  Damit  fort/  fomufj 
ein  anDereS  feinet  gleiten  Die  äuäfprac&e  tbun;  DaDurcb  boret  e$ 
Docb/  unD  (ernet  Den  Unferfd)ciD,  wie  e$  (icb  im  auöfpre^en  nac5 
Dem  33udf)tfaben/  unD  niebt  nacb  feiner  eigenen  $?epnung  richten 
muß* 

2Baö  Die  2(.  55.  <£.  (3#üfer  anbelangt/  folgen  Die  SBucbfta* 
ben  am  erften  befannt  ju  macben/  ware  Der  ndcbtfe  ^eg/  ibnen 
erjllid)  nur  eine  Dieifre  aufzugeben/  um  jblcbe  wr*unD  hinterwärts 
ju  lernen  unD  ju  prüfen/  um  fte  Den  Q5ucbffaben  beffer  nennen  unD 
fennen  ju  fernen;  Damit  fk  Das  a  b  c  niebt  juerff  auöwenDig  (er* 
nen/  wann  man  nur  ein  5t:nD  in  Der  (Scbul  bätte.  #at  man  aber 
mebr  Dergleichen:  fo  lag  icb  fie  Das  a  b  c  nacb  einanDer  auffagen/ 
aber  mnn  Das  £inD  aufgefagt  bat,  fo  frage  icb  eS:  Ob  eS  mit 
niebt  Den  Sßucbtfaben  (welcben  icb  Dann  fagc)  mit  Dem  Ringer 
jeigen  fonne?  finDe  icb/  Dag  Das  ÄinD  bloDe  ODer  unwiffenD,  fi> 
frage  icb  ein  anDereS  feines  gleicben;  oDer  fo  Diel  ibrer  finD.  2Get 
ober  ginger  Den  SSucbftaben  am  ertfen  anzeiget,  foleben  ginger 
ergreiffe  icf>  mit  Der  £aflD/imD  batte  Denfelben  fo  lang;  biSieb  fcor 
fold)  ÄinD  einen  ©trieb  mit^reiDe  gemaebt;  aimnn  frage  id) 
wieDer  naefr  einem  anDem  $5ucf)j?aben/  u.  f.  f.  SDelcfyetf  ^mD  nun 
Den  %ag  über  Die  tfiettfen  ©triebe  befommen  l)Mr  DaS  bat  aucf> 
Die  meiflen  SSucbtfabe»  angejeigt;  folgern  bin  icf>  aud)  etwaä 

S3  fdjulDig 


44       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

«  X    i*   X   & 

fcfrulbig/  ewa  cine  551um  auf  papier  gemaf)(ef/  oDcr  einen  Q3o* 
gel.  ©inb  fie  aber  mebrenrtjeite  g(eid),  fo  geben  jte  in$  £oog/  fo 
giebt  e«  befto  weniger  QSerbrug.  2)urd)  biefe  $rapn  wirb  nid)£ 
nur  Denen  aDju  bföben  ibre  QMöbigfeit  ( welcbeä  eine  große  £\n> 
fcernig  im  lernen/)  etwas  benommen/  fonDern  aud)  Die  €ufl  unö 
liebe/  um  gern  in  Die  ©d)ul  ju  geben  Dermebret,  @o  t>iel  jur 
9vacbrid}t  auf  fein  5$egcbren/  wie  id)  Die  ÄinDer  jur  @cf)ul  auf* 
4iebnie:  aud)  wie  »or  Dem  ©ebdt  bei)  Q)erfammfung  Der  5?inDer> 
ainD  aucl)  nacb  Dem  ©ebdt  Die  ©cbul*  Uebung  fortgefeßt  wirD ; 
mid)  Durcb  m$  »or  $?ittel/  Die  allju  unaebtfamen  unD  forglofen 
2ur  2ld)tfamfeit  unD  (gorge  if>re  Section  wob!  ju  lernen  angetrie* 
ben  werDen;  aucl)  wie  Den  allju  5MöDen  fo  Diel  möglicO  53epl)ülf' 
fe  gefcbiel)et. 

ßu  fernerer  gortfefcung  Dienet  jur  9?ad/rid)t:  Sag/ wenn  Die 
fleinen  tia$  erftemal)l  aufgefagt/  fo  gebe  id)  Den  ^eftament  ©cbü* 
lern  wieDer  ein  Sapitel  ju  lernen  auf.  SßßaS  geitung  unD  Briefe 
liefet/  ft^en  befonDerä;  m$  reebnet  Deögleicben*  ginDeid)  aber  im* 
ter  Den  fleinen  Dag  fte  im  lefen  fo  weit  gefommen;  Dag  fte  aucf> 
balD  tücbtig  im  ^eftament  juSefen  ft'nD/  folebe  werDen  Dann  Denen 
Filament  *©cbitlern  angejeigt  Dag  fte  probieren  wolten,  wann 
fiel)  ein  guter  £efer  unter  Den  %eflament*@cbüfern  ibrer  annehmen 
wo(te;  mit  Unterteilung:  DiealäDann  Darju  gewilligt/  Die  treten 
jjeraitf/  ergreiffen  gemelDte  @cbüler  bei)  Der  £<\nb,  unD  fefcen  jt'e 
neben  ftd);  toann  Diefeö  gefcbefjen/  wirD  ifynen  ein  (Japitel  augge* 
tbeilt/  fo/  Dag  jeglicbem  *  QJerSju  lernen  jugetbeilet  werDen.  gin* 
bet  fieb  aber/  Dag  man  nod)  ein  unD  anDerer  Uebung  benötiget, 
(aß  ©pruej)  unD  (£apitcf  ju  fueben/  oDer  dSprud)  auäwenDig  ju 
lernen,  bei)  welcher  Uebung  gleicbfafö  ein  jeDer  einen  QSerä  lefen 
mug/)  fo  tbeilt  man  ibnen  nur  einen  Q3er3  au$,  welcbeS  Dann  De* 
nen/  Die  probieren  im^eftamentju  lefen;  aud)  niebt  ju  febwer  fdlt* 
ginDet  ftcW  Dann/  Dag  folebe  ©cbüler  in  Der  ^robe  fieb  wof)l  unö 
fleißig  in  Srternung  ibreS  jugetbeilten  QScrfc^  befunDen/  fo  wirb 
ibnen  eine  2ßocbe  jur  $)robe  gegeben;  in  welcber  SBocbe  fte  ifyre 
Section  im  a  b  c  33ud)/  mit  Den  fleinen  lernen  unD  auffagen  mtif* 
fen/  aud)  mit  Den  %eftament*@cbulern  j^ren  cq^S  lernen  unb 
auflagen  muffen,  galten  fte  Die  *JJrobe  wobl  au$;  fo  fommen  fte 
Die  näcbfte  2ßod)e  Darnad)autf  Dem  a  b  c  Q3ucb  ins  ^eflament; 
unD  Dann  wirb  ibnen  erlaubet/  bat  fd)reiben  aueb  mit  an  Jpanb  ju 
nehmen;  tvekbe  aber  Die  ^robe  nic&t  anhalten/  müfien  noeb  eine 

ßefefcte 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG  45 

*     X     *3     X     « 

gefeßte  gelt  bet)  Denen  a  b  c  ©cbülern  oerbfettaf/  cfie  ftc  lieber 
jur  ^irobe  fommen*  9?acbDem  Die  ^(lament *@*ufcr  aufge* 
fagt/  werDen  Die  Kernen  aud)  n>iet>er  vorgenommen,  'SBann  DiefeS 
gefdjeben/  fo  tverDen  jie  Dann  an  ?>a$  ttorgefefene  Sapitel  erinnert/ 
tinD  ju  mein,  unD  ifjrem  Unterricht  Die  Darinnen  enthaltene  Scbre 
ju  beDenefen  gegeben :  weilen  e$  a(6Dann  nicf)t  febfet/  Daß  folc&e 
Sebrflücfe  an  anDern  Orten  ß.  ©grifft  aucf)  befcbrieben/  fo  wer* 
Den  folcbe  aufgefucbt  UnD  gelefen;  unt>  nad;gebenD$  ein  ©efang 
aufgegeben,  welcbeä  Diefe  Sebrftücfe  aucf)  in  )tcb  &dft.  3flt  nad£ 
Dem  nod)  Seit  übrig/  fo  mirD  ibnen  fdmtlid)  ein  furg  @prud)(einr 
auSwenDig  $u  fernen  aufgegeben,  IftacfoDem  DiefeS  gefcfceljen/  muf* 
fen  fte  üjre  ©cbrifften  aufivcifeti/  wefcbe/  nacbDetfi  |ie  überfein  unt> 
numerirt/  wirD  Dem  erften  in  Der  Kummer  ein  bait  2ßort  ju  bucfc 
tfabieren  aufgegeben:  tan  er$  nic&t/fo  fallt  e$  auf  Den  ztm  unö 
fo  fort,  melier  eö  fatv  Der  empfangt  feine  ^c&fifiTc ;  unD  Dann, 
f  ommt  wreDer  m  barf  2Borü  auf  Den  erften;  unD  DiefeS  continuirt 
biß  fie  alle  ibre  ©cbrijften  Durcl)  bud)flabieren  empfangen. 

£Bei(en  Die  5?inDer  ibr  0)}ittag^£(]en  bei)  fid)  baben;  wirD  tft* 
nen  nad)  Dem  (£|]en  eine  llunDe  Stepbeic  öergönnet;  Dienerten  fie 
aber  gemeinig(id)  Diefe  Srepbeit  mißbraud;en/  wann  man  nicfcü 
tfets  bei)  ibnen  ijl;  fo  muß/  fo  lang  id)  ibnen  fcorfäjreibe/  einer  o* 
Der  jween  im  alten  ^efiament  eine  unliebe  #ifiorie/  (oDer  au* 
SWofe  unD  Den  «}Jropl)eten#  oDer  au$  (Salomon/  oDer  @ira$$ 
(Sprücben)  lefen/  biß  Die  ©cbu(  angebet. 

(S3  Dienet  aud)  Diefetf  jur  $?ad)rid)t:  weiten  5vinDer  $?otf)bak 
ben  au$  Der  @cbu(  fragen/  unD  man  ihnen  aud)  folcbeS  erlaube« 
muß/  will  man  nicht  Den  Unratl)  unD  ©effanef  in  Der  ©d)ul  ba* 
bm.  UnD  aber  Da3  ©efebret)  um  ©rlaubniß  binauö  ju  geben/  Den 
gangen  %ag  continuiret/  aud)  wohl  obne  Stoffe  ftinauö  fragen/ 
Daß  juweilen  z  biß  3  Drauffen  Die  Seit  mit  fpiefen  jubringen/  fo 
f)abe  Diefe«  ju  Derbuten/  einen  9?age(  an  Den  <5:f>ür*9)foflcrt  ew 
gefebfagen/  woran  ein  folgern  «pdeffein  Ijdngt.  SBefcbem  Dann  efe 
voaö  *>on  nötigen  ift/  Der  fiebet'natf)  Dem  «£dcf(ein/  ob  e$  an  Der 
<£bur  bringt:  mnn  Daö  •j&acfletn  Da  banget/  fo  ift  Der  *paß  aud) 
Da  Daß  eg  Darf  bmautf  geben  obne  gefragt/  Dann  nimmt  t$  DaS 
«£dcf  lein  unD  gebet  fjinaut,  fommü  ein  anDerS  Dem  voai  DOn  rifc 
fben/  Daö  Darf  aui)  weiter  niebt  fragen :  fonDern  eg  (Mit  ftcb  ati 
Die  ^bwv  fo  bafD  Der  fommt  mit  Dem  ^acflein,  fo  nimmt  es  fok 
*M  son  Dem  anD^rn/  unD  gebet  Ijinau*/  bleibt  Daö  ^dcflein  wafi 

^4  iu 


46       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

•    X    14  <X    • 

ju  fang;  fo  bringet  Die  Wotb  Defies  ber  an  Der  %f)ür  toartef/  fol* 
d;e$  anjujcigcn:  Dann  wirD  gefragt/  roer  am  festen  Draußen  ge* 
luefen?  Der  n?eig  Dann,^er  i&m  Den^ag  abgenommen;  fo;  Dag 
Feiner  ju  lang  »erteilen  fan. 

Um  Die  unroiffenben  f,je  giffern  unD  3aWm  ju  lernen :  fofdjreibe 
idf>  ibnen  auf  Die  9?otcn*QMancf  (belebe  Ränget  Dag  fie  alle  Da* 
rauf  feljen  fönnen)  Diefe  3iffer*3aW 

i234s678?o 

mit  ton  einanber  Dor/Dag  man  anDere  Ziffern  Dar&or  unD  Darbin* 
(er  fegen  fan/  Dann  fe£e  tcb  eine  o  »or  Da$  i  unD  beDeute  tf>nen/ 
Dag  ob  roofyl  Die  o  &or  i  flehet  Dennoch  niebtö  an  Der  3<*bl  wrmef)* 
vet  n>erDe/  Dann  löfc&e  id)  Die  o  &or  Dem  i  auö  unD  feße  fte  Winter 
Daö  i  fo  mac&t  e$  io  au6;  folgen  $tt>et>  $M  fo  fmDö  ioo  folgen 
fcret)  fo  jtnDS  iooo,  u.  f.  n>.  folcbeS  jeige  id)  ibnen  Durcb  alle  Die 
fcorgefefcte  Stffer^gaW.  ^ann  Diefeä  gefcbel)en;  fo  roirD  ju  Dec 
crflen  gijfer  i  nocb  i  jugefefct/  fo  ftnDtf  u.  foirD  aber  jroifefcen  Die 
ii  eine  o  gefegt/  fo  jtnDö  ioi,  tvirD  aber  Die  o  ju  binterfi  befun* 
Den/  fo  fi'nD  eö  no.  auf  Dergleichen  2lrt  unD  233eife  gebe  id)  fine* 
Der  Durd)  ttorgefefcte  Siffern  mit  ibnen  Durd>.  233ann  DiefeS  gefebe* 
fan,  fo  gebe  men  ettvaä  ju  fucben  auf/  e$  fep  im  ^eflfament/  ober 
©efang^uc^;  Die  Dann  am  fertigten  Damit  ftnb/  Die  baben  &or 
ifyren  gleig  bei)  mir/  oDer  ju  #aug  etroaö  ju  erlangen. 

^Beilen  and) im  lefen  (um  fcerjMnblid)  ju  lefen)  nöt&ig ,  iff,  bag 
man  ttjobl  auf  Die  <£omma  aefrtung  gebe/  unD  aber  Die  im  lefen 
nocl)  niebt  rcobl  berodbrt  ftnb/  folcbeS  ju  fcfrroer  fdlt/  al$  f)abebe$* 
faß  folebe  QJerorDnung.  ©o  jemanb  unter  Den  lament  (gebü* 
!em  niebt  fort  liefet/  fonDern  bdft  jlill  ebe  er  bin  f ommt  n?o  Dag 
©triolein  oDer  ^üncftlein  jte&et/  bat  ift  ^  gefebft/  tt>ieberum  n>er 
über  folcbeS  obne  einjubaften  fort  liefet/  ift  gfeicfrfafö  ?,  mt  ein 
<2Bort  jtt>et;mabl  fpricbf/  ift }  al$  Dann  werben  alle  gebier  unD  in* 
fonDerfjett/  n>a$  ein  jeDergefebletbatangemercfet.  2Dann  jie  Dann 
alle  aufgefagt  baben/  fo  mußen  alle  Die/  fo  gefehlt  baben  berau$ 
treten/  unD  nacbDem  Die  gebier  feyn/ in  eine  SXeibe  (leben;  Die  Dann 
nk^tö  gefeblt  baben/  Die  rücf en  binter  Die  $,afel  jufammen ;  Die  an* 
Dem  feljen  fiel)  roieDer  ju  unterfl  an  Die  Süfef. 

SBa*  nun  Dag  Q5rief  roecbfeln  gegen  einanDer  betriff/  fo  ift  Die* 
feö  ju  merefen/  Dag  icb  iz  Qaljr  fang  jnw  (Stufen  n>ie  febon  ge* 
melDt  t>erfeben;  unt)  aueb  4  @ommer  (nebmlic^  3  9)?onat  Die  i(^ 
liegen  Der  (SrnDte  frep  tatte)  in  ©ermantottw  ©cfcul  geilten/ 

Ott 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  47 

•  X   *5   )(  @ 

alt  baben  Me  ©cbitler  in  ©djipbacb/  wann  tcb  wieDer  nac(j  bcc 
(gcbuf  in  Ooflfort  gegangen  Briefe  mitgegeben/  wann  icf)  wieDet 
jurucf  gefommetv  fo  baben  Die  ©ollforter  (gcbuler  Dergleichen 
getban/  Die  @acbe  war  fo  eingerichtet/  Daö  Die  ©cbreiber  fo  in 
gleicbem@ewicbtflunDen  cinanDer  gefcbrieben.  <2Gar  e$  aber;  DaS 
jjernacb  einet  im  anDern  überwogen/  fo  fcbrieb  er  an  einen  anDern 
roelc&em  er  Dacbte  gleid)  ju  roerDen.  S>te  Ueberfcbrift  war  nur  Die* 
fe$:  deinen  freunDlicben  ©rug  an  *ft.  W.  SDer  Snbalt  De« 
33rief$  war  ein  f urfce$  ÜJeimgen/  oDer  ein  ©prucb  aus  Der  SSi* 
bei/  nebfl  Dem  wurDe  ttttat  Don  iljrer  ©cbuWlebung  (was  ftet>or 
einen  3)entf  fprucb  &or  Diefe  «Sßocb/  unD  wo  er  betrieben/  unD 
Dergleichen)  angeführt/  aucb  gabetman  Diefer/  jenem  in  feinem 
(Schreiben  eine  grage  auf/  welcbe  er  gern  mit  einem  (Sprucb  auS 
$.  ©cbrift  beantwortet  bdtte.  3cb  jweifle  nicbt/  wann  jwet? 
<3cbulmeitfer/(  fte  möcbten  gleicbfallö  an  einem  Ort  wobnen  oDer 
nicbt/)  icb  fage:  wann  fte  foldtje  Siebe  gegen  einanDer  batten/  unD 
wolten  aucb  gern  Siebe  unter  ibrer  3ugenD  pflanzen/  Dag,  fo  fern 
e$  in  berfcf.  2kk  $u  ®9tt,  unD  Dem  gemeinen  heften  Der  3u* 
genD  tn6  SSJercf  gerietet  wurDe/  e$  Siebe  gebdbten  würDe, 

@o  Diel  ware  in  ©tücfweig  jur  Anleitung  unD  2lnfübrung,Dte 
SugenD  Die  SBucbftaben  ju  Jemen,  unD  wie  fie  Darinnen  t>on(gtaf' 
fei  $u  ©taffei,  ibre  dritte  unD  ©cbritte  tbun  muffen/  ebe  man  fie 
SU  Dem  Qmtf  bringen  fan;  Den  man  jur  (£bre  @ötte$  unD  tljrew 
#et)l  im  2(ugenmcrcf  bat/  welcbeS  sufefct  folget 

SBaS  nun  feine  iww  grage  oDer  SSegebren  anbelangt:  nem* 
lieb/  2Bie  mit  DerfcbieDenen/  aucb  DerfcbieDene  gucbt/  unD  nacfr 
Dem  $?aag  Der  Uebertretung/  aucb  Die  ©traffe  Dermebret  oDet 
tterminDert  wirD? 

©olcbeä  wofte  Dem  greunD  julieb  Ijerfclicb  gerne  in  aBen  ©fä* 
cfen  au$  treuem  «öerßen  offenbaren:  weilen  aber.Diefeä  alleS/  tu 
nen  folgen  weiten  begriff  in  ficbbdlt/fo  weig  id)  weqen  Der  ^SScte 
Iduffigfeit  nicbt  wobl/  wo  icb  anfangen  oDer  cnDen  foH.  Sie  Ur* 
facbe  fommt  Daber/  weilen  Der  DerDorbene  guflanD  Der  3ugen& 
fi'cb  in  fo  Dielen  fingen  offenbaret/  unD  Die  Slergerniffe  DeSglei* 
djeit  mannigfaltig  ftnD/  woDurcb  Die  SugenD  geärgert  wirD  *>oti 
Denen  Die  älter  aß  fte  ftnD/ unD  weilen  &ött  felbfl  bezeuget :  1  Q$. 
€0?of-  8/  &sx.  ©ag  Daö  Did)ten  unD  tracbten  De$  menfcbficben 
•Öer^enö  fe»  bog  Don^ugenD  auf/fo  Dag  auSDiefer  unreinen  QueU 
le/  ( wo  ni#t  täglich  Dure!)  gute  Sinpflanfeungen  Daran  gearbeitet 

£>  3  nw£V 


4S       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


*   X    16   X   « 

mtrb  ba$536fe  ju  unterDnicf  en  unD  ju  Dampfen)  menig^offnung  jur 
QxfTerwrg  berauäflieffen/  DaS  33erDerben  i(]  ju  grog/  unD  meljrec 
fid)  ju  Dicfcr  3eit  nod)  tdglid)  auf  allerfjanb  Sßßeife/  Daf?  ic&  eö  fo 
gar  Da^or  anfebe/  Daß  e*  sanft  nic&t  mebr  juldnglid)  ift  autf  eige* 
nen  tfrajftcn  etmaS  ju  t>erbeffern.  2So  Der  #£rr  niefct  Dtefeö 
$auß  bilfft  bauen/  fo  merDenmoblumfonft  Daran  arbeiten  alle/  Die 
Daran  bauen.  S>ie«öanDplatfd[>/«öaße|nftraucbunl)  SBircfenftocf/ 
fint)  it>obI  Mittel  Dem  böfen  Siuöbrucb  ju  meforen/  aber  (te  finD  fei* 
ne  Mittel  Das  bog^aftige  #er§  ju  »erdnDern/  mefcfreS  unä  alle* 
fammt  »on  9?atur  nad>  Dem  Sali  in  folder  <£igenfd)afft  &dlt,  Daß 
mir  mel)r  jum  3>ofen  al$  jiim  guten  geneigt/  fo  (ang  Daö  £er§  in 
folgern  SujlanD  uimerdnDert  bleibt/  unD  nid)t  Durd)  ©OtteS 
©eift  erneuert  mirD.  3eDod);  obmobl  Der  @aameaucfrt>on3ugenb 
auf  in  Dem  9#enfcben  Dafi  er  jum  35öfen  geneigt/  fo  fönte  <#  Doc& 
fo  meit  ntcbf  in  Demfelben  jur  2luäübung  f ommen/  mann  unfer  aU 
ter  @d)aDe  reebt  erfant  unD  gefufclet  miirDe/  fo  murDen  mir  aud) 
Daftin  mit  (Srnfl  arbeiten/  Daß  Derfelbe  nidbt  nur  »on  uns  allein/ 
fonDern  aueb  fcon  unferem  9}eben*?0?enfd)en/  unt>  &on  unferer  3u* 
genb  ausgerottet  unD  öertilget  merDen  möd)te;  seilen  Djefer  alte 
©c^aDcn  unD  ©erlangen  *55i§  einerlei  ift/  fo  murDen  mir  aucb 
allefamt  Den  rechten  ^unD*2lr£t-i>or  Diefe  SOBunDen  mit  grnft 
fueben,  unD  aud)  Die  Mittel/  Die  er  unS&orfolcben  <gd>aDen  ju  ge* 
braueben  worDnef/  t>or  unö  unD  unfere  3fugenD  jum  @enefung& 
Mittel  anmenDen;  meilenmirobne  Diefe  ©ene£mittef  nid)t  jurmafj? 
ren  SXufye  fommen  fonnen/  fonDern  Den  nagenben  2ßurm/  Der 
Durd)  Diefen  ©drangen  Q5$  alljeit  Das  ©emiffen  naget/  fubleti 
iu  unferem  emigen  QSerDerben.  ©O^  tpolle  uns  allefamt  in 
©naDen  bepjlcben/ Da§  mir  Die  QJer&eifiung/  einjufommen  ju  feiner 
SJvube,  ntcbf  »erfdumen  unDunfer  feiner  Dahinten  bleibe/  2Jmen. 

2Bei(en  mie  gemelDt/  alle  porfallenbe  Gegebenheiten jumeitldufc 
tig  fallen  murDen/  fo  mill  id)  Docb  Dem  greunD  etfidje  anjeigen : 
unD  aud)  Die  Mittel  Die  ich  gegen  folebe  anjumenDen  gefugt  babe; 
mc(d)e  Mittel  aber  Den  ©d)aDen  nid)t  Reifen  fönnen.  S>m 
££rrn  aller  ££rren;  Der  alles  in  feiner  £anD  bat,  unD  um  Deffen 
»j&ülffe  unD  35e»ftanD  man  in  foleben  SdUw  Urfad)  bat  ber^lid)  ju 
bitten/  Dem  gebübret  aud)  Die  ßbre;  mann  man  fielet  unD  fpü&ret; 
Daß  ctmaö  sur  Q5ef[erung  anfcbldget. 

Srftlicb/  ift  bei)  mim  ÄinDern  Daö  fluchen  unD  fdjmiren  fo  ge^ 
mein/  melcbeö  in  fo  »iel  fc^anDbaren  Porten  fidj  auf  aüer^anD 

2lrt 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  49 

$  x  17  x  @ 

2fr£  unb  QOßetfe  Dflfenbaßree :  (So  fern  nun  Diefem  Ue6e(  unb  böfett 
©emobnbeit  ntct>t  mit  ©rnft  gewebret  n>irb,  fo  t>erfduert  folcber 
(Sauerteig  Den  ganfcen  <£eig/ al$  werDen  Diejenigen  (S*ul*£in* 
Der  fo  gerinnen  fcbulDig  befunben  werDen  erfilicb  unterfudjet/  ob  fte 
aud)  Diefeä  wrftünben  n>aö  fte  fprecben/  Da  e$  Dann  öffterä  ganfc 
f  lar  an  Den  ^ag  f ommt/  Dag  fte  e$  nicbt  fcerfteben  maö  e$  in  ftd> 
bält/  fragt  man  fte  aber/  ob  jte  Die  SEßorte  felbften  erDacbt/  oDec 
ton  jemanD  anberS  gebärt  battm?  fo  jeigt  e$  ftcb  wieber  bet>  sie* 
len  5?inbern;  Dag  ©er/  ober  Söic  fo  fagten:  gragt  man  jte  ferner: 
SGßarum  fte  Dann  folcbeS  aueb  fagten?  fo  iff  gemeiniglicb  wkbt* 
rum  Die  Antwort:  <2Beif  ©er  ober  ©ie  fo  fagten.  (So  finbet  |tcf> 
Dann  bet)  fielen  Die  Unwiffenbeit/  Dag  fte  nicbt  Riffen/  warum  jte 
eö  tbun :  (Solcben  wirb  bann  t>orge|Wt  Dag  jte  ftcb  wobl  in  Siebe 
nebmen/  unD  bergleicben  2ßorte  nicfcc  mebr  fprecben  folten;  bag  e£ 
wiber  ©OtteS  2Bort  unb  SBillen  fep;  aueb  mann  fte  3>en/  obec 
S)ie/  ton  welcben  fie  biefe  gfücbe  geboret/  nodj  mebrmafö  börett 
würben/  fo  folten  fte  t'bnen Tagen:  Sag  felbige  f)kxitmm  ftebb  op* 
pelt  serfünbtgten/  fie  fepen  Darüber  in  Der  (Scbule  in  (Straff  fom* 
men/  weifen  jtefolcbe  Slücbe  i>on  iljnen  gelernet.  Q3erfprecben  Dann 
folcbe#inberfba£  jte  Dergfeicben  SBorte  nicbt  mebr  gebrauebett 
wollen/  fo  fommen  jte  Dag  erftemal  frei);  finbt  ftcbä  aber/  bagnaefr 
Dem  fte  gewarnet  ftnb/  felbige  Dannod)  bet)  folcber  b6Un  ©ewobn* 
fteit  terbarren/  fo  werDen  folebe  nacbDem  man  Der  (Sacbe  gewig 
tft/  Dag  fte  ftcb  wieber  mit  foleben  ^Borten  öerfcbulbet/  eine  Seif* 
lang  auf  bie  (Straff*  Q3anc?  alleine  gefegt/  unb  jum  Sieben  baj? 
biefelbe  in  Der  (Straff  ftnb/  bag  3od)  am  £>a(g  tragen.  S3erfpre* 
eben  fte  bann  bag  fte  fünfftig  fürjtcbtiger  fet)n  wolten;  fo  fommen 
jte  mit  etlicben  «öanbftreicben  fret)/  fommen  fte  wegen  foteben  gfu* 
eben  wieber  auf  i)ie(Strajf*Q3ancf/  fowirbbie  (Straffe  termebret/ 
fommen  aueb  nicbt  frep  obne  Bürgen/  unb  jemebr  fte  jtcb  wrfcbuf* 
Den/  jemebr  Bürgen  fte  jMen  muffen/  ia  bann  bie  Bürgen  biefe« 
in  aebt  5U  nebmen  babett/  bag  fte  felbige  an  ibr  QJerfprecben  erin* 
nern;  fte  aueb  Dermabnen/  mit  allem  graft  forgfdltig  ju  fetm  unb 
ftcb  i>or  (Straffe  ju  büten.  SDiefeS  iff  Der  gaum  unb  ©ebig  fr 
man  ibnen  wegen  folebet  böfen  ©ewobnbeit  in  Den  S0?unb  legen 
mug/  aber  ba$  #erfj  ju  dnbern/  ba$  mug  *>on  einer  böbem  #ant> 
fommen/  unb  mit  ernjllicbem  gleben  bet>  bem  gefuebt  werben/  ber 
#erfc  unb  gieren  prüfet;  aueb  mug  ibnen;  unb  allen  (Scbülertt 
jur  Tarnung  au*  ®Qttti  Stßort  sorge  tfelt  wtiw.  2Sa$  bk* 

$4  W 


50       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

»    X     18     X    ® 

fe$  atleS  (fo  man  mutwillig  fcartnnen  verharret/  unb  biß  anign* 
De  Darinnen  befunden  wirb,)  i>or  ein  fcbwereä  ©ewicht  tat/  unb 
Dag  Die  Wenfchen  muffen  SRecbenfchafft  geben  am  jtingften@5ericht, 
Don  einem  jeglichen  unnüfcen  2ßort  Da$  fte  gereDet  haben,  ©ol* 
che  unD  Dergleichen  (Spruche  muffen  fte  auffuchen  unb  lefen;  aud> 
wirD  ifenen  ju  fernerer  Sehr  ein  £ieD  oDcr  ^falrn  ju  fingen  aufgc* 
geben,  Die  Daffelbige  gleichfalls  bejeugen. 

Ob  nun  wof)l  ^ennfotoanien  »on  Diefer  anfiecfenDen  unD  böfen 
giftigen  ©wehe/  t>or  Diefem  nicht  fo  angeftecft  gewefen  al*  Die  San* 
Der,  Die  fcbon  lange  Durct>  Den  blutigen  jfrteg  beangtfet  unD  über* 
jogen  jinD/  Da  Dann  unter  Den  rauben  unD  ungejogenen  (SolDaten 
weDer  Sucht  nod)  grbarfeit  beobad)tet  tutrD/  fonDern  ohne  einigen 
(Scheu  unD  gurcht  fcor  ©Ott  nod)  SO?enfcben  mit  <2Sorten/  ®e* 
berDen  unD  Sjercfcn  aüerhanD  böfe  @tücfe  ausüben/  n>ot)urcb  Die 
arme  unfcbulDige  3ugenD  geärgert  wirb/  unD  fluchen  unbfchwören 
fo  gemein  wirb  Daß  eö  bet;  Dielen  nicht  mehr  t)or  ©ünbe  gehalten 
wirb/  fage  bei)  fielen  2l(ten:  5)ie  arme  unfchulDige  3ugenD  lehret 
folcheö  nachfacjen,  fte  ftnb  unb  werben/  wie  un$  allen  bef annt/  in  fol* 
d)emelenben  guftanb  auf  Dtefe  2Belt  gebogen.  Da  fte  nicht  fprecben 
f  6nnen,fO/  Daß  man  fte  Deswegen  gar  nid;t  befcbulDigen  tan,  a(ö  n?an 
Diefelbcn  folche  böfc  ©geschafften  ton  fchdnDlichen  Porten  mit 
auf  Die  2Gelt  bringen^  ach  nein!  mann  fte  fprechen  lernen,  fo  ler* 
nen  fte  Die  2Borte  nachfagen  Die  fte  ju&orgehoret/  Der  33er|ianD  ift 
nicht  Da/  fte  wiffen  nicht  ob  e$  bös  oDer  gut  ift  m$  fte  nachfagen. 
UnD  weifen  note  semelDf/  Diefetf  SanD  unter  göttlichem  ©cbu$  btg^ 
J)er  t)on  3?rieg$tterheerungen  befreiet/  auch  Diele  &on  Den  erfiengin* 
bohnern  unD  Anfängern  in  Diefem  ÜanD  folche  SOlenfchen  waren, 
Die  ®Ött  Dor  Slugen  hatten  unD  in  feiner  gurcht  manDelten/  fo 
hat  man  auch  ju  Der  Seit  wenig  unter  9fung  unD  211t  Don  Dcrgfet* 
d)en  2ßorten  gehöret.  2Jber  je  mehr  fi'ch  SDJenfcljen  nach  Diefem 
JanD  begeben/ je  mehr  auch  folcher  Sßaare  mit  fommt/unbobfte 
allhier  fchon  nicht  t>or  Äauffmannö^2Baar  gültig  erfannt  tvirD/ 
fo  wirb  eö  Doch  fo  vermifchet/  Daß  fte  je  langer  je  mehr  gebrauchet 
wirb/  m  groffem  ®d)aDen  Der  nachfommenben  3ugenbf 

3roet)teng/  offenbaret  ftch  Da$  tieffe  Q3erDerben  auch  an  Der  %\ic 
genD/  Daß/  wann  fte  eine  SO?iffetljat  begangen  unD  fte  Deswegen  an* 
gefprochen  werben/  fte  folcheä  gemeiniglich  mit  £ügen  verbergen  o* 
Der  jubeefen  wollen ;  SBelchetf/  fo  ti  nicht  mit  ©rnft  an  Den  Sim 
Dem  beff  raffet  unb  folcheö@chIangen<©ijft  nicht  abgewöhnet  wirb/ 

fte 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG  51 

•   X   i?    X   * 

fie  öaburd)  ini  jettlicbe  unb  ewige  Q3erDerben  gerafften/  wegwegen 
6(tcrnunb@d;u[meitfer,  fo  fern  fit  Der  armen  ÄinDcr  ibr  #et>lunD 
©eligfeit  $u  beforDernfucben,  unt)  fid)  folcbeSmit  grnft  angelegen 
fet>n  lafienfdjulDig  fmD,DiefeS  fruljjeitig  511  verbüau  3*var  i(lt)ie^ 
je  böfe  ©ewobnbeit  febon  febr  alt/  inDem  ficf>  folcbe  gfetd>  nacbDem 
gall  an  ${Dam$  erflgebobrnen  (Sobn  Dem  Cain  an  ^ag  gegeben, 
a(ö  Derfelbe  wegen  feiner  groffen  ©iinbe  Die  er  an  feinem  frommen 
Q3ruDer  #abel  auSgeübet,  Don  &Ott  gefraget  würbe:  2Bo  ift 
bein$5ruber#abel?  fo  antwortete  er  wiDer  fein  beffer  SEßiffen 
unD  ©ewigen,  unD  fpradf):  3d)  weig  niebr,  foil  tcb  meines  Q5ru* 
DerS  -öuter  fepn.- 1  S5ud)  SOjof.  4,v.  9.  @o  Dag  man  fyierauöfe* 
fcen  fan,  Dag  ftdE>  Diefer  @cblangen*@aamen  furfc  nad)  Dem  Sali 
geoffenbabret,  unD  noc(>  tdglicb  Siebte  jum  <£oD  unD  jum  ?5er* 
Derben  bringet,  welcbeS  ©tern  unD  ©cbulmeifier  febwer  jur  03er* 
antwortung  fteben  wirD,  mnn  jte  niebt  ibre  anvertraute  ^uQmb 
DigfaüömitSrnjHavonfucben  abjubalten.  Sßie  febr  mir  Diefeäojft 
amHöerfcen  lieget,  weig  niemanD  beffer  als  id):  S)iä  bekommen* 
De  @d)üler  SieD  wirD  ttm$  Davon  an  %a&  legen»  £$  bejeuget  Der 
4>&t  3<gM  felbffen  3o&.  8,  v.  44-  bag  Der  Teufel  Der  öigen 
Q)ater  fep,  Unb  weilen  ju  Der  Seit  Die  (gcbrtfftgefefjrten  unb  tyfa 
rifder  welcbe,  ob  jte  wobl  dufferlicb  Den  @d)ein  batten  von  ©Ott* 
feügfeit,  aber  aüeS  was  fte  tbdten  niebt  in  Der  ^Da&rbeit  jur  &>** 
@ütte$  gefebabe,  fonDern  ibre  eigene  <£bre  fuebten,  fo  fd;mucften 
fie  ibre  ©acbe  mit  £ügen  gegen  Die  <2£abr&eit,  wegwegen  fteSbri* 
fhrä  wie  in  gemelDten  Q3er$  ju  feljen,  mit  fofgenben  Porten  an* 
fpridjt:  3b*  fept)  von  Dem  QSater  Dem  Teufel/  unD  nadj  eures 
<23aterg  Üutf  wollet  it)t  tbun.  Söerfelbige  Ol  tin  Sftörber  von  2to* 
fang,  unD  ift  niebt  beflanben  in  Der  SGßabrbeit:  Sbtnn  Die  2Dabr* 
beit  ift  niebt  in  t'bm.  2Benn  er  Die  £ügen  reDet,  fo  reDet  er  von  fet* 
rtem  eigenen;  Denn  er  ijlein  Sügner,  unD  ein  93ater  Derfelbigen. 
@o  lauten  be$  $©rrn  3Sfu  eigene  2Gorte.  %of)annt$  Der 
^duffer  nennet  (te  um  foleber  iöfen  ©genfcbajft  willen  ütterge* 
jücbte,  als  ju  feben  $?attb*  3,  v.  7-  Sptan  lefe  ferner  unD  betrachte 
mit  €rn(l  unb  2lnDad)t  Daö  23.  <£aj>.  50?attbdt,  fo  wirD  man  fin* 
ben,  was  Die  lügenbaffte  unD  ebrfücbtigen  Ausübungen  vor  <2Bebe 
nad)  jub  jieben*  ÖerfefcteSluSfprucb  Der  <2Bebe,  wirD  in  Dem  33  V. 
mit  folgenDen  ^Borten  auägefprocben:  %bv  ©cbfangen,  ibr  öt* 
ternge  jücbte,  rok  wollt  ibr  Der  böllifeben  vSerDammnig  entrinnen? 
©0  nun  wie  gemelDt,  fßl^e  böge  S^eifle  unD  93flan$.en  an  Der 

?5  S  Sugenb 


52       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

•  X  *o  X  • 

3ugenb  mit  ©rn|t  geDdmpffet  unD  an  ffatt  Deffen  ami  gute«  ge* 
pfianfcet/  aucb  ©Ott  berfclicfr  Darum  erfucbet  roirD/  Dag  er  jum 
pflanzen  unD  begieffen  fein  gndDigeä  ©eDcpcn  geben  foolle/  fo  t(l 
Hoffnung,  mit  Der  #ü(ffe  ©ötteä  erma^  guteä  an  Der  3ugenD 
ju  ibrem  heften  ini  2Bercf  ju  ricbten.  ©ann  Die  3ugenD  an  ficb 
felbft  iflallejeitam  meitfenjuentfcbulDtgen;  Denn  ftei|troie2Bacb$/ 
in  twlcbetf  man  allerlei;  gormen  Drucfen  fan.  Sdflfct  man  aber 
folcbe  böfe  2Burßef  au$fd)1agen  unD  umw&inDert  fort  tt>ad;fen/  fo 
n>erDen  gleichfalls  foldje  böfegrücbte  an  Denerwadjfenen  Räumen/ 
tterftelje  an  folgen  erroacbfenen  ?0jenfc&en  jum  93orfcI)ein  f cmmen, 
Die  Dem  2Belje  unD  56Utfc(>en  geuer  jugeeignet  trcrDen.  &mn  Die 
2ltt  tft  Dem  Q5aum  fc&on  an  Die  SDBurfjel  gelegt/  Dag/tt>elcbei? 
Q3aum  niebt  gute  grücbte  bringet/  ftirD  abgehauen  unD  in$  geuer 
geroorjfen.  $Jun  tft  DreSügen  tint  folcbe  grud&t/  Die  in$  geuer 
gehöret.  (Sie  itf  auclj  Der  ©cblupffroincfel  toorinnen  ftcb  DieanDe* 
ren  ©ünDen  verbergen/  Dag  man  fie  nicfrt  feben  nocfr  ftnDen  foil/ 
Damit  ein  Betrüger  feine  Betrügerei)  fort  treiben  Un,  unD  Dannocb 
ein  eljr  lieber  #?annfet>/  oDerDaöor  gehalten  fet>n  n>tB/  fofcbmücfet  er 
feine  ©aefre  mit  Jügen»  ©ag  eine  «£ure  Docf)  Die  6#re  als  eine 
Sungfrau  baben  unD  behalten  toilf/  Darju  gebraust  jte  Die  Sügen. 
©n  5)ieb/  S0?6rt>cr  unD  ©jebreeber  maebtö  eben  fo;  unD  ftanrt  niebt 
offenbare  ^eugnifie  genug  t>orIjanDen  jtnD/  twrDen  too&l  Die  @a* 
eben  mit  £ügen  fo  üerDecf t  unD  wrtbeiDiget  twrDen/  Dag  man  Dig* 
fall«  cor  Der  SOBelt  Dannod)  ein  efjrficf)er  QJlann  bleibet  SJber  roo 
niebt  in  3tit  Der  ©naben  fofdbe  ©ünDen  Dor  &ött  Durcb  tyfylU 
cbe  33u|fe  bereuet  unD  befennet  tterDen/  fo  rcirD  foleber  (gcblupffc 
ttjincfel  ntcbtö  verbergen  Hnmnr  Da$  Snbe  toirD  Die  £a(l  tragen 
muffen.  $)ann  roer  feine  $?iffetljat  leugnet/  Dem  toirDS  niebt  ge* 
Kngen :  2Ger  fte  aber  befennet  unD  lagt/  Der  tvirD  35armber£igf  eit 
erlangen.  <Sprücbn>.  (galom.  %f  t>.  13. 1  £p.  3ob.  i/ 1>.  8. 9- 

2ßaö  nun  Die  Mittel  belanget,fo(cben  üblen  Sluöbrucb  $u  ftinDem 
Dag  er  nicbtüberbartbnebme,fo  fefje  id)  jnxnv  Dag  eö  niebt  in  menfdj* 
lieben  jf  rafften  flehet  Die  SBurfcel  im  ©runD  ju  üertilgen:  ©Ott 
Allein,  Durcb  feinet  &  ©eitfeö  Ärafft  mug  Diefen  (geegen  in  un$ 
mräfübren.  3ebennocb  ift  ^reDigern  unD  QJorffe&ern/  Sftern  unö 
(Sebulmeiftern  iljre  ^fllicbt/  erfllicb  an  ibnen  felbtf,  an  i^rem^dcb^ 
flen  unD  ^eben  ^enfeben/  unD  aueb  an  Der  3ugwD  <u  arbeiten/ 
Diefen  beflecften  9iocf  DeS  gleifcbeö  niebt  nur  ju  bafietv  fonDem 
aud;  autfjujieben/  fo  ml  |ie  Durc&  ©ütteö  ©naDe  vermögen  in* 

2ßercl 


THE  SCHUL-OKDNUNG  53 

«    X    ai    X    » 

2Bercf  ju  riefen:  UnD  i(l  na*  meiner  grfdntniß  bat  erffeunb 
nörl)igffe  Mittel/  ein  berfc(idf)e$  unD  inbrtinltigeS  ©ebdt  ju  ©Ott 
um  #ulffe  unD  S35ci>ftanD ;  au*  weilen  Die  Unwiffenfjeit  unD  Dev 
Un&erflanD  no*  bei)  Der  SugenD/  Dag  fie  öa^  groffe  Q3erberbctt 
ni*t  begreifen  fonnen,  fo  itf  Don  n6tfjen  fie  erftli*  in  (>erkli*et 
Siebe  ju  erinnern:  2ßef*e  (£igenf*affren  una  ju  ©Ott  fuljren, 
unD  wel*e  un$  Don  &Ott  abführen  5  wel*e  einen  ©eru*  DeäJe* 
ben$  jum  Sieben,  unD  we(*e  einen  ©eru*  Deö  ^cDeö  jum  %oDe  in 
(icfe  baben*  <2gje  Die  guten  <£igenf*afften  torn  guten  foer,  unDau* 
wieDer  na*  Dem  guten  juflieffen,  unD  wieDer  in  ifrren  guten  Ur* 
fprung  füfjren,  unD  wie  im  ©egentfceilbaä  556fe,  urfprüngIi*fcom 
böfen  f  ommt  unD  jum  brifen  führet,  au*  lieber  ju  feinem  böfen 
Urfprung  fdbret;  unD  i>a$  Das  &nu  mit  ©utem  belohnet  werDe> 
unD  Da$  Q5öfe  mit  35öfem.  ©aß  ©Ott  bai  &ö*tfe  ®ut  unD  Der 
Urfprung  alleä  guten  fep  j  ©er  (Satan  aber,  fe#e  Der  böfe  Seinb 
woDur*  alles  böfe  geftifftet  werbe;  unD  twe  ©Ott  ein  ©Ott  Der 
2ßabrljett  Uto  alio  im  hingegen  Der  dSatan  einQ3ater  DerSügen; 
baß  man  Derowegen  Die  S&afrrljeit  lieben,  ft*  au*  mit  ©rnft  Der 
2Babrf)eit  befleißigen  müfie  mit  Sßorten  unD  SBercfen,  wann  mir 
ju  ©Ott  in  Den  Fimmel  fommen  unD  ewig  glütf feiig  fet?n  wof* 
ten,  Dann  Der  Lügner  ibr^fjeilfepe  bu  »öölle  unD  Der  feurige  *})fuljL 
<2Gann  man  fol*e  unb  Dergleichen  6rmaf)nung  mit  *nen  in$ 
Sßercf  gerietet,  fo  ift  man  au*  f*ulDig  bk  Seugnijfe  beiliget 
<S*rifft  ifcnen  bef anDf  ju  ma*en  Die  fol*e$  bejeugen.  gerner,  fo 
t)at  man  nö*ig  ibnenbiefeä  t>orjufMen,  bafa  fo  fern  fte  f  ünfftig&in 
ni*t  (Sorge  tragen  würben  ft*  »or  fol*en  böfen  (Stücfen  ju  W 
ten,  fonDern  unt>orft*tig,  oDer  wof)l  gar  mutwillig  Dergleichen 
treiben  würDen,  Daß  man  fte  Dann  bißfallä  nfct>t  Dürfte  ungefhafft 
Eingeben  (äffen,  wolte  man  anberS  feine  (Seele  erretten*  ginbtft*$ 
Denn,  Daß  na*  gegebener  SSßarnung  Dergleichen  Uebertrettung  juro 
Q)orf*ein  fommt,  Daß  folebe  offenbaljr,  unD  Der  (S*üfer  benno* 
fo(*'eä  mutwillig  leugnet,  fo  wirD  Die  (Straffe  Der  Uebertrettung 
in  jwet?  ^ei(  ge*eilet,  unD  Die  fugen  wirD  am  erften,  unD  au* 
am  Wrtften  geff  rafft,  eö  wirD  aud)  üor  eine  Jügen  hin-  SBürge  an* 
genommen,  Dor  Die  Uebertrettung  na*  Dem  fte  ift,  wirb  Do*  bie 
©träfe  bur*3$ürgf*afft  geminbert,  ober  ofjne  Burgen  auf  93er* 
fpre*en  ft*  Fünftig  in  afyt  ju  nehmen  gar  gef*encfet,  au*  wer* 
Den  nafy  gefcbef)ener  (Straffe,  Die  geDroljete  (Straffen  über  fo(*e 
€0?iffet&at  in  Eiliger  ©grifft  wieberfeolet. 


54       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 
#     X     M     X     & 

55a£  ©tebfenmill  ftd^  aucl>  frü&jcifig  bei)  blieben  5?inbern  offen* 
barren,  unD  tvann  fte  in  foldjer  tyat  ergriffen/  fo  tvollcn  fte  fiel)  aud) 
gemeiniglich  Der  Siigen  beDienen,  geben  t>ot,  biefeS  ober  jenctf  babe 
t$  ibnen  gegeben  oDer  Dcrtaufcbcf/  oDer  fie  f>cittenö  gefunden :  UnD 
tiefet  mirb  offtmablS  fo  öermirrt  burej)  einander  wrDrcbet/  Da§ 
man  genug  ju  tbun  finbet  foldjrt  mieber  ju  red)t  ju  bringen.  2IW 
babe  DiefeS  ju  verböten  fold;e  QSerorbnung  gejMo  &a(5  fein  £int> 
in  Der  @d;ul/  aud)  auf  Dem  2Beg  ober  ju  #auß/Obne  Q}ormiffen 
mein/  unb  ibrer  ©tern  etmaS  Derfcbencfen  ober  wrtaufeben  foil/ 
aud)  ftann  fie  etmaS  in  ber  ©c&uf/  ober  auf  bem  SCBeg/  ober  mo 
ti  fepn  mag  finben  mürben/  fo  folten  |]e  e«  mir  anjeigen :  25ann 
tvaö  fie  funben,  t*a&  gef)6re  ibnen  nod)  nid>tüor  eigentbümlicb  }u; 
fonbern  bent/  ber  etfuerlobren;  mann  fid)  aber  nicmanD  fin\)ctfnacl)4 
Dem  e$  eine  3<^  fang  befant  gemad)t  morben  je?/  altfbann  gebö* 
ret  e$  bent/  ber  ci  gefunben*  S)urdb  biefeS  Mittel  fyabi  eö  bod) 
©Ott  (ob  itabin  gebracht/  i>a$  Digfaüö  menig  ju  beftrajfen  »or* 
fommt. 

Sie  eigene  S&rfucbt  betreffend  fo  offenbaret  ftcfr  foldjeS  aud> 
bet)  iKti  Äinbern,  fte  tfl  aberbod)  niebt  ju  Dergleichen  in  ber9)?aa£/ 
mie  fte  ftcb  bei)  bm  ermaebfenen  unb  alten  offenbaret/  ta  offterä 
um  eine  bfoffe  SbrenfMeunb  %ituf/  t>iel5?rieg  unbOMutüergieffen 
angeriebtet  mirb/  niebt  nur  unter  bofjen  ©ranbeä  *JJerfonen/  fon* 
Dem  aueb  unter  Sfttenfcben  &om  geringen  &tani>,  c6  erbebet  fid) 
efft  btgfallö  groffer  (Streit/  ja  nur  bat  einfeige  2Görtletn  Söu, 
bringt  offtmabte  (Streit/  aud)  mobl  gar  @d;(äg  barju:  2iber 
unter  Äinbern  ifi  biefem  Uebel  Diel  (eiebter  ju  (teuren :  ginbet  fid) 
ein  5Cinb;  melcbeS  bk  öberfielle  beftgen  mill/  unb  feinen  bcfjörigen 
ort  Derldffet/  unb  ftd)  mit  ©emalt  einbringen  mill  baö  obertfe  511 
fei)ii/  obne  einiget  9?ed;t  barju  mcber  im  fd)reiben/  lefen  u.  b.  g. 
fo  mirb  eä  anbern  jur  2Barnung  gang  untm  an  gefegt/  biß  e$ 
bureb  feinen  gleiß  mieber  an  ben  Ort  fommf/  ben  zi  öerDienet; 
mann  bie  ÄinDer  biefeS  einmabl  miffen/  fo  ift  ber  (gacbe  febonge* 
bolffen.  2Ber  mill  aber  bie  2Kten  fo  meit  berunter  bringen  mie  Die 
ÄinDcr/  mann  fte  ftcbnad)  GbriffrSebr  niebt  felbfl  erniebrigenmof* 
(en?  Sjjjaüffe.  zo/t).  26.27.  c.  23/ 1).  i2.£uc.  14/ 1>.  u.c.18/  H- 

€0?it  ber  5? tnber  ibren  ©treif&dnöeln  ifl  eö  gleicbfaüö  fO/  fte  jlnD 
oud)  Diel  beffer  jur  Bereinigung  ju  bringen  alt  Die  2llten.  2Bann 
bie  Äinber  unter  einanber  in  UnjufrieDen^eit  fommen/  eö  fei;  in  ber 
(Scbulober  auf  bem  2Ceg;  unb  1$  mirb  unterfud)t/  unb  befunben/ 
Daß  in  ber  ©ad)  auf  bei;ben  ©eiten  gefeblrt/  u«b  eineö  fo  mobl  in 

©c{)ul& 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG  55 

•    X    *3    X    * 

(gcbulD  fct>  alt  Da$  anDere,  fo  notrb  ibnen  tfcre  UeBerfreffung  auf 

bet;Den  ©eiten,  unD  aucb  Die  Deswegen  üerDientc  ©traffe  sorgeftellt 
tinD  einem  je&en  Die  feine  juerfanDt,  fo  fern  ffe  fidf)  niebt  wieDermit 
einanDer  in  Der  @üte  vertragen,  hierauf  wirD  ibnen  angefagt:  ©o 
fern  fie  niebt  geneigt  waren  ftcb  mit  einanDer  ju  wrfobnen,  fo  foU 
ten  fte  ftcb  fogleicb  Don  Den  anDern  ©cbufern  abfonDem,  unDfolan^ 
neben  einanDer  auf  Der  ©traff*  SSancf  fi^en/  btg  fte  fid)  mit  einan* 
öer  vertragen,  wo  nicbt,  fo  würDe  Die  Digfalfö  »erDiente  ©traffe 
folgen,  aber  e$  f  ommt  feiten  Darju  Dag  fte  ftcb  abfonDern,  unD  auf 
Die  ©tra)T*Q3ancf  fommen:  ©ie  reichen  lieber  einanDer  Die #anD, 
unD  Damit  tft  Die  ©acb  aufgehoben,  unD  Der  ^örcceg  bat  ein  <£nD. 
©efebäbe  btefeö  fo  feiebt  unter  Den  2llten,  unD  ware  aucb  fo  balD 
»ergeben  unD  aergeflfen  wie  bet;  Den  ÄinDern,  fo  würDe 

Surcb  proceffen  Der  Q5eutel  nicbt  teer 

2)em  2lDt>ocaten  Der  Q$eutel  nicbt  febwer* 
SDa$  nagenD  ©ewiffen  fäm  aucb  jur  3vuf>; 
€iebe  unD  SrieD  fam  aucb  Daju; 

&  brachte  nicbt  fo  i>ie(  gequdl 

Q3or  &tb  unD  ©eel. 

€S  tDtrb  ferner  an  mieb  begehret,  nad)  3nbaft  femeö  ©ebreföen« 
einen  SSericbt  ju  tbun,  nebmlid):  3)urcb  tt>efc&e  Mittel  icb  Die 
jftinDer  t)om  ©cbwdgen  ab;  unD  jur  ©tide  bringen  fan. 

«hierauf  antworte:  S)a§  fofcbeö  Denen  ÄinDern  Die  fcbwerefle 
Section  iji,  tDelc&e  fte  febwerlicb  au$  freiem  Tillen  lernen  wollen. 
&  wdbfet  lang  bi$  fie  fpreeben  lernen,  unD  mann  fte  e$  einmal 
f önnen,  fo  wollen  jte  (tcb  ntcl>t  (eiebt  Dat)on  abgalten  (äffen.  2GBei* 
len  man  aber  unter  Den  ÄinDern  in  Der  ©ebul  niebtä  orDentlicbe* 
erbauen  noeb  jur  SSefferung  pflanzen  fan,  e$  fet)  Dann,  Da§  Da* 
DveDen  feine  &it,  unD  aucb  oa$  ©Zweigen  feine  Seit  haben  mug, 
unD  aber  folebe  örDnung  fo  febwer  bet)  Den  ÄinDern  fallt  ftcb  Da* 
rein  febiefen  ju  lernen;  unD  e$  febeinet,  wir  2llten  Umn  Diefe  £ecti* 
on  felbfl  noeb  niebt  reebt  fertig  gelernet,  baß  reDen  unD  febweigen 
feine  Seit  bat,  Die  wir  un$  offt  beffer  in  aebt  neunten  (ölten  in  re* 
Den  unD  febweigen;  aucb  laffet  ftcb  Da$  fleine  ©lieD  Die  gunge  fo 
(eiebt  nicbt  jdbmen,  man  fan  eö  aucb  niebt  mit  Der  fKutben  juebti* 
gen  xok  Die  anDern  ©lieDer  am  £eibe;unD  Die  SDJiffetbaten  Die  mit 
SEGorten  gefdjeben,  werDen  Durcb  Die  gunge  serriebtet,  nacb  3n* 
fcalt  unD  innerlicber  Q3efcbaffenbeit  De$#er$en$  W/latty.  izrV.25. 
Ob  nun  wobl  bet)  Denen  if  inoem  Daö  reDen  unD  fpreeben  welcbeS 


56       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

•    X     *4     X    • 

fte  unfercinanber  treiben/  bet;  Dielen  niebtauäfobifem  Q3örne5nKn 
entfielet/  fo  fan  man  Dod;  niebtö  frucbtbarlid;e$  auflebten/  oDcr 
ti  muß  wie  gcmelDt/  reDen  unt)  febroeigen  feine  3*it  faben.  Um 
fte  nun  Darju  ju  bringen/  fjabofefron  garüiel  Riffel  unD2ßege  an 
ibnen  probieret/  roeld)c  jroar  eine  Seit  fang  gut  Qttban,  tvann  e$ 
aber  jur  ©ewobnbeit  korben/  fo  babe  tvieDer  tt\x>a$  anDerS  in$ 
Sßercf  gerietet  fi e  Da&urcb  in  (Stille  $u  bringen :  ?0?eine  OrDnung 
unt)  2ßeife  ttomit  icb  fiebifjljer  jur  (Stille  gebracht/  tgDiefe : 

©rglid)/  tvann  ibnen  ibre  Section  aufgegeben  ig/  fo  lernen  fte 
Diefelbe  nad)  baggern,  rcieaucbnad)  gngellanDS  35raud;  unt)  ©e* 
rcobnbeit  mit  lauter  (Stimme/  um  jte  Dann  fdmtlid)  ant  lernen  ju 
batten/  gebe  icf)  in  Der  (ScbulebmunD  fao  bjgid)  Dentfe  fte  baben 
geit  genug  gebabt  ibre  action  ju  lernen :  SlleDann  tbue  icf)  einen 
©treid)  mit  Der  Diutbe  an  Die  9?oten  blancf  oDer  %a\tl,  fo  igö 
mit  einmabl  ftitt/  Dann  fangt  Der  erge  an  aufoufagen:  SlItfDatm 
mug  einer  alä 'SBdcbter  (n>ekf)er  Daju  tterorDnet  roirD)  auf  eine 
Q3anc£  oDer  fonfl  erhabenen  Ort  geben  in  Der  ©cfjul/  Da^  er  fte  aU 
le  überfeben  fan,  Diefer  muß  alle  mit  Q3or*unD  3unamen  anjeigeti/unö 
nad;Dem  er  fte  angezeigt/  aud;  auffebreiben  Die  Da  plauDern  oDer 
laut  lernen/ .oDer  fonfl  tttvat  treiben  Daö  wrbottenig.  teilen  a* 
ber  befunDeti/  Daß/  wann  man  fte  nad)  Der  3vet)be  juSGddjterti 
braueben  trill  einige  nad;  ©unfl  oDer  Ungung  anjeigen/  alö  wer* 
Den  Diejenigen  abgeftelt  Die  bierinnen  untreu  erfunDen  tvorDen/  unD 
fommen  aueb  fünffrig  niebt  mebr  an  Diefe  ©teile/  eä  fei;  Dann/  Dag 
fle  ftcb  felbg  anmelDen  unDöerfpredjenfunfftig  treue  Slufftcbt  juba* 
ben;  Deögleicben/  wann  einer  twgen  Üügen  auf  Die  (Strafbancf 
f  omt/  fo  tvirD  foleber  aud)  niebt  jum2ßdd)ter  gegellt,eä  rodre  fcan  Dag 
er  fiel)  eine  geraume  3eitwob(t>erbaiten/  Daf?manDergleid)ennid)t$ 
an  ibmgefpübret:  £Bann  Dann  Die  (Scbul  mit  einem  freuen  'IGdcb* 
ter  beflcüt  tg/forcirDeogill/  baß  man  fic  fan2Juffagen  laffen;aud) 
fonfl  em>aö  erbauliebeö  mit  ibnen  uornebmen/  nad;  tterrid;tetem  2luf* 
fagen  (lebet  eä  fo;  toill  man  eä  Darbet;  lagen  fowrgigt  manS/tvann 
aber  folcfoefl  eflicbemabl  gefd;ebeti/  unDüerfpübrttDirD/ Dag  fte  eö  gea- 
ring ad;ten;  fo  muffen  Diejenigen  fo  Der<2Gdcbter  angejeigt  beraub 
iretten  unD  nad;  Der  9{et;be  auf  Die  (Straff *  Q5ancf  gfcen/  lantt 
n>irD  ibnen  Die  2Gabl  gegeben/  ob  gelieber  eineä  nad)  DemanDertt 
Daä  3o4  am  $a(g  tragen/  oDer  lieber  £anDgreid)  baben  wollen, 
aber  {k  errodbfen  feiten  Daä  3od)/  fonDcrn  greefen  gemeiniglid) 
tie  £anD  auö  nad;  Der  Dvutbe, 

2>iefe* 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG  57 

•  X    *r    X  • 

3)iefe$  ifl  auf  fein  SBegcbrcn  Die  9?acbricbt  n>ic  ic5>  ftc  t>om  fc^ttJcU 

%m  jur  (Stille  bringen  fan,  e$  bat  aber  bei)  mir  Die  $Ö?ei)nun<} 
ganfe  unD  gar  ntdbt/  Daß  tcb  permit  jemanD  anDerS  eine  Svegul 
t)orfdE>rcibcn  rooltC/  tt>ornac&  er  ftdt>  rcgulircn  folte :  2lcb  nein !  eämag 
Dißfalß  ein  jeDer  in  feiner  #außbaltung  tfcun,  unD  Diefelbige  fub* 
ren;  wie  er  eö  am  beftent)or@üft  unD  9)?enfd)en  ju  fcerantrcorten 
geDencf et.  ©ölte  mir  aber  meine  bißber  geführte  ©ebul  <  Uebung 
Die  icb  l)ier  auf  SSegebren,  unD  niebt  au$  eigenem  triebe  befd;rie* 
ben  babe;  Darinnen  t>cr  unregelmäßig  angenommen  werten/  mi* 
len  fie  in  wrfcbieDenen  Singen  gegen  Die  gewöbnlicbe  Übung  in 
^eutfcbfanD  unD  anDern  Qxtm  ift,  Denen  gebe  fo  t>tcf  jur  Sttacb* 
riebt:  Saß  e$  in  bigger  93rot>ini§  unter  Den  freien  ©nroobnem 
in  ^ennfotoanien,  aueb  gleicbfaltö  in  wrfcbieDenen  Singen  unter* 
fcbieDen  ift,  roaS  Die  ©cbul  betrifft :  Sann  roelcbem  Der  (ScbulDien|l 
Durcb  Die  bobe  öbrigfeit  beftdttiget  ift  in  <£eutfcblanD,  unD  i&m 
Der  @cbulftubl  wftgefeßet,  Den  fan  Der  gemeine  $?ann  niebt  feiebt 
wrfe^en,  Daber  e$  aueb  niebt  fo  leicbt  mit  ibnen  in  ©efabr  ftebeC 
joor  Sftenfcben,  wann  fie  febon  ttwtö  ju  febarff  geben  mit  Der  3u* 
genD.  3eDocb  beFenne  fret),  ob  id;  febon  auf  gemelDte  f>of>e  QSer* 
orDnung  beftdttiget  wäre,  fo  mdre  e$  Docb  in  'Sßabrbeit  in  folebe* 
^efebaffenbeit  Damit,  Daß,  ob  man  roobl  Die  SOJacbt  t)0n  @ötc 
unD  bober  öbrigfeit  batteDie  ©ebdrffe  ju  gebraud;en,  fo  ift  fie 
Docb  nur  jur  35efferung  gegeben,  unD  niebt  jumQSerDerben.  9?un 
bringet  e$  Die  grfabrung  bepm  ©cbulbalten,  Daß  ein  $inD  mU 
cbeä  bloDe  ift,  folebetf,  wann  e$  mit  ©ebdrffe,  e$  fep  in  Sßorteit 
oDer  mit  fcbarjfer  3udbt*9iutben  beftrafft  rcorDen,  Daß  Daffefbige 
5?inD  DaDurcbmebr  folte  t>erDorben  als  gebelfert  werDen;  foü  nun 
ttmt  an  folgern  ÄinD  fcerbeffert  tterDen  fo  muß  es  Durcb  anDere 
Mittel  gefebeben.  SeSgfeicben,  ein  ÄinD  Das  Dumm  ift,  wirD 
DurcbS  fcblagen  mehr  DerDorben  als  gebelfert.  <£tn  ÄtnD,  Das  ju 
*Öauß  ju  tn'ef  mit  ©d)fdgen  tractirt  rcirD  unD  Derfelben  gewobnt 
ift,  folcfyeS  roirD  in  Der  ©ebul  niebt  mit  @d)ldgen  ju  reebt  gebracht/ 
fonDern  noeb  mebr  fcerDorben.  @oll  nun  foleben  ÄinDem  ctroai 
jur  Q5efferung  gereieben,  fo  muß  es  Durcb  anDere  50?ittel  gefebeben. 
«äßaS  bartndefige  ÄinDer  ftnD,  Die  DaS  33öfeju  treiben  feinen 
©cbeu  tragen,  folebe  muffen  mit  febarffer  gud;t*9vutben  beimgc* 
fuebt,  unD  Darneben  aueb  mit  ernfter  (grmabnung  aus  ®Om$ 
<2Bort  angefproeben  werDen,  ob  man  DaDurcb  ctvoa  DaS  $er£  tref* 
fen  möebte.   2lber  Die  btöDen  unD  Dummen  im  lernen,  muffen  Durcf) 

anDere 


58       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


m  x  *«  )(  $ 

anbere  Mittel  gebelfert  werDen/  woDurcb  felbige  fo  Did  m6glid> 
freimütiger  gemacht/  unD  fiebieSuft  fefbflen  jum  fernen  antreibt» 
SBann  e$  Dann  mit  Den  ÄmDern  forfeit  fommt/Dann  fallt  it  Den 
Wintern  unD  Dem  ©cbulmeifier  nic&t  meftr  febwer/  Dann  mann  a(* 
le  Diejenigen;  Die  mit  mir  in  folgern  Q3erujf  flehen  reebt  erwägen, 
trie  treuer  fokbe  junge  (Seelen  in  Den  Siugen  ®Ottti  ftnD/  unD 
Dag  wir  aud)  Degwegen  t)on  unferem  #augbalten  werDen  9ved> 
nung  tbun  muffen/  fage  folebe:  ob  jie  wobl  Die  S9?ad;t  baben  ju 
flraffen/  fo  werben  fic  beeb  mit  mir  Diel  lieber  Daf)in  arbeiten/  Dag 
e$  mit  Der  3u8*nb  in  Den  3ufianD  f  ommen  mochte/  Dag  fie  DaSje* 
tiige  aut  freiwilliger  Siebe  tbun/  worju  man  jie  fonflen  mit  Der 
?Xut(>en  antreiben  mug/>ann  bat  2Gort  SDu  folt  unD  muft/  unD 
Da$  <20ort  3d)  folg  mit  Suft/  führet  ntefet  einerlei  tyon,  auf  Den 
legten  JUang  braucht  Der  ©djulmeijter  feine  3iutlje/  unD  ifl  lieb* 
lieber  ju  boren  unD  (eiebter  ju  verantworten.  ty[  i  ro,  t).  3.  fiebert 
alfo:  Wad)  Deinem  ©teg  wirb  Dir  Dein  33o(cf  williglici)  opffern 
im  ^eiligen  ©ebmuef.  <2Baö  nun  in  leiblichen  unDgei|](id;en  Ö3er* 
riebtungen  willig  gefebiebr,  Da$u  fyat  man  feinen  S^ang  nod^rei* 
ber  nötbig.  gerner  fa&et  *Pf-  32/D-  8.  9.  alfo;  3d)  will  Diel)  un* 
ferweifen/  unD  Dir  Den  2ßeg  jeigen/  Den  Du  wanDeln  folt:  3d) tvill 
Did;  mit  meinen  2lugen  leiten,  ©ei)D  nid;t  wie  DJog  unD  Wduler/ 
bie  nid)t  DerftdnDig  ftnD :  SGelcöen  man  gaum  unD  ©ebig  mug 
inö  ?0?aul  legen/  wann  fie  niebt  ju  Dir  wollen.  #ier  ift  abermabl 
ju  erfrben/  Dag  Diejenigen  Die  ftcb  unterweifen/  unD  mit  Den  Siugen 
leiten  (äffen/ Die  ^aben  foleben  Qaum  unDÖebig  nicbtnötbig.  Wan 
ftebet  foldjen  UnterfcbeiD  an  Den  unüemunfftigen  gieren:  3)er  ei* 
m  gubrmann  braud)t  nid)t  tot  balbe  f>artc  juruffen/  geiffeln  unD 
fcblagen  an  feinen  ^3ferDen;  alt  ein  anDerer  tbut;  unD  fübret  Docb 
eben  fo  febroer,  ja  juweilen  febwerer  über  Q3erg  unD  ^bal/  fo  wobt 
alt  Der  anDere:  UnD  nad)  t)errid)teter  Slrbeit/  babenä  Die  willigen 
<})fcrDe  unD  aud)  Der  gubrmann  am  feiebteften  gebabt;  Die  ^ferDe 
baben  Die  @d)ldge  am  wenigen  gefüblet/  unD  Der  guljrmann  batä 
nicht  notbig  gebabt  fte  mitftrenger  ©traffe  511  tractieren/  fic  baben 
iDiüig  getban/  rr>at  anDere  Durd)  Die  ©ebdrffe  baben  tbun  muffen. 

<2ßa$  nun  ferner  Don  mir  begebret  wirD  an  Den  greunD  ju  be* 
rid)ten/  nebmüd):  2ßie  icbDie  ÄinDer  in  Siebe  ttactiere/ Dag  fte 
tnieb  lieb  baben;  unD  aud)  fürd)ten. 

hierauf  antworte  fo  Diel:  55ag  f c^ mir  mt  Diefer  *}3untffen  in 
ftcb  bält/fage.  Dag  id)  mir  Digfaltf  im  geringen  niü)ti  ju  eignen 

fan. 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG  59 

m    )(    *5    X    & 

tan:  3d)  \)0\ttii  w»  erne  ganfc  um>erbtente@na&e  son  ©Off/ 
fo  gerinnen  etwas  fruc&tbarlicbeS  jttifc&en  mir  unb  Der  3ugen& 
(eö  fei)  im  fernen/  unb  aud)  in  einigen  Uebungen  $ur  ©ottfelig* 
fett)  auögcübet  tt>tvt>-  grfllid)  Ijabe  i$  es  bem  lieben  ©Ott 
fccrfclicjj  ju  Dancfen;  öa^  naeftbem  id)  ju  folgern  55eru|f  fconibw 
DcrorDnet  bin  worben/  er  mir  aud)  Die  ©nabe  mitgetbeilet  bat? 
bafnd)  tint  fonberlid;e  Siebe  ju  Der  3ugenb  babe;  bann  n>dve 
biefe  Hebt  nifyu  fo  tt>dre  es  eine  unerträgliche  Saft  unter  folget 
SugenD/  aber  bie  Siebe  trdgf/  unb  wirb  nidjt  mube*  #ittt  eine 
natürliche  Butter  feine  Siebe  ju  tfjreir  5?inbern/  ba^  Äinber  jie* 
l>en/  voai  tint  Butter  von  bcr@eburt  an/ burd)  allerfjanb  Sufäf* 
te  an  ihrem  Äinb  ausüben  mu§/  fette  eine  unerträgliche  *af? 
fet)n/  aber  bie  Hebt,  weldje  (it  ju  tyren  Äinbern  traget;  macfjeC 
biefe  £a(l  leidet/  wann  ber  SJpofW  Paulus  feine  Siebe  gegen  i*ic 
©emeine  ju  ^befiafontc^  reebt  an  ^ag  geben  will/  fo  brücfter* 
mit  folgenben  QBbrten  auS/ 1  ^Ijeff.  */  t>,  r.  bis  ju  Snbe  be£ 
13 ten  23erfeS.  3m  7.  unb  8  ten  &erS  mgleidjt  er  feine  Siebe 
einer  Mutterliebe,  wann  er  fpriebt:  ©letcOwie  eine  Simme  ifyrer 
Äinber  pfleget/  alfo  Ratten  wir  #er£enS  Sufl  an  eud)/  unb  wa* 
ren  willig  eud)  mitjutbeilen/  nfc^t  allein  baS  &>angelium  ®Öt* 
tt$,  fonbern  auef)  unfer  Seben  5  batum;  Da£  tt)ir  eud)  lieb  babett 
gewonnen.  Qfttin  werter  greunb.  SDiefe  SBorte  beS  2lpofM£ 
brücfen  eine  folebe  Siebe  aus,  bie  nidjt  nurmtßis  war  basgwms 
gelium./  fonbern  aud)  baS  Seben  mitsutfjeilent  Slber  itf  es  wofrl 
bet)  allen  ^rebigern  in  ber  fogenanten  (£I)riftenf)eit,  t)0n  ber  2(po* 
fiel/  big  auf  biefe  Reiten/  fo  in  bcS  2lpojWS  ©eiß  in  berfclidfw: 
Siebe/  unb  m  folgern  (gtanbe  geblieben  ?  <£s  labert  ja  alle  art 
ben  twgemelbten  SBorten  beS  2lpofWS  ein  furtreftlid)  QSorbilt) 
gehabt:  3a  er  ruffet  uns  allen  $u,  unb  fprtc^t :  Solget  mir/  (ie* 
ben  trüber,  unb  fefret  auf  bie/  bie  alfo  wanbeln/  wie  ibr  un$ 
fcabt  jum  93orbilbe.  tytylip.  3,  *>♦  17.  2Bie  es  aber  ju  ber  21* 
poftel  Seit  geRanben/  unb  wit  e*  auf  gegenwärtige  Seit  in  betr 
fo  genanten  (ifjriftenbeit  ftebet,  fonnen  bie  am  bellen  einfcljen^ 
Denen  bie  21'ugen  beS  ©eijles  eröffnet  jmb.  3*  will  eS  babet) 
(äffen/  unb  meinen  ©inn  bent  greunb  auf  fein  SSegefjren  fjier* 
mit  an  ^ag  geben/  id)  jweifie  niebt;  bergreunbf)at  gute  Sibftd)* 
ten  ber  3ugenb  jum  heften,  ©efe^t  nun/  eS  wäre  eine  natura 
lic^e  Mutter/  pit  g(eid)fall3  fol^e  Slbpc^ten,  wegen  iljrer  gefübr* 
ten  Siebet  3u^t  wit  i&ren  Äinbern  ^ätte/  fo/  Dap  fie  folcbeS 

£  öerne 


60       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

«   )(    *«   X    $ 

gerne  fchrifftKch  fcerfaffen  n>o(tC/  n>ie  fie  il>rc  $inber  erjogen/  bar« 
mit  nach  ihrem  Slbfterben  Die  SBaage  in  gleichem  2(uSfcblag  bleu 
ben  möchte :  SDie  ßinber  aber  befdmen  nach  ihrer  Gutter  abtfer* 
ben  eine  anbere  SDJutter*  Die  würbe  gar  leidet  $u  ben  Äin&ern  fa* 
gen :  (Sure  vorige  Gutter  I>at  euch  nach  ibrem  @fnn  gejogen, 
id;  obeiv  tvcrDe  euch  nach  meinem  ©inn  jiefjen  unb  regieren.  Unb 
bann  fönte  bas  wenig  belften/  was  bic  vorige  Butter  aus  lauter 
Siebe  ju  Dcrßinber  ibrem  heften  inö<335crcF gerichtet :  Sebocbbie 
©lufter  Ijat  baS  il)re  gctf)an,  gleichwie  ber  2Jpo|W  Das  feine/  mit 
Den  QGBorten :  folget  mir/  lieben  55rüDer#  unbfehet  auf  bie/ bie 
olfo  wanbeln/Wie  ihr  uns  habt  jum  Q}otbilbe.  S5ie  nun  nach  3n* 
l>a(t  gcmelbtcn  i7ten  ö.  nicht  folgen  wollen/  fonDern  lieber  bem 
©egentbeil  folgen/  wie  ber  ig.  unb  x?.  t>.  anjeiget;  welches  ber 
2(po|M  fchon  bajumafyl  mit  weinen  fagte/  folche  folgen  ihrem 
(Sinn.  3>eboch  Ijatte  ber  SipojW  Das  feine  getfyan/  unb  feine 
(Seele  errettet* 

Seh  habe  xt>k  gemclbt/  bem  SreunD  auf  fein  begehren/  nem* 
lieh:  2ßie  ich  bie  Äinber  mit  Siebe  tract tere/ Daß  fic  miefr  lieb  ba* 
ben  unb  auch  fürchten/  ju  erfennen  gegeben;  baß  ich  mirfelbft 
DiftfaUS  nichts  sueignen  fan.  ©ie  Siebe  itf  eine  göttliche  Söür* 
cfung/  nachbem  man  fi'e  begehrt/  unb  Don  -gerben  Darnach  (hebet* 
fan  man  berfelben  burch  ©ötteS  ©nabe  tbeilhafftig  werben* 
nac^Dem  man  fic  bewahrt  unb  gebraucht/  fan  fie  wminbert  ober 
vermehret  werben.  3ebocb  fan  man  wohl  fo  Diel  Nachricht  ge* 
ben*.S)urch  welche  ©geschafften  man  förberlich  ober  hinberlich* 
93ortheil  ober  Q3er(uft  höben  fan*  an  ber  Siebe.  2)ie  göttlichen 
gu£ftapffen/  wann  man  ber  rechten  Siebe  nach  frühen  will/  bie 
bejeugenS/  btö  feine  Siebe  allgemein  fei)/  unb  ftch  an  alle  ©efeböpf* 
fe  mittheilet/  er  läffet  feine  (Sonne  aufgehen  über  Sßöfe  unb@u* 
te/  unb  (äffet  regnen  über  ©erechte  unb  Ungerechte:  @o  fern  nun 
Der  $?enfcb  ber  Siebe  ©ötteS  will  theilbafttig  werben/  unb  i>a* 
rinnen  wachfen  unb  junebmen/  fomufm  folgen  Sugflapffen  nach* 
folgen ;  t)k  werben  ihn  in  ber  Siebe  leiten  unb  führen/  t>on  einer 
tiebe  jur  unb  in  bie  anbere;  burch  Betrachtung  ber  ©efehöpffe* 
imb  Erhaltung  berfelben* 

2)aS  groffe  QCercf  ber  Siebe  in  Crlöfung  beS  menfd)ficfjen  @e* 
fchlechtS/  ift  auch  ins  allgemeine  gefchehen/  wäre  eS  auch  ins  all* 
gemeine  t)on  uns  $0?enfd)enfinDern  angenommen/  geglaubet/  un& 
in  ber  Siebe  benen  SufltoPffw  W$  natygetvanbelt/  fo  würben 

wir 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  61 

®     X     *7     K     • 

nrir  aud)  burd)  Die  Siebe  <Sf>rifti  t>cft  gegrunbrt  nwbert/  oaf  n>ir 
aud)  mit  alien  ^eiftgen  begreiffen  fdnten;  Celebes  Da  fet>  Die 
SSreite/  unD  i>k  Sdnge;  t>te  ^ieffe  unö  Die  #öbe;  folder  unenDli* 
#en  Siebe;  unD  rcürDen  aud?  erfennen  unD  erfabren,  baß  <£bri* 
(tum  lieb  l>aben  beffer  fei>/  Denn  alles  roiffem  (Sf>nflt  gupflapffctt 
ju  folgen;  jmD  alle  (£briften  berufen/  unb  folgern  ju  folgen  in 
Der  Siebe;  Ijat  er  uns  ein  ÖSorbifD  gelaffen.  i  tytt.  if  t>-  %u  3fo!j. 
13,  ö.  13. 14.  if* 16.  17.  unD  anDerer  Orten  mebr. 

©0  tt>ir  nun  im  ©egentbeil  una  ju  Dem  allen  befennen;  folgen 
aber  Denen  gugftapffen  Der  2Belt/  in  2fugen*Sufi;  3leifcbeS*Suft 
unD  l)6jfdrtigen  Seben;  fo  twDen  mit  twnig  SOacbStfcum  in  Der 
Siebe  ®ötu$  ju  fjojfen  J)aben;  e$  fet?  trer  es  trolle;  er  fei?  aud) 
&on  aujfen  betitult  tvieer  trolle;  unD  rcanneraucfr  Den  2lllerd)rifc 
li#en  ^itul  »or  Der  <2£elt  b&ttz.  S)ann  fo  /emanD  Die  2Be(t 
lieb  f>at/  in  Dem  tfi  niebt  Die  Siebe  DeS  SJaterS.  1  $ob.  */*>•  ij* 

SDiefe  <2Belt*  Siebe  ift  nicfyt  rein, 

©ie  füfjrt  aud)  niebt  ins  Sllfgemem, 
©ie  führet  nur  ins  $?ein,  unD  ©ein. 
©0  fang  Das  %J}tit\f  unD  Sein  geehrt; 

©0  lang  bleibt  Diefe  Sieb  betväbtt 

Äommts  ©gen*  Sieb,  unD  ©>r  ju  nafv 
©0  ijt  gleid)  Ärieg,  unD  2lufrubr  Da» 
55er  natürliche  Sicbesfuncfen,  roelcpen  @Ött  nad)  Dem  gattm'djt 
ganfc  erföfeben  laßen,  fonbern  ftcb  in  wnünfftigen,  unD  um>er* 
nünpgen  <£reatuven;  nad>  iljrer  Sftatur  unD  ©genfc&aflFt  fc6en 
unD  fpübren  (dft,  folder  toirb  aud)  burd)  bie  unorbentlidje  <2Belfc 
Siebe,  in  tiefen  SDingen  gefd&>n>dc^e  unD  untetDrücf  t*  3>d)  n>iü  nur 
anfübren,  Die  ratürfiebe  Siebe  unter  natürlichen  ?Dlenfd)en :  Söt'e 
Durcb  Diefen  SiebeSfuncfen  in  ibren  bergen  entjünDet  toerbert/  fic^ 
ebelicb  mit  einanDer  ju  üerbinDen,  foldje;  fo  lange  Diefer  natürliche 
Siebesfuntfen  jtvifeben  bepben  @beleuten  Die  OberbanD  behalt, 
fo  mirD  fold)e  Siebe  nt'^t  fcerminDert,  fonDern  wrmefyret;  fo;  Dag 
(ie  in  folgern  55anD  je  länger  |e  mebr  m  einanDer  DerbunDen* 
mit  einanDer  leben;  Äinber  jeugen;  unD  ffe  aud)  mit  einanDer  er* 
näbren ;  Dann  DiefeS  i(l  t'bnen  in  Diefer  natürlicben  Siebe  einge* 
pflanzet;  aud)  unter  #epDen;  unD  Dergleichen  *fla£ionen>  &cmn 
obne  DiefeS,  Witte  fid)  Das  menfebfiebe  ©efcfrfccfrt  nid)t  in  örD* 
ttung  twmebren.  <£S  ift  aud)  Den  unvernünftigen  Kreaturen  eine 
natürliche  iUbt  eingepflanzt,  ifcre  jungen  ju  ernafjren.    €bri* 

€  2  ftm 


62       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

flcn  haben  nicht  nur  Das  natürliche  Süncfretn/  ihre  Jtinber  ju  er* 
lieben,  fonDern  fie  auch  nach  ©QtteS  Rillen  in  Der  Sucht  unD 
<33ei  mabnung  jum  ££rrn  ju  ergeben;  nacb  2lnweifung  ©Ot* 
teS  endlichen  Befehls,  alten  unD  neuen  laments,  unD  wo 
folebe  ÄinDet  Sucht/  w$  f>cr^(id>er  Siebe  bei;  glternunb  ©cbul* 
mctftetn,  nacb  £briftlic&er  Pflicht  urn  Die  g&re  @Otted/  unD 
baS  gemeine  SBeffc/  an  Der  3ugenb  ju  beförDern  int  SBertf  ge* 
richtet  wirD,  fo  wirb  rt  auch  niebt  ebne  (gegen  bleiben.  Sonn 
Jiebe,  Sucht  unb  <33crmabnung  jum  £)£rrn,  ift  jufammen  eine 
Dreifache  (Schnur,  welche  niebt  leiebt  jerreifiet.  £at  bet)  gltern 
unD  (Scbulmeiffcrn  eine  aufrichtige  QJaterliebe  Den  Vorgang  ju 
Den  Äinbern,  fo  ifl  juboffen,  Dag  folcbeS wieber  bei? Den  ÄinDern 
eine  aufrichtige  finDlicbe  Siebe  gebähten  möge:  £omt  folebe  Sie* 
be  bep  Den  ftinbetn  jum  93otfcbein,  fo  ifi  ju  hoffen,  Daß/  wann 
folebet  ©aame  nicht  etflicft  witD,  fonDetn  im  <2BacbStbum  blei* 
bet,  Dag  cnDficb  eine  gefegnete  (StnDte  etfolgen  wetDe.  <2£ill  aber 
Die  grei;beit  Diefe  Siebe  überwältigen,  unD  mit  wilD  geuer  anfle* 
efen  unD  enßünDen,  fo  mug  wie  gemelDt,  Siebe,  Sucht  unD  93er* 
mabnung  jum  £>£rrn  jufammen  geflochten,  unD  ju  einet  tfetigen 
©eiffel  oDet  Siebet  Ruthen  gebtaucht  wetDen,  fo  ifi  ju  hoffen, 
baß  jjierauö  Siebe,  gutebt  unD  ©ebotfam  entliehen  werDe;  aber 
aüeS  Durch  ©ütteS  gndbigen  @eegen,  #ülffe  unD  Q3et)flanD, 
bann  er  mug  Datum  etfucht  wcrDen,  Dag  et  511m  pflanzen  unD 
begießen,  ©eDei;ew  geben  wolle. 

2ln  ®öttc$  ©naD,  unD  mifDen  ©eegenr 

3(1  alles  ganfc  unD  gat  gelegen: 

UnD  ohne  feine  #ülff  unD  ©unfi/ 

3jl  allot  ?0?enfchen  tf)un  umfonfl 

25er  ©eclen>9)?drber  fuchet  alfejeit  Die  wabte  aufrichtige  Siebe 
ju  befreiten  mit  feiner  falfchen  SMila/  Der  2Belt*  Siebe,  Die  mit 
ibtet  SuflbegietDe  jum  ©uten  erflorben/  fo,  Dag  jte  auch  Den  na< 
rürlichen  SiebeS*guncfen  Der  nach  Dem  gall  noch  übrig  geblieben, 
fuchet  auSjulofcben,  unD  auch  fd;on  bei)  Dielen  auSgelofchet  hat, 
woraus,  unD  wobureb  Dann  alles  ungöttliche  SEUefen  folget/  wo; 
Durch  Der  Sorn  ®Ottt$,  auf  Den  ^ag  beSSornSgebduffet  wor* 
Den  unD  noch  witD;  als  ju  fehen  ijt  an  Der  erften  <3LX3cIt :  wie 
auch  an  ©oDom  unD  ©omorra,  an  Nathan  unD  Slbiram,  wie 
auch  an  Der  3erfWrun.<j  3fenifalem,  unD  anDetn  Orten  mehr« 
SSSaö  Dör  26etcfe  Derginflernig  fc&on  i>or  langen  3eüen  auSge* 

wirefet 


THE  SCHUL-OBDNUNG  63 

f&     )(     *9     X     %& 

wircFct  foorDen/  Dat>on  jeuget  Die  beilige  ©djrifft  an  Dreien  Or* 
ten:  3d)  rotU  Der  fürfce  nad)  nur  anführen/  ti\bm.  it  t>.  18.  bi* 
ju  gnDe,  3tcm  2  *J)et.  2,0.  4»  5. 6.  3uDd  d.  7*  Unön>öö  »or 
Dergleichen  <2BcrcPe  ju  unferen  Seiten  noeb  tdgficb  au^geubet 
n>erDen/  folcbeS  lebret  un$  leiDer!  Die  tdglicl)e  (Srfabrung, 

<2Bann  man  eine*  (Jbriffen  ©tanD  unt)  *PfIicbt,  auf  Die  recbte 
<2Baagfcbale  leget/  aucb  in  ben  ebelidjen  Siebten;  fo  ftnDet  ftdj 
Diefer  Sluäfcblag  ricbtig/  Die  Siebe  mu§  in  allen  Singen  Den  2lu& 
febfog  geben/  unt)  n>o  Diefe  manqelt/  Da  toirD  aucb  fciel  an  Der 
3ud>t/  an  guter  örDnung  unD  Q3ermabnung  jum  ££rrn/  in 
Der  ÄinDcrjucbt  bei)  Altern  unD  (gcbulmeiffern  ermanglem  £* 
bat  feine  Öiicbtigfeit  in  beifigw  ©grifft/  Da£  Der  9)?ann  De* 
2üeibe*  -£>aupt  fet>.  g$  ifl  aber  aucb  Diefe*  auf  De*  Spanne* 
(Seiten  tvobl  in  aebt  ju  nebmen;  tva*  Der  Sipoflet  $aufu*  Denen 
Cbrtftticben  gbemdnnern  tviffenD  maebt/roenn  er  fpriebt:  1  <£or* 
**/  D.  1-  3d)  laffe  eueb  aber  tviffen/  lieben  QSrüDer/  Dag  Sb^ 
ffu*  iff  eine*  jeglicben  Spanne*  £aupt;  Der  $9?ann  aber 
iff  De*  SOBeibe*  £aupt.  9?un  iff  gar  iiicbt  ju  jroeiffeln/  n>ann 
Der  9)?ann  mit  &br  unD  £eben©)rifto  feinem  #aupt  folget/  uni) 
Da*  <2Beib  Dem  ?D?amt/  DieÄinDer  ibren  Altern  unD  (Scbufmei* 
(lern  untertbdnig  folgen  unDgeborfam  fi'nD ;  fo  toirD  Die  aufriefe* 
tige  Siebe/  Den  2iu*fd)lag  am  ©enriebt  ©jntflidjer  $flidjt  reid)* 
lid)  Darlegen.  UnD  alSDann  bat  man  Dennocb  bet)  Diefem  allen 
niebt*  mebr  getban,  a(*  roa*  man  ju  tbun  fcbu(Dig;  unD  Die<3^ 
ligfeit  iff,  unD  bleibet  Dennod)  ein  un&erDiente*  ©naDengefcbencf, 
3eDocb  tt>eil  alle  (Sbriffticbe  93flicbten  ©tafeln  finD/  worauf  auc& 
n>ir,  t>on  (Staffel  ju  (Staffel/  unfere  dritte  unD  (SdJritte  fegen 
muffen.  <26oüen  n>tr Dtefer  ©naDetbeilbafftigwerDen/  fobat  un* 
Der  ££9v9v  36fu*  <*nd)  Di§fall$  öerfebiebene  Sebre  unD  <2Bar* 
nung  binterlaffen.  Ob  nun  ftobl  fein  SOlenfcb  Dem  anDern  ©öt* 
teö  ©naDe  abfagen  fan/  weifen  Der  eine  fo  tuobl  aß  Der  anDere 
ebne  ®öttt$  ©naDe  niebt  leben  fan:  (go  ftnDet  ft'cb  Docb  in  Der 
£ebre  Sbritfi  Diefer  auäDrucf  liebe  UnterfcbeiD;  jrcifcben  Dem  tW 
riebten  Sftann,  unD  tböriebten  3n"9frctuen;  unD  jmifc^en  Dem 
f  lugen  9)?ann;  unD  f  lugen  Sungfrauen;  swifeben  Dem  treuen 
unD  untreuen  Änecbt;  jage  jttifeben  Diefen  beiden/  fJnDet  (leb 
ungleicbe  %xbt\tf  unD  «ucbungleidje  QMobnung  Der  ©naDe  unD 
UngnaDe.  (So  iff  e*  ja  Demnacb  mit  beffer,  Da§  man  fid)  ^feriri 
%tit  Der  ©naDen  auf  Den  2ßeg  begibt/  auf  welchem  ©Ott  feine 

<£  *  ©naDe 


64       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

@    X    50    )(    f 

©nabe  fcetbetfien  tint)  jugefagt,  ate  tap  man  eö  barauf  anFcm* 
men  Caflfe/  auf  @ütte$  ©nabe  ju  fünbigen;  unb  in  bet  ©ünbe 
ju  beharren/  auf  i>a§  Die  ©nabe  bcfto  mächtiger  tt>evt>e/  befiele 
9vöm*  £/  ».  1«  2*  3ft  nun  n>ie  gemelbt  eineö  (griffen  (gtanb 
alfo  befc^affcri/  tote  id)  audjbefenne/  unb  glaube^  t>$  Cbritfuö 
t|l  baö  #aupt  feiner  ©cmctno  unbaffo  aud)  eineö  jeglicbentOlan* 
tie*  »öaupt/  fo  ftn&et  fid)  foldjeöja  Don  felbjten/  ba§c$  beö$?an* 
tie*  fdjulbige  tyfJicbt  fe»,  baß  er  baöjenige/waö  ifrn  fein  £aupt, 
•Jögrr,  unb  SDJeifier  felbjlen  (ebret/  er  aud)  baö  SBeib  fofdf>e« 
lebre,  worüber  er  jum  £aupt  gejMet  tji;  unb  fo  bann  bepbe 
GbrifHicbe.  Seeleute  tbrer  $inber  £et)l  unb  @eligfett  t>on  #er* 
#n  fudjetv  fo  werben  fte  aud)  alle  ©ebotte/  bie  tynen  ber  £(£n: 
gebietet  ju  Herren  nehmen,  unb  fte  ifjren  Äinbern  einfdjdrffen, 
tiacfc  &Otti$  95efef)l  fo  unö  febrifftlid)  l)inter(affen/ 1  35. 9Dlof. 

18;  »•  19*  f  9Ä0f  6/  t>.  6.7.  fy.  78/  D.  i.z.3.4.  (£j>I).6/i>.4- 

<£olo|f.  3/ t>.  &i.  unb  anbern  Qxttn  meljr. 

<2öaö  nun  ber  ©tern  ibre  ^>fltd?t  tf>rer  Äinber  wegen  in  ftd> 
fcdft:  £ben  baöjenrge  wirb  aud)  Don- einem  (gcbufmeifter  erfor* 
bert/  beme  foldje  Sugenb  übergeben  unb  anvertrauet  iff*  Unb  ob 
man  wofyf  fo  viel  alö  jum  J&aupt  geJMet  wirb  über  folate  3u* 
flenb/  fo  ijt  aud)  bififalö  <£I)riftuö  unfer  #aupt/  nad)  bejfen  S5e* 
feblwir  unfere£au£baltungmit  berljugenb  regieren  unb  führen 
feilen.  $atnunber££it3i£fuöba5umal)l/alö  er  juunöaufbiefe 
SEBeft  gefommen/  $u  fueben  unb  feiig  ju  mad;en/  waö  twlobren 
war/  bie  Äinber  fo  fonbetlid)  auf?  ftebe  ju  fieb  geruffen/  fte  gefeej* 
net  unb  auö  Siebe  geber£et/>  unb  if>ncn  baö  #imme(reicb  fcerbeif* 
fen:  alö  ju  feben  $?arc.  y,  t>.  ^.  37.  @o  fan  eö  unö  nid)twobl 
ablaufen/  wann  wir  ty'rannifcb  mit  ibnen  umgeben;  wiewobl  fte 
müjfen  in  ber  3ud)t  unb  QSermabnung.jum  ££rrn  erlogen  wer* 
ben.  grwdgen  wir  ferner  mit  grnfl  unb  Slnbacbt,  wie  ber  #err 
3£fuö  bajumaW  feine  jünger  gelebref/  weldjeö  unö  allen;  bie 
wir  unö  (griffen  nennen/ jur  Sebre  fcbr!fftlid)binterla|Tcn  werben/ 
alö  im  £t)angelio  <3.  9)?attb*  18  (Tap:  t)om  iten  biö  6.  t>.  fol* 
genber  maßen  ju  lefen:  gu  bevfelbigcn  ©tunbe  traten  bie  3fün# 
ger  ju  Sgfu;  unb  fpvadjen:  2Bcr  itf  boeb  ber  gröffetfe  im  £im# 
melreicb?  3<£fuö  rieffein  £inb  ju  ftd)/  unb  ftellete  eö  mitten  un* 
ter  fte/  unb  fprad):  ^arlicb/  icb  fage  eud>:  €öfet)  bann/ bag 
ibr  umfebret/  unb  werbet  wie  bie  ^inber/  fo  werbet  t'br  nid)t  in 
baö  Himmelreich  fommen.  2ßer  (id)  nun  felbfi  erniebrigetr  wie 

big 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  65 

*    X     ?«     X     * 

b\$  Ämb/  ber  i(l  bev  größere  im  £imme(reidj,  Unb  wer  ein  fof* 
cbeS  5?inb  aufnimmt  in  meinem  tarnen/  ber  nimmt  mid)  auf* 
<2Ber  aber  ärgert  biefer  geringen  einen/  t>te  an  mid)  glauben/  bem 
trdre  beffer,  bag  ein  $?uf)(tfein  an  feinen  £a(S  gelänget  würbe; 
unb  erfduffet  würbe  im  ?0?eer/  ba  eö  am  tieften  ijl.  2{u$  an* 
geführten  2Bötfen  be$  ££rrn  3®fu,  haben  n>ir  alle  genug  ju 
erlernen:  (go  fern  wir  trollen  ntf  •önnmefteteft  fommen/  unb  e* 
wig  ghicffelig  fet>it/  burffen  rot*  ung  mcfct  einbilben  ba§  biefe* 
ber  <2Beg  barjufeVi  tvann  tDtr  Die  $inber  feinbfelig  anfebett/  ober 
wol)(  gar  barum  fd)e(ren  unb  beftraffen/  wann  fie  uns  in  <2Bor* 
ten  unb  ©ebdrben  nid)t  (£f)re  genug  geben/  nod)  Komplimenten 
genug  machen  (innen*  2id)  nein!  big  iji  ber  2Beg  nid)t  jum 
^imme(reicf).  2Dann  wir  aber  t>on  jfold>er  eigenen  £brfud)t  um* 
fefyren,  nad)  Qjrifii  ittyx,  unb  werben  fo  niebrig  rote  bie  Äinber; 
bat  befdrbert  nid)t  nur  jum  9veid)  ©öttttr  fonbeni/  et  bringet 
aueb  eine  finblidje  ©cmeinfdjafft;  n>e(c^eö  alles  öiel  mehr  9?u§en 
fcfyaffen  Fan/  als  ade  ba$  botybaitmwn  jtd)  felbjl:  2)ann  wer 
ji'cf)  bier  felbfl  erhöbet;  ber  wirb  emiebriget  werben ;  unb  wer  fiel) 
fefbfi  emiebriget/  ber  wirb  erbtet  werben. 

(£$  waren  hierüber  nod)  feftr  tn'ele  gigenfd>afften  anjufuf^ren/ 

t)ie  tbeilä  nü^ftd^  unb  beförberlid)  waren  Siebe  ju  j)pan^en/  wo* 

burd)  bie  £l)re  ©ÖtteS  üermefyret/  unb  bat  gemeine  Q5efie  be* 

fävbert  werben  fönte:  2iud)  waren  fciele  bergleidjen  ©genfcfyaf* 

ten  bet) jufügen/  welche  gerabe  bat  ©egentfjeil  pflanzen/  baburefj 

bie,  Sbre  &ötut  öerminbert/  unb  bie  t>erborbene  eigene  Sbve 

wrmebret  wirb/  jum  @i$aben  unb  9?ad)tf)ei(  bit  gemeinen  35e* 

jten:  3*  will  et  aber  wegen  biefem  ^uneften  babet)  bewenben, 

unb  anberen  ju  fernerer  ^rüfung  uberfajfen. 

Hun  folgen  noeb  etliche  nüslicbe  &<bul*Ucbm$cttr 

welche  nicht  mir,  font>em  fcem  einigen  (BÖ>ZZ  unb 

feinem  VOort  $u  i£k>ren/  nach  fcbuUuger  pfltcfet  mir; 

iwt>  meiner  anvertrauten  ^JugenO/m  ile^r  un&Ue* 

bung  3u  bringen  mieb  verpflichtet  finbe* 

(Srftlid)  bienet  $ur  9?adjrid)t/  ba$  in  wdl)renber  Seit  id)  l)ier 

im  ianbt  @djul  gebalten/  id)  5linber  Don  serfefrebenen  Dveligi* 

ont  $}et)nung  unb  Hebung  jur  @d)ul  bef ommen/  fo/  t>a§  id)  lie 

niebt  in  einerlei)  gorm  bet  £ated)ifmi  unterrichten  f onnen/  aud) 

ift  mir  folebeä  ni$t  mit  eingebunden  worben/  fonbern  wann  fi'e 

im  lefen/  ^reiben  unb  bergleid)en  @d)uUUebungen  wofyl  be* 

£  4  wdl)rt/ 


66       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

ttdbrf/  fo  fjöbett  tie  Altern  *u  £au§  bfe  Äinber  ben  <£ated)ifmu£ 
felbfletl  gelehrt;  mir  if?  au* im  ©efang/  megen  Sieber  unb  $JfaU 
tuen  ju  fingen  gret)beit  gefaffen  morben:  Sllfo  babe  id)  bannaucf) 
Sieber  unb  ^falmen  mit  ibnen  gefangen/  roetlen  Don  bei;ben  tbei* 
Jen/  ote  nebmlidv  Don  geiftreicben  Siebern  unb  QJfaltncn/  ber  £♦ 
©eilt  ber  2Bercfmeiffer. 

Sieben  b.iefer  Uebung  babe  gearbeitet/  um  t$  babin  ju  brfn^ 
gen/  bag  ibnen  t>tö  neue  lament/  mit  (Eapitel  fucben  unb 
auffebfagen  recf)t  befant  »erben  möge/  ttelcf;e$  aucb  tootyi  bct)ib* 
lien  Don  jTatten  gegangen/  fo;  b$  mann  man  jur  &bre  unb  £r# 
ftabnung  einen  (gprucb  anfu&ren  mill/  fie  Don  fe(bften;  obne  2ln* 
tteifung  gemelbten  (Sprucb  auffcblagcn  unb  (efem 

2l(ö  ibnen  nun  We  %bur  eröffnet/  fobabe  getracbtet  fte  ^abitt 
|U  bringen/  ba$  fie  bie  QMumfein  in  biefem  eblen  0araWe$  ©ar* 
ten  #.  ©cbrifft;  niebt  nur  megen  ibrer  ©cbönbeit,  fonbern  aud> 
wegen  ibreS  lieblicben  ©eruebs  reicblicb  fammlen  motten/  moju 
id)  ibnen/  fo.  Diel  nacb  meinem  geringen  Vermögen  bebüffflicb 
few  f  innen/  2(nmeifung  gegeben/  me(d;e  einen  ©erueb  beS&benS 
jum  &be,n  in  ftcb  baben/  menn  man  fte  fo  gebrauchet/  mie  fie 
geoffenbabret  finb/  nacb  ibrer  Ärajft  unb  SBürcfung.  Slucb  bin* 
gegen/  mefebe  einen  ©erueb  be$  $;obe$  jum  ^obe/  in  ftcb  baben* 
Dag  fte  Don  bcp&en  gigenfebafften  eine  (SrfdntnifJ  au$£.  @<$rift 
Raben/  unb  feben  möcbten.  Sann  gleicbmie  bie  SLGabrb.eit  bat 
Sieben  in 'ftcb  bat/  unb  ein  ©crueb  bcö  febens  jumSeben  ifl/  mann 
man  ber  «SBabrbeit  folget;  alfo  im  ©egentbeil/  bat  bie  ?ugeti 
ben  %o\>  in  ftcb/  unb  ifi  ein  ©erueb  be$  ^obe$  jum  ctobe/  unb 
fübret  jum  <Sob  mann  man  ber  £ügen  folget:  3)ann  ber  üügner 
^beilunb  £obn  ift  ber  feurige  9)fuf)(/  melcbeS  ifi  ber  anbere^ob* 
iOffenb.  21/  d.  8.  SDte  SGßabrbeit  aber/  mer  ibr  folget/  machet 
fcierDon  frei)/  befiebe  hierüber  im  gDancj.  3°^  @aP-  g> 1>.  3  x*3^^ 
33-34. 31* 

S&ie  nun  gemelbte  ©genfebafften  einanber  jumiber  fmb/  fo/ 
Da9  bie  eine  böö  Jeben  mit  fieb/  unb  jum  Seben  fübret/  unb  bie 
ßnbere  Un  <£ob  in  fid)  bat/  unb  jum  ^obe  fübret;  alfo  Derbdlü 
e$  ftcb  aucb  jmifeben  ber  Siebe/  unb  ibren  gigenfebafften ;  folebe 
Ift  gleichfalls  ein  ©erueb  be$  ?eben$/  jum  üeben/  mer  ibr  folaet: 
Slbcr  #af?/  ^tib  unb  geinbfcbajft/  baben  einen  ©erueb  t>e$  %o* 
t>eö  jum  ^obe  in  fiel)/  unb  fübren  jum  ^obe  unb  Q3erberben  mer 
ibnen  folget;  bann  fie  finb  baö  ©egentbeil/ unb  ber  öebe  jumiber, 

3Kfo 


THE  SCHÜL-ORDNUNG  67 

•   X   »   X   • 

2((fo  ff!  tt  au<$  mit  ©fauben  unD  Unglauben/  ferner  }ftifd)en 
?25at*ml>ergtgFcit  unb  UnbarmfjeV^igFeit/  jVDtfcf>en  ©crcc&tigfcit 
unb  Ungerecptigfeit;  jtvifc&cn  Äeufcftöeit  unt)  ünfettfc&beit,  $n)i* 
fc&en  £)emutf)  unt)  «öoc&mutl).  (gumma :  2lüe  g6ftfid>e  ©gen* 
jtyafften  fyaben  bat  üeben  in  ficfj,  unb  führen  aud>  einen  ©erud) 
jum  ewigen  Seben  mit  fid)/  rcer  fie?)  burefr  tl>re  Ärafft  unb£ßür* 
cfung  will  bearbeiten  unb  regieren  faffen,  ber  Fommt  baburef)  jur 
SBiebergeburt,  unb  aus  bem  <£ob  ins  jcben.  hingegen  aüe^  um 
g6ttlicf)e  2Gefen  nebfl  Deren  ©genfd)aften,  geben  einen  ©erudj 
Des  <£obeS  t>on  fiel)/  einen  töbtlic&en  ©erud)  beS  ^obeS  jum  ^o* 
be  unb  QSerbctmmnig,  »ertönen  big  in  Den  tob  folget- 

2US if)nen  nun  biefeS  auc&'jum  <£I)eil  eröffnet:  (So  &aben  fie 
(Sprüche  t>on  biefer  ober  jener  ©genfcf>afft/  fb/  tt>fe  es  an  fie  be* 
gefjret  ftirb  auffudjen  muffen :  2Bef$er  bann  ben  erften  @prud) 
»on  former  ©genfebafft  bat/  fo  an  fie  geforbert  Sorben/  ber  trtt 
berauS  unb  ftreefet  Die  #anD  auS;  unb  n>ie  fie  (Sprüche  ton  fot* 
d&er  ©genfebaft  fin&en,  fo  treten  fie  eine*  nad>  bem  anbern  ber* 
fcotv  unb  fMen  fid^  in  tint  9Je$fce>  ctrreö  hinter  baS  anbew  Die 
Knaben  befonDerS/ unD  Die  S0?dgD!ein  befonberS:  JöiefeS  conti* 
nuiret  bis  fie  atte  (Spritcfie  baben.  2tfSbann  tiefet  ber  erfte  feinen 
©prucj):  ginbetftebs  aber/  baß  jemanb  in  ber  iKe^e  ifl/  ber  ben 
(Sprucb  aueb  bdtte/  ort  gelefen  tfb  fo  tritt  es  aus  ber  Övet)be  unt) 
fuebet  ftcb  einen  anbern,  unb  tritt  afSbann  lieber  ju  unterfl  in 
t>ie  Uferte.  ©iefcS  gefebiebetbarunv  baß  bie  eblett  Honigblumen 
aüe  befud?t  »erben :  5iucb  finbet  es  fic&  wn  felbften/  bag  jemebr 
(gprücbe  son  fofeber  ©genfebafft  fo  an  fie  begehrt  tvorben  »or* 
Fommen/  je  mebr  bie  <2Babrbeit  Demjenigen  Deutlicber  an  tag 
fommt/  fo/  Dag  ein  (Sprue!)  ben  anbern  niebt  nur  befeftiget/  fon* 
Dem  aud)  erfldbret  unb  aufleget  9?acb  gegebenem  (efen  ber 
(Sprüche  werben  etliche  gragen  an  fie  gefleüt/  n>e(d)e  Diefelbe  t>ch 
felbflen  erftdren ;  bann  merbeu  fie  lieber  auf  gemelbte  (Sprüdje 
jurücf  gemiefen/  unb  noebmabfs  roieberftolet;  ba  bann  insgemein 
tjerfebiebene  Stnmercfungen  iwFommen/  unb  aug  angeführten 
©prüfen  F(ar  tor  Slugen  liegen/  tbeifs  jur  Jebre/  tbeifs  jum 
^roft  unb  (gtdrefung  beS  ©laubenS/  tbeilö  jur  ©traffe  unt) 
Sßarnung* 

gevner  roann  fit  mty  geübt  im  Men;  fo  fdgt  man  es  jumef* 
len !  be?  ibnen  auf  bk  $robe  fommen/  unD  erinnert  fie :  S)a§  ba^ 
aujferlid)e<SiJc!)etiaT)  fi*  felbfl  ni*t  wrwerfK^  fei?/  leboc&fotten 

e  r  fuj 


68       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

•    X    34    X    • 

fte  föfcbe*  aud)  auf  cine  an&ere  ©ejlalt  probieren;  jte  foffen  nun 
ganfc  ftille  fifcen  unt>  auf  tyre  ©ebancfen  Sichtung  gebet?/  unb  aU 
U  eitle  ©ebancfen  fahren  (äffen;  aber  Den  erften  ©prueb  Der  ib* 
nen  in*  ©emütbe  fame/  ben  folten  (tc  auffudjen  unb  fefen.  35et> 
biefer  Uebung  babeieb  mieb  offtmabl*  fonberlicb  t>crn>unbcrn  muf* 
fen/Wieftcb@ött/au*  bem  ?0?unbe  ber  Unmünbigen  unb  (Saug* 
tinge  ein  Job  jugeriebtet  bot/  um  ben  geinb  unb  ben  9faebgieri* 
gen  ju  Vertilgen. 

sftaebbem  e*  nun  ®Qttti  ernjHicber  SSefebt  iff/  baß  man  ben 
StinDernbie  ©ebotte/bieerun*  gebotten/  aueb  einfcbärjfen/ unb 
biefeiben  in  berguebtunb  QJermabnung  jum#£rw  erjiebenfoll/ 
fc  fi'nben  fid)  in  £.  @cbrift  fo  t>ief  febone  unb  berrlicbe  geug* 
niflfe  Don  bem  einigen  ©öft/unb  bejfen  göttlicben ©genfebafften, 
rote  fieb  ©Oft  bureb  feine  2lllmacbt  unb  bureb  bie  ©cböpffung 
öllerSingegeoffenbabret/  aueb  wie  er  alle  Singe  bureb  i*tö  ^SBort 
feiner  Ärafft  unb  bureb  ben  ©eijt  feine*  $}unbe*/  bureb  feine  un* 
erforfrf>Itd>e  SWmacbt  unb  2Bei*beit  erfebaffen  unb  gemaebt  bat. 
S>ie  £.  (gebriftgibt  ferner  Seugnifr  wie  bureb  be*  Teufel*  *fteib 
ber  ^obr  unb  bai  jeitfiebe  unb  einige  QJerberben  in  bk  2Be(t 
fommen/  unb  wie  ba*  menfcblidje  @efdjled)t/  bureb  be*  ©atan* 
Jijt/  in  ©ünbe  unb  Uebertretung  gefallen/  unb  baß  bureb  biefe 
Uebertretung/  bie  @ünbe  in  bie  22Selt  fommen,  unb  bureb  bie 
(günbe  ber  ^ob ;  unb  ift  alfo  ber  ^ob  ju  allen  SJttenfcben  bureb* 
flebrungen/  biemeil  fte  alle  gefünbiget  batten. 

$)ie  beilige  (Seftrift  untertveifet  un*  ferner,  baß  &ött  nad) 
feiner  greifen  Q5armber£igFeif/  bem  gefallenen  menfeblicben  @e* 
fcblecbt  bie  QSerbeifTung  getban,  baß  be*  «SBeibeö^aamen  ber 
©drangen  ben  £opf  jertreten  foüe/ bamit  fte  wieber  au*  bem 
glucb  unb  93erbammni§  folten  erlöfet  werben/  bureb  eine  ewige 
grlofung.  Q5on  biefem  allen  finbet  man  in  Jb.  @d)rift  t>tcC 
trofllicbe  ^erbeiflungen/ fö  ju  ben  sQäfern  gefebeben  befebrieben/ 
welcbe  Don  Seit  ju  geit/  bureb  ©iofen  unb  bie  ^3ropbeten/  tbeil* 
bureb  Siguren  unb  QSorbifber/  tbeil*  bureb  ©eftebte  unb  SSSeif* 
fagung  befteittiget  worben;  wcüon  in  beiliger  ©ebrift  alten  ^efla* 
ment*  fcf>r  fciele  Seugniffe  twrbanben.  gerner/  wie  folebe  Q3er* 
beiffung  bureb  Sbn'ftum/  al*  ben  t)erbeiffenen(323eibe*^@aamen 
jur  erfüllten  Seif/  bureb  SCßürcfung  be*  £.  ©eifte*,  biefe*/  naeb 
menfd)licber  2)ernunfft  unbegreiffliebe  göttlicbe  @ebeimniß»2Bevcf 
ber  grWfungf  bureb  S^rijti  ©eburf/  £ebr  unb  ttbm  Reiben; 

(Sterben/ 


THE  SCHULORDNUNG  09 

*  X   it   X   • 

©fcrbett/  StuferfJebung  unb  £immeffabrt  ittf  SBBercf  gerichtet/ 
tint)  »oDbrac&t  n>ovben  iff;  uon  biefem  allen  gibt  unö  ttiefteifige 
(Scbvift  neuen  %tftammtS  grunblicben  $5ui<bt:  2Iud>  jiti&et  ft* 
barinnen  auöfübrficf;e  SRacfyricbt/  wie  man  folder  grlofung  tl)t\U 
baftig  werben  Un.  2Jud)  wie  ein  Shrift  feinen  Q3eruf/  woju  er 
berufen  ifb  butcb  Uebung  Der  ©ottfeligfeit  in  <£bvift(icf)en  <$> 
genben/  t>on  (Staffel  ju  (Staffed  feine  dritte  unö  (Schritte  fefcett 
muf/  jum  täglichen  ^acbötbum  unb  gunebmen  in  $ef>r  unt>£e* 
ben/  nad)  bem  (gbenbilbe  beffen/  ber  ifyn  gefcbaffen  unb  erlöfet 
bat  3d)  (age:  33on  biefem  allen/  (ebret  unb  unterweifet  unö  bie 
Jebve  (grifft  unb  feiner  2ipojiel  auöfübrlicb  im  neuen  Filament. 
Wm  fofteson  jeglidjer  Uebung  inöbefonbere/  nact)  obigem  3n* 
f>aTt  fd)rifftlid)  aufgefegt  werben :  n>ie  eö  bei)  ber  3ugenb  jur£ebr 
unb  grmabnung  gebräuchlich  ba$  fte  (Sprucbe  t)on  biefer  ober 
jener  ©genfdjaft/  wieeö  an  fte  begehrt  wirb  auffucbeti/  unb  nadj* 
bem  ein  jeber  feinen  (Sprud)  gelefen/  werben  aud>  fragen  an  fte 
getban/  unb  jebe  gragc  wirb  mit  einem  (Sprucl)  beantwortet/  ba 
bann  ein  (Sprue!)  ben  anbern  tf)eilö  befeftiget/  tbeifö  erf Idret  unb 
aufleget.  (Sage/  x>on  folebem  allen  fcbrifftltcften  SBericfrt  ju  er* 
teilen/  \w  eö  an  mieb  begebret  worben/  folte  eine  große  c2ßctt^ 
läuffigf  eit  in  ftcb  begreiffen  j  QSeilen  aber  bk  £♦  @d)rift  alle* 
in  ftcb  bat  unb  bdlt/  fo  wirb  eö  alba  ju  fudjen  unb  aud)  ju  ftnben 
fet)n;  unb  weilen  in  Cbvifto  3£fu  alle  (Sdjdße  ber  2Beiöbeit 
unb  ber  ©f  dntniji  verborgen  liegen/  wotton  unö  bie  #.  <Scbrift 
gewiffen  35ericbt  gibt;  fo  weife  id>  mid)/  unb  anbere  g^enfe^ett 
baf)in  ju  fliegen/  in  ber  Hoffnung/  fo  wir  Don  ganzem  #erfcenfu* 
eben/  baf?  wir  aueb  fünben  werben.  Severn.  2?,  t>.  13.  $)latt\).  7. 
t>.  7.  S)ie  2J5eIt  fuebet  ja  mit  grnjl  unb  SSegierbe  nad)  £br 
unb  ©ut/  naef)  ©olb/  (Silber/  Sbelgefteinen  unb  bergieid)en 
©cbdfjen/  bie  bet)  ber  2Belt  in  großen  Würben  unb  <335ert5  ge* 
fyaltetr  werben/  welche  boeb  t)ergdnglicb/ unb  gegen  bie  urwergang* 
liebe  (Scbd^e/  bie  unö  &ött  in  feinem  ^ßort  anerbietet/  gar 
niebf  ju  Dergleichen  ftnb*  SOßie  nun  ba$  fueben  i|l/  fo  wirb  auc& 
baöfinben  fet)m  (Sucbet  man  bie  SBeft  in  2lugen*£uft/  glei* 
fd)eö  £uft  unb  boffdrtigem  2chn,  man  wirb  fte  fo  ftnbett/  matt 
wirbaueb  mit  an  ber'SBelt^beil  nebmert/  unb  enblicb  aud)  mit 
ber  <2Belt  ^beil  unb  Sobn  batjor  jtnben*  2Ber  aber  @43tt  unö 
baö  ewige  itkn  fuebet/  unb  (grifft  Sufflapffen  getreulieb  nadj* 
folget/  ber  wirb  aucl;  finben  unb  nic^t  üergeblic^  fucf)en$  fein  fu^ 

eben 


70       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


**    X    3*    X    * 

dKttttirb  ibm  ntibt  ungefunben,  audj-nidtf  unbefoftnet  Bleiben. 

SD^.   12/  V.  z£.  C.  I4f  t>.  3-  C.  17/  t).  24. 

Sie  £ßcitlduffigfeit  ju  vermeiben  beriefe  n>ie  fc^on  gemelbt: 
Sag  id)  viele  ntifcücbe  unb  erbauliche  Uebungen  tint)  2lnroeifung 
gur@ottfeliqfeit  nicbt  umfldnblid)  betreiben  fan :  QJonÖlau* 
be/  Siebe,  Hoffnung,  ©ebutt.  (gumma,  alle  Uebungen  Der  <£u* 
genb,  bie  in  $.  @a>rift  jur  ©ottfefigfeit  anweifen,  tr>te  folcbe 
tiufc  jur  ?ebre,  jur  ©trajfe,  u.  b,  g.  binterlaffen,  unb  aufgejeid)* 
net  (leben :  (gage  folate/  n>ie  jte  »on  jebem  tntfbefonbere,  auf  ge* 
tw$  Seit/  mit  Der  ^fugenb  vorgenommen  werten  foUett/  von  alle 
bem  aUbier  auffubrlidjen  SBenxpt  ju  tfyun,  folte  ju  lang  fallen* 

Sebodj,  seilen  Der  wabre  feligmacbenbe  ©taube  alle«  ergreife 
fen  muß/  was  jum  Sehen  unb  göttlichen  <2öanbel  bienet,  unb  ja 
nid)t$  gültiger^  bet)  unb  in  3£fu  <£t>riftö  ijt,  ate  ber  ©laube  ber 
tmrd)  Üiebe  tl)dtig  ftdt>  bereifet,  ber  wabre  ©laube  m  ben  ££rrn 
SfSfum,  bem  ift  von  bem  ££rrn  3£fu  felbjt  ber  @d)ilb  gege* 
ben,  i>a§  er  <£l)ritfi  2ßa(fentrdger  i|t,  niebt  nur  bie  SBelt  ju  u* 
berwinben/  al$  ju  feben  1  3fob*  r  /  v.  1.  £.  fonbern  aud)  augju* 
föfdjen  alle  feurige  Pfeile  betf  SBöfewicbtä,  wie  wir  lefen  fdnnen 
<£pb.  6,  v.  i£.  <2Bill  bemnad)  nur  mir  unb  anbern  jur  2Juf* 
münterung  unb  ©tdrefung  be$  ©laubentf,  albier  etwas  »on  Den 
©genfebaflften  be$  ©laubenä  beifügen,  fo  viel  id)  vor  biefe  3eit, 
nad)  bem  SOJaag  meiner  geringen  ©aben,  burd)  beä  ££9u)v^ 
©nabe  ju  tbun  vermag»  Sann  obne  feine  &mi)c  unb  ©unjt, 
i(l  unfer  <£bun,  unb  atteö  umfonjh  SBeilen  id)  biefeg  bet)  mir 
fo  beflnte,  fo  finbe  mid)  aud)  verliebtet;  biefeä  einzig  unb  aU 
lein  jum  ^rei§  ®Ottt$,  unb  jur  <£l>re  feinet  beifigen  Samens 
aufjufefcen.  Sann  niemanb,  als  bem  lieben. ©OS/X  b^bm  wir 
t$  ju  banefen,  ü$  er  un$  in  biefer  juntfern  2ßelt,  b#er  fein  bei* 
ligeS  QQBort,  al^  eingebt  auf  bem  £eud)ter  fyat  jteben  lajfen>wann 
nur  unfere  güffe  auf  benSBeg  betf  griebenä  gerichtet  finb;  fo 
fönnenwir  aud)  mit  SaviD  fagen :  *JJf*  n9rV.  ioy.  #£9v9i 
fccin  SOBort  ift  meines  guffeö  Seucbte,  unb  ein  fi'c&t  auf  meinem 
SÖCege. 

&Ott  aber,  ber  ein  Ziüt  tß/in  wefdjem  feine  gintfernifr  wolle 
uns  fein  Sidjt  unb  feine  SGßabrbeit  fenöen,  i>$  fte  uns  leiten  unb 
fübren,  bureb  biefeS  finftere  ^bal  unb  ©cbatten  be*  ^obe*,  ju 
feinem  beiligen  5Serg,  unb  ju  feiner  2Bobnung;  t>a$  wirauc^ 
In  SBabrljeit  mit  ©avib  fagen  fönnen :  ^3f.  3^  3»  beinern  2id)t 

fe^en 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  71 

*    X    37    X    # 

fefyen  n>ir  Da$  Sicftt.  Ö!  Da§  mir  mit  @lauben$*2Jugen  feie* 
feä  ^tcF>t  nicbc  nur  behauen,  fonbern  aucb  in  folgern  ödpt  man* 
Dein,  unD  baburdt)  enDlid)  alle  S0?ad)t  Der  ginftemif}  uberrcinDeti 
unb  bc(i'cgen  motten;  rcoju  id)  »on  £er^en  t»ünfd)e  unD  bitte* 
um  £ülffe  unb  ©tauben*  «Ärajft  aus  Der  £6f)e,  2imen» 

£Stntge  $racreit  tf  or  &wber/  woburd)  it>itett  bie 

^urebt  <5Q>ttc6,  tmreb  2lrtfö^r  ung  vieler  vortrefiü* 
cfcer  Scbrift  Spruche  befrwt  gemacht  wirb. 

gr.  i.  2Da^  tfl  ber  ©laube? 
21.  ©ne  gerDiffe  3w>erftci)£  tot,  Das  man  hoffet/  unD  niefcf 
jfteifelt  an  Dem;  ba*  mannet  fietyt.  gbr.  ii;  i. 
gr.  2.  Voraus  fommt  Der  ötau&e? 
2t-  @o  femt  Der  ©laube  aus  Der  ^reDigt;  baö  preDigen  a* 
ber  öurcf>  Das  SBort  ©Ott«.  9\öm.  io,  i£. 
gr.  3.  Sunt  Anfang  t>e$  ©tauben*  su  fommen,  auf  aa*  tot  einen 

£e!)rmei(ler  ()at  man  ju  feiert? 
St  2fuf3€fum/öen  2infdnger  unD  33ollenDer  Des  ©tauben** 
<£br.  ii,  z. 

gr.  4-  2Ba$  mürefet  ber  ©taube  wann  er  recfttfdjafFen  ijl? 
21.  UnD  ttiffet,  Daß  euer  ©laube,  fo  er  redjtfcijajfen  ifk,  ©e# 
Dutt  »urefet  ^at.  i,  3. 

gr.  5.  SBBai  mujj  ein  e&rifl  in  feinem  ©tauben  barrei^en? 
21.  @o  ttenDet  allen  euren  gleiß  Dran;  unD  reichet  Dar  in  eu* 
tem  ©tauben  SugenD,  unD  in  Der  SugenD  S5efd)eiDen!)eit,  unD 
in  Der  $8efc&ei&enj)eit  ?9töffigfeit/  unD  in  Der  9)?d|JigFeir  ©eDult, 
unD  in  Der  ©ebuft  ©ottfeligfeit,  unD  in  Der  ©ottfeligfeit  bru* 
Derlicfye  Siebe,  unD  in  Der  brüDerlicfcen  Siebe  gemeine  Siebe,  z^et. 
*r  U  *♦  7* 

gr.  6.  SBec  aber  foldjeS  nid)t  bat  barsureic^en? 
21.  £>er  itf  blinD,  unD  tappet  mit  Der  £anD,  unD  wrgiflet  Die 
Reinigung  feiner  »engen  @unDen.  2,  *}3et.  1,  9. 

gr.  7.  San  man  m$t  aud)  oljne  glauben  ©D£t  Gefallen? 
21.  Obne  ©laüben  iff*  unmöglich  ©Ott  ju  gefallen :  Samt 
tver  ju  ©ÖS/t  fommen  n>iH,  Der  muß  glauben,  Daß  er  fep, 
unD  Denen  Die  tljn  fuefcen,  m  Q3erge(ter  fepn  tterDe.  £br.  1 1,  £♦ 
gr.  8.  2ßie  fdjllid)  ifl  e$  fcemnad)  um  Den  regten  ©taubeij? 
2U  auf  Daß  euer  ©laube  recfrjcfjaften  unD  Diel  föfflid)er  er* 
funDen  werbe;  Denn  Das  wrgdnglic&e  ©olb/  Dag  Durchs  geue* 
bemalet  rcirb,  x.  1  $ef.  1/  7.  gr*  $♦ 


72       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

#     X     38     X     « 

Sr.  9.  28a*  t>«>c  trofLMngt  t$  gläubigen  Seelen,  mann  fie  fm  ©laif 

ben  roanbeln? 
%  2Bh>  Die  wir  glauben/  gehen  in  Die  9{ub«/  :c.  £br.  4/  3* 

gr.  10.  2Ba$  bor  SBerficötruug  bringt  e$  ben  Ungläubigen? 
21.  Reichen  febwur  er  aber,  Daß  fk  nicht  ju  feiner  OCulje  fom* 
wen  [offen/  Den  Ungläubigen  ?  Unb  wir  [eben/  bag  fte  nicht  ha* 
ben  fönnen  f>incin  f  ommen/  um  beä  Unglaubens  willen,  gbr.  3/ 

gr.  u.  SBorju  roerben  glaubige  ©eelen  bureb  Un  ©lauben  bewahret? 
2J.  (Such/  Die  ibr  autf  ®Otte$  TOacbt  Durcb  Den  ©lauben  be* 
roabret  werbet  jur  ©eligfett,  welche  jubercitet  ijt,  Dap  fie  often* 
bar  werbe  ju  Der  festen  Seif,  i  ^)ef.  1, 5. -beliebe  t>.  »1. 
gr.  12.  Surd)  welche  gigenfc&afft  erlangt  man  ^it  wahre  ©ereebtigfeit? 
%  ©0  Du  mit  Deinem  WunDe  befenneft  3><5|um,  t>$  er  Der 
£)£vr  fet?/  unD  glaubeft  in  Deinem  £er£en,  tag  ihn  ©Ot^ 
von  Den  lobten  auferweefet  bat/  fo  wirft  Du  feiig.    3}ann  [0 
man  toon  £erfcen  glaubet/  fo  wirb  man  gerecht  unD  fo  man  mit 
Dem  9)?unbe  befennet,  fo  wirb  man  feiig.    S5ann  Die  (Schritt 
fpricht:  2öeran  ihn  glaubet/  wirb  niebt  ju  [chanben.    3vöm. 
10/  9. 10. 11. 
gr.  ij.  eo  man  bur*  ben  QylauUn  an  ebrifium  3€fum,  foldjer  ©*; 
reefetigfeit  tbcilbaftig  wirb;  wie  (lebtet  bann  jwifeben  ©D££ 
unb  folgen  (Seelen? 
21.  9?un  wir  Dann  finD  gerecht  woiben  burch  Den  ©lauben, 
fo  haben  wir  Srtebe  mit  ®ött,  burch  unfern  #£rrn  SSftim 
Cbriftum.  SKöm.  f  / 1» 

gr.  14.  3tf  Ju  biefer  ©ereebtigfeit  ju  gelangen,  ber  bloflfe  3Kunb*  ©Jam- 
ben, obne  grücbte,  ©eilt  unb  Vtbtn  genug? 
%  ©leichwie  Der  Seib  obne  ©eift  tobt  i|t,  alfo  auch  ber  ©lau* 
be  ohne  SBercfe  »tf  tobt*  3ac.  1, z£. 
gr.  i?.  ^Botinnen  begebet  bic?miipts©umma  aller  ©ebotte,  ünb  wa$ 

i(l  ibre  (Sigenftbafft? 
21.  ©ic  £aupt*  (Summa  beä  ©ebotts  jjl:  Jiebe  t>on  reinem 
^erfcen/  unD  t>on  gutem  ©ewiffen,  unD  t>on  ungefärbtem  ©lau* 
ben.  i<fcim.  1,  r. 
gr.  16.  scann  aber  ba$  $er(j  nicht  recbtfc&affen,  fo  ijl  ber  ©laubc  g*; 
färbt:  ijat  man  in  fol*em  Buflanbe  auch  Xbcil  an  folgen 
SBerbeijfungcn? 
2J.  ©u  wirft weber  ^heil  nod)  SJnfall  haben  an  biefem^ort; 
Dann  bein  #erf$  ift  nicht  reebtfehaffen  t>or  ©Ö^.  ©arum  thue 
SSuflfe  fur  biefe  beine  55opheit/  un\>  bitte  &OtU  ob  bir  »ergeben 

werben 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG-  73 

®    X    i9    X    * 

werten  mdd)te  fcer  ^ücf  Deine*  #er£en*.  2lpojl  ©efd).  8,21*  2*# 
gr.  17.  Sie  £.  Scftrifft  gibe  SeugniS/  ba£  ©imon  Dec  3auberer,  rootwn 

gcmelbt,  auct>  gläubig  raorDcn? 

,  21.  ©u  alaubeft,  Dag  ein  einiger  ©Ott  ifl:  ©u  t^ufl  wol)f 

Daran;  Die  Teufel  afauben*  aucb,  unD  jitfern.  3ac.  2,  19.  fcq. 

gr.  18.  5Bc(ct)cc  (Slaubc  i(l  gäütg  cor  ©Ott,  in  Gbrifto  j(5fu? 

21*  2lbrai)am  bat  ©Ott  geglaubt/  unD  e*  ifi  tl>m  gerechnet 

jur  @ered)ttgfeit.  ©at.  3,  £♦ 

gr.  19.  2Bie  foflf  mau  aber  tJum,  wann  man  neef)  6ct>  lieb  befinbet,  Dajj 

man  nod)  in  feinem  »erlognen  ©unDenftanD  gefangen  lieget? 

%  ©ie  Seit  ift  erfüllet,  unD  Da*  Dvcid;  ©Otte*  ifi  f>erbet> 

f ommen :  tyut  5Suffe/  unD  glaubet  m  Da*  ©>atigelium.  9)?arc. 

i/  if-  9)?atff).  $/  2,.  c.  4/  *7- 

gr.  20.  553al  tmlunbiget  Dann  Das  (£t>angelium  Den  armen  bugfertigen 

©ünDern? 
2t.  2llfo  f)at  &OVI  Die  gßelt  geliebet,  Dag  er  feinen  einge* 
bo^en  ©ol?n  gab,  auf  Dag  alle,  Die  an  il)n  glauben,  nicljt  »er* 
lofyren  merDen,  fonDem  Da*  ewige  Scben  Gaben,  ^b-  */  ^6-  lieg 
aueb  Sue.  if  gan£.  1  %m 1.  if.  £uc. 1?,  10.  9)?att^  18,  n« 
90tattf>.  11,  28.  29.  30. 

gr.  21.  ginben  fid)  in  £>.  6cfjrifft  no*  mebr  Bewgniffc  Daf  Die  buffetti* 
gen  6unDer,  Durd)  Den  ©Lauben  an  Gbriftum  3£fwfl/  Vergebung 

Der  6ünben  empfa&en  folten? 
21.  ^on  Diefem  jeugen  alle  ^ropfyetcn,  Dag  Durd)  feinen  9?a« 
men  alle,  Die  an  ihn  glauben,  Vergebung  Der  ©ünDen  empfa* 
tyn  foüen.  2lpoft.  ©efd).  10,  4$. 

gr.  22.  ©efyet  Diefe  Qßer&eiflfung  aQe  roal>re  glaubige  bußfertige  SünDa* 
an,  ober  ijl  nod)  ein  Unterfcf>cit>? 
2(.  <£*  iff  f)ie  fein  Untcvfd>eiD  unter  ^uDen  unD  ©riedjen :  <£$ 
ift  alfer  jumal  m  ££9\3w  reid>  über  alle,  Die  if>n  onruffen. 
Sann  wer  Den  Womn  De*  ^e^vOv^  toixb  anrufen,  foil  feiig 
werten.  Dvöm.  10,  iz#  ij. 

gr.  2;.  jr»at  Dann  ©Ott  feinen  Sobn  Darum  in  Die  Sßelt  gefanbf,  un$ 
armen  £ünbern  ba$  gnabenreidje  (£öangelium  juüerfünbigen? 
21.  ©er  ©eift  De*  #grm  ift  bei)  mir,  Derfyalben  er  mid)  ge* 
falbet  fjat,  unD  gefanDt  ju  DerfünDigen  Da*  ©>angefium  Den  2lr* 
men,  ju  feilen  Die  jerftoffene  £erfcen,  ju  preDigen  t)m  ©efange* 
nen,  Dag  jte  log  fepn  foüen,  unD  Den  35linDen  m  ©eftd)t,  unö 
Den  3etf*lagenen,  Dag  fk  frep  unD  feDig  fet)n  foüen.  UnD  ju  pre* 
Digcn  Da*  angenehme  3af>r  De*  £&d®m.  £uc.  4,  18.  1?. 
3ok  3/  *7*  **•  1  30b  4/  ?♦  ßtoU  4/  4*  f  * 

Sr.  24. 


74       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

*    X    40    )(    * 

3t\  24.  teilen  nun  ®0£t  au$.  8ic6c  cor  un$  arme  ©unter,  feine*  tU 
Ittgen  8obne6  niebt  »erfcbonet,  fonbern  ibn  t>or  un3  ofle  önftin  gegeben,  fo, 
fcafl  alle  t)ie  an  ibn  glauben  mit  fotfen  wrlobren  merben,  fonbern  M$  eroige 
feben  baben :  ©o  fragt  |lcf)$  ferner,  seilen  auä)  ber  roabre  (glaube  eine 
SBurcfung  be$  £.  föeiflcS  in  un$  feon  muß:  2Borauf  bann  unfer  (Glaube 
on  (Ebr'tfunt3@:fum  gegründet  feonfofl,  wann  n>ir  Den  j£>.  öeift  aumSBerct- 
meifler  baben  mit)  bebalten  rooflen?  ob  toir  bicr&or  aueb  in  fy.  ©grifft  ge? 
ttifie  öiaebriebt  unb  Slnroeifung  baben?  ober  ob  cg  bieran  nict)t$  gelegen 

fei),  man  glaube  nact)  feinem  eigenen  2Biüen,  (Butbüncfen  unb  2Babu, 
nxtf,  unb  n>ie  man  rooQe? 

21.  2ßer  an  mieb  glaubet/  rote  Die  ©grifft  fa/pt»  »on  Deffcn 
Jeibe  ti>crDen  (Ströme  Des  (ebenDigen  SBaffii*  flieflen.  S)a$  fog* 
ft  er  aber  »ort  t>em  ©eift/  melden  empfaben  foften/  Die  an  ibn 
gfaubeten;  Dann  Der  $.  ©eijl  war  noeb  niebt  Da/  Dann  32M 
n>ar  noeb  niebt  aetfläret.  3ol>.  7/  38.3?-  fabe  aueb  z^et.  i; 
t)#  16.  bti  zi. 

Sc.  a$.  2Bann  man  aber  bet)  (left  beffnbet,bajman  mebr  auf  bie  Hugen 
gabeln  gefeben  unb  benen  gefolget,  als  ber  #.  ecbritft;  tpotoureb  man  ftcb 

!elb|l  berbinbert,  baß  ber  £.  (Beiß  ben.roabren  lebenbigen  <&laubtn  an€f)ru 
tomjjSfum  niebt  baf  rourefen  fonnen,  unb  man  ift  barum  oon  £erijenbe* 
trübt,  unbtüolte  gerne  befielben  roieber  tbeilbatftig  werben,  buret)  roelcf) 

Mittel  (an  un$  gebolffen  werben? 

21.  SSittit,  fo  roirD  eueb  gegeben/  fuebet/  fo  roerDet  if>r  finbcn/ 

f  (opfet  an/  fo  mirD  eueb  aufgetban.    Sann  roer  Da  bittet,  Der  em* 

pfäbet/  unD  roer  Da  fuebet  Der  finDet/  unD  roer  Da  anflopfet/  Dein 

ttirD  aufgetban.  SWartb*  7/  7.  8. 

gr.  26.  #ar  bann  (bOtt  folgen  armen  unb  elenben  $?enfcben  aueb  3er« 

beiiTung  getban,  ba$  er  tief)  roolle  finben  lajfen? 
%  <2BenDet  eueb  ju  mir/  fo  twrDet  ibr  feiig  aller  ^SGelt  (£nDe, 
t)ann  icb  bin  650%%/  unD  feiner  mebr.  feqq.  3fefaja  40  u. 
aueb  3evem.  29,  n.  ia.  1*. 

Sr.  27.  feilen  gcmelbte  ßeugniffe  e$  frdfftig  bejeugen,  ba$  ©Ott  foU 
eben  bußfertigen -©unbent,  bie  lltb  mit  bitten  unb  fleben  im  @lau6ctl  ju 
<*>£>a  nmiben,  in  feinem  2Bort  (aborting  jugefagt:  60  fragt  ficfcSnun, 
roarunt/  ober  um  roa$,  fic  am  erflen  ju  bitten  nptbig? 
21.  Q^eibirge  Dein  Sintiig  fcon  meinen  (SünDen/  unD  tilge  alle 
meine  Sftiffttbat.  ©cbaffe  in  mir  &Ott  ein  reinem  £erfc/  unD 
gib  mir  einen  neuen  gett>iflfen  @ei|t.  bewirf  mieb  niebt  i>on  Dei« 
nem  2Ingeftd)t/  unD  nimm  Deinen  Seifigen  Seift  niebt  t)on  mir. 
^tröfte  mieb  tvieDer  mit  Deiner  »öülffe;  unD  Der  freuDige  @ei(l 
entbalte  mieb.  ^Pf.  $  x#  n«  1*.  1?.  14. 

Sc  28.  2B«i  foil  man  atibdtcn  ? 

21.  Sa 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  75 


m  x  43  x  • 

&  ©a  fpracfc  $£fus  ju  fl>m:  (Dem  Teufel)  bebe  bf<$  »eg 
ton  mir/  ©aeart/  Dann  es  flehet  gefcbriebett;  ©u  folt  anbdtett 
©Ott  Deinen  *ö£rrn/  unt)  ibm  allein  Dienen.  9#atf.  4/  io* 
Sr.  29.  3n  roelcfiem  tarnen  foil  man  Den  bimmlifcften  5Batec  an6dun? 

2(.  SB5af>rItdf>/  tvabrfid)/  id)  fage  eucl;:  ©o  il}V  ben  93ater  e£* 
was  bitten  treibet  in  meinem  tarnen,  fo  wirb  etö  eud)  geben* 
SSiSfjer  fjabt  t*J>r  nichts  gebaten  in  meinem  tarnen.  SMttef/  fo 
werbet  l&mefjmen/  Daß  eure  gmifce  t>oüfommen  fep*  3of>.i6/ 
23,  24. 

St  jo,  SBBie  fort  imfer  &itit  ferner  gefc&e&en? 

2L  ©arum  fage  icf)  euc^t  2(üeS/  was  ibr  bittet  in  eurem  ©e* 
bat/  glaubet  nur/  Daß  ibrs  empfaben  werbet/  fo  tt>frbö  euefr  wer* 
Den.  50?arc-  ii/  24.  3ac.  1/  3  bis  6. 

gr.  ji*  aßie  foa  unfer  ©ebat  ferner  eingert^fU  fetfri*  baß  ©ir  crX>6cee 

©crDen  ? 

21.  ©aö  fjt  Die  gfeubigfeit  Die  wir  baten  ju  tbnt/  $a{?/  fo  tt>tr 
etwas  bitten  nad)  feinem  Rillen/  fo  boret  er  uns.  i  3fof>*  r / 14- 

Sr.  3«*  2B«nn  mm  Der  ©eifl  midig,  aber  Die  tfrdffte  De$  ©lauDenS  iU 
fcfcmacf),  n>er  ftilfft  Diefer  ©drcatbbcit  auf  im  ©ebat? 

2(.  ©er  ©eift  bilfftunferer  @cbwad)beit  auf.  ©enn  tt>it 
toiffen  nid)t  was  wir  bdten  fallen/  wie  ftc^ö  öebübref/  fonbern  De* 
©eijt  felbft  fctttrftt  unS  äufS  befte/  mit  unausfprecblicben  feuf* 
£en.  ©er  aber  Die  »Serben  forfeit/  Der  wi$;  was  Des  @eifle£ 
©inn  fei>:  ©enn  er  vertritt  Die  ^eiligen/  nac^bem  baS  ©Ö^SI 
ßefdllet*  Üv6m.  8/  2^  27* 

3c.  *  *.  3d  Danno*  ©ÖtteS  tfrafft  in  folgen  ©ebroacben  mächtig,  aarni 
fie  iljre  ©cijmac&beit  mit  Demütigem  unD  jerfnirfc&tem  ftafttn,  nacb  Dem 
SKaa$  i&re$  ©laubenS/  mit  bitten  unt)  fliegen,  (äffen  cor  ©£>££ 
funD  njei'Den? 

21.  ©enn  atfo  fpriebt  ber  f^o^e  unb  erbäbene/  Der  ewtglicj) 
wobnet/  Des  SRame  beilig  tfh  ©er  icf)  in  Der  £6l)e  unD  im  #ei* 
Jigtbum  wofyne/  unD  bei)  Denen/  fo  jerfcbfageneS  unD  Demütiges 
©eijieS  |tnD/  auf  Daß  id)  erquiefe  Den  ©eift  Der  geDemütbigtenA 
tmb  Das  #erß  Der  jerfebfagenen.  3d)  n>tü  niebt  immevbar  ba* 
Dem/  unb  nieftt  ewiglid)  jtirnen/  fonDerrt  es  foil  fcon  meinem  2ln* 
geftdjt  ein  ©eifi  twbetv  unb  icfy  will  Stetem  madden;  3ef.  f  i* 
ir.  it 

Sc.  H.  ©  til  «i5  äffen  angefubrtert  B^gnijfen  5.  £(5'rifft  flac  w  Mi* 
(!el)en,  Daß  e^  an  Q)DM$  ©eiten,  wegen  Der  Sftenfcöen  35etebnmg  ni*t  fel>s 
(et,  ob  febon  unfer  ©laube  febroaeb/  n>ann  er  nur  redjter  föejlalt  t)or  ©Ott 
W#  fo  fomt  ©O«  wnferer  ©cb«?a*beit  De*  SlaubenS  in  ^>ul(T.  ©ann  Der 

3  @Uii$f 


76       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


®    X    44    )(    « 

©toufic  ifl  eine  SBürtfung  beg  ^eiligen  ©eifleS  in  uttf,  mann  air  nur  ten? 
felbcn  in  un*  rooaen  roürcfen  lafien.  <5o  lange  aber  Der  Unglaube  in  uns 
Die  Oberhaut)  bebalf,  fo  roirefet  Der  bofe  ©eilt  Dur*  Den  Unglauben  2Ber* 
tfe  De$  Unglaubens  nebmli*  alle  Unreinig!eif,  Unfriebe,  unn>a&r&cit,un* 
gcre*tigfeit,  un\)  alles  ungbttli*e  SBcfcn  in  Den  tfinDern  Del  Unglaubens, 
uoDur*  ©DttcS  3orn  unD  beriefet  juc  etraffe  über  aaeg  ungottli*e 
SBefcn  fommt.  3|1  nun  Die  grag:  SBann  ©Oireg  ©erieftf,  über  eine 
<5taDt  oDer  £anD  geDrduet  mirD,  unD  no*  fo  Diel  (£rfäntnü$  übrig,  Dap 
man  ernennen  tan,  Daßunfere  ©ünDe  unD  Ungerechtigkeit,  Durcf)  Denilnglau* 
ten  fol*e  ©trajfe  t)erurfa*ct,  unD  erfennet  unD  befennet  fein  Unrecf)t,  unD 
trautet  naef)  jKe*t  unD  ®ere*tigfeit,  fol*e$  mieDer  Dur*  ber$li*e  SBuffe 
im  (3lauptn  aufjuriebten,  rca$  Dur*  Den  Unglauben  unD  feine  2Bcrtfe  i(t 

oeriDuflet  roorDen;  ob  no*  in  &DtttB  SBort  önaDen*&erbeifrung 

»orbanDcn  ? 

21.  ©ebet  burd)  Die  ©äffen  $u  Serufalenv  unb  flauet  unb 
«fahret/  unb  fuc^ct  auf  if>rcr  (Straffen,  ob  it)r  j'emanb  finbet/  ber 
retfx  tbue/  unb  nad)  bem  ©tauben  frage/  fo  will  id)  ifyr  sndbig 
fcpti.  3fercm.  5/  *.  £jed).  18/22,  *j. 

gr.  js.  2Bann  aber  Die  SMebrung  ni*f  folget? 

2(.  ©Ott  iff  ein  rechter  9\icf)ter,  unb  ein  ©Ott  ber  tdg^ 
lid)  brauet,  Sßill  man|td)nid)t  befebmi/fo  bat  er  fein  ©cb^erbt 
getve^ct/  unb  feinen  SBogen  gefpannet/  unb  jielet;  unb  f>at  i>a* 
rauf  gelegt  töbtiiebe  ©ef$o§,  feine  Pfeile  6at  er  jugeric&tet  ju 
Derberben.  tyi.  7/ 12-13. 14* 

gr.  36.  2Beil  e$  na*  Dem  gaa,  Don  «Ratur  mit  Dem  ®?enf*en  fo  befielt 

ift,  Daß  er  gern  t)or  roeife  unD  (lug  roia  gebalten  roerDeu:  <Sr  aber  feine 

2Bei$beit  6ffiter5  in  fingen  fu*et,  Die  cor  ®0££  nur  für  Sborbeit  %u 

balten  werDen;  fo  ijl  Die  grag:  Sur*  rcel*e  (£igenf*afft  man  einen  %n? 

fang  in  Der  roabren  3Bei$beit  nebmen  fan? 

%  Sie  gurd)t  be$  £g9v9ft*  ift  ber  2ßei$beit  Anfang,  Daö 
ift  eine  feine  Älugfyeit,  tver  barnad)  tbut/  beö  ?ob  bleibet  ercig* 
lieb.  ^3f.  in/  10. 

gr.  37.  2Beil  Die  gur*t  DeS  ££rrn  DerSBeiSbcit  Qlnfang,  fo  if]  e$  w 
infonDerbeit  audi)  febr  nüfjli*  oor  Die  3ugenD,  roann  fie  all  ibr  Sßornebmen 
in  Der  gur*t  ©DaeS  anfangen? 

21*  2)eS  $£rren  gurd)t  iff  Slnfang  sum  lernen/  bie  Üvudjfo* 
fen  -öeradjten  2ßci$beit  unb  3ucbt,  ©pr.  (Sal.  1/  7- 
gr  ,8-  ©0  man  roeife  unD  »erflanDig  leben  t»\ü,  roa$  muß  manmeiDen? 

21.  (Siebe,  bie  gurebt  be$  ££rrn/  bae  ijl  bie  ^ei^ljeit/  unb 
meiben  btö  Ö36fe/  baö  ifl  Q3er|lanb.  »öiob  z%f  28. 

gr.  39.  ^an  man  au*  &a*ri*t  finDen,  reo  Die  rna^re  fffiei^beit  ibre 
SBobnunfl  unD  Verberge  nimmt  ? 

%  2>ie  533d^eit  fomt  nidjt  in  eine  boöJjaffttflc  (Seele/  unb 

wofjnet 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  77 

•    X     4f     X    • 

mhntt  mcftt  in  einem  ?eibe  Der  ©ünbe  unterfoorffett-  Sann 
ber  Zeitige  ©#/  fo  vecbt  teeret/  fleugt  Die  abgtoifcben/  iinbn>et* 
c&et  t>on  Den  rucfrlofert/  tt)elcf)e  gejlrafft  werben  mit  Den  ©ütiben/ 
Die  über  fte  wrfodnget  tt>er&en.  Sann  Die  2Bei$beit  ifl  fo  fromm, 
Dag  fte  Den  Saferer  nicljt  ungejtrafff  (äßr.  Senn  ©Ott  ifl  geu* 
Se  über  alle  ©eDancfen/  tust)  erfennet  alle  «öerfcetr  geroi£/  unD 
fröret  alle  <2Borte.  Senn  Der  2BeItfrei*  iff  t>oll  ©eifleä  De* 
^€D\3v^/  tmb  Der  Die  3?eDe  fennet/  ift  allentyäfben,  ©arum 
fan  Der  uicfyt  »erborgen  bleiben/  Der  Da  Unrecht  rebet,  unD  Das 
3ve*t/  fo  ibn  {trafen  foil/  mtrb  fein  nic&t  fehlen.  SBeiöfe.  ©♦  i/ 
t).  4  biö  8* 

Sc  40.  2ßo  roobnet  fte  bann  ? 

21.  Sie  gurdji  Des  J&grrn  tfi  Der  $BeiSf)eit  Anfang,  unD  ift 
im  $erßengrunD  allein  bet>  Denen  ©laubigen,  unD  n>ol)ne£  allein 
bet)  Den  auöemdblten  2öeibevn/  unD  man  ftnbet  fte  allein  bei) 
Den  gerechten  unD  glaubigen,  ©trad)  i/  16. 

gr.  41.  feilen  ©Da  feinen  ©oftn  in  biefe  2Belt  gefanbf  bat,  Daß  wie 
tmrd)  il)rt  leben  foaen,  roelcbcr  un$  in  £ebr  unb  Üeöeit  ein  IBor&ilb  gelafien, 
baß  wie  foaen  nadjfolgen  feinen  gujjtfapffen :  melcfeer  uns  auefc  t)on  <SD££ 
gemaebt  i|l  jur  2Bei$beit,  jur  (Berecbtigfeit,  aur  Heiligung  unb  jur  Qürlo* 
fung.  ©o  fragt  fieftf:  Ob  man  beim  aueb  noeb  ferner  notbig  fjat  jufor* 
fc&en  nacb  2Bei$beit,  unb  auf  pbilofopbifcben  boben  ©cbulen  (lubieren  foflf/ 
in  ben  Söücbern  ber  Wlofopben,  unb  Sebre  ber  Stfenfc&en,  n>ie 
e$  in  ber  SBBelt  gebrducblicb? 

%  ©ebet  ju,  Daß  euct>  niemanD  beraube  bur#  Die  $&ifofö* 
pbia  unD  lofe  Q5erfül)rung  nacl)  Der  50?enfcben*£ebre/  unD  naefr 
Der  <2ße(t  ©afcungen/  unD  niebt  nac&  (Sfjrijto.  Senn  in  ityw 
wobnet  Die  ganße  gülle  Der  ©ottbeit  feibbafftig/  unD  if)r  fet)D 
twllfommen  in  il>m,  welker  ift  Das  #aupt  aller  gürftentbümer 
unD  öbrigfeit.  fjofoft.  z;  8, 9. 10. 

gc.  42.  Borinnen  foa  man  bann  betfdnbig  (lubieren  mh  üer&leiben? 

2(.  Su  aber  bleibe  in  Dem/  Das  Du  gelernet  Ijafi/  unD  Dir  t>er^ 
trauet  ify  {internal  Du  roeifieflf/  wn  tt>em  Du  gefernet  f>aff-  UnD 
n>eil  Du  t)on  5ftrtD  auf  Die  ^eilige  ©grifft  tteiffefb  fan  Diel)  Die* 
felbige  unterweifen  jur  ©eligfeit/  Dur*  Den  ©lauten  an  <l\)K\* 
fto  3Sfu.  Senn  alle  ©grifft  öon  ©Ott  eingegeben/  ifl  nüfc 
jur  Sebre/  jur  ©traffe/  jur  25efierung;  jur  Sättigung  in  ber 
©ereefrtigfeit;  Daß  ein  SÜtotfd)  ©ötteS  fei)  Dollfommen/  ju  aU 
(en  guten  Verden  gefc^ieft.  z  %m.  },  14.  bis  17, 
Sr.  4}.  ^Beilen  uns  bie  %.  ©grifft,  mann  man  i&r  folger,  jur  ©eligfeit 

S  *  untertveifet/ 


78       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


$    X    4*    )(    & 

untermeifef/  unb  unfer  erlaube  auf  nid)t§  anberS,  al*  a&efn  auf  ben  einigen 
©0£t/  unb  Den  er  gefanbt  l)at  Sbriltum  ju  grünen,  »elc&tf  t)cr  rccbtc 
3Beg  au$  'Dem  £oD  in$  ['eben  311  geben,  aueb  Di«  2Babrbeif  unb  Da$  £eben 
iß;  fo  i|l  nun  Die  gragc:  Ob  man  aueb  auf  Diefem  2Bege,  bee  jiyn  £ebe& 
fubrer,  €rcui$  unD  Sriibfal  311  geroarten'bat? 

21.  ©ie  fldrdf etert  Die  (Seelen  Der  Singer*  unb  ermabnetett 
f?C;  Dag  j?e  im  ©fauben  blieben/  unb  baj?  wir  Duvcb  Diel  $rüb* 
fal  muffen  in  Dag  3\eid)  ©ötteg  geben-  21p.  @.  14/  **♦ 

gr.  44.  38a$  febaffet  Denn  bie  Srübfal  üoe  duften,  fo  man  beftdnbig  ge* 
bultig  big  an£  (£nDc  ücrbleibt? 

21.  Unfere  %rübfa(/  Die  jeitlicb  unt)  leiebt  if?/  febaffet  eine  e* 
n>ige  un&  über  alle  maflen  wiebtige  #crrficbfeit/  uns/  Die  wir 
niebt  [eben  auf  ttöä  fiebtbare/  fonDern  auf  Dag  unjtcbtbare.  SDenit 
m$  ftcf;f bar  if?/  Dag  ijl  jeitlicb  >  wag  aber  unfiebtbar  if?/  Dag  ift 
ewig,  z  dor.  4/ 17.18. 

gr.  4?.  2Beil  man  ben  Sßeg  311m  eroigen  2tbm  fofcfnnal  finDet,baf?  man 
buicf)  Diel  drcnij  unD  Xrübfal  in$  f)tctcf)  (SDttts  eingeben  muß:  <5o  wirb 
^  rnobl  böfbfl  notbig  fetjn,  ben  lieben  ©Oft  tdglifl)  um  Äraft  be$  ©lau* 
btn$,  unb  um  öeDult  imb  £rofl  ansufleben? 

2(.  ©ebuft  aber  ijl'  eueb  notb/  auf  Dag  ibr  Den  SOßiHen  ©öt* 
feg  tt)i\t,  tinD  Die  QJerbeiffimg  empfabef.  Senn  noeb  über  eim 
Herne  SEßeifc  fo  wirb  fommett/  Der  Da  fommen  foD/  unD  niebt 
Derjiebeu.  ©er  gerechte  aber  tvirt)  beö  ©laubeng  leben:  2Bct 
aber  weichen  wirb/  an  Dem  wirb  meine  (Seele. fein  ©efallen  ba* 
ben.  2Bir  aber  jtnb  niebt  »on  Denen/  Die  Da  weisen  unD  Der* 
Dämmt  werben/  fonDern  Don  Denen/  Die  Da  glauben;  unD  Die 
(Seele  erretten.  ©>r.  ia/  36.  big  ??. 

gr.  46.  Spat  man  au*  9lnf«&fong  auf  biefem  2Beg  $u  erwarten? 

21.  UnD  weil  Du  &03S  lieb  »arejl/  fo  muf?g  fo  fcpn,  obne 
Sinfecbtung muf?ef?  bu  niebt  bleiben/  auf  Dag  Du  bewa&ret  wür* 
bef?.  ^obia  izr  13. 
gr.  $7.  .Sann  »erben  Die  frommen  bureb  Sretrtj  unb  Srubfal  berodbrt? 

21.  £)enn  gleicb  wie  Dag  ©olb  burcfyg  getter/  alfo  »erben Wer 
fo  &ött  gefallen/  burebä  geuer  ber  ^rüibfal  bcwdbret.  @ir  2, 5. 

5r.  48.  6tebet  tf  mit  Den  Sbriflen  auf  Dem  S33eg  sum  £cben  in  folgern 
3u|lanD/  Daß  fic  Durcf)  Da$  geuer  Der  £rübfal  muffen  bemdbrt  unD  geläutert 
rocrDen,  fo  bat  fiebia  ein  Gbiifl  in  Dicfec  «ißclt  niebt^  anbtti  iuüerfeben, 
a\§  Da^  er  neb "jur  3lnfecbtunq  febiefen  muß? 

2i.  ?0?ein  Äinb/  mit  Du  ®öttc$  Wiener  fet;n/  fo  febiefe  bid> 
3ur  21nfccbtung.  (Siracb  2/  u 

3r.  49.  2Bie  bat  man  tut)  ferner  in  foleben  Slnfecbtungen  suoerbalten? 

2t.  Steine  lieben  SSrüber/  aftüt  ti  eitel  greuDe/  wenn  ibr  itt 

mancherlei? 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  79 

•    X    47    X    # 

TOattd>er(et> Slnfed^f uttg  fallet;  unb  wifiTet/  ba§  euer  ©foube/  fo  er 
recbtfdjaffen  iji/  ©ebult  Wurcfet.  3ac.  i/  z*  $♦ 
3r.  ? o.  533irl>  foldje  Srubfal  tint)  .Slnfedjtung  Den  £bri(len  urn  be&raiUert 
Don  &Ott  jugeftbttft,  bafi  fie  allein  foflen  bctt)df)ct  bleiben;  ober  haben  fie 

au*  noef)  fonberlicbe  2Biberfa*eiv  um  be$  Samens  (H)ritfi  Witten? 

9L  (Solc&eä  habe  tdt>  ju  euej)  gerebt/  bag  ifjr  cuef)  niebt  ärgert» 
@ie  werben  euep  in  ben  Q5ann  tbun:  <5ö  fommt  aber  C>ie  3eie 
bag;  wer  euef)  tobtet;  wirb  meinen,  er  tfyue  ®Ott  einen  2)tenjt 
baran*  Unb  fofdt>eö  werben  fie  eud)  barum  tbun/  bag  fie  weber 
meinen  Q3ater  noeb  mid)  ertenneii.  Slber  folcbe^  babe  id)  ju 
eud)  gerebt/  auf  t>$  wann  bie  Seit  fommen  wirb,  baf?  ifer  barati 
gebenefet/  paß  tcf)$  eueb  gefagt  ^abe*  3ob*  16/ 1  btö  4* 
Stf.  ?  *.  So  bor  i*  »ol)l/  man  bat  auf  biefem  fcbmalen  Sßeg  bei  Seben* 
aueb  Seinbew  tjermwben? 

%  2(d)  *0£n>  wie  finb  meiner  geinbe  fo  biet/  unb  fegen  ftdj 
fo  Diel  wiber  mid),  Q3iel  fagen  t>on  meiner  (Seele:  @ie  f)üt  Ui* 
tie  £üfffe  beo  @0<£$  <3ela.  feqq.  $f>  3;  i,  2.      . 

gr.  s*.  5Bie  fod  ft*  aber  ein  (Sbritf  gegen  feine  leiblicbe  $einbe  »erftat 

ien;  unb  ma*  bat  er  in  feiner  Öjritfltcben  9iitterf*ajTt  Diffaflß  t>oc 
£)rbre  oon  feinem  tfonig  ? 

$(♦  3d)  aber  fage  eueb ;  £kbit  eure  geinbe,  fegnet  ik  eud)  flu* 
d)en/  tbut  wobl  benen  bie  eud)  &affen#  bittet  für  bie/  fo  eueb  be* 
(eibigen  unb  »erfolgen*  SOtotfy.  r  /  44» 

gr  $;.  teilen  ein  Sbriff,  feine  leiblicbe  geinbe  bur*  \>it  Mt  uberwitu 

Den  foa,  fo  fragt  fi*$,  roa$  benn  t)\t  Siebe  bor  ©emebr  (raget/  bem 
Seinb6cbabenju*btm? 

2(.  SMe  Siebe  itf  langmütig  unb  freunblidv  bie  Zkbt  eijfert 
iiic&ü/  bie  Siebe  treibet  md)t  mutbwillen/  jte  blebet  ftcb  niebt/  jte 
(lellet  fidj  titele  ungebdrbig,  ße  fuebet  nic&t  i*tö  il>re/  fie  Idfiet fiel) 
nid)t  erbittern/  jte  trautet nujjt  nad)  «Scbabetv  fte  freuet  pd&  niebt 
wanns  unrecht  jugebet/  fte  freuet  fid)  aber  wannS  reebt  jugebet* 
(Sie  »ertraget  alletf/  fte  glaubet  alleä,  jte  bojfet  ade*/  fie  bulbet 
alles.  1  <£ot\  i^/4b!^7. 

gr.  54.  5Bie  ifl  e$  bann  beffellf  um  \)U  gei|Hi*e  geinbe,  roaS  öoc  S&afc 

fen  unb  ©ewebe  ber  Sbritflicben  üiitterfcbafft  werben  bieju  erforbert? 

31.  ©enn  ob  wir  wobl  im  gleifcb  wanbelU/  fo  jlreiten  wir  bod) 
ni*t  fleifcblicber  2Beife/  benn  bie  2Bajfen  unferer  Svitterfcbajft 
ftnb  niebt  fleifcbfid)/  fonbern  md^tig  für  @ött,  ju  twjtoren  bie 
55e»ejiigungen/  bamit  wir  »erjliren  bie  Slnfcbfdge  unb  alle  £6* 
(K/  bte  jtcb  erbebet  wiber  i>tö  grfdnfmß  ®Qttc$,  unb  nehmen 
gefangen  alle  53ernunjft  unter  ben  ©eborfam  e&rifti.  *  Forint 


80       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


*     X     48      X     & 

Jjc.  ?*.  ©inb  bic  2Ba(fen  gemelbter  SKüferfc&afTf  m'cfjf  fleifc&li*/  unt> 
toirD  an*  nicfjt  fleifcbli*  gejlritteu:  fo  miiflm  e$  §cinbe  fem?,  Denen  auf 
cine  anbere  20eife  2Biber|lanb  getban  werben  mufj.  2Bec  fmb  nun 
aac  Diefc  geinbe? 

2(.  Silicat/  meine  trüber!  im  ftaref  in  Dem  #<&rn,  unb  in 
ber  €0?ac&e  feiner  ©fdrcfe.  %kt)tt  an  ben  £arnifd)  ©üttcS, 
baß  ibr  begeben  fönnet  gegen  Die  litfigen  anlaufe  Des  Teufel«. 
SDenn  wir  fyaben  nid)t  mitgleifcfr  unbSSlut  ju  fdmpfcn^ fonbern 
mit  Surften  unb  ©ewaltigen,  nef)m(id),  mit  Den  #(£rren  ber 
2Belt/  Die  in  Der  ginfternif  biefer  2Bclt  Ocrrfcfrciv  mit  ben  bo* 
fen  ©eitlem  unter  bem  #immeL  (£pl>.  6,  io,  n#  iz«, 
gr.  56.  6inbba$  bie  geinbe  atte^bie  man  u&crroinbenmuli? 

2i.  £)ann  alle«;  mi  t>on  ©O  :$/S  gebogen  ifr  uberwinbet 
tie  2Bc(t/  unb  unfer  ©laube  ijt  ber  ©(eg,  ber  bk  2ße(t  über* 
ttunben  l)at-  1  3of>.  5;  4* 

gr.  57.  Sinb  nod)  mc&r  geinbe,  meiere  ttibec  bie  Seele  (Ireiten? 

■21.  Sieben  95riit)ct>  icf)  ermahne  eudv  als  bie  gremblingen 
unb  pilgrim :  enthaltet  euch  t)on  fleifcfylicben  Stiffen,  welcfce  wi^ 
ber  bie  (Seele  tf  reiten,  1  tyit  z,  u.  unb  ferner:  @o  (affetnurt 
bie  (gunDe  nicf)t  fyerrfeben  in  eurem  jlerMic&en  £eibe/  ifjr  ©efyor* 
fam  ju  leiten  in  if>ren  Stiften.  3?6m.  6/ 10. 

gr.  58.  Törinnen  muß  man  feine  sgjacjjt  unb  Stdrtfe  »ermebren  gegen 
folcf)e  geinbe? 

2(.  gulelt,  meine  trüber!  U\)b  tfarcf  in  bem  ££rrn,  unb  in 
ber  $?ad)t  feiner  ©tdrcfe*  gpfj.  6, 10. 
gr.  59.  ^Ät  man  auef)  O^acöricfet,  baß  ficb  einflampf  unb  ©freit  erhoben? 

21.  Unb  eö  erbub  fid£>  ein  (Streit  im  Fimmel :  SCttidjael  unb 
feine  gngef  (dritten  mit  bem  S5rad)en,  unb  ber  3)rad)e  jtatt,unb 
feine  gngel;  unb  fiegeten  nicf>t/  aud)  warb  tyre  ©tatte  nid)t 
mebr  funben  im  £immef.  Unb  e$  ftarb  auögeworffen  bergrof* 
fe  3)rad)e/  bie  alte  ©change;  bie  ba  beißet  ber  Teufel  unb@a* 
tm$,  ber  bk  gan^e  <2tßeft  »erführet/  unb  warb  geworffen  auf 
bie  Grbenr  unb  feine  gngel  würben  au$  b^in  geroorjfem  Off- 

12/  7.  8.9. 

gr.  60.  md  nun  biefer  6ofe  geinb,  im  Fimmel  ifl  &eflritten,unb  aucf> 
fi^ertounDett  unb  au^gefloffen,  aueb  il)m  feine  Statte  im  Fimmel  meftr  er* 
funben  ift:  2Bir  aber  fo  lang  mir  auf  erben  roobnen,  einen  foleben  Seinb, 
unb  Seelen  s^Rorbcc  m  beüreitcn  ba5cn,  unb  einen  folgen  Äamptf  au$ 
eigenen  Ärdfftcn  in«  3Bercf  m  richten  i(l  üergebens,  ido  un«  ©£>££  ni*t 
mit  ber  gßait  feiner  göttlichen  ^rctjft  unb  ©tdrtfe  ju  ^ulffe  fommt,  unb 
Der  tfarefe  ^>elb  au^  ©aoiD«  ©lamm,  ber  bem  liefen  feinen  9iaub  nebmeit 

fan/ 


THE  SCHUL-OKDNUNG  81 

&  x  49  x  m 

tan,  tm$  nfdjt  in  feine  93^fc6fvmuna  nimmt,  fo  roirb  bfefec  geinb  tin*  ben 
2Beg  3um  #imwelrei*  fucften  au  cerfperren.      ©ann  mit  unfer  $flati)t 

ifini*t$  getban,  n>ir  finb  gar  bafD  aii^  eigenen  ^rafften  niebergeleget? 

21.  UnD  nun  fprtdP>t  Der  £&t,  Der  Diel)  gefdjaffen  l?at,  I^acob, 
unD  Did)  gemalt  Ijat  3frael:  Surfte  t>tcf>  nidjt,  Denn  id)  babe 
bid)  evldfef/  id)  babe  Did)  bct>  Deinem  Tanten  geruffen,  Du  btjt 
mein.  Senn  fo  Du  Durcbs  2Bafler  gefrejt/  trill  ic^  bei)  Dir  fepn, 
&a§  Did)  Die  ©tröme  nicf)t  t>etfduffen/  unD  fo  Du  ins  geuer  ge* 
l>cft,  folt  Du  nid)t  brennen/  unD  Die  Stamme  foil  Dicf>  nityt  an* 
jünDen.  feqq.  ^ef.  43>  »•  *•  *c. 

gr  6r.  3(1  biefe  SÖeröctffung  \in$  armen  jum  6*u$,  fo  ftnb  rcir/ft 

recftt  glütffelig  in  allem,  roa$  un$  na*  ®0ut$  Tillen  begegnen  fan  ? 

21.  SBaä  wollen  wir  Denn  weiter  fagen  ?  3(1  ©ö^  für 
uns  wer  mag  wiDer  uns  feptt?  SGßelcber  aud)  feines  eigene« 
(Softes  nid)tberfd)onet,fonDem  \\)t\  für  uns  alleDal)in  gegeben: 
2ßie  folte  er  uns  mit  ibm  nidjt  aHeS  fdjencfen  ?  9töm.  8/  31-32. 
unD  fo  ferner  bis  ju  <£nDe. 

gr.  $2.  2Bobur*  baben  bte  ©laubigen  biefen  geinb  übewunben? 

21.  UnD  fte  l)aben  tf>n  überwunDen,  Durd)  Des  Lammes  ÖMuf/ 
unD  Dur*  Das  2Bort  tl>ver  geugnif,  unD  fjaben  if)r  £eben  nifyt 
geliebet  big  an  Den  <£ob.  öffenb.  iz,  11. 

gr.  6;.  2Bamt  man  bur*  ebriflt  £ob  unb  &luf,  jur  Ueberminbung 
fommen  fan,  fo  man  fi*  in  roabrem  tölauben  an  €t)ri(lum  übergibt,  fo  bat 
man  ja  eine  Teilung,  toorinnen  man  ftc&er  i|t  m>r  biefem  geinb 
unb  Seelen  Berber? 

%  Söer  9?ame  DeS  £€rrn  itf  ein  befteS  @d)fo§,  Der  ©erecfc 
tetöujft  Dabin,  unD  wirb  befdjirmet.  @pr.  @a(.  18/  10. 

gr.  64  feilen  aber  biefer  geinb  unb  Seelen  *$)?orber,  unfere  erflen 

eitern  im  yamitf  aufy  in  biefer  SBeftung  angetroffen,  roel**  er  mit  ®u 

wait  ni*t  baut  einnehmen  fonnen,  bat  jte  aber  bur*  £i|t  unb  betrug  b(u 

t)in  gebracht,  baß  fte  biefe  ffieflung  oon  felbflen  übergeben;  fo  iff  Die  grage: 

£)b  man  auti)  in  biefer  Sßeffung  no*  Urfa*  bat,  auf  Der  2Ba*t  3u  fei;n? 

21.  ©ei)D  nücbtern  unD  wachet/  Denn  euer  2GiDerjacj)er  Der 
Teufel;  gef>et  umber,  t)yk  ein  brülfenDer  Um,  unD  fud)et,  wef* 
d)en  er  berfd)linge*  Sem  t&iberfleljet  üefi  im  ©tauben,  unD  wif* 
fet,  Daß  eben  Diefelbigen  Seiben  übet  eure  SSrüber  in  Der  2ßelt 
geljen.  i  9>ef.  5r  8.  ?♦ 

gr.  6y.  2ßie  lang  ö<tt  man  noftig  »ac!er  w  few? 

2(.  @o  fet)D  nun  n>arfer  allejeit/  unD  bätet,  t>4  ifyr  würDfg 
werben  möget,  ju  entfliegen  biefem  allen,  Das  gefeiten  foil,  unb 
ju  flehen  wr  Des  9??cnf*en  ©ofrti.  Sue*  ai,  35, 

©4  gr.^. 


82       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


*  X   ro  X  » 

gr.  66.  2ßa$  f)aben  folc&e  fH5dd&tec  tor,  ober  jum  5elb*©ef*ret)? 
21.  2Bacbct;  liefet  im  ©toubeti/  fci;b  mdnnlidv  unD  fei>i> 
flarcf.  alle  eure  Singe  lajfet  in  ber  Siebe  gefeiten,  i  Soring. 

16,  13.  14. 

5r.  67.  2ßrt$  bor  gietwei)  miifTen  fie  anjtefjen,  unb  (ragen ? 

%  ©0  jiefyct  nun  an  als  Die  2iuSem>al)lten  ©ötreS/  <Set'(t' 
gen  unb  ©  cliebten/  l>erß(icf)eS  Erbarmen/  greunblid)!  eit/  !£)emuti)> 
(Sanftmut^/  ©ebult;  unb  »ertraget  einer  tan  anbern/  unb  t>er* 
gebet  eucf?  unter  einanber/  fo  jemanb  5?lage  l)at  rciDer  ben  an* 
bern :  ©letdjrme  (EfjrtffuS  eucf)  »ergeben  bat/  alfo  aucf)  il>r.  Ue* 
ber  alles  aber  jiefyet  an  Die  Siebe,  bie  ba  ift  Das  $5anD  Der  33o[l* 
fommenfjeit.  (£otof]T.  3>  I2<.  *3>  14.  a.  f»  f.  biß  17. 

gr.  68,  2Borinn<n  befielet  ibre5Crieg^9tü(limg^armfct)imb©(mebr 
T>a$  fte  taglicb  erqreiffen,  unb  in  iBereitf^affr  babm  muffen/  wann  jte  biefen 
eeeletujeinb  beflreiien  urib  beilegen  rooflen? 

21.  grgreiffet  Den  #armfd)  @Otte$/  auf  Dag  i(>r/  n>enn  DaS 
bofe  ©tunblein  fömmt  SOßiöerftanb  tfjun,  unb  alleS  tt>oljl  aus* 
rieten/  unD  baS  gelb  behalten  moget*  ©P  flehet  nun/  urngur* 
fet  eure  Jenben  mit  ber  2Bal)rf)eit/  unb  angejogen  mit  bent 
ÄrebS  ber  ©erecfytigfeit,  unt>  an  deinen  geftiefelt/  als  fertig  ju 
treiben  baS  Swwgelium  Des  griebenS,  bamit  if>r  bereit  fepb.  £3or 
allen  fingen  aber  ergreiffet  bm  (Sc&ilb  beS@(aub*nS/  mit  xotU 
d)em  ibr  auSl6fd)en  finnet/  alle  feurige  Pfeile  beS  ?S6fen>tc^t^ 
Unb  neb'met  im  #elm  beS  £et)fs,  unb  baS  @d;merbt  Des  @ei* 
ftes,  meines  ift  baS  2Bort  ©Otte*.  Unb  batet  (lets  in  aüem 
Slnliegen,  mit  bitten  unb  flehen  im  ©etjt,  unb  n>ad)et  baju,  mit 
allem  2lnl>alten/  unb  gießen  fur  alle  £eiliflen.  gpbef.  6, 
t>.  X3.  big  18* 


e  s»  o  e 


THE  SCHÜL-ORDXUXG  83 

ßinbtt  *  gicWetn. 

ober 

Ztufmuntetuttg  ber  Rinbtt* 

tltcL  3$  xreig  ein  BlümUw  ^ubfc^  im&  fern. 

SDmmt,  liebe  ßinber,  foramt  herlJet), 
lint)  lernet  3<SSU3R  fennen  : 
gonratt  bog  unb  feht,  wie  gut  er  jet?/ 
SSBie  fromm  unb  treu; 
tfommt,  thut  ihn  2»ei|br  nennen. 

2.  D!  fehet  feine  greunblicjjfeitf 
Sie  fid)  3u  euef)  thut  neigen/ 
2Bie  herlief)  er  fi$  anerbeut 
€ucf)  allesetf/ 

ffiiet  gutes  3u  erzeigen. 

3.  £r  miff  eueft  fernen,  flia  tint)  fromm 
Stag  ©Dtte*  2BiHen  leben/ 

<£r  ruffet:  5ie6e^  tfinblein,  fomm! 
Unb.rcerbe  fromm/ 
3d)  »iff  bir  dlleS  geben. 

4.  St)/  tommt  bann  tfinber !  ge&t  bo#  fjer* 
3n  ggfu  ftjjone  e#ule 

£ort,  lernt,  unb  folget  feiner  $tt)r, 

Sie  Eectionen  jmb  m$t  fc^n>er# 
25a  few  eucft  her, 
Sluf  fetner  2Bei^fteit  Stuhle. 

5.  Sffiie  gut  i(l  es,  nne  f$tfn  unb  fcirv 
SBie  lieblid)  anjufehen: 

Sßattn  ^inber  recjjt  ge^orfam  fet)n, 
Unb  gern  allein; 
3«  3£©U  Seilte  gehen. 
.6,  Sa  Jemen  fte,  mit  £u(l  unb  Jreufy 
§Re$t  6aten,  lefen,  fingen, 
llnbfucfjen  ihre  gebend  3eit 
3n  £eiligfeit, 
Sflit  3SSÜ  hinzubringen. 
7.  £>!  fold)e  Äinber  habend  gut, 
©ie  roerben  eroig  mofjnen, 
3m  Himmelreich,  mit  frohem  9ftuth: 
§ßo  3SSU®  thut, 
Sen  frommen  ^int>ern  lohnen. 

S  4  *.  Ck- 


} 


84       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


&    X     5z     X    * 

8.  bewerben  ba,  tit  grofler  greub, 
2IU  tag  unt)  6timt>ert  lcb<m, 

ffcin  9inq|l,  fein  gttrcht,  fein  2rraurtgfeiff 
5tein  <6d)mer$  irnD  2eit>; 
2Birb  ft'e  t»a  meftr  umgeben. 

9.  Snim,  ricben^mber  lernet  gern, 
lint)  debet  ggfum  tmt>li$: 

Stent  ihm,  ate  eurem  <&OZZ  unb  £E3i9t3k 

llnb  fliehet  fern; 

*8on  affem,  was  nur  fitnblid). 

10.  Jolqt  nid)t  t>er  bdfen  fltnber  9totf, 
5>er  £duffer,  unt)  ber  ©pteler: 

Sie  euren  3(5@U5D?  nur  üerfpott/ 

$liti)t  liebet  ®D£X, 

*töd)t  fet)n  will  3£6tt  <5djtHer. 

11.  3Ra$t  ew$  mit #3gfu  redjt6efanf, 
Unt)  fi$t  ju  feinen  Stiffen: 

2)a  gebet  ihm  Die  recite  £anb, 
lint)  faqt:  £et)lanb! 
21$,  faffe  mid),  ©ic&  fuffen. 

12.  j^anqt  ihm  ate  Heine  ftitfterleity 
unfeinen  £iebeS<5lrmeu, 

llnb  fagt :  (£r  foae  gndbig  fegn, 
(Ju$  tfinberlein; 
lint)  euer  fid)  erbarmen. 

15.  £r  foil  eucf)  fegnen  mit  3Jerj!anb, 
SDaf?  ihr  baä  %>6\e  freuet, 
<S:r  foflf  eu<fy  werben  red)t  befanbt/ 
9lte  ein  >f>et)lanb, 
S)er  eucf)  Don  6unt>  befrenct. 

14.  3a  bittet  ihn,  er  wolle  1)0$/ 
Qrttd)  $u(l  unt)  5iebe  fdjemfen: 
(Bein  liebes,  fanffteS,  ft'iffeS  3°#> 
2U$  flinber  nod), 

3u  traqen  mit  bebenden. 

15.  (£r  foffe  euer  ^unqe^  £er$. 
3)?it  feiner  £tebe  füllen, 

2)a^  eS  (lets  bencfe  himmelwärts, 
llnb  alien  odjertj, 
6Beracf)t,  um  feinet  willen. 

16.  go,  tfinber,  hangt  ihm  herlief)  aty 
^Xcf).1  hangt  ihm  an  bie  £dnbe. 

llnb  fagt:  O  36SU!  führe  bann, 

EührunS,  fortan, 
>  fiiijr  uns,  bijj  ans  (Jnbe.1 


17,  S% 


THE  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  85 


•    X    S3    X 

*7.  5uF>r  ««ft  <m*  t>tefer  SBuflenetj/ 
£)e$  argen  2Belt>(£etummete, 
3n$  I8atterlant>/  wo  uns  erfreu, 
£>  3<£@U,  treu ! 
Sie  £errli«feit  De$  £immel$, 


@terb«£ieD. 


ITTet.  XPer  nur  ben  lieben  ©(Dtt  lift  WAltem 
Qf&O!  Fommet  Der,  if>r  9)?enf«en*#inDerJ 
<l  21«  fommt/  imt>  feftt  Die  $i«tigfeit! 
SDie  SHfcrd^tiöfeit/  Der  flogen  ©linDer, 
lint)  iforeS  gebend  eitelfeit. 
JDann  aM,  aUt$,  xoat  ibr  feljf/ 
g)a$  tragt  Die  £)bf«rifft:  ©  &ergef)H 

2.  3*  liege  fjier,  im  Sterbebette 
*8om  ©linDen  *  ®tfft  gan$  infifcirt, 
SD?ein  Qytift  roeif  feine  Ruty-- Statte, 
JDie  mir  Die  liebe  £anD  geriitf/ 

911$  nur  Den  Sfeamen  3(£fu  ejrif?/ 
£)er  mid)  im  £oD  mein  8e6ert  ifl. 

3.  5S>?em  seitlich  5e6en  ifl  oerflofftfy 
UnD  meine  Xage  finD  oorbet) : 

Sie  furfte  SBaflfaftrt  ifl  bef«loflen, 
€$  ifl  <in  mir  Die  £oDe$>ftet)f) 
2)o«  bin  i«  froft,  J^^Stm  3£§U  e&rift 
SDafj  Du  au«  mit  am  3let)6en  bifl. 
4»  3«  fab  Dur«  <&Ötte$  reiche  ©naDe, 
2)er  Seit  f«on  langfl/  gut  ^tad)t  gefagt: 
UnD  auf  Dem  («malen  3@fu$  $faDe, 
9ta«  njaftrer  Seelen  9*ul)  getra«t. 
S)o«  fab  i«  nid)t  getfan,  t»a$  taugt/ 
UnD  öiel  au  wenig  (Srnfl  gebrau«t. 

5.  21«  6£>££!  Dur«  Deine  Siebe*  >#anDe/ 
SRa«  Du  mi«  je$o  no«  bereit : 

S)a§  i«,  an  meinem  legten  ^nDe/ 
3n  Deinem  £epl  getrofl  abf«eit>, 
Sein  2ßia  fer>  mir  in  Croigfeit, 
€iu  Centrum  Der  3ufrieDenfait. 

6.  hiermit  mill  t«  nun  2(bf«eiD  ne&men, 
58on  Denen/  Die  mi«  hier  gefennt, 

5ßor  erfl  t)on  Denen/  Die  fi«  gramen. 
3n  iftretn  armen  <5orgen>(5tanD, 
Sur«'t  ®Dtt,  unD  bätet  £ag  unD  3*a«fr 
3n  ifa  »ertraut  j  nm  gute  S^ac&t. 

7»©ttt 


86       THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

*    )(    f4    X    & 

jr,  ©ut  $<t$t,  i&r  Steigen  biefer  (urrben, 
Sie  iftr  Un  0*eid)tl)um  nennt  ein  föliicf/ 
°fö  n>unfd)te  niemals  reid)  au  werben, 
&  Ȋfjrt  bod)  nur  tm  Slugenblttf, 
llnb  e&rifutf  ruft:  tin  fyarte*  SBity! 
SSebencFtS  bocf),  bttt  id),  sum  SIbieu. 

8.  ®ut  D^ac&t/  t)u  tüifDe  ©cftaar  Der  3ugertty 
3)u  unbef  ehrte  Reiben  >3ucf)t, 

S)ie  t)u  nicf)t$  roeifit  bon  (S&r,  imt)  Xugenb, 
1Mb  nur  Dem  <5<aan  bringe!*  grud)t. 
golg  ©Dtte*  emflem  SBort  unb  ülatfj, 
©onfl  ftnbft  bu  ewig  feine  &na\). 

9.  ©ut  i^acbt  iftr  2Belt  geffnnten  Werften/ 
2)ie  il)r  auf  grben  greube  fuc^t, 

2Sn  flurfy»eil/  £acf)en,  ©pielen,  ©Werften: 
Unb  eurem  &OZI  nid)t  bringet  griK&t. 
21$,  tout  bod)  ©eelen,  tf)ut  bod)  %u$l 
©onfl  fabrt  tyr  in  \>k  5in(ternuf?. 

10.  @ut  Sftadjt,  eu$  mit  einanber  alien* 
S)u  fdfcfje,  bofe,  arge  2Belt, 

Sflf?  euer  fc&un  mir  nicf)t  gefallen, 
J&at  end)  mein  2Banbel  öorgetfeHt: 
2ßdr  fold>e$  nid)t  burd)  föOttc^  öirnb, 
©djon  e&'r  geftye&n,  töär$  jeßt  au  fpaf* 


TRANSLATION   OF 

THE   SCHUL-ORDNUNG 


Simple  and  Thoroughly  Prepared 


School-Management 


Clearly  setting  forth  not  only  in  what  manner  chil- 
dren may  best  be  taught  in  the  branches  usually 
given  at  school,  but  also  how  they  may 
be  well  instructed  in  the  knowl- 
edge of   godliness. 


Prepared  out  of  love  for  mankind  by  the  skilful  schoolmaster 
of  many  years  experience, 


Christopher  Dock 


And  through  the  efforts  of  several  friends  of  the 
common  good  authorized  to  be  printed. 


Germantown: 
Printed  by,  and  to  be  had  of,  Christopher  Saur,  1 770 


PUBLISHER'S   PREFACE 

Beloved  Reader: 

It  is,  beyond  dispute,  one  of  the  first  duties  of 
parents  and  rulers  to  rear  and  rule  their  children 
and  subjects  in  the  fear  of  God.  This,  above  all  else, 
requires  our  greatest  diligence  and  care  in  a  two- 
fold, yea,  threefold  manner : 

First,  we  shall  look  upon  them  as  precious  gifts 
which  God  has  entrusted  to  us,  not  only  that  we 
should  play  with  them  and  have  in  them  our  temporal 
delights,  but  that  we  are  under  obligation  to  exert 
every  effort  to  bring  them  up  in  the  nurture  and 
admonition  of  the  Lord.  (Ephes.  vi,  4.)  Knowing 
that  we  shall  be  called  to  account  for  all  that  is  given 
vis,  for  unto  whomsoever  much  is  given,  whatever  it 
may  be,  of  him  shall  much  be  required.  (Luke  xii, 
48.)  A  pious  teacher  writes  that  parents  may  earn 
heaven  or  hell  by  their  children,  just  as  they  bring 
them  up. 

Second,  in  addition  to  this,  therefore,  is  required 
not  only  a  formal  admonition ;  "Not  so,  my  children, 
do  not  such  evil  things/'  as  did  the  old  priest  Eli  in 
I  Saml.  ii,  23,  etc.,  nor  with  constant  nagging  or 
beating  whereby  children  are  incensed  to  anger,  but 
rather  an  earnest  admonition  to  the  Lord,  with 
sound  punishment  if  these  admonitions  are  not  suf- 
ficient to  suppress  evil,  and  a  good,  steadfast  life  in 
godliness ;  for  bad  examples  ruin  more  than  all  good 
precepts  combined  can  build  up.    Children  keep  a 

91 


92     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

sharp  eye  on  those  who  are  set  over  them,  be  they 
parents  or  teachers. 

Third,  in  order  not  to  offend  one  of  these  little 
ones,  a  thing  which  is  fraught  with  such  severe  pun- 
ishment (Matth.  xviii,  6,  10),  we  require  untiring 
prayer  for  ourselves  and  for  the  gifts  entrusted  to 
us,  that  God  may  add  His  blessing  that  they  may  be 
brought  up  to  His  glory.  Even  if  we  were  to  apply 
all  diligence  in  planting  good  seed  in  our  youth  by 
good  teaching,  and  water  it  by  careful  training,  yet 
God  must  give  it  strength,  or  it  will  not  flourish. 
For  we  cannot  give  our  children  other  hearts,  but 
God  can.  Therefore,  we  should  earnestly  continue  to 
pray  day  and  night  and  beseech  Him  for  their  sakes ; 
and  when  parents  and  teachers  once  make  this  their 
main  object  and  greatest  care,  to  bring  up  their  chil- 
dren and  those  entrusted  to  them  to  the  honor  of  God 
and  to  do  with  them  as  the  Lord  has  already  admon- 
ished the  children  of  Israel  in  the  Old  Covenant  (5th 
book  of  Moses  vi,  6,  7),  "And  these  words,  which  I 
command  thee  this  day,  shall  be  in  thine  heart :  And 
thou  shalt  teach  them  diligently  unto  thy  children, 
and  shalt  talk  of  them  when  thou  sittest  in  thine 
house,  and  when  thou  walkest  by  the  way,  and  when 
thou  liest  down,  and  when  thou  risest  up. ' '  Then  in 
a  few  years  we  should  see  quite  a  different  world. 
And  although  it  does  not  lie  in  the  power  of  parents 
to  give  their  children  new  hearts,  their  efforts  would 
still  not  be  in  vain,  but  God  would  add  His  blessing 
to  their  diligence,  and  if  with  all  their  diligence  and 
those  wTholesome  admonitions  some  should  fail,  they 
have  still  saved  their  own  souls. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  93 

Ordinary  life  is  similar  to  a  household,  the  usual 
thing  therein,  be  it  orderly  or  disorderly,  cleaves  to 
the  children  throughout  their  lives,  so  that  Solomon 
may  well  say  in  22  Cap.  v.  6, ' '  Train  up  a  child  in  the 
way  he  should  go,  and  when  he  is  old  he  will  not 
depart  from  it. ' '  Can  we  not  similarly  plant  early  a 
fear  of  God;  when  at  every  opportunity  vice  is 
made  hateful  and  virtue  and  love  of  Grod  desirable  ? 
Therefore  parents  should  be  especially  careful  of 
the  company  into  which  they  send  their  children, 
and  especially  what  teachers  they  choose  for  them ; 
for  what  they  see  and  hear  of  these  impresses  itself 
deeply  upon  their  tender  spirits. 

This  my  beloved  father  saw  clearly,  and  already 
almost  twenty  years  ago  he  felt  a  desire  to  meet  our 
wants,  as  far  as  possible,  in  this  respect,  and  as  he 
knew  of  a  man  whose  whole  desire  was  to  seek  the 
children's  best  advantage  in  body  and  soul,  to  teach 
godliness  as  well  as  the  ordinary  branches,  and  in 
accordance  with  the  advice  of  the  Apostle  Paul  (Tit. 
ii,  7),  always  showed  himself  a  good  example,  and 
was  also  blessed  with  a  natural  gift,  he  was  desirous 
of  obtaining  a  written  statement  of  his  school  man- 
agement that  he  might  print  and  publish  it,  that 
other  teachers  who  are  anxious  to  instruct  their 
children  well  and  are  not  so  richly  gifted  might  find 
something  in  it  to  improve  themselves.  And  for 
others,  who  care  not  whether  the  children  learn  any- 
thing or  not,  so  long  as  they  receive  their  pay,  it 
should  serve  as  a  means  of  shaming  them,  when  they 
see  that  parents  too  know  how  a  well-planned  school 
should  be  kept,  and  finally  it  is  to  teach  the  parents 


94     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

themselves  what  to  do  with  children  whom  they 
earnestly  wish  to  teach  something  good,  for  many 
parents  in  this  country  are  obliged  to  teach  their 
children  themselves,  (and  others  should  do  so  rather 
than  send  them  to  teachers  whose  lives  are  stained 
with  vice).  These  and  other  considerations  have 
induced  my  beloved  father  to  write  to  one  of  his 
good  friends,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  following 
letter. 

Thus  our  good  friend  Dock  was  willing  to  write 
such  a  work,  but  when  it  was  completed,  he  could 
not  make  up  his  mind  to  have  it  printed,  because  of 
a  certain  modesty,  fearing  that  it  would  be  looked 
upon  as  a  monument  to  himself  and  thus  be  taken 
amiss.  For  this  reason  he  was  unwilling  for  it  to 
be  published  during  his  lifetime,  and  it  therefore  lay 
nineteen  vears,  until  a  few  friends  of  the  common 

%J  7 

good  begged  him  persistently  to  have  it  published. 
Finally  he  yielded,  and  in  the  year  just  passed  it  was 
given  me  to  publish.  After  reading  it,  and  finding 
much  pleasure  therein,  I  consented  to  print  it,  but 
before  I  could  attend  to  the  work,  the  MS.  was 
mislaid  that  I  knew  not  how  to  find  it  again,  and  I 
feared  that  it  had  been  sold  as  plain  paper,  so  that  I 
advertised  in  the  newspaper  for  its  return  and 
offered  a  reward  to  the  finder.  When  it  still  re- 
mained undiscovered,  some  people  cherished  evil 
thoughts,  charging  me  with  willfully  putting  it  out 
of  the  way  on  account  of  some  possible  distasteful 
features  in  it.  This  I  was  forced  to  bear  for  some 
time,  and  had  nothing  to  justify  me  but  my  good 
conscience.    However,  the  author  was  not  unhappy 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG  95 

over  the  delay,  and  sent  me  a  letter  begging  me  not 
to  worry  over  the  loss  of  the  MS.,  that  it  had  never 
been  his  intention  to  have  it  published  during  his 
lifetime,  and  so  he  was  quite  well  satisfied  that  it 
was  lost.  But  when,  as  it  seemed,  I  had  borne  my 
disgrace  long  enough,  the  MS.  was  finally  found,  in 
a  spot  where  my  men  and  I  had  repeatedly  looked 
for  it  searchingly  without  noticing  it,  after  having 
been  lost  for  more  than  a  year.  So  I  have  been 
unwilling  to  make  any  further  delay,  and  here  I 
give  it  to  you,  dear  reader,  as  the  honest,  benevolent 
author  wrote  it,  for  the  good  of  all  who  may  read 
and  profit  by  it.  I  hope  no  harm  has  been  done  by 
its  having  lain  so  long,  for  perhaps  those  who  would 
have  read  it  then  would  have  laid  it  by  and  forgotten 
it  by  this  time,  and  in  our  day  it  is  as  important  as 
then,  or  more  so.  For  experience  teaches,  that  as 
the  end  of  time  draws  nigh,  so  carelessness  toward 
the  good  increases,  and  mankind  is  in  godly  things 
so  careless  and  so  indifferent  to  profitable  instruc- 
tion as  was  scarcely  the  case  in  the  time  of  Noe,  of 
which  it  is  said :  ' '  They  heeded  it  not. ' '  And  we  see 
that  almost  everywhere  children  are  far  more  care- 
fully instructed  in  the  equality  of  the  world  and 
useless  things  than  in  useful  duties  that  stimulate  to 
godliness. 

That  this  little  work  may  serve  the  purpose  for 
which  it  was  first  written  and  compiled  by  the 
author,  and  having  been  delayed  so  long  may  be 
received  with  the  greater  attention,  is  the  sincere 
wish  of  your  faithful  friend  who  has  at  heart  the 
welfare  of  all  men.  Christopher  Saur. 

Germantown,  March  27,  1770. 


96     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

OCCASION    FOR   WRITING 
THIS   LITTLE   BOOK 

Friend  Dielmax  Kolb  : 

The  thought  has  frequently  occurred  to  me,  gone 
and  returned,  that  you  should  (if  you  have  the  time 
in  the  future)  some  time  write  down  for  me  the  art 
and  method  employed  in  keeping  school  by  our 
friend  Dock.  How  he  receives  the  children  into 
school.  How  he  manages  various  children  in  differ- 
ent ways.  How  he  treats  them  kindly  and  lovingly 
that  they  both  fear  and  love  him.  That  they  love 
one  another.  Also  of  their  letter-writing.  How 
he  trains  them  to  maintain  silence.  How  he  uses 
shame  as  an  incentive  to  teach  diligence.  Also  how 
he  draws  childlike  pictures  for  them  to  practice.  In 
fine,  I  should  like  to  have  you  describe  it  to  me 
briefly  or  at  length,  in  such  a  manner  that  if  he 
should  depart  this  life  we  could  give  a  just  descrip- 
tion of  him,  partly  for  the  glory  of  God  and  partly 
for  the  instruction  of  other  schoolmasters  and  of 
their  successors,  how  it  is  possible  to  educate  the 
youth.  This  I  think  would  be  well  worth  printing, 
during  his  life-time  if  he  be  willing,  or  afterward. 
At  least  I  should  like  to  send  it  to  Germany  if  he 
should  be  unwilling  to  see  it  printed  during  his  life. 
I  consider  it  important,  for  it  is  desirable  to  know 
how  to  instruct  children  in  letters  and  religion. 
While  you  could  not  use  your  pen  I  have  gladly 
excused  you,  but  now  you  have  no  such  excuse  as 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDXUNG    97 

you  had  when  you  were  ill.  I  have  mentioned  only 
a  few  points  that  chanced  to  occur  to  me.  You  can 
enlarge  upon  it,  and  I  think  there  is  nothing  in  his 
conduct  toward  children  and  adults  but  is  worthy 
of  consideration.  I  send  my  heartiest  regards  to 
you  and  your  wife  and  remain  indebted  to  you  in 
love  and  service. 

Christopher  Saur. 

Geemantown,  Aug.  3,  1750. 


AUTHOR'S   PREFACE 

Sollford,  Aug.  8,  1750. 

Salutem,  Esteemed  Friend  : 

With  present  writing  will  say  that  I  was  to-day, 
for  a  definite  purpose,  called  upon  to  visit  Friend 
Dielman  Kolb,  who  told  me  that  he  is  in  receipt  of  a 
letter  from  Friend  Christopher  Saur,  in  which  he 
inquires,  in  general,  as  to  my  school  management, 
concerning  which  he  would  like  to  know,  not  only 
the  art  and  method  by  which  I  receive  the  children, 
but  also  how  I  keep  order  among  them.  Then 
Friend  Dielman  explained  to  me  thus:  He  would 
like  to  undertake  such  a  labor  of  love  for  his  Friend 
Saur,  but  as  he  is  not  thoroughly  acquainted  with 
my  methods  he  is,  therefore,  not  able  to  comply  with 
Friend  Saur 's  request  in  a  satisfactory  manner. 
Therefore  he  has  begged  me  to  take  the  burden  upon 
my  shoulders  and  make  a  report,  to  gratify  Saur's 
wishes.  This  I  am  not  able  to  refuse  altogether  on 
account  of  my  love  for  Friend  Saur  and  Friend 
Dielman,  but  I  find  many  difficulties  in  a  matter  of 
this  kind  which  I  should  like,  first  of  all,  to  explain. 

As  regards  reporting  upon  the  questions  that 
Friend  Saur  has  put  to  Friend  Dielman  and  the 
latter  to  me,  I  could  easily  answer  them,  seeing  that 
my  daily  dealings  with  youth  are  known  to  me  better 
than  to  another.  But  the  difficulty  is  this :  that  it 
would  appear  as  though  I  were  trying  to  build  up 
for  myself  a  reputation,  testimonial  or  unsavory 

99 


100   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

monument,  which,  if  it  were  indeed  true,  would  de- 
serve before  God  and  all  pious,  Christian  people,  not 
honor,  but  rather  ridicule  and  shame,  and  could  not 
conduce  to  my  soul's  welfare  and  salvation.  It 
would  only  be  food  for  self-love.  But  may  the  Lord 
keep  this  far  from  me,  for  many  pious  hearts  have 
been  attacked  by  this  robber  and  have  lost  what  they 
had  attained  in  the  grace  of  God.  For  example,  take 
even  wise  Solomon  himself,  who  had  not  his  equal  in 
wisdom,  riches,  honor  and  glory,  all  of  which  and 
more  he  obtained  from  the  Lord  by  prayer.  In  time 
he  had  through  divine  grace  risen  so  high  in  knowl- 
edge, wisdom  and  understanding,  that  none  was  his 
equal;  he  flourished  like  a  tree  by  the  rivers  of 
water.  Of  his  wisdom  and  what  he  accomplished 
by  it  we  may  read  at  length  in  the  first  book  of 
Kings,  third  to  tenth  chapters.  Yet,  after  Solomon 
allowed  self-love  to  conquer  him,  this  beautiful  tree 
still  stood  in  honor  and  glory,  but  self-love  had  bred 
so  many  nests  of  caterpillars  that  many  of  Solo- 
mon's first  fruits  were  withered,  which  displeased 
God,  as  may  be  read  in  I  Kings  xi. 

In  my  dealings  with  youth,  this  is  of  all  my 
duties  the  heaviest  burden  upon  my  heart,  and  it 
outweighs  everything  else,  call  it  what  you  may, 
namely  this:  How  I  may  rule  and  conduct  my 
household  that  I  may  some  day  receive  a  gracious 
testimonial  from  the  great  Shepherd  of  the  sheep, 
who  entrusted  the  young  lambs  to  me  through 
twenty-six  years.  They  were  really  entrusted  to  me 
thirty-six  years,  by  an  occupation  that  no  one  knows 
better  than  I.    But  in  this  country  I  neglected  that 


TEANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNÜNG         101 

profession  for  ten  years,  for  which  I  often  felt  the 
smiting  hand  of  God,  which  before  then  had  served 
me  well.  May  the  Lord  graciously  overlook  my 
neglect  of  the  youth  during  that  time. 

Further  regarding  the  work  asked  of  me,   I 
stand  here  as  in  a  deep  valley,  with  a  high  mountain 
range  before  me,  and  I  would  much  rather  end  my 
few  remaining  days  down  here  in  the  valley,  in  the 
simplicity  of  life,  God  being  willing,  than  climb  the 
mountain.    I  hope  my  friend  will  be  able  to  under- 
stand me.    But  as  my  friend's  interest  in  this  matter 
is  the  glory  of  God,  and  the  good  education  of  youth, 
I  can  and  will  not  refuse  to  add  what  is  in  my  feeble 
power.    Especially  as  I  shall  soon,  though  only  God 
knows  when,  leave  this  mortal  habitation.     O,  it 
should  be  the  supreme  desire  of  every  one  to  pro- 
mote the  glory  of  God  and  the  common  good,  for  this 
can  make  us  happy  here  and  in  eternity.      Holy 
Script  tells  us  in  so  many  places  to  do  this.    For  the 
sake  of  brevity  I  shall  quote  only  St.  Peter's  words 
(I  Peter  iv,  10,  11),  "As  every  man  hath  received 
the  gift  even  so  minister  the  same  one  to  another,  as 
good  stewards  of  the  manifold  grace  of  God.    If  any 
man  speak  let  him  speak  as  the  oracles  of  God ;  if 
any  man  minister,  let  him  do  it  as  of  the  ability 
which  God  giveth;  that  God  in  all  things  may  be 
glorified  through  Jesus  Christ;  to  whom  be  praise 
and  dominion  for  ever  and  ever.     Amen." 

Beloved  friend,  this  admonition  of  the  Apostle 
binds  me  for  the  glory  of  God  to  serve  my  neighbor 
with  the  gift  that  God  has  given  me,  as  I  wish  to  be 
considered  a  faithful  steward  before  God,  this  being 


102    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

as  aforesaid  the  aim  toward  which  I  strive,  and  to 
obtain  which  is  dearer  to  me  than  all  that  is  visible. 
As  I  know  that  I  can  do  nothing  of  my  own  strength 
without  God's  help  and  the  strength  of  His  Holy 
Spirit,  and  that  my  best  work  is  incomplete,  I  give 
my  school  management  to  my  friend  on  this  condi- 
tion: should  he  find  anything  therein  that  would 
serve  for  the  glory  of  God  or  the  assistance  of 
others,  let  him  put  it  where  it  belongs,  and  render 
unto  God  what  is  God's.  (Psalm  cxv,  1.)  Also,  if 
my  friend  during  my  life-time  can  give  to  me  or  my 
pupils  any  useful  directions  (that  will  add  to  the 
glory  of  God)  I  am  willing  and  duty-bound  to  accept 
the  same  with  love. 

Now  to  arrive  at  the  request  of  Friend  Dielman, 
I  could  begin  at  once,  but  as  Friend  Christopher 
Saur  asked  of  Dielman  a  report  of  everything,  in- 
cluding the  correspondence  of  the  pupils  with  one 
another,  I  must  give  Friend  Saur  an  explanation 
of  this  latter,  so  that  when  we  come  to  it,  he  may 
be  enlightened. 

After  I  had,  as  stated  above,  given  up  the  school 
at  Skippack  which  I  had  taught  for  ten  years,  and 
lived  ten  years  in  the  country,  doing  farming  ac- 
cording to  my  limited  ability,  various  opportunities 
for  teaching  presented  themselves,  until  finally  I 
began  teaching  again,  in  the  two  townships  of  Skip- 
pack  and  Sollford,  three  days  weekly  in  each  school. 
But  I  was  already  acquainted  with  keeping  school 
in  this  country,  and  knew  that  it  is  very  different 
from  methods  in  Germany,  where  the  schools  stand 
upon  such  pillars  as  the  common  man  cannot  well 


TRANSLATION:  SCHULORDNUNG         103 

overthrow.  Then  when  I  considered  the  duties  of 
the  profession,  and  firmly  determined  to  carry  out 
all  these  duties,  I  also  saw  the  degenerate  condi- 
tion of  youth,  and  the  many  wrongs  of  this  world 
by  which  adults  spoil  and  distress  youth.  And  I 
saw  not  only  my  own  unworthiness,  but  also  the 
unequal  ability  of  parents  in  the  training  of 
their  children,  for  while  some  seek  the  salva- 
tion of  their  children  in  precept  and  example, 
and  do  all  in  their  power  to  promote  the  glory 
of  God  and  the  good  of  their  children,  others 
are  quite  the  opposite.  They  teach  their  chil- 
dren evil  by  their  own  example,  and  thus  the 
teacher  must  counteract  this  influence  and  be  stern 
toward  such  unruly  pupils.  This  readily  gives  a 
teacher  the  reputation  of  being  partial.  It  is  said 
that  he  is  more  severe  with  one  child  than  with 
another.  This  indeed  he  must  be,  for  the  children's 
sake,  that  good  children  may  not  be  ruined  by  bad 
ones.  Otherwise  it  is  of  course  a  teacher's  duty  to 
be  impartial.  The  poor  beggar  child,  scurfy,  ragged 
and  lousy,  if  otherwise  it  have  a  good  disposition 
and  willingness  to  learn,  should  be  as  dear  to  him 
though  he  never  receive  a  penny  for  it  in  this  world, 
as  the  child  of  wealth  from  whom  he  expects  good 
remuneration.  The  rich  reward  for  the  poor  child 
will  come  in  the  next  world.  In  fact,  it  would  take 
too  long  to  enumerate  all  the  duties  of  a  schoolmas- 
ter. But  it  would  take  still  longer  to  enumerate  his 
troubles.  Considering  all  this,  I  early  discovered 
that  if  I  wished  to  accomplish  good  among  children 
I  must  daily  with  David,  lift  up  my  eyes  to  the 


104   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

mountains  for  help  (Psalm  cxxi)  if  I  wished  to  do 
good  work  in  the  world  as  it  exists,  and  so  I  re- 
entered this  work  and  have  thus  far  remained  in  it. 
I  often  wish  I  could  have  accomplished  more,  but  I 
thank  God  for  helping  me  to  do  as  much  as  I  did. 

Concerning  Friend  Saur's  first  question,  how  I 
receive  the  children  at  school,  I  proceed  as  follows : 
the  child  is  first  given  a  welcome  by  the  other  chil- 
dren, who  extend  their  hands  to  him.  Then  I  ask  him 
if  he  will  be  diligent  and  obedient.  If  he  promises 
this,  he  is  told  how  to  behave ;  and  when  he  can  say 
his  ABC's  and  point  out  each  letter  with  his  index 
finger,  he  is  put  into  the  Ab.  When  he  reaches  this 
class  his  father  owes  him  a  penny,  and  his  mother 
must  fry  him  two  eggs  for  his  diligence,  and  the 
same  reward  is  due  him  with  each  advance;  for 
instance,  when  he  enters  the  word  class.  But  when 
he  enters  the  reading  class,  I  owe  him  a  present,  if 
he  reaches  the  class  in  the  required  time  and  has  been 
diligent,  and  the  first  day  this  child  comes  to  school 
he  receives  a  note  stating :  " Diligent.  One  pence.' ' 
This  means  that  he  has  been  admitted  to  the  school ; 
but  it  is  also  explained  to  him  that  if  he  is  lazy  or 
disobedient  his  note  is  taken  from  him.  Continued 
disinclination  to  learn  and  stubbornness  causes  the 
pupil  to  be  proclaimed  lazy  and  inefficient  before  the 
whole  class,  and  he  is  told  that  he  belongs  in  a  school 
for  incorrigibles.  Then  I  ask  the  child  again  if  he 
will  be  diligent  and  obedient.  Answering  yes,  he  is 
shown  liis  place.  If  it  is  a  boy,  I  ask  the  other  boys, 
if  a  girl,  I  ask  the  girls,  who  among  them  will  take 
care  of  this  new  child  and  teach  it.    According  to 


TRANSLATION :  SCHULORDNUNG         105 

the  extent  to  which  the  child  is  known,  or  its  pleas- 
ant or  unpleasant  appearance,  more  or  less  children 
express  their  willingness.  If  none  apply,  I  ask  who 
will  teach  this  child  for  a  certain  time  for  a  bird  or  a 
writing-copy.  Then  it  is  seldom  difficult  to  get  a  re- 
sponse. This  is  a  description  of  my  way  of  receiving 
the  child  into  school. 

Further  report  concerning  the  assembling  of  the 
children  at  school: 

The  children  arrive  as  they  do  because  some  have 
a  great  distance  to  school,  others  a  short  distance,  so 
that  the  children  cannot  assemble  as  punctually  as 
they  can  in  a  city.  Therefore,  when  a  few  children 
are  present,  those  who  can  read  their  Testament  sit 
together  on  one  bench ;  but  the  boys  and  girls  occupy 
separate  benches.  They  are  given  a  chapter  which 
they  read  at  sight  consecutively.  Meanwhile  I  write 
copies  for  them.  Those  who  have  read  their  passage 
of  Scripture  without  error  take  their  places  at  the 
table  and  write.  Those  who  fail  have  to  sit  at  the 
end  of  the  bench,  and  each  new  arrival  the  same ;  as 
each  one  is  thus  released  in  order  he  takes  up  his 
slate.  This  process  continues  until  they  have  all 
assembled.  The  last  one  left  on  the  bench  is  a  "lazy 
pupil." 

When  all  are  together,  and  examined,  whether 
they  are  washed  and  combed,  they  sing  a  psalm  or 
a  morning  hymn,  and  I  sing  and  pray  with  them. 
As  much  as  they  can  understand  of  the  Lord's 
Prayer  and  the  ten  commandments  (according  to 
the  gift  God  has  given  them),  I  exhort  and  admon- 
ish them  accordingly.     This  much  concerning  the 


106   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

assembling  of  pupils.    But  regarding  prayer  I  will 
add  this  additional  explanation.     Children  say  the 
prayers  taught  them  at  home  half  articulately,  and 
too  fast,  especially  the  "Our  Father"  which  the 
Lord  Himself  taught  His  disciples  and  which  con- 
tains all  that  we  need.    I  therefore  make  a  practice 
of  saying  it  for  them  kneeling,  and  they  kneeling 
repeat  it  after  me.     After  these  devotional  exer- 
cises those  who  can  write  resume  their  work.    Those 
who   cannot   read  the   Testament  have  had  time 
during  the  assemblage  to  study  their  lesson.    These 
are  heard  recite  immediately  after  prayer.     Those 
who  know  their  lesson  receive  an  O  on  the  hand, 
traced  with  crayon.    This  is  a  mark  of  excellence. 
Those  who  fail  more  than  three  times  are  sent  back 
to  study  their  lesson  again.    When  all  the  little  ones 
have  recited,  these  are  asked  again,  and  any  one 
having  failed  in  more  than  three  trials  a  second 
time,  is  called  "Lazy"  by  the  entire  class  and  his 
name  is  written  down.    Whether  such  a  child  fear 
the  rod  or  not,  I  know  from  experience  that  this 
denunciation  of  the  children  hurts  more  than  if  I 
were  constantly  to  wield  and  flourish  the  rod.     If 
then  such  a  child  has  friends  in  school  who  are  able 
to  instruct  him  and  desire  to  do  so,  he  will  visit  more 
frequently  than  before.      For  this  reason:  if  the 
pupil's  name  has  not  been  erased  before  dismissal 
the  pupils  are  at  liberty  to  write  down  the  names  of 
those  who  have  been  lazy,  and  take  them  along  home. 
But  if  the  child  learns  his  lesson  well  in  the  future, 
his  name  is  again  presented  to  the  other  pupils,  and 
they  are  told  that  he  knew  his  lesson  well  and  failed 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         107 

in  no  respect.  Then  all  the  pupils  call  " Diligent" 
to  him.  When  this  has  taken  place  his  name  is 
erased  from  the  slate  of  lazy  pupils,  and  the  former 
transgression  is  forgiven. 

The  children  who  are  in  the  spelling  class  are 
daily  examined  in  pronunciation.  In  spelling,  when 
a  word  has  more  than  one  syllable,  they  must  repeat 
the  whole  word,  but  some,  while  they  can  say  the 
letters,  cannot  pronounce  the  word,  and  so  cannot 
be  put  to  reading.  For  improvement  a  child  must 
repeat  the  lesson,  and  in  this  way :  The  child  gives 
me  the  book,  I  spell  the  word  and  he  pronounces  it. 
If  he  is  slow,  another  pupil  pronounces  it  for  him, 
and  in  this  way  he  hears  how  it  should  be  done,  and 
knows  that  he  must  follow  the  letters  and  not  his 
own  fancy. 

Concerning  ABC  pupils,  it  would  be  best,  hav- 
ing but  one  child,  to  let  it  learn  one  row  of  letters  at 
a  time,  to  say  forward  and  backward.  But  with 
many,  I  let  them  learn  the  alphabet  first,  and  then 
ask  a  child  to  point  out  a  letter  that  I  name.  If  a 
child  is  backward  or  ignorant,  I  ask  another,  or  the 
whole  class,  and  the  first  one  that  points  to  the 
right  letter,  I  grasp  his  finger  and  hold  it  until  I 
have  put  a  mark  opposite  his  name.  I  then  ask  for 
another  letter,  &c.  Whichever  child  has  during  the 
day  received  the  greatest  number  of  marks,  has 
pointed  out  the  greatest  number  of  letters.  To  him 
I  owe  something — a  flower  drawn  on  paper  or  a  bird. 
But  if  several  have  the  same  number,  we  draw  lots ; 
this  causes  less  annoyance.  In  this  way  not  only  are 
the  very  timid  cured  of  their  shyness  (which  is  a 


108   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

great  hindrance  in  learning),  but  a  fondness  for 
school  is  increased.  Thus  much  in  answer  to  his 
question,  how  I  take  the  children  into  school,  how 
school  proceeds  before  and  after  prayers,  and  how 
the  inattentive  and  careless  are  made  attentive  and 
careful,  and  how  the  timid  are  assisted. 

Further  I  will  state  that  when  the  little  ones 
have  recited  for  the  first  time,  I  give  the  Testament 
pupils  a  verse  to  learn.  Those  reading  newspapers 
and  letters  sit  separately,  and  those  doing  sums  sit 
separately.  But  when  I  find  that  the  little  ones  are 
good  enough  at  their  reading  to  be  fit  to  read  the 
Testament,  I  offer  them  to  good  Testament  readers 
for  instruction.  The  willing  teacher  takes  the  pupil 
by  the  hand  and  leads  him  to  his  seat.  I  give  them 
two  verses  to  try  upon.  But  if  I  find  that  another 
exercise  is  necessary  after  this  (such  as  finding  a 
passage  in  Scripture,  or  learning  a  passage,  in  which 
case  each  reads  a  verse),  I  give  only  one  verse,  which 
is  not  too  hard  for  those  trying  to  read  in  the  Testa- 
ment. If  pupils  are  diligent  and  able,  they  are  given 
a  week's  trial,  in  which  time  they  must  learn  their 
lesson  in  the  speller  with  the  small  pupils  and  also 
their  lesson  with  the  Testament  pupil.  If  they  stand 
the  test  they  are  advanced  the  next  week  from  the 
spelling  to  the  Testament  class,  and  they  are  also 
allowed  to  write.  But  those  who  fail  in  the  Testa- 
ment remain  a  stated  time  in  the  ABC  class  before 
they  are  tested  again.  After  the  Testament  pupils 
have  recited,  the  little  ones  are  taken  again.  This 
done  they  are  reminded  of  the  chapter  read  them, 
and  asked  to  consider  the  teaching  therein.    As  it  is 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         109 

the  case  that  this  thought  is  also  expressed  in  other 
passages  of  Holy  Writ,  these  are  found  and  read, 
and  then  a  hymn  is  given  containing  the  same  teach- 
ing. If  time  remains,  all  are  given  a  short  passage 
of  Scripture  to  learn.  This  done,  they  must  show 
their  writing  exercises.  These  are  examined  and 
numbered,  and  then  the  first  in  turn  is  given  a  hard 
word  to  spell.  If  he  fails  the  next  must  spell  it  and 
so  on.  The  one  to  spell  correctly  receives  his  exer- 
cise. Then  the  first  is  given  another  hard  word,  and 
so  each  receives  his  exercise  by  spelling  a  word 
correctly. 

As  the  children  carry  their  dinner,  an  hour's 
liberty  is  given  them  after  dinner.  But  as  they  are 
usually  inclined  to  misapply  their  time  if  one  is  not 
constantly  with  them,  one  or  two  of  them  must  read 
a  story  of  the  Old  Testament  (either  from  Moses 
and  the  Prophets,  or  from  Solomon's  or  Sirach's 
Proverbs),  while  I  write  copies  for  them.  This 
exercise  continues  during  the  noon  hour. 

It  is  also  to  be  noted  that  children  find  it  neces- 
sary to  ask  to  leave  the  room,  and  one  must  permit 
them  to  do  this,  not  wishing  the  uncleanness  and 
odor  in  the  school.  But  the  clamor  to  go  out  would 
continue  all  day,  and  sometimes  without  need,  so 
that  occasionally  two  or  three  are  out  at  the  same 
time,  playing.  To  prevent  this  I  have  driven  a  nail 
in  the  door-post,  on  which  hangs  a  wooden  tag.  Any 
one  needing  to  leave  the  room  looks  for  the  tag.  If 
it  is  on  the  nail,  this  is  his  permit  to  go  out  without 
asking.  He  takes  the  tag  out  with  him.  If  another 
wishes  to  leave,  he  does  not  ask  either,  but  stands  by 


110   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

the  door  until  the  first  returns,  from  whom  he  takes 
the  tag  and  goes.  If  the  tag  is  out  too  long,  the  one 
wishing  to  go  inquires  who  was  out  last,  and  from 
him  it  can  be  ascertained  to  whom  he  gave  the  tag, 
so  that  none  can  remain  out  too  long. 

To  teach  the  uninitiated  numbers  and  figures,  I 
write  on  the  blackboard  (which  hangs  where  all  can 
see)  these  figures 

1234567890 
far  apart,  that  other  figures  can  be  put  before  and 
behind  them.  Then  I  put  an  0  before  the  1  and 
explain  that  this  does  not  increase  the  number. 
Then  I  erase  the  0  and  put  it  after  the  1,  so  that  it 
makes  10.  If  two  ciphers  follow  it  makes  100,  if 
three  follow,  1000,  &c.  This  I  show  them  through 
all  the  digits.  This  done  I  affix  to  the  1  another  1, 
making  11.  But  if  an  0  is  put  between  it  makes  101, 
but  if  it  be  placed  after,  it  makes  110.  In  a  similar 
manner  I  go  through  all  the  digits.  When  this  is 
done  I  give  them  something  to  find  in  the  Testament 
or  hymnal.  Those  who  are  quickest  have  something 
to  claim  for  their  diligence,  from  me  or  at  home. 

As  it  is  desirable  for  intelligent  reading  to  take 
note  of  commas,  but  as  the  inexperienced  find  this 
difficult,  I  have  this  rule :  If  one  of  the  Testament 
pupils  does  not  read  on,  but  stops  before  he  reaches 
a  comma  or  period,  this  counts  one-fourth  failure. 
Similarly  if  one  reads  over  a  comma,  it  is  one-fourth 
failure.  Repeating  a  word  counts  one-half.  Then 
all  failures  are  noted,  and  especially  where  each  one 
has  failed.  When  all  have  read,  all  those  who  have 
failed  must  step  forward  and  according  to  the  num- 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         111 

ber  of  errors  stand  in  a  row.  Those  who  have  not 
failed  move  up,  and  the  others  take  the  lowest 
positions. 

Regarding  the  correspondence,  I  may  say  that 
for  twelve  years  I  kept  two  schools,  as  already  said, 
and  for  four  summers  (during  the  three  months  that 
I  had  free  owing  to  the  harvest)  I  taught  school  at 
Germantown.  Then  the  pupils  in  Skippack,  when 
I  went  to  Sollford,  gave  me  letters,  and  when  I  re- 
turned, the  Sollford  pupils  did  likewise.  It  was  so 
arranged  that  pupils  of  equal  ability  corresponded. 
When  one  became  his  correspondent's  superior,  he 
wrote  to  another  whose  equal  he  tried  to  be. 

The  superscription  was  only  this :  My  friendly 
greeting  to  N.  N.  The  contents  of  the  letter  con- 
sisted of  a  short  rhyme,  or  a  passage  from  Scripture, 
and  they  told  something  of  their  school  exercises 
(their  motto  for  the  week  and  where  it  is  described, 
&c).  Sometimes  one  would  give  the  other  a  ques- 
tion to  be  answered  by  a  passage  of  Scripture.  I 
doubt  not,  if  two  schoolmasters  (dwelling  in  one 
place  or  not)  loving  one  another  and  desiring  their 
pupils  to  love  one  another,  were  to  do  this  in  the  love 
of  God,  it  would  bear  fruit. 

This  is  a  piecemeal  description  of  how  children 
are  taught  letters,  and  how  their  steps  are  led  from 
one  degree  to  the  next,  before  they  can  be  brought 
to  the  aim  that  we  have  in  view  to  the  glory  of  God 
and  for  their  own  salvation,  and  which  will  be  last 
discussed. 

Now  regarding  his  second  question :  How  differ- 
ent children  need  different  treatment,  and  how  ac- 


112    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

cording  to  the  greatness  of  the  offense  punishment 
must  be  increased  or  lessened. 

I  should  gladly  tell  my  friend  all  of  this  truly, 
but  as  the  subject  is  such  a  broad  one,  I  really  do 
not  know  where  to  begin  or  end.  This  is  because  the 
wickedness  of  youth  exhibits  itself  in  so  many  ways, 
and  the  offenses  which  are  taught  them  by  those 
older  than  themselves  are  so  various,  and  as  God 
Himself  declares:  (I  Moses  viii,  21)  "For  the  imag- 
ination of  man's  heart  is  evil  from  his  youth/ '  so 
that  from  this  impure  spring  (unless  by  constant 
effort  the  bad  is  suppressed  and  rooted  out)  there  is 
little  hope  of  improvement.  Corruption  is  so  great, 
and  increases  daily  in  so  many  ways,  that  I  am  con- 
vinced that  it  is  impossible  to  do  anything  of  one's 
own  power.  Where  the  Lord  does  not  help  build,  all 
that  build  work  in  vain.  The  slap  of  the  hand,  hazel 
branch  and  birch  rod  are  means  of  preventing 
wicked  outburst,  but  they  cannot  change  the  stub- 
born heart,  which  holds  us  all  in  such  sway  since  the 
fall,  that  we  are  all  inclined  more  to  the  bad  than 
to  the  good,  so  long  as  the  heart  is  unchanged  and 
not  renewed  by  the  spirit  of  God.  But  while  the 
seed  of  wickedness  is  present,  it  could  not  grow  if 
we  were  convinced  of  its  presence,  and  strove  ear- 
nestly to  remove  it,  not  only  from  ourselves,  but 
from  our  fellow  man  and  from  our  youth.  As  this 
old  evil  and  serpent's  sting  is  the  same  in  all,  we  all 
are  enabled  to  seek  earnestly  the  same  surgeon  and 
apply  the  means  of  recovery  which  He  prescribes 
for  such  evil,  to  ourselves  and  our  youth.  For  with- 
out recovery  we  cannot  reach  peace,  for  the  worm 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         113 

that  forever  gnaws  our  conscience  through  the  ser- 
pent's sting  leads  to  eternal  damnation.  May  God 
mercifully  assist  us  all,  that  we  may  not  neglect  the 
promise  to  enter  into  His  rest,  and  none  of  us  re- 
main behind.    Amen. 

Because,  as  has  been  said,  it  would  take  too  long 
to  enumerate  all  cases,  I  shall  give  my  friend  only  a 
few,  together  with  the  means  that  I  have  sought  to 
apply.  But  these  means  cannot  cure  the  damage. 
The  Lord  of  Lords,  who  holds  all  in  His  hand,  and 
for  whose  help  we  need  much  to  pray  in  such  cases, 
deserves  all  the  praise  if  we  see  improvement. 

First,  among  many  children  swearing  or  curs- 
ing is  so  common,  expressing  itself  variously  in  so 
many  wicked  words.  If  this  evil  is  not  warded  off, 
such  sour  " leaven  leavens  the  whole  lump,"  there- 
fore such  children  are  carefully  examined,  whether 
they  understand  what  they  are  saying.  As  it  is  fre- 
quently very  evident  that  they  do  not,  they  are  asked 
whether  they  have  thought  of  the  words  themselves 
or  have  heard  them;  they  usually  reply  that  they 
heard  them  from  So  and  So.  If  asked  why  they 
say  it  also,  the  answer  is  usually  again,  because  So 
and  So  said  it.  Thus  often  ignorance  is  shown. 
They  do  not  know  why  they  are  saying  it.  To  such 
it  must  be  explained  that  they  must  guard  against 
such  words;  that  they  are  against  God's  will  and 
command.  If  they  hear  So  and  So  use  them,  they 
shall  tell  that  person  that  he  or  she  is  doubly  sinning, 
for  they  got  into  trouble  in  school  by  repeating  the 
words.  If  such  children  then  promise  not  to  use 
the  words  again,  they  go  free  the  first  time.    But  if 


114   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


after  being  warned  they  persist  in  the  bad  habit, 
after  being  certain  that  the  accusation  is  true,  they 
are  put  upon  the  punishment  seat,  with  the  yoke  on 
their  neck,  as  a  sign  of  punishment.  On  promising 
to  be  good  in  the  future  they  escape  with  a  few  slaps. 
If  they  again  offend,  the  punishment  is  increased, 
and  they  must  furnish  surety.  The  oftener  the 
offense,  the  more  bondsmen.  These  bondsmen's 
business  is  to  warn  and  remind  the  offender  and 
prevent  repetition.  This  is  the  rein  and  the  bit  to 
be  put  into  their  mouths  for  such  offense,  but  the 
change  of  heart  must  come  from  a  higher  hand,  and 
must  be  sought  with  diligent  prayer.  The  import 
of  God's  word  must  also  be  explained  to  the  offender 
and  the  other  pupils.  What  great  weight  is  in  all 
this  (if  one  persist  and  is  found  guilty  to  the  end) 
and  that  man  must  render  an  account  of  himself,  on 
the  judgment  day,  of  every  idle  word  spoken.  Such 
passages  they  must  look  up  and  read,  and  for  their 
further  instruction  they  are  given  a  song  or  a  psalm 
to  learn. 

Perhaps  Pennsylvania  was  not  infected  by  this 
contagious  and  wicked  plague  as  early  as  some  other 
countries  that  are  long  harassed  with  bloody  war, 
where  rough  and  unmannered  soldiers  have  neither 
propriety  nor  decency,  but  do  all  sorts  of  wicked 
things  in  word  and  deed,  without  fear  of  God  or 
man.  The  poor  innocent  children  are  hereby  in- 
fected, and  cursing  and  swearing  become  so  common 
that  many  do  not  consider  it  a  sin,  even  by  adults. 
Children  repeat  such  things,  they  are  we  know  born 
into  the  world  without  the  power  of  speech,  so  that 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         115 

we  cannot  blame  them  for  bringing  the  use  of  such 
wicked  words  with  them.  O,  no!  the  words  they 
hear  they  learn  to  speak,  they  do  not  understand 
them,  and  do  not  know  whether  the  word  is  good  or 
evil.  And  as  this  country  has  been  divinely  pro- 
tected from  war  thus  far,  and  many  of  the  first  set- 
tlers were  people  who  walked  in  the  presence  of 
God,  little  of  this  was  heard  among  us.  But  a 
greater  number  of  people  coming  to  this  country 
bring  a  greater  quantity  of  this  ware  with  them,  and 
while  it  is  not  recognized  as  merchant's  ware,  it  is 
still  distributed  and  more  generally  used,  to  the 
great  disadvantage  of  youth. 

Secondly,  the  deep-seated  wickedness  of  youth  is 
exhibited  in  this  way.  When  they  have  done  a 
wrong,  and  are  questioned  regarding  it,  they  usually 
try  to  cover  it  by  a  lie.  Which,  if  it  is  not  seriously 
punished  and  earnest  effort  made  to  eradicate  such 
snake  poison,  leads  to  their  destruction  in  time  and 
eternity.  Therefore  parents  and  schoolmasters,  in 
so  far  as  they  seek  to  promote  the  welfare  and  salva- 
tion of  the  poor  children,  must  act  betimes  to  pre- 
vent lying.  To  be  sure,  this  wicked  habit  is  very 
old.  It  exhibited  itself  directly  after  the  fall,  in 
Adam's  first-born  son,  Cain,  when  he  was  asked  to 
account  for  his  great  sin  against  Abel,  his  pious 
brother.  God  asked  him,  "Where  is  thy  brother, 
Abel?"  and  he  answered  contrary  to  his  knowledge 
and  conscience:  "I  know  not,  am  I  my  brother's 
keeper  ?"  (I  Moses  iv,  9.)  From  this  we  see  that  this 
snake  poison  was  manifest  soon  after  the  fall,  and 
still  bears  fruit  of  death  and  destruction,  which  will 


116   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

be  hard  for  parents  and  schoolmasters  to  account 
for  if  they  do  not  seriously  endeavor  to  keep  their 
children  from  it.  How  near  this  is  to  my  heart,  none 
knows  better  than  I.  An  accompanying  song  for 
pupils  will  reveal  it  in  part.  The  Lord  Jesus  Him- 
self testifies  that  the  devil  is  the  father  of  lies. 
(John  viii,  44.)  At  His  time  the  Scribes  and  Phari- 
sees, while  having  the  external  appearance  of  piety, 
did  things  not  for  the  glory  of  God,  but  for  their 
own  glory,  and  colored  their  cause  with  lies  against 
truth,  for  which  Christ  said  to  them,  as  the  verse 
tells  us:  "Ye  are  of  your  father  the  devil  and  the 
lusts  of  your  father  ye  will  do ;  he  was  a  murderer 
from  the  beginning,  and  abode  not  in  the  truth  be- 
cause there  is  no  truth  in  him.  When  he  speaketh 
a  lie,  he  speaketh  of  his  own,  for  he  is  a  liar,  and  the 
father  of  it."  Such  are  Lord  Jesus'  own  words. 
John  the  Baptist  calls  them  for  the  same  reason  a 
generation  of  vipers,  as  may  be  seen  in  Matthew  iii, 
7.  Read  also  and  consider  earnestly  the  twenty- 
third  chapter  of  Matthew,  and  you  shall  find  what 
woes  follow  lying  and  selfish  actions.  The  last  ex- 
pression of  the  woes  is  described  in  the  thirty-third 
verse:  "Ye  serpents,  ye  generation  of  vipers,  how 
can  ye  escape  the  damnation  of  hell?" 

As  I  have  said,  by  weeding  out  such  bad  twigs 
and  plants  from  our  children,  and  planting  good 
things  in  their  stead,  then  earnestly  exhorting  God 
to  add  growth  to  their  watering,  there  is  hope  of 
doing  some  good.  For  the  children  themselves  are 
always  most  to  be  pardoned,  for  they  are  as  wax 
that  can  be  pressed  into  any  shape.    But  if  such  evil 


TRANSLATION:  SCHULORDNUNG        117 

root  is  permitted  to  branch  and  grow,  similar  fruits 
will  appear  on  the  grown  tree,  I  mean  the  grown 
man,  that  belong  to  woe  and  hell  fire.  For  the  kind 
of  fruit  is  in  the  root,  and  the  tree  that  does  not 
bring  forth  good  fruit  is  hewn  down  and  cast  into 
the  fire.  Now  a  lie  is  one  of  the  fruits  that  belong 
in  the  fire.  It  is  also  the  hiding  place  in  which  other 
sins  conceal  themselves.  That  a  deceiver  may  con- 
tinue his  deceit  and  yet  appear  an  honest  man,  he 
adorns  his  cause  with  lies.  That  a  harlot  may  keep 
the  name  of  being  a  virgin,  she  employs  lies.  A  thief, 
murderer  or  adulterer  does  likewise,  and  if  there  is 
not  sufficient  clear  evidence  his  crime  is  so  covered 
by  lies  that  he  may  still  remain  honest  in  the  sight 
of  the  world.  But  if,  while  there  is  time  for  grace, 
such  sins  are  not  admitted,  such  hiding  place  can 
hide  nothing,  the  end  will  have  to  bear  the  burden. 
For  who  denies  his  sins  will  not  succeed,  but  he  who 
admits  and  discontinues  them,  will  obtain  mercy. 
(Solomon  ii,  13 ;  I  John  i,  8,  9.) 

Regarding  the  means  of  preventing  these  out- 
breaks, I  see  that  it  is  beyond  human  power  to  exter- 
minate the  root.  God  alone  through  the  power  of 
His  Holy  Spirit  must  do  this.  Still  it  is  the  duty  of 
preachers,  directors,  parents  and  schoolmasters  to 
work  diligently  on  themselves,  their  fellow  man  and 
children,  to  hate  this  sullied  coat  of  the  flesh,  and  to 
remove  it,  as  much  as  by  the  grace  of  God  is  in  their 
power.  And  it  is  my  opinion  that  the  first  and  most 
important  means  is  to  pray  for  God's  help.  As 
children  are  ignorant  and  foolish  and  do  not  under- 
stand the  enormity  of  it,  we  need  to  remind  them 


118   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

earnestly  and  lovingly:  what  qualities  lead  us  to 
God,  and  which  lead  us  away;  which  have  within 
them  the  odor  of  life  unto  life  and  which  that  of 
death  unto  death.  How  good  qualities  come  from 
the  good  and  eventually  return  to  it,  how  similarly 
evil  comes  of  evil  and  leads  back  to  it,  and  that  good 
is  rewarded  with  good  and  evil  with  evil.  That  God 
is  the  highest  good  and  the  source  of  all  good.  But 
Satan  is  the  source  of  all  evil,  and  as  God  is  a  God 
of  truth,  so  Satan  is  the  father  of  lies.  For  this 
reason  we  must  love  truth,  and  work  truth  in  words 
and  deeds,  if  we  would  go  to  heaven  and  be  forever 
happy,  for  the  reward  of  liars  is  hell  and  the  fiery 
pit.  Having  taught  such  things  we  are  also  bound 
to  make  them  acquainted  with  the  passages  in  Holy 
Writ  that  testify  to  this.  Further  we  must  warn 
them  if  they  wish  to  be  happy  they  must  avoid  this 
wrong,  for  if  they  carelessly  or  perhaps  intention- 
ally disobey  this  command  they  will  be  punished 
for  the  good  of  their  souls.  If  after  this  the  pupil  is 
found  to  trespass,  and  denies  his  guilt,  the  punish- 
ment is  divided  into  two  parts,  and  the  lie  is  first 
and  hardest  punished,  also  for  a  lie  no  bondsman  is 
accepted.  For  the  original  offense,  according  to  its 
nature,  the  punishment  is  lessened  by  surety,  or 
without  bondsman  may  even  be  deferred  on  promise 
of  reform.  Also  after  punishment,  the  punishments 
threatened  by  Holy  Writ  are  reiterated. 

Stealing  is  also  exhibited  early  in  some  children, 
and  when  caught  in  the  act  they  usually  try  to  lie ; 
telling  that  one  or  the  other  gave  it  to  them,  or  that 
they  found  it.    And  often  the  evidence  becomes  so 


TRANSLATION:  SCHULORDNUNG        119 

confused  that  one  has  work  enough  to  straighten  it 
out.  I  have  this  rule  for  its  prevention :  No  pupils 
are  allowed  to  give  away  or  exchange  anything  with- 
out the  previous  knowledge  of  myself  or  their 
parents,  be  it  at  school,  at  home  or  on  the  road ;  and 
if  they  find  anything  they  should  give  it  to  me,  for 
it  is  not  theirs  if  an  owner  can  be  found.  If  no  one 
claims  it  for  a  certain  time  after  being  found,  it 
belongs  to  the  finder.  In  this  manner  I  have  suc- 
ceeded, thank  God,  in  reducing  punishments  for  this 
offense  to  a  minimum. 

Greed  for  honor  is  exhibited  among  children, 
though  not  to  such  extent  as  among  adults,  in  whom 
it  has  often  led,  for  the  sake  of  a  title  or  an  honor, 
to  great  war  and  bloodshed,  not  only  among  those  in 
high  places,  but  among  people  of  low  degree.  Much 
quarrel  arises  from  it;  indeed  the  little  word 
"thou"*  often  creates  quarrel  and  even  riot;  but 
among  children  the  evil  is  much  more  easily  gov- 
erned. If  a  child  persists  in  occupying  a  seat  higher 
than  the  one  he  has  deserved  through  merit  in  read- 
ing, writing,  &c,  and  tries  to  crowd  out  the  rightful 
occupant,  he  is  placed  at  the  tail  of  the  class,  as  a 
warning  to  the  other  pupils,  and  must  stay  there 
until  he  has  worked  his  way  up.  When  the  children 
realize  this,  the  evil  is  easily  remedied.  But  who 
will  humiliate  adults,  if  they  will  not  humble  them- 
selves, as  Christ  teaches?  (Matth.  xx,  26,  27;  Chap, 
xxiii,  12;  Luke  xiv,  11;  Chap,  xviii,  14.) 

In  the  matter  of  quarrels,  children  are  also  much 


*  A  German  resents   "  Du,"  the  familiar  form  of  address,  from  a 
stranger,  especially  one  of  lower  rank. 


120   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

more  easily  appeased  than  adults.  When  children 
become  angered  at  school  or  on  the  way  there,  and  it 
is  shown  that  both  combatants  are  wrong,  each  one's 
fault  is  pointed  out  and  the  punishment  for  each 
defined,  and  also  meted  out  if  they  are  unwilling  to 
make  peace.  Thereupon  they  are  placed  together 
on  the  punishment  seat,  apart  from  the  other  chil- 
dren until  they  are  willing  to  make  up;  if  not, 
deserved  punishment  will  follow.  But  it  rarely 
happens  that  they  are  put  on  the  punishment  seat. 
They  prefer  shaking  hands,  and  then  the  case  is 
adjusted.  If  this  wTere  the  case  among  adults,  and 
if  they  were  as  willing  to  forgive  and  forget, 

By  lawsuits  no  purses  depleted  would  be, 
And  lawyers  would  never  wax  rich  on  their  fee. 
Gnawing  conscience  would  come  to  rest, 
With  love  and  peace  life  would  be  blest ; 
Much  less  of  ache  and  dole 
For  heart  and  soul. 

I  am  further  asked  how  I  teach  the  children  to 
refrain  from  talking,  and  train  them  to  silence.  To 
this  I  reply,  that  it  is  the  hardest  lesson  for  children 
to  learn,  and  they  would  hardly  do  it  of  their  own 
free  will.  It  takes  them  long  to  learn  to  speak,  and 
having  learned  they  are  loath  to  give  up  the  privi- 
lege. But  nothing  more  edifying  can  be  taught  chil- 
dren than  that  there  is  a  time  to  speak  and  a  time  to 
keep  silent,  and  none  more  difficult  to  instil.  Indeed, 
it  would  seem  that  we  grown  ones  have  not  learned 
this  lesson  too  well  ourselves,  for  we  should  often  be 
more   careful  when  to  speak  and  when  to  keep 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        121 

silence.  And  the  little  organ,  the  tongue,  is  not 
easily  tamed,  nor  can  one  punish  it  with  the  rod,  as 
other  organs.  And  the  mischief  done  by  words  is 
done  through  the  tongue,  according  to  the  constitu- 
tion of  the  heart  (Matth.  xii,  25).  Although  often 
the  talking  done  among  children  is  not  due  to  evil 
intention,  nothing  can  be  accomplished  unless  talk- 
ing and  silence  each  have  their  time.  I  have  devised 
several  means,  all  of  which  worked  for  a  time,  but 
not  permanently,  so  that  something  new  had  to  be 
tried.    My  method  is  as  follows : 

First,  when  the  lesson  is  assigned,  they  learn  it, 
after  the  custom  of  this  country  and  England,  by 
repeating  aloud.  To  keep  them  all  at  work  I  move 
among  them  until  I  think  they  have  had  time  enough 
to  learn  the  lesson.  Then  I  rap  with  the  rod  on  the 
blackboard  and  there  is  silence.  I  now  ask  the  first 
to  recite;  meanwhile  a  monitor,  who  has  been  de- 
tailed to  this  duty,  stands  on  a  bench  or  other  high 
place  where  he  can  see  all  and  reports  the  Christian 
and  surname  of  each  one  who  talks,  studies  aloud  or 
does  anything  else  that  is  forbidden.  He  also  writes 
the  name  down.  As  some  use  partiality  in  this 
work,  those  who  have  been  proven  to  be  untruthful 
are  discharged  from  the  work  unless  they  apply, 
and  promise  to  be  honest.  Also  those  who  have  been 
on  the  punishment  seat  for  lying  are  not  allowed  to 
be  monitors,  unless  they  prove  truthful  through  a 
period  of  time.  Thus  provided  with  a  monitor,  one 
can  hear  the  lesson  or  go  on  with  something  else 
that  is  instructive,  without  interruption.  When 
the  work  is  over  this  may  be  forgotten.    But  if  it  is 


122    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

noticed  that  the  talkers  take  advantage  of  being 
forgotten,  those  noted  by  the  monitor  must  come 
forward  and  sit  on  the  punishment  bench,  one  by 
one.  They  are  given  their  choice  between  wearing 
the  yoke  or  a  rap  on  the  hand.  Most  of  them  extend 
their  hand  for  the  rod. 

This  is  the  information  asked  for  regarding  the 
way  I  keep  the  children  quiet,  but  it  is  by  no  means 
my  intention  to  force  this  method  upon  any  one  else. 
Each  must  arrange  his  affairs  in  the  best  way  that 
he  can.  But  if  my  management  written  here  by  re- 
quest and  not  from  choice,  should  be  in  any  way 
objected  to,  because  it  differs  from  that  of  Germany 
and  other  places,  I  will  say  in  defense,  that  condi- 
tions here  are  different.  Among  the  free  inhab- 
itants of  Pennsylvania  schools  are  differently  con- 
stituted from  those  in  Germany.  For  a  schoolmaster 
there  is  definitely  installed  by  the  government,  and 
the  common  man  cannot  readily  remove  him,  hence 
he  is  in  no  great  danger  if  he  is  too  hard  with  chil- 
dren. Although  I  freely  confess,  even  if  I  were  thus 
installed  by  high  authorities,  I  should  still  feel  that 
the  power  to  be  hard  with  children  was  given  me 
for  their  good.  Now  experience  teaches  that  a  timid 
child  is  harmed  rather  than  benefited  by  harsh  words 
or  much  application  of  the  rod,  and  to  improve  it, 
other  means  must  be  employed.  Likewise  a  stupid 
child  is  only  harmed.  A  child  that  is  treated  to  too 
much  flogging  at  home  is  not  benefited  by  it  at 
school,  but  it  is  made  still  worse.  If  such  children 
are  to  be  helped,  it  must  happen  through  other 
means. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         123 

A  stubborn  child  that  does  not  fear  to  do  wrong 
needs  to  be  sharply  punished  with  the  rod,  and  also 
earnestly  reminded  of  God's  word,  in  the  hope  of 
reaching  the  heart.  But  the  timid  and  stupid  must 
be  reached  by  other  means  that  make  them  more  free 
in  spirit  and  more  desirous  to  learn.  When  the  chil- 
dren are  brought  thus  far  it  is  no  longer  difficult  for 
teacher  or  pupil,  and  my  colleagues  will  agree  with 
me  that  the  souls  put  in  our  keeping  are  very 
precious.  We  will  be  called  to  account  for  them  by 
our  God,  and  though  we  have  the  power  to  punish 
they  would,  I  think,  agree  with  me  in  saying  that  it 
is  preferable  to  bring  the  children  to  do  things  from 
a  love  of  doing  than  to  force  them  by  the  rod.  The 
words  "Thou  shalt  and  must"  and  the  words  "I 
obey  gladly' '  are  very  different  in  sound.  For  the 
latter  the  master  needs  no  rod,  and  it  sounds  sweeter 
and  is  easier  to  account  for.  In  Psalm  ex,  3,  it  is 
written :  ' l  Thy  people  shall  be  willing  in  the  day  of 
thy  power,  in  the  beauties  of  holiness."  Now  what 
is  done  willingly  in  body  or  soul  is  not  in  need  of  a 
rod.  Again  in  Psalm  xxxii,  8,  9,  we  read:  "I  will 
instruct  thee  and  teach  thee  in  the  way  which  thou 
shalt  go :  I  will  guide  thee  with  mine  eye.  Be  ye  not 
as  the  horse  or  as  the  mule,  which  have  no  under- 
standing ;  whose  mouth  must  be  held  in  with  bit  and 
bridle,  lest  they  come  near  unto  thee."  Here  again 
we  see  that  they  who  allow  themselves  to  be  taught 
and  led  with  the  eye  have  no  need  of  a  bit  and  a 
bridle.  We  can  see  this  difference  in  senseless  ani- 
mals. One  driver  does  not  employ  half  the  shout- 
ing, spurring  and  whipping  with  his  horses  as  an- 


124   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

other,  and  yet  takes  as  heavy,  yea  heavier  burden, 
over  hill  and  dale.  And  when  the  work  is  done,  the 
willing  horses  and  also  the  teamster  have  had  the 
easier  time  of  it. 

Eegarding  my  friend's  question,  how  I  treat  the 
children  with  love  that  they  both  love  and  fear  me, 
I  will  say  that  in  this  respect  I  cannot  take  the  least 
credit  upon  myself,  if  I  am  at  all  successful  with 
children,  either  in  teaching  or  in  performing  re- 
ligious duties.  First  I  owe  God  particular  thanks, 
because  besides  calling  me  to  this  profession  He 
has  given  me  an  extreme  love  of  children.  For  if  it 
were  not  for  love  it  would  be  an  unbearable  burden 
to  live  among  children.  But  love  bears  and  never 
tires.  If  a  natural  mother  did  not  love  her  children 
all  the  little  incidents  in  the  education  of  a  child 
would  be  unbearably  wearisome,  but  her  love  makes 
this  burden  light.  When  St.  Paul  explains  his  love 
to  the  congregation  at  Thessalonia  he  expresses  it  in 
the  words  of  I  Thes.  ii,  1,  13.  In  verses  7  and  8,  he 
compares  his  love  to  a  mother's  love  when  he  says: 
"But  we  were  gentle  among  you,  even  as  a  nurse 
cherisheth  her  children ;  so  being  affectionately  de- 
sirous of  you,  we  were  willing  to  have  imparted  unto 
you,  not  the  gospel  of  God  only,  but  also  our  own 
souls,  because  ye  were  dear  unto  us."  My  esteemed 
friend,  these  words  of  the  Apostle  express  such  love 
in  that  he  was  willing  not  only  to  impart  the  gospel, 
but  his  very  life.  But  have  all  clergymen  in  this 
so-called  Christendom  from  the  time  of  the  Apostles 
down,  remained  in  this  spirit?  All  have  had  a 
splendid  example  in  the  words  of  the  Apostle  just 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         125 

cited.  Yea,  he  calls  to  all  of  us  and  says:  " Breth- 
ren, be  followers  together  of  me,  and  mark  them 
which  walk  so  as  ye  have  us  for  an  example' '  (Phil. 
iii,  17).  But  as  it  was  at  the  time  of  the  Apostles 
and  how  it  is  in  our  so-called  Christendom  those  can 
see  best  whose  spiritual  eyes  are  opened,  I  will  leave 
the  question  open,  and  comply  with  my  friend's 
request,  feeling  certain  that  he  means  well  for  the 
children's  good.  But  suppose  a  mother  felt  like  per- 
petuating her  loving  methods  toward  her  children, 
and  committed  the  same  to  a  book,  that  after  her 
death  they  might  be  continued,  but  the  children 
should  then  receive  another  mother.  She  would  be 
very  likely  to  say  to  the  children,  your  former 
mother  raised  you  according  to  her  ideas,  I  will 
follow  mine.  Then  it  would  be  of  little  use  to  the 
children  that  their  mother  wrote  in  pure  love.  Yet 
the  mother  did  her  part,  even  as  St.  Paul  when  he 
wrote :  "  Brethren,  be  followers  together  of  me,  and 
mark  them  which  walk  so  as  ye  have  us  for  an  exam- 
ple." Now  those  who  do  not  desire  to  do  as  told  in 
the  seventeenth  verse,  but  prefer  the  opposite,  as  the 
Apostle,  weeping,  wrote  in  the  eighteenth  and  nine- 
teenth verses,  such  follow  their  own  ideas.  Yet  the 
Apostle  had  done  his  duty  and  had  saved  his  soul. 

I  have  told  the  friend  in  answer  to  his  question 
regarding  my  treatment  of  the  children  with  love, 
that  I  can  take  no  credit  for  it.  Love  is  a  gift  of 
God.  According  as  one  desires  it,  it  is  given  and 
according  as  one  guards  and  uses  it,  so  it  can  be 
increased  or  diminished.  But  perhaps  it  can  be 
stated  by  what  qualities  one  can  help  or  hinder  love, 


126   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

profit  or  lose  by  it.  The  divine  footprints  that  we 
follow  in  seeking  righteous  love  show  us  that  it  is 
universal  and  extends  to  all  creatures.  "He  letteth 
his  sun  shine  on  the  wicked  and  the  good,  and  send- 
eth  rain  to  the  just  and  the  unjust."  To  partake  of 
the  love  of  God  man  must  follow  these  footprints. 
They  will  guide  him  in  love,  from  one  love  to  an- 
other by  a  consideration  of  creatures  and  protecting 
them. 

The  great  work  of  the  redemption  of  the  human 
race  was  also  universal,  and  if  we  had  accepted  it 
universally,  believed,  and  followed  in  love  the  foot- 
steps of  Christ  we  would  be  firmly  grounded  in  it. 
We  would  understand  with  the  Saints  the  length 
and  breadth,  the  depth  and  height  of  such  endless 
love,  and  would  know  and  realize  that  the  love  of 
Christ  is  better  than  all  knowledge.  All  Christians 
are  called  upon  to  follow  in  Christ's  footsteps,  and 
to  do  this  in  love  He  has  left  us  an  example.  (I 
Peter  ii,  21;  John  xiii,  13-17,  and  other  places.) 

But  as  we  accept  all  this,  yet  follow  the  foot- 
prints of  the  world  in  lust  of  the  eye  and  the  flesh 
and  vain  life,  wre  may  hope  for  little  growth  in  the 
love  of  God,  be  it  whoever  it  may,  no  matter  what 
his  titles,  and  if  he  have  the  most  Christian  title  in 
the  world.  "For  whoever  loveth  the  world  loveth 
not  the  Father."  (I  John  ii,  15.)  The  love  of  this 
world  is  not  undefiled.  Nor  does  it  lead  to  a  love  of 
humanity.  It  leads  only  to  what  is  mine  or  thine. 
So  long  as  mine  and  thine  are  secure,  the  love  of  this 
world  remains ;  but  should  self-love  and  glory  suffer, 
war  and  turmoil  begin  at  once. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-OßDNUNG         127 

^  The  natural  spark  of  love  which  God  did  not 
quench  entirely  after  the  fall,  but  exhibits  in 
rational  and  irrational  creatures  according  to  their 
capacity,  is  in  many  ways  weakened  and  suppressed 
by  love  of  the  world.  I  will  only  mention  the  nat- 
ural love  among  natural  people.  It  leads  to  their 
union  in  marriage,  and  so  long  as  the  natural  spark 
of  life  is  maintained,  such  love  is  not  lessened,  but 
increased,  so  that  they  are  more  closely  bound  to- 
gether, produce  children  and  support  them  together. 
For  this  is  implanted  in  them  in  this  natural  love, 
even  among  heathens  and  such  nations.  For  other- 
wise the  human  race  could  not  multiply  in  an 
orderly  manner.  Irrational  creatures  are  also  im- 
bued with  a  natural  love  to  feed  their  offspring. 
Christians  have  not  only  the  natural  spark  to  bring 
up  their  children,  but  also  to  bring  them  up  in  fear 
of  God,  according  to  commandments  in  the  Old  and 
the  New  Testament.  And  where  such  education  is 
carried  on  in  sincere  love  by  parents  and  teachers,  it 
will  not  be  without  blessing.  For  love,  breeding  and 
admonition  to  the  Lord,  form  a  three-fold  cord  that 
does  not  easily  break.  If  parents  and  teachers  have 
sincere  parental  love  for  children,  it  may  be  ex- 
pected that  this  will  in  turn  produce  a  sincere  filial 
love.  When  this  love  appears  in  the  child,  unless  it 
is  choked  it  may  be  expected  to  mature  good  fruit. 
But  if  liberty  attempt  to  overpower  this  love  and 
ignite  it  with  wildfire,  love,  breeding  and  admonition 
to  the  Lord,  as  stated,  must  be  used  as  a  three-cord 
whip,  then  there  is  hope  that  love,  fear  and  obedi- 
ence will  result.     But  all  through  God's  gracious 


128   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

blessing,  help  and  assistance,  for  He  must  be  begged 
to  add  growth  to  planting  and  watering. 

In  God's  grace  and  tender  blessing 

All  is  safe  and  of  much  avail ; 
But  without  His  help  and  succor 

The  efforts  of  all  men  must  fail. 

The  murderer  of  souls  seeks  constantly  to  combat 
true  love  with  his  false  Delilah,  world-love,  that  in 
its  lust  is  dead  to  the  good,  so  that  it  seeks  to  extin- 
guish the  natural  spark  of  love  left  after  the  fall, 
and  has  succeeded  in  many  cases.  Then  follows  all 
ungodly  conduct,  piling  up  the  wrath  of  God  upon 
the  day  of  wrath.  It  may  be  seen  in  the  first  world, 
and  also  in  Sodom  and  Gomorrah,  in  Dathan  and 
Abiram,  as  also  in  the  destruction  of  Jerusalem  and 
other  places.  What  works  of  darkness  have  been 
done  in  times  gone  by !  Holy  Writ  tells  us  in  many 
places.  For  brevity  I  shall  mention  only :  Romans 
i,  18  to  end;  II  Peter  ii,  4-6;  Jude  7.  And  what 
works  of  this  kind  are  done  in  our  own  time,  experi- 
ence tells  us. 

When  we  weigh  a  Christian's  duty,  his  matri- 
monial duties  as  well,  we  find  that  love  must  always 
be  the  standard,  and  where  it  is  wanting  there  will 
be  much  wanting  in  order,  in  education  and  admoni- 
tion in  the  Lord,  in  the  management  of  children,  in 
parents  and  teachers.  It  is  a  true  passage  in  Scrip- 
ture that  man  is  woman's  head.  But  on  the  part  of 
man  it  is  well  to  consider  what  St.  Paul  tells  to 
Christian  husbands:  (I  Cor.  xi,  3)  "But  I  would 
have  you  know  that  the  head  of  every  man  is  Christ, 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        129 

and  the  head  of  the  woman  is  the  man."  Now  it  is 
beyond  doubt  true  that  if  in  his  life  and  teachings 
the  man  follows  Christ,  and  the  woman  the  man,  the 
children  will  follow  their  parents  and  teachers  and 
obey  them.  So  that  sincere  love  fully  specifies  the 
weight  of  Christian  duty.  And  yet  in  all  this  we 
have  done  no  more  than  our  duty,  and  blessedness 
still  remains  only  a  gracious  gift.  But  all  Christian 
duties  are  steps  that  we  must  place  our  feet  upon, 
step  by  step.  If  we  seek  salvation  our  Lord  Jesus 
has  given  us  directions.  While  no  man  can  deny 
another  God's  mercy,  because  without  it  we  cannot 
live,  there  exists  this  difference  between  wise  men 
and  virgins  and  foolish  men  and  virgins;  between 
faithful  and  faithless  servants:  there  is  a  differ- 
ence of  work,  and  unequal  reward  of  grace  or  dis- 
grace. So  it  is  much  better  that  we  begin  here  in 
time  of  grace  to  walk  the  road  that  God  has  prom- 
ised than  to  take  the  risk  of  sinning  and  remaining 
in  sin,  letting  grace  be  so  much  mightier.  (See 
Romans,  vi,  1,  2.)  Now  if  the  Christian's  place  is 
thus  fixed,  that  Christ  is  the  head  of  the  church, 
and  therefore  of  each  man,  it  is  a  foregone  con- 
clusion that  it  is  each  man's  duty  to  teach  what  his 
master  has  taught  him  unto  his  wife  also,  whose 
head  he  is.  And  both  parents,  seeking  the  salvation 
of  their  children,  will  obey  all  the  Lord's  command- 
ments, and  teach  them  to  their  children,  as  has  been 
commanded  us.  (I  Moses  xviii,  19 ;  V  Moses  vi,  6,  7 ; 
Psalm  lxxviii,  1-4 ;  Ephes.  vi,  4 ;  Coloss.  iii,  21,  and 
other  places.) 

Now  all  the  duties  of  parents  to  their  children 


130   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

are  also  the  duties  of  the  teacher  to  whom  the  chil- 
dren are  entrusted.  And  as  he  is  in  this  sense  head 
of  these  children,  so  Christ  is  his  head,  according  to 
whose  command  we  must  act.  When  Christ  came  to 
this  world  to  seek  and  to  save,  he  called  the  children 
to  him  in  especial  love,  caressed  and  blessed  them 
and  promised  them  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  (Mark 
ix,  36,  37. )  For  this  reason  we  will  not  be  blessed  if 
we  are  tyrannical  with  them,  however  much  they  must 
be  raised  in  discipline  and  in  the  fear  of  the  Lord. 
Further,  let  us  consider  how  the  Lord  Jesus  taught 
his  disciples,  a  record  of  which  is  kept  for  us  in  St. 
Matth.  xviii,  1-6 :  "At  the  same  time  came  the  disci- 
ples unto  Jesus,  saying,  Who  is  the  greatest  in  the 
kingdom  of  heaven  ?  And  Jesus  called  a  little  child 
unto  him  and  set  him  in  the  midst  of  them,  and  said, 
Verily  I  say  unto  you,  except  ye  be  converted,  and 
become  as  little  children,  ye  shall  not  enter  into  the 
kingdom  of  heaven.  Whosoever  therefore  shall 
humble  himself  as  this  little  child,  the  same  is  great- 
est in  the  kingdom  of  heaven.  And  whoso  shall 
receive  one  such  little  child  in  My  name  receiveth 
Me.  But  whoso  shall  offend  one  of  these  little  ones 
which  believe  in  Me,  it  were  better  for  him  that  a 
millstone  were  hanged  about  his  neck,  and  that  he 
were  drowned  in  the  depth  of  the  sea."  From  the 
quoted  words  of  the  Lord  Jesus  we  all  have  enough 
to  learn.  If  we  would  enter  heaven  and  be  happy 
forever  we  need  not  imagine  that  the  way  is  to  glare 
at  these  children  or  even  scold  and  punish  them  if 
they  do  not  show  us  enough  honor  or  pay  us  enough 
compliments.     Ah,  no,  this  is  not  the  way  to  the 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-OKDNUNG        131 

kingdom  of  heaven.  But  if  we  turn  from  such 
selfish  pride  to  Christ's  teachings,  and  humble  our- 
selves to  the  level  of  children,  it  not  only  leads  us  to 
the  kingdom  of  God,  but  gives  us  a  community  with 
the  children  that  is  much  more  useful  than  all  this 
keeping  aloof.  For  who  exalts  himself  here  will  be 
humbled,  and  who  humbles  himself  will  be  exalted. 

There  might  be  much  more  said  here  of  qualities 
that  are  partly  useful  in  implanting  love  by  which 
the  honor  of  God  is  enhanced  and  the  common  good 
increased.  And  many  qualities  might  be  enumer- 
ated that  do  the  opposite,  by  which  the  honor  of  God 
is  decreased  and  the  common  good  injured.  But  I 
shall  leave  this  matter  to  the  judgment  of  others. 

NOW  FOLLOW  A  FEW  USEFUL  SCHOOL  EXERCISES  WHICH 
I  FEEL  COMPELLED  TO  MENTION,  NOT  FOR  MY  GLOR^, 
BUT  FOR  THAT  OF  ALMIGHTY  GOD,  AND  WHICH  I  GIVE 
THE  YOUTH  ENTRUSTED  TO  ME. 

I  may  say  that  in  my  experience  in  this  country 
I  have  had,  at  my  school,  children  of  various  relig- 
ious denominations,  so  that  I  could  not  teach  them 
the  same  catechism.  Nor  have  I  such  a  catechism 
included,  but  when  the  children  have  learned  to 
read  well,  the  parents  at  home  have  to  teach  them 
the  catechism  themselves.  In  the  teaching  of  hymns 
I  have  been  given  liberty.  So  I  sang  hymns  and 
psalms  with  them,  for  the  author  of  both  religious 
songs  and  psalms  is  the  Holy  Ghost. 

Besides  this,  it  has  been  my  aim  to  make  them 
familiar  with  the  New  Testament  from  the  exer- 


132   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

cises  of  finding  chapters.  This  has  been  quite 
successful,  so  that  when  a  passage  was  men- 
tioned, they  turned  to  it  and  read  it  without  being 
prompted. 

When  this  door  is  opened,  I  have  aimed  that  they 
should  cull  the  flowers  in  this  Garden  of  Eden, — 
Holy  Writ, — not  only  for  their  beauty,  but  also  for 
their  fragrance,  by  pointing  out  to  them,  to  the 
best  of  my  feeble  power,  which  have  a  fragrance  of 
life  unto  life  when  put  to  the  use  that  is  revealed  in 
them.  Also  which  have  an  odor  of  death  unto  death, 
that  they  might  have  knowledge  from  both  sides  of 
Holy  Writ  and  might  be  able  to  see.  Then  just  as 
truth  has  the  odor  of  life  unto  life  and  when  we 
follow  it  leads  to  life,  thus  lies  have  the  odor  of  death 
unto  death  in  them  and  lead  to  death  if  we  follow 
them.  For  the  reward  of  liars  is  the  fiery  pit,  which 
is  the  other  death.  (Revel,  xxi,  8.)  Truth,  however, 
frees  him  who  follows  it.     (John  viii,  31-35.) 

Now  as  opposite  qualities  have  opposite  effects, 
some  leading  to  life  and  others  to  death,  so  it  is  with 
love.  Love  has  the  odor  of  life,  but  hate,  envy  and 
enmity  have  the  odor  of  death  and  lead  to  death,  for 
they  are  the  opposite  of  love. 

Thus  it  is  also  with  faith  and  faithlessness,  char- 
ity and  lack  of  charity,  justice  and  injustice,  chas- 
tity and  unchasteness,  humility  and  vanity.  In  fine, 
all  Godlike  qualities  have  life  in  them  and  lead  to 
life;  whoever  trusts  in  their  efficacy  is  born  again 
from  death  into  life.  All  Godless  things  and  their 
qualities  are  of  death,  and  lead  to  damnation,  if  one 
persists  in  them  until  death. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        133 

When  this  was  explained  to  them  in  part,  they 
had  to  look  up  passages  referring  to  the  various 
qualities.  Whoever  finds  a  passage,  steps  forward, 
the  next  follows,  and  so  they  form  a  row,  boys  and 
girls  separately,  as  each  finds  some  passage  of  Scrip- 
ture until  they  are  all  in  a  row.  Then  the  first  reads 
his  passage.  But  if  another  one  should  have  the 
same  passage,  he  steps  out  and  looks  for  another, 
and  then  joins  the  ranks  again  at  the  foot  of  the 
class.  This  is  done  in  order  to  have  them  find  all 
the  rare  Bible  gems  which  express  these  qualities. 
It  also  becomes  evident  that  the  more  passages  are 
found  dealing  with  a  certain  quality,  the  more 
clearly  does  the  truth  of  the  same  appear.  In  this 
way  one  passage  of  Scripture  serves  not  only  to 
fix  another  one  in  memory,  but  also  to  elucidate 
and  explain  it.  After  the  references  have  all  been 
read,  the  children  are  asked  several  questions, 
which  are  easily  answered  from  such  references. 
The  references  are  then  repeated.  This  gener- 
ally gives  rise  to  different  points  which  are  brought 
to  light  by  the  passages  made  use  of,  in  part  for 
instruction,  partly  for  comfort  and  strengthening 
of  faith,  partly  for  warning  and  chastisement. 
Besides,  when  the  pupils  have  had  much  prac- 
tice in  finding  references,  they  are  at  times  put 
to  the  test  and  reminded  that  outward  seeking  is 
not  in  itself  undesirable,  but  that  it  should  be  tried 
in  another  form.  I  let  them  sit  very  still,  pay  atten- 
tion, and  think  no  idle  thoughts,  but  the  first  passage 
that  enters  their  minds,  they  shall  stand  and  read. 
In  this  exercise  I  have  often  marvelled  how  God 


134   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

"has  perfected  praise  out  of  the  mouths  of  babes 
and  sucklings"  to  destroy  the  revengeful  foe. 

As  it  is  God's  stern  command  that  we  should 
teach  the  children  the  commandments  He  has  given 
us,  and  shall  bring  them  up  in  the  fear  and  ad- 
monition of  the  Lord,  there  are  in  the  Scriptures 
many  beautiful  witnesses  to  the  one  God  and  His 
divine  qualities;  how  He  reveals  Himself  by  His 
works,  and  how  He  created  all  things  by  the  power 
of  His  word;  the  breath  of  His  mouth,  and  His 
impenetrable  omnipotence  and  omniscience ;  Script- 
ure further  testifies  how  through  the  devil's  envy 
death,  temporal  and  eternal  destruction,  came  into 
the  world,  and  how  the  human  race  by  Satan's  cun- 
ning fell  into  sin  and  disobedience,  and  that  through 
this  disobedience  sin  came  into  the  world,  and 
through  sin,  death,  and  thus  death  penetrated  to  all 
men,  because  they  all  sinned. 

Holy  Writ  teaches  us  also,  that  God  in  His  great 
mercy  promised  fallen  mankind  that  the  seed  of  the 
woman  should  bruise  the  serpent's  head,  that  they 
may  be  again  redeemed  from  the  curse  through  an 
eternal  redemption.  Of  all  this  we  find  in  Scripture 
many  comforting  promises  given  to  the  fathers 
from  time  to  time  through  Moses  and  the  Prophets, 
partly  by  signs  and  partly  by  visions  and  prophe- 
cies. Of  these  there  are  many  in  the  Old  Testament. 
Again,  how  such  promise  was  fulfilled  through 
Christ,  the  promised  offspring  of  woman,  by  the 
Holy  Ghost,  God's  mysterious  plan  of  redemption 
— incomprehensible  to  man.  Of  His  birth,  ministry, 
life,  suffering,  death,  resurrection  and  ascension,  of 


TRANSLATION :  SCHUL-OKDNUNG        135 

all  these  the  Scriptures  tell  explicitly.  Also  we  find 
here  how  we  can  obtain  this  salvation.  Also  how  a 
Christian  shall  do  his  duty  through  practicing  piety 
in  Christian  virtue  and  rise  step  by  step  to  become 
more  like  Him  who  created  and  redeemed  him.  I 
say  in  all  these  things  we  are  instructed  by  the 
teachings  of  Christ  and  His  Apostles,  in  the  New 
Testament. 

Now  I  should  tell  of  each  exercise  in  detail,  how 
it  is  customary  with  children  to  have  them  read  a 
passage  relative  to  one  or  another  quality,  then  to 
ask  questions  and  have  them  answered  by  another 
quotation,  so  that  one  impresses  the  other,  explains 
and  amplifies  it.  But  to  explain  all  this  would  be 
very  tedious.  But  as  Holy  Script  contains  every- 
thing, that  is  the  place  to  seek  and  to  find  it.  And 
because  in  Christ  Jesus  all  treasures  of  knowledge 
and  wisdom  are  hidden,  I  refer  myself  and  all  others 
to  Scripture  where  such  can  be  found.  ( Jerem.  xxix, 
13 ;  Matth.  vii,  7.)  Does  not  the  world  seek  diligently 
for  honor  and  property,  for  gold,  silver  and  pre- 
cious stones?  These  and  other  treasures  are  held 
in  righ  esteem  by  the  world,  yet  they  are  perishable, 
and  not  to  be  compared  to  the  immortal  treasures 
God  offers  us  in  His  word.  As  we  seek,  so  shall  we 
find.  If  we  seek  the  world  in  the  delights  of  the  eye 
and  of  the  flesh  and  in  vain  living,  we  shall  find  it 
so,  and  finally  also  find  the  world's  share  and  wages. 
But  whosoever  seeks  God  and  everlasting  life  and 
follows  Christ's  footprints  faithfully,  he  will  also 
find  and  not  seek  in  vain.  His  search  will  not  be 
left  unrewarded.  (John  xii,  26 ;  Chap,  xiv,  3 ;  Chap, 
xvii,  24.) 


136   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

To  avoid  tedium,  I  repeat  I  cannot  describe 
many  exercises  that  are  conducive  to  blessedness  of 
faith,  love,  hope,  patience;  in  fine,  all  exercises  of 
virtue  that  in  Holy  Script  lead  to  blessedness,  as 
they  are  written,  useful  for  instruction,  punishment, 
&c.  As  each  should  be  taken  up  at  a  particular  time 
with  children,  to  tell  of  all  this  in  detail  would  take 
too  long. 

But  the  true  redeeming  faith  must  embrace  all 
that  is  useful  in  life  and  in  the  path  of  righteousness, 
and  nothing  is  more  acceptable  to  Jesus  Christ  than 
exhibiting  one's  faith  in  acts  of  love.  To  such  the 
Lord  Jesus  Himself  has  given  the  shield  that  He 
shall  be  His  armor  bearer,  empowered  not  only  to 
win  in  this  w^orld  (I  John  v,  5,  6),  but  also  to  quench 
all  fiery  darts  of  the  Evil  One  (Eph.  vi,  16).  I 
shall  only  for  my  own  and  others'  encouragement, 
and  the  strengthening  of  their  faith,  add  a  few 
things  concerning  the  properties  of  faith  so  far  as 
I  am  now,  with  my  feeble  strength  and  by  the  grace 
of  God,  able  to  do  this.  For  without  His  grace  and 
favor  our  actions  and  everything  are  in  vain.  Be- 
cause I  find  this  to  be  the  case  with  myself,  I  feel 
called  upon  to  write  this  down,  simply  and  solely 
for  the  glory  of  God,  and  in  honor  of  His  holy  name. 
For  we  may  thank  none  but  the  dear  God,  that  He 
has  thus  far  in  this  dark  world  let  His  holy  word 
stand  like  a  light  in  a  candle-stick.  So  long  as  our 
feet  are  turned  in  the  path  of  peace,  we  can  say  with 
David  (Psalm  cxix,  105),  "Lord,  Thy  word  is  a 
lamp  unto  my  feet,  and  a  light  unto  my  path." 

But  may  God,  who  is  a  light,  and  in  whom  there 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        137 

is  no  darkness,  send  us  light  and  truth,  that  they 
may  lead  and  guide  us  through  this  dark  valley  of 
the  shadow  of  death  to  His  holy  mountain  and  to 
His  abode ;  that  we  may  also  in  truth  say  with  David 
(Psalm  xxxvi),  "In  Thy  light  we  see  light."  O, 
that  we  may  with  the  eyes  of  faith  not  only  see  this 
light,  but  also  walk  in  it,  and  by  it  at  last  conquer  all 
the  powers  of  darkness,  for  which  I  wish  and  pray 
from  my  heart  for  help  and  power  of  faith  from  on 
high.    Amen. 


Some  Questions  for  Children 

Whereby  the  fear  of  God  will  be  taught  them 
through  many  excellent  Scripture  passages. 

0.1.— What  is  faith! 

A. — The  substance  of  things  hoped  for,  the  evidence  of 
things  not  seen.    Hebrews  xi,  1. 

Q.  2. — Whence  cometh  faith? 

A. — So  then  faith  cometh  by  hearing,  and  hearing  by  the 
word  of  God.    Romans  x,  17. 

Q.  3. — To  reach  the  beginning  of  faith,  what  teacher  shall 
we  choose? 

A. — Looking  unto  Jesus,  the  author  and  finisher  of  our 
faith.    Hebrews  xii,  2. 

Q.  4. — "What  does  faith  do  when  it  is  righteous  ? 

A. — Knowing  this,  that  the  trying  of  your  faith  worketh 
patience.    James  i,  3. 

Q.  5. — What  must  a  Christian  give  in  his  faith  ? 

A. — And  besides  this,  giving  all  diligence,  add  to  your  faith 
virtue;  and  to  virtue,  knowledge;  and  to  knowledge,  temper- 
ance ;  and  to  temperance,  patience ;  and  to  patience,  godliness ; 
and  to  godliness,  brotherly  kindness ;  and  to  brotherly  kindness, 
charity.    II  Peter  i,  5,  6,  7. 


138   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Q.  6. — But  who  has  not  this  to  give  ? 

A. — He  is  blind,  and  cannot  see  afar  off,  and  hath  forgotten 
that  he  was  purged  from  his  old  sins.    II  Peter  i,  9. 

Q.  7. — Can  one  not  please  God  without  faith? 

A. — Without  faith  it  is  impossible  to  please  Him,  for  he 
that  cometh  to  God  must  believe  that  He  is,  and  that  He  is  a 
rewarder  of  them  that  diligently  seek  him.    Hebrews  ii,  6. 

Q.  8. — How  precious  then,  is  true  faith? 

A. — That  the  trial  of  your  faith,  being  much  more  precious 
than  of  gold  that  perisheth,  though  it  be  tried  with  fire,  might 
be  found  unto  praise  and  honor  and  glory  at  the  appearing  of 
Jesus  Christ.    I  Peter  i,  7. 

Q.9. — What  comfort  is  it  to  believing  souls  to  abide  in 
faith? 

A. — For  we  which  have  believed  to  enter  into  his  rest,  &c. 
Hebrews  iv,  3. 

Q.  10. — What  is  threatened  the  unbelieving? 

A. — And  to  whom  sware  He  that  they  should  not  enter  into 
His  rest,  but  to  them  that  believed  not.  So  we  see  that  they 
could  not  enter  in  because  of  unbelief.    Hebrews  iii,  18,  19. 

Q.  11. — To  what  shall  faithful  souls  be  kept? 

A. — Who  are  kept  by  the  power  of  God  through  faith  unto 
salvation  ready  to  be  revealed  in  the  last  time.  I  Peter  i,  5. 
See  v,  41. 

Q.  12. — By  what  quality  do  we  reach  true  justice? 

A. — If  thou  shalt  confess  with  thy  mouth  the  Lord  Jesus, 
and  shalt  believe  in  thine  heart  that  God  hath  raised  Him  from 
the  dead,  thou  shalt  be  saved.  For  with  the  heart  man  believeth 
unto  righteousness  and  with  the  mouth  confession  is  made  unto 
salvation.  For  the  Scripture  saith,  Whosoever  believeth  on 
Him  shall  not  be  ashamed.    Romans  x,  9,  10,  11. 

Q.  13. — When  we  through  faith  in  Christ  Jesus  partake  of 
such  justice,  what  is  the  relation  of  God  to  such  souls? 

A. — Therefore  being  justified  by  faith,  we  have  peace  with 
God  through  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.    Romans  v,  1. 

<}.  14. — Is  mere  faith  of  mouth  sufficient,  without  fruits, 
spirit  and  life? 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        139 

A. — For  as  the  body  without  the  spirit  is  dead,  so  faith 
without  works  is  dead  also.    James  ii,  26. 

Q.  15. — What  is  the  end  of  all  commandments  and  what  is 
its  character  f 

A. — Now  the  end  of  a  commandment  is  charity  out  of  a 
pure  heart,  and  of  a  good  conscience,  and  of  faith  unfeigned. 
I  Tim.  i,  5. 

Q.  16. — But  if  the  heart  is  not  righteous,  faith  is  feigned ; 
in  such  condition  do  we  partake  of  such  promises  ? 

A. — Thou  has  neither  part  nor  lot  in  this  matter,  for  thy 
heart  is  not  right  in  the  sight  of  God.  Repent  therefore  of  this 
thy  wickedness,  and  pray  God,  if  perhaps  the  thought  of  thine 
heart  be  forgiven  thee.    Acts  viii,  21,  22. 

Q.  17. — Holy  Script  bears  witness  that  Simon,  the  sorcerer, 
also  was  converted? 

A. — Thou  believest  that  there  is  one  God ;  thou  doest  well ; 
the  devils  also  believe,  and  tremble.    James  ii,  19  and  fol. 

Q.  18. — Which  faith  abides  before  God  in  Christ? 

A. — Even  as  Abraham  believed  God  and  it  was  reckoned 
to  him  for  righteousness.     Romans  iv,  9. 

Q.  19. — But  what  shall  one  do  when  he  finds  that  he  is  still 
a  sinner? 

A. — The  time  is  fulfilled,  and  the  kingdom  of  God  is  at 
hand ;  repent  ye  and  believe  the  Gospel.  St.  Mark  i,  15 ;  Matth. 
iii,  2 ;  Chap,  iv,  17. 

Q.  20. — What  is  promised  to  poor  repentant  sinners  ? 

A. — For  God  so  loved  the  world,  that  He  gave  His  only 
begotten  Son,  that  whosoever  believeth  in  Him  should  not 
perish,  but  have  everlasting  life.  St.  John  iii,  16.  Read  also 
St.  Luke  xv;  I  Tim.  i,  15;  Luke  xix,  10;  Matth.  xviii,  11; 
Matth.  xi,  28,  29,  30. 

Q.  21. — Are  there  in  Holy  Script  other  passages  testifying 
that  repentant  sinners  shall  receive  forgiveness  of  sins  by 
believing  in  Christ  Jesus  ? 

A. — To  Him  give  all  the  prophets  witness,  that  through 
His  name  whosoever  believeth  in  Him  shall  receive  remission  of 
sins.    Acts  x,  43. 


140   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Q.  22. — Does  this  promise  refer  to  all  repentant  sinners, 
or  is  there  a  distinction? 

A. — For  there  is  no  difference  between  the  Jew  and  the 
Greek ;  for  the  same  Lord  over  all  is  rich  unto  all  that  call  upon 
Him.  For  whosoever  shall  call  upon  the  name  of  the  Lord  shall 
be  saved.    Romans  x,  12,  13. 

Q.  23. — Did  God  send  His  Son  into  the  world  to  proclaim 
to  us  sinners  the  redeeming  Gospel? 

A. — The  Spirit  of  the  Lord  is  upon  me,  because  He  hath 
anointed  me  to  preach  the  Gospel  to  the  poor;  He  hath  sent 
me  to  heal  the  brokenhearted,  to  preach  deliverance  to  the 
captives,  and  recovery  of  sight  to  the  blind,  to  set  at  liberty 
them  that  are  bruised,  to  preach  the  acceptable  year  of  the 
Lord.  St.  Luke  xviii,  19 ;  John  iii,  17,  18 ;  I  John  iv,  9 ;  Gal. 
iv,  4,  5. 

Q.  24. — Now  as  God,  for  love  of  us  poor  sinners  did  not 
spare  His  own  Son,  but  sacrificed  Him  for  us  all,  so  that  all 
believing  in  Him  should  not  perish,  but  have  eternal  life;  the 
next  question  is,  seeing  that  true  faith  is  the  action  of  the  Holy 
Ghost  upon  us,  whereupon  shalt  this  faith  in  Jesus  Christ  be 
founded,  if  we  would  have  the  Holy  Ghost  as  our  leader,  and 
keep  it?  Have  we  certain  information  regarding  this  also  in 
Holy  Script,  or  may  we  in  this  regard  believe  according  to  our 
own  will,  judgment  and  liking  whatever  we  wish? 

A. — He  that  believeth  on  Me  as  the  Scripture  hath  said, 
out  of  his  belly  shall  flow  rivers  of  living  water.  (But  this 
spake  He  of  the  Spirit,  which  they  that  believed  on  Him  should 
receive,  for  the  Holy  Ghost  was  not  yet  given,  because  Jesus 
was  not  yet  glorified.)  John  vii,  38,  39.  See  also  II  Peter  i, 
16  and  21. 

Q.  25. — But  if  we  find  that  we  have  given  more  attention 
to  wise  tales  than  to  Holy  Writ,  thereby  preventing  the  Holy 
Ghost  from  implanting  the  true  faith  in  Jesus  Christ ;  and  we 
are  then  sorry  from  our  heart  and  would  like  to  become  pos- 
sessed of  it  again,  how  can  we  be  helped? 

A. — Ask,  and  it  shall  be  given  you ;  seek,  and  ye  shall  find ; 
knock,  and  it  shall  be  opened  unto  you:    For  every  one  that 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         141 

asketh  receiveth ;   and  he  that  seeketh  findeth ;  and  to  him  that 
knocketh  it  shall  be  opened.    Matth.  vii,  7,  8. 

Q.  26. — Hath  God  also  promised  such  poor  and  wretched 
ones  that  he  could  be  found  ? 

A. — Look  upon  Me,  and  be  ye  saved,  all  the  ends  of  the 
earth;  for  I  am  God,  and  there  is  none  else.  Isaiah  xlv,  22. 
Also  Jerem.  xxix,  11,  12,  13. 

Q.  27. — Because  the  references  given  emphatically  testify 
that  God  has  promised  a  hearing  to  those  repentant  sinners 
who  turn  to  Him  with  prayers,  the  question  arises,  what  is  the 
first  thing  they  should  ask  for  ? 

A. — Hide  Thy  face  from  my  sins  and  blot  out  all  mine 
iniquities.  Create  in  me  a  clean  heart,  0  God;  and  renew  a 
right  spirit  within  me.  Cast  me  not  away  from  Thy  presence ; 
and  take  not  Thy  Holy  Spirit  from  me.  Restore  unto  me  the 
joy  of  Thy  salvation;  and  uphold  me  with  Thy  free  Spirit. 
Psalm  li,  9-12. 

Q.  28. — To  whom  shall  we  pray? 

A. — Then  saith  Jesus  unto  him,  get  thee  hence,  Satan ;  for 
it  is  written,  Thou  shalt  worship  the  Lord  thy  God,  and  Him 
only  shalt  thou  serve.    Matth.  iv,  10. 

Q.  29. — In  whose  name  shall  we  pray  to  the  heavenly 
Father? 

A. — Verily,  verily,  I  say  unto  you,  whatsoever  ye  shall 
ask  the  Father  in  My  name,  He  will  give  it  to  you.  Hitherto 
have  ye  asked  nothing  in  My  name.  Ask  and  ye  shall  receive, 
that  your  joy  be  fulfilled.    John  xvi,  23,  24. 

Q.  30. — How  shall  our  prayer  proceed? 

A. — Therefore,  I  say  unto  you,  what  things  soever  you 
desire,  when  ye  pray,  believe  that  ye  receive  them,  and  yet  shall 
have  them.    Mark  xi,  24;  James  i,  3,  6. 

Q.  31. — How  shall  our  prayer  be  shaped  further,  that  we 
may  be  heard? 

A. — This  is  the  confidence  we  have  in  Him,  that,  if  we  ask 
anything  according  to  His  will,  He  heareth  us.    I  John  v,  14. 

Q.  32. — Now  if  the  spirit  be  willing,  but  the  power  to 
believe  too  weak,  who  helps  to  strengthen  this  power  in  prayer  ? 


142   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

A. — The  Spirit  helpeth  our  infirmities;  for  we  know  not 
what  we  should  pray  for  as  we  ought;  but  the  Spirit  itself 
maketh  intercession  for  us  with  groanings  which  cannot  be 
uttered.  And  he  that  searcheth  the  hearts  knoweth  what  is 
the  mind  of  the  Spirit,  because  He  maketh  intercession  for  the 
saints  according  to  the  will  of  God.    Romans  viii,  26  and  27. 

Q.  33. — Does  God's  power  still  reign  in  such  feeble  ones 
when  they  reveal  before  God  their  weakness  with  humble  and 
contrite  heart? 

A. — For  thus  saith  the  high  and  lofty  One  that  inhabiteth 
eternity,  whose  name  is  Holy:  I  dwell  in  the  high  and  holy 
place,  with  him  also  that  is  of  a  contrite  and  humble  spirit,  to 
revive  the  spirit  of  the  humble,  and  to  revive  the  heart  of  the 
contrite  ones.  For  I  will  not  contend  forever,  neither  will  I 
be  always  wroth:  for  the  spirit  shall  fail  before  me,  and  the 
souls  which  I  have  made.    Isaiah  lvii,  15,  16. 

Q.  34. — All  witnesses  cited  from  Holy  Script  clearly  show 
that  God's  help  is  not  lacking,  however  weak  faith  may  be,  if 
it  be  only  of  the  right  appearance  before  God,  God  will  come 
to  the  aid  of  our  weakness.  For  faith  is  an  action  of  the  Holy 
Ghost  in  us,  if  we  will  only  allow  it  to  act.  So  long,  however, 
as  unbelief  has  the  upper  hand  within  us,  the  evil  spirit  will 
through  unbelief  work  acts  of  unbelief,  namely,  all  unclean- 
ness,  dissension,  untruth,  injustice  and  all  ungodly  things  in 
the  children  of  unbelief,  whereby  God's  wrath  and  punishment 
will  come  upon  all  ungodly  conduct.  Now  the  question  is:  If 
God's  judgment  is  threatened  over  a  city  or  country,  and  there 
is  still  enough  faith  left  to  admit  that  our  punishment  was 
caused  by  unbelief  and  sin,  and  we  repent  of  wrong,  and  try  to 
do  right  and  justice,  and  raise  once  more  in  the  heart  by  faith 
what  unbelief  has  destroyed,  will  God  be  merciful  still  ? 

A. — Run  ye  to  and  fro  through  the  streets  of  Jerusalem, 
and  see  now,  and  know,  and  seek  in  the  broad  places  thereof, 
if  ye  can  find  a  man,  if  there  be  any  that  execute th  judgment, 
that  seeketh  the  truth;  and  I  will  pardon  it.  Jerem.  v,  i; 
Ezek.  xviii,  22,  23. 

Q.  35. — But  if  no  conversion  follow? 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        143 

A. — God  judgeth  the  righteous  and  is  angry  with  the 
wicked  every  day.  If  he  turn  not,  he  will  whet  his  sword;  he 
hath  bent  his  bow,  and  made  it  ready.  He  hath  also  prepared 
for  him  the  instruments  of  death;  he  ordaineth  his  arrows 
against  the  persecutors.    Psalm  vii,  11,  13. 

Q.  36. — As  since  the  fall,  man  likes  to  pose  as  knowing  and 
wise,  but  often  seeks  wisdom  in  matters  that  God  counts  fool- 
ishness, the  question  is :  By  what  quality  can  we  make  a  begin- 
ning in  true  wisdom  ? 

A. — The  fear  of  the  Lord  is  the  beginning  of  wisdom.  A 
good  understanding  have  all  they  that  do  His  commandments ; 
His  praise  endureth  forever.    Psalm  cxi,  10. 

Q.  37. — Because  the  fear  of  the  Lord  is  the  beginning  of 
wisdom,  is  it  desirable  for  the  young  to  begin  all  their  under- 
takings in  the  fear  of  God  ? 

A. — The  fear  of  the  Lord  is  the  beginning  of  knowledge, 
but  fools  despise  wisdom  and  instruction.    Proverbs  i,  7. 

Q.  38. — To  live  wisely  what  must  we  avoid? 

A. — Behold,  the  fear  of  the  Lord,  that  is  wisdom,  and  to 
depart  from  evil  is  understanding.    Job  xxviii,  28. 

Q.  39. — Can  we  find  information  where  true  knowledge 
resides  ? 

A. — Wisdom  enters  not  the  portals  of  a  wicked  soul,  nor 
dwells  in  a  body  under  the  bondage  of  sin.  For  the  Holy 
Ghost  which  teaches  aright  avoids  the  idolatrous  and  departs 
from  the  profligate  who  will  be  punished  for  his  sins.  Wisdom 
is  so  exalted  that  she  will  not  permit  the  scoffer  to  go  unpun- 
ished. For  God  is  a  witness  of  every  thought.  He  knows  the 
innermost  recesses  of  every  heart.  He  hears  every  word.  The 
orb  of  the  world  is  filled  with  the  Spirit  of  the  Lord.  He  who 
fathomest  speech  is  everywhere.  Therefore,  he  who  speaks 
falsely  will  not  escape;  and  the  right  by  which  he  is  to  be 
judged  will  not  fail  him.    Wisdom  of  Solomon  i,  4-8. 

Q.  40.— Where  then  doth  it  dwell? 

A. — The  fear  of  the  Lord  is  the  beginning  of  wisdom,  and 
is  alone  the  heart's  foundation  of  all  believers.  It  dwells 
with  the  elect  of  womankind  and  is  to  be  found  only  with  the 
righteous  and  believing  ones.    Sirach  i,  16. 


144   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Q.  41. — Because  God  has  sent  His  Son  into  this  world  that 
through  Him  we  shall  live,  who  has  left  us  an  example  in 
teachings  and  life,  that  we  shall  follow  His  footprints.  Who 
also  is  made  by  God  for  wisdom,  justice,  healing  and  redemp- 
tion. The  question  is :  Do  we  need  further  to  seek  after  knowl- 
edge, and  study  at  high  schools  of  philosophy,  the  books  of 
philosophers  and  teachings  of  men,  as  it  is  customary  in  the 
world  ? 

A. — Beware  lest  any  man  spoil  you,  through  philosophy 
and  vain  deceit,  after  the  tradition  of  men,  after  the  rudiments 
of  the  world  and  not  after  Christ.  For  in  Him  dwelleth  all 
the  fulness  of  the  Godhead  bodily.  And  ye  are  complete  in 
Him  which  is  the  head  of  all  principality  and  power.  Coloss. 
ii,  8,  10. 

Q.  42. — Wherein  then  shall  we  continually  study  and 
remain  ? 

A. — But  continue  thou  in  the  things  which  thou  hast 
learned,  and  hast  been  assured  of,  knowing  of  whom  thou  hast 
learned  them.  And  that  from  a  child  thou  hast  known  the 
Holy  Scriptures,  which  are  able  to  make  thee  wise,  unto  salva- 
tion through  faith  which  is  in  Christ  Jesus.  All  Scripture  is 
given  by  inspiration  of  God,  and  is  profitable  for  doctrine,  for 
reproof,  for  correction,  for  instruction  in  righteousness.  That 
the  man  of  God  may  be  perfect,  thoroughly  furnished  unto  all 
good  works.    II  Timothy  iii,  14,  17. 

Q.  43. — Because  Holy  Script,  if  we  follow  it,  teaches  us 
salvation,  and  to  found  our  faith  on  nothing  but  the  one  God 
and  Christ  whom  He  sent,  which  is  the  right  way  from  death 
into  life,  and  is  also  truth  and  life,  the  question  now  is: 
Whether  on  this  road  that  leads  to  life  we  may  expect  crosses 
and  troubles  ? 

A. — Confirming  the  souls  of  the  disciples  and  exhorting 
them  to  continue  in  the  faith,  and  that  we  must  through  much 
tribulation  enter  into  the  kingdom  of  God.    Acts  xiv,  22. 

Q.  44. — What  is  the  benefit  of  trouble,  if  we  are  patient 
unto  the  end? 

A. — For  our  light  afflictions,  which  is  but  for  a  moment, 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         145 

worketh  for  us  a  far  more  exceeding  and  eternal  weight  of 
glory;  while  we  look  not  at  the  things  which  are  seen,  but  at 
the  things  which  are  not  seen:  for  the  things  which  are  seen 
are  temporal;  but  the  things  which  are  not  seen  are  eternal. 
II  Corinth,  iv,  17,  18. 

Q.  45. — As  the  road  to  eternal  life  is  so  narrow  and  one 
must  enter  through  trial  and  tribulation  into  the  kingdom  of 
God,  is  it  necessary  daily  to  pray  God  for  strength  and 
patience  ? 

A. — For  ye  have  need  of  patience,  that,  after  ye  have  done 
the  will  of  God,  ye  might  receive  the  promise.  For  yet  a  little 
while,  and  He  that  shall  come  will  come,  and  will  not  tarry. 
Now  the  just  shall  live  by  faith,  but  if  any  man  draw  back, 
my  soul  shall  have  no  pleasure  in  him.  But  we  are  not  of 
them  who  draw  back  into  perdition,  but  of  them  that  believe 
in  the  saving  of  the  soul.    Hebrews  x,  36-39. 

Q.  46. — Have  we  also  to  expect  persecution? 

A. — Because  God  hath  loved  you,  it  had  to  be  thus.  With- 
out temptation  thou  canst  not  be,  in  order  that  thou  mayest  be 
established  in  the  faith.    Tobia  xii,  13. 

Q.  47. — Then  the  pious  will  be  saved  by  crosses  and  tribu- 
lations ? 

A. — Just  as  gold  is  purified  by  fire,  those  who  please  God 
are  approved  through  the  fire  of  tribulation.    Sirah  ii,  5. 

Q.  48. — If  it  is  the  fate  of  a  Christian  on  his  road  to  life 
to  be  tried  and  purified  by  the  fire  of  trouble,  is  it  a  Christian  's 
sole  mission  to  prepare  to  suffer  persecution? 

A. — My  child,  if  thou  desirest  to  be  God's  servant,  prepare 
thyself  for  tribulations.     Sirah  ii,  1. 

Q.  49. — How  must  we  behave  in  such  persecution? 

A. — My  brethren,  count  it  all  joy  when  you  fall  into  divers 
temptations;  knowing  this,  that  the  trying  of  your  faith 
worketh  patience.    James  i,  2,  3. 

Q.  50. — Is  such  trouble  and  persecution  sent  a  Christian  by 
God  solely  to  preserve  him,  or  has  he  other  enemies  for  Jesus' 
sake? 

A. — These  things  have  I  spoken  unto  you  that  ye  should 
10 


146   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

not  be  offended.  They  shall  pnt  you  out  of  the  synagogue; 
yea  the  time  cometh  that  whosoever  killeth  you  will  think  that 
he  doeth  God  service.  And  these  things  will  they  do  unto  you 
because  they  have  not  known  the  Father,  nor  Me.  But  these 
things  have  I  told  you  that  when  the  time  shall  come,  ye  may 
remember  that  I  told  you  of  them.  And  these  things  I  said 
not  unto  you  at  the  beginning  because  I  was  with  you.  John 
xvi,  1-4. 

Q.  51. — Then  if  I  understand  aright,  on  this  narrow  way 
we  may  expect  enemies? 

A. — Lord,  how  are  they  increased  that  trouble  me!  Many 
are  they  that  rise  up  against  me.  Many  there  be  which  say 
of  my  soul,  There  is  no  help  for  him  in  God.    Psalm  iii,  1,  2. 

Q.  52. — How  shall  a  Christian  act  toward  his  bodily  foes, 
and  what  orders  has  he  in  his  Christian  knighthood  from  his 
King? 

A. — But  I  say  unto  you,  love  your  enemies,  bless  them  that 
curse  you,  do  good  to  them  that  hate  you,  and  pray  for  them 
which  despitefully  use  you,  and  persecute  you.    Matth.  v,  44. 

Q.  53. — If  a  Christian  is  to  conquer  his  enemies  by  love, 
what  arms  does  love  carry  that  can  injure  enemies? 

A. — Charity  suffereth  long  and  is  kind;  charity  envieth 
not;  charity  vaunteth  not  itself,  is  not  puffed  up.  Doth  not 
behave  itself  unseemly,  seeketh  not  her  own,  is  not  easily  pro- 
voked, thinketh  not  evil ;  rejoiceth  not  in  iniquity,  but  rejoiceth 
in  the  truth  ■  beareth  all  things,  believeth  all  things,  hopeth  all 
things,  endureth  all  things.    I  Cor.  xiii,  4-7. 

Q.  54. — How  is  it  with  spiritual  enemies ;  what  weapons  of 
Christian  knighthood  are  used  against  them? 

A. — For  though  we  walk  in  the  flesh  we  do  not  war  after 
the  flesh.  (For  the  weapons  of  our  warfare  are  not  carnal, 
but  mighty  through  God  to  the  pulling  down  of  strongholds;) 
Casting  down  imaginations,  and  every  high  thing  that  exalteth 
itself  against  the  knowledge  of  God,  and  bringing  into  captivity 
every  thought  to  the  obedience  of  Christ.    II  Corinth,  xi,  3,  4,  5. 

Q.  55. — If  the  weapons  and  the  fighting  are  not  carnal,  the 
enemies  must  be  such  as  can  be  resisted  in  another  way.  Who 
are  all  these  enemies? 


TEAXSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        147 

A. — Finally,  my  brethren,  be  strong  in  the  Lord,  and  in 
the  power  of  His  might.  Put  on  the  whole  armor  of  God,  that 
ye  may  be  able  to  stand  up  against  the  wiles  of  the  devil.  For 
we  wrestle  not  against  flesh  and  blood,  but  against  the  rulers 
of  the  darkness  of  this  world,  against  spiritual  wickedness  in 
high  places.    Ephes.  vi,  10,  11.  12. 

Q.  56. — Are  these  all  the  foes  we  must  conquer? 

A. — For  whatsoever  is  born  of  God  overcometh  the  world; 
and  this  is  the  victory  that  overcometh  the  world,  even  our 
faith.    I  John  v,  4. 

Q.  57. — Are  there  other  foes  that  fight  against  the  soul? 

A. — Dearly  beloved,  I  beseech  you  as  strangers  and  pil- 
grims, abstain  from  fleshly  lusts,  which  war  against  the  soul. 
I  Peter  ii,  11.  And  also :  Let  not  sin  therefore  reign  in  your 
mortal  body,  that  ye  should  obey  it  in  the  lusts  thereof.  Ro- 
mans vi.  12. 

Q.  58. — How  shall  we  strengthen  our  power  against  such 
enemies ! 

A. — Finally,  my  brethren,  be  strong  in  the  Lord,  and  in  the 
power  of  His  might.    Ephes.  vi,  10. 

Q.  59. — Have  we  also  news  that  a  war  has  arisen? 

A. — And  there  was  war  in  heaven.  Michael  and  his  angels 
fought  against  the  dragon:  and  the  dragon  fought  and  his 
angels;  and  prevailed  not;  neither  was  their  place  found  any 
more  in  heaven.  And  the  great  dragon  was  cast  out,  that  old 
serpent  called  the  Devil,  and  Satan,  which  deceiveth  the  whole 
world :  he  was  cast  out  into  the  earth,  and  his  angels  were  cast 
out  with  him.    Revel,  xii,  7,  8,  9. 

Q.  60. — Xow  because  this  enemy  was  conquered  in  heaven, 
overcome  and  cast  out,  we  while  we  live  on  earth  must  fight 
him  here,  and  are  unable  to  wage  such  war  alone  and  without 
the  help  of  God's  divine  power.  LTnless  the  strong  hero  of 
David's  race,  who  can  take  his  booty  from  the  giant,  come  and 
help  us,  this  enemy  will  seek  to  bar  our  way  to  heaven.  For 
with  our  power  nothing  can  be  done,  and  our  own  strength  is 
easily  vanquished? 

A. — But  now  thus  saith  the  Lord  that   created  thee,   0 


148   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Jacob,  and  He  that  formed  thee,  O  Israel,  Fear  not :  for  I  have 
redeemed  thee,  I  have  called  thee  by  thy  name ;  thou  art  Mine. 
When  thou  passest  through  the  waters,  I  will  be  with  thee; 
and  through  the  rivers,  they  shall  not  overflow  thee ;  when  thou 
walkest  through  the  fire,  thou  shalt  not  be  burned;  neither 
shall  the  flame  kindle  upon  thee,  and  fol.    Isaiah  xliii,  1,  2,  &c. 

Q.  61. — If  this  is  promised  us  poor  ones  for  our  protection, 
then  we  may  be  very  happy  in  everything  that  may  befall  us 
in  God's  will. 

A. — What  shall  we  then  say  to  these  things?  If  God  be 
for  us,  who  can  be  against  us?  He  that  spared  not  His  own 
Son,  but  delivered  him  up  for  us  all,  how  shall  he  not  with 
him  also  freely  give  us  all  things  ?  Romans  viii,  31,  32,  to  the 
end. 

Q.  62. — How  have  the  faithful  vanquished  the  enemy? 

A. — And  they  overcame  him  by  the  blood  of  the  Lamb,  and 
by  the  word  of  their  testimony;  and  they  loved  not  their  lives 
unto  death.    Revel,  xii,  11. 

Q.  63. — If  we  can  conquer  by  the  death  and  blood  of  Christ, 
if  we  relinquish  ourselves  to  absolute  faith,  have  we  a  fortress 
in  which  we  are  safe  from  the  foe  and  soul-murderer? 

A. — The  name  of  the  Lord  is  a  strong  tower :  the  righteous 
runneth  into  it  and  are  safe.    Prov.  xviii,  10. 

Q.  64. — But  this  enemy  and  soul-murderer  found  our  first 
parents  in  paradise  in  this  tower,  which  he  could  not  take  by 
force,  but  caused  it  to  surrender  by  deceit  and  cunning.  The 
question  is:  Is  it  necessary  to  be  watchful  even  within  this 
fortress  ? 

A. — Be  sober,  be  vigilant,  because  your  adversary,  the  devil, 
as  a  roaring  lion,  walketh  about,  seeking  whom  he  may  devour ; 
whom  resist  steadfast  in  the  faith,  knowing  that  the  same  afflic- 
tions are  accomplished  in  your  brethren  that  are  in  the  world. 
I  Peter  v,  8,  9. 

Q.  65. — How  long  is  it  necessary  to  be  watchful  ? 

A. — Watch  ye  therefore,  and  pray  always,  that  ye  may  be 
accounted  worthy  to  escape  all  these  things  that  shall  come  to 
pass,  and  to  stand  before  the  Son  of  man.    Luke  xxi,  36. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        149 

Q.  66. — What  is  the  war  cry  of  these  watchers  ? 

A. — Watch  ye,  stand  fast  in  the  faith,  quit  ye  like  men, 
be  strong.  Let  all  your  things  be  done  with  charity.  I  Corinth, 
xvi,  13,  14. 

Q.  67.— What  clothes  shall  they  wear? 

A. — Put  on  therefore,  as  the  elect  of  God,  holy  and  beloved, 
bowels  of  mercies,  kindness,  humbleness  of  mind,  meekness, 
long  suffering,  forbearing  one  another,  forgiving  one  another, 
if  any  man  have  a  quarrel  against  any,  even  as  Christ  for- 
gave you,  so  also  do  ye.  And  above  all  these  things  put  on 
charity  which  is  the  bond  of  perfection.  Coloss.  iii,  12,  13,  14, 
to  17. 

Q.  68. — Wherein  consists  their  implements  of  war,  armor 
and  weapons,  that  they  daily  seize,  and  have  in  readiness  if 
they  wish  to  fight  and  conquer  this  soul-enemy? 

A. — Wherefore  take  unto  you  the  whole  armor  of  God, 
that  ye  may  be  able  to  withstand  in  the  evil  day,  and  having 
done  all,  to  stand.  Stand  therefore  having  your  loins  girt  about 
with  truth,  and  having  On  the  breastplate  of  righteousness; 
and  your  feet  shod  with  the  preparation  of  the  gospel  of  peace ; 
above  all,  taking  the  shield  of  faith,  wherewith  ye  shall  be  able 
to  quench  all  the  fiery  darts  of  wickedness.  And  take  the 
helmet  of  salvation,  and  the  sword  of  the  Spirit,  which  is  the 
word  of  God.  Praying  always  with  all  prayer  and  supplication 
in  the  Spirit,  and  watching  thereunto  with  all  perseverance 
and  supplication  for  all  Saints.    Ephes.  vi,  13-18. 


END. 


150   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


CHILDREN'S   SONGS 

OR  ENCOURAGEMENT  FOR  THE  CHILDREN 
Tune:    /  Know  a  Floweret  Beautiful  and  Fair. 

1. 

Come,  dear  children,  come  hither, 
And  learn  to  know  Jesus. 
Do  come  and  see  how  good  He  is, 
How  innocent  and  faithful. 
Come !  call  Him  master. 

2. 

0  see  His  kindliness 
That  bends  toward  you, 
How  heartily  he  offers  himself 
To  you  at  all  times 
To  show  much  good. 

3. 

He  wants  to  teach  you,  quietly  and  piously 
To  live  after  God's  will. 
He  calls,  dear  child,  come 
And  become  pious. 
He  will  give  thee  all. 

4. 

0,  then  come,  children,  do  go  on 

Into  Jesus 's  school. 

Hear,  learn  and  follow  His  teaching, 

The  lessons  are  not  hard. 

Sit  down  here 

On  the  chairs  of  His  wisdom. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG         151 

5. 

How  good  it  is,  how  fine  and  beautiful, 

How  lovely  to  behold, 

When  children  are  right  obedient 

And  gladly  alone 

Go  to  Jesus 's  school. 

6. 

There  they  learn  with  eagerness  and  joy 

Rightly  to  pray,  read,  sing, 

And  seek  their  lifetime, 

In  holiness, 

With  Jesus  to  spend. 

7.        « 
0  such  children  are  well  off. 
They  will  forever  dwell 
In  heaven  with  joyful  spirit, 
Where  Jesus  does 
Reward  pious  children. 

8. 

They  will  there  in  great  joy 

Dwell  every  day  and  hour. 

No  fear,  no  wrong,  no  sadness, 

No  pain  and  sorrow 

Will  surround  them  there  any  more. 

9. 
Therefore,  dear  children,  learn  gladly 
And  love  Jesus  filially. 
Serve  Him,  as  your  God  and  Lord, 
And  fly  far 
From  all  that  is  sinful. 

10. 
Do  not  follow  the  group  of  bad  children, 
The  loafer  and  the  gambler, 


152   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Who  only  mock  your  Jesus, 
Who  do  not  love  God  and 
Will  not  be  Jesus 's  pupil. 

11. 
Become  well  acquainted  with  Jesus 
And  sit  at  His  feet. 
Give  Him  your  right  hand 
And  say :  Savior ! 
0,  let  me  kiss  thee. 

12. 
Hang  like  little  children 
About  His  loving  arms, 
And  say,  He  shall  be  merciful 
To  you  children 
And  have  pity  on  you. 

13. 

He  shall  bless  you  with  understanding, 

That  you  avoid  the  bad. 

He  shall  become  well  acquainted  with  you 

As  a  Savior 

Who  frees  you  from  sin. 

14. 

Yes,  beg  Him  to 
Give  you  pleasure  and  love. 
His  dear,  gentle,  sweet  yoke 
Still  learn  as  children 
To  wear  thoughtfully. 

15. 

He  shall  your  youthful  hearts 

Fill  with  His  love, 

That  it  think  ever  heavenward, 

And  all  jesting 

Ignore  for  His  sake. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHUL-ORDNUNG        153 

16. 
Thus,  children,  cling  to  Him  heartily. 
Ah !  hang  on  His  hands 
And  say:   0  Jesus,  lead,  then 
Lead  us  henceforth. 
0  lead  us  to  the  end. 

17. 
Lead  us  out  of  this  wilderness 
Of  the  wicked  turmoil  of  the  world, 
Into  the  Fatherland,  where  we  may  be  pleased, 
0  Jesus  true, 
With  the  glory  of  heaven. 


154   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

DYING  SONG 

Tune:   Who  Letteth  Only  God  Command. 

1. 

0,  come  here,  ye  children  of  men ! 

0  come  and  see  the  nothingness, 
The  vanity  of  proud  sinners 
And  their  life's  emptiness. 
For  all,  all  that  ye  see 

Bears  the  inscription :  it  perisheth ! 

2. 

1  lie  here  on  my  death  bed, 
Quite  infected  by  the  poison  of  sin. 
My  spirit  knows  no  resting  place 
That  the  dear  Hand  has  given  me 
Save  only  the  name  Jesus  Christ, 
Who  also  in  death  is  my  life ! 

3. 
My  earthly  life  is  over 
And  my  days  are  passed. 
The  short  pilgrimage  is  ended ; 
It  is  my  time  to  die. 
But  I  am  glad,  Lord  Jesus  Christ, 
That  Thou  art  with  me. 

4. 
I  have  by  God's  rich  grace 
Long  ago  said  Good-night  to  the  world, 
And  on  the  narrow  path  of  Jesus 
Sought  true  peace  of  spirit. 
But  I  have  not  done  what  was  useful, 
And  used  far  too  little  seriousness. 


TRANSLATION:  SCHULORDNUNG         155 

5. 

0  God,  through  Thy  loving  hands 
Prepare  me  now  still, 

That  I  at  my  final  end 
Depart  comforted  in  Thy  salvation. 
Thy  will  be  to  me  in  eternity 
A  centre  of  contentment. 

6. 
Herewith  will  I  now  take  leave 
From  those  who  knew  me  here ; 
First  from  those  who  grieve, 
In  their  poor  condition  of  sorrow, 
Fear  God,  and  pray  day  and  night ; 
Trust  in  Him ;  now  good-night. 

7. 
Good-night,  ye  rich  of  this  earth, 
Who  call  riches  happiness. 

1  never  wished  to  grow  rich. 
It  only  lasts  a  moment  at  best, 
And  Christ  calls :  a  hard  pain ! 
Think  of  it,  I  pray  you  as  a  parting. 

8. 
Good-night,  you  wild  swarm  of  youth, 
Ye  unconverted  brood  of  heathens, 
That  know  nothing  of  honor  and  virtue, 
And  bear  fruit  only  for  Satan. 
Follow  God's  earnest  word  and  advice, 
Or  you  will  never  find  grace. 

9. 

Good-night,  ye  worldly  hearts, 
That  seek  pleasure  on  earth 
In  pastime,  laughter,  play,  jesting, 
And  bear  no  fruit  to  your  God. 


156   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

O,  do  ye  souls,  do  penance, 

0,  ye  souls,  do  penance, 

Else  you  will  descend  into  darkness. 

10. 
Good-night,  all  of  you, 
Thou  false,  bad,  wicked  world; 
That  your  doings  do  not  please  me 
My  life  has  shown  you. 
If  it  had  not,  by  God's  grace, 
Happened  earlier,  it  would  be  too  late  now. 


GEISTLICHES   MAGAZIEN 

PART  I.  Nos.  33,  40,  41 
AND  PART    IL  No.   15 


ÄrifHtefctf  SBasotirm  3?um-  33. 

Copt4  eitw  &d>tifft  welche  &ec  @d>ulmeifJ«: 

itbviflQpb  2>ocF,  an  ferne  nocb  lebeuöe  Scbuler 
3»r  Jtel>r  irnö  Verm^nutigatie Jltebcgcfcbriebeii^t. 

jjfiftftn  ^Dienern  unb  SWtetfen,  $aufc33dfem  unb  SJÄüffern, 
***  nebfl  ibren  ÄinDern  unb  Slngebörigen,  tuänfcbc  icb  jur  l)erfc 
ficben  SSegrüfliing,  DafJ  Der  ©Ott  be$  ^rieben*,  unfere  £er£en 
unb  (Sinnen  regieren  trolle  ju  einem  &Ött  woblgefdlligen  Sebeti 
unb  2ßanbe(,  ju  tbun  ma*  *>or  ibm  gefällig  i|l,  bureb  SSfuro 
€&rifi,  welc&em  ftp  gfrtc/  t>on  Swigfeit  ju  ©mgfeit  Slmen. 

(Beliebte  in  bem  &igrm! 

|2W  bit  Urfacb   to'efe*  tbun,  tint)  bat  <Sd)ufrecf>t  in 

vgebreibens  anbelangt,  Cbritfi  ©ebul*  ju  lernen;  unt> 

fo  gefebiebet  fofebe^  aus  lieft  jubereiten  unb  jubereitenlaf* 

einer  bringenben  Siebe  jur  2luf*  fen  wollen,  gbrifti  3ocl>  auf|ufr 

munterung,  aueft  eine  fterßlicbe  $u  nehmen,  unb  als  ©eftafleitt 

Üiebeä*  Tarnung,  au«  freuer  rbrem  (Seelen  Wirten  in  febr  unb 

ßebefc$0icftt  an  alle  meine  ge*  Seben  ju  folgen,  jicft  willig  m 

tt>cfene  ©eftüler,  fo  noeft  t>orge*  ©efcorfam  ergeben,  unb  ferner 

genwdrtige  3eit  im  Sehen  |inb/  ergeben  wollen;  folgen  wirb  aueft 

bann  teft  niebt  wifien  fan,  wie  wann  fit  biä  anö  gnbe  getreu 

balb  leb  meine  fterblicbe  £im  »erbleiben  ju^fail  werben,  mt 

ablegen  werbe,  acb!  liebe  Sin*  ber  #£tT3gfuöfolcbent)er&eif* 

Der!  mann icb jurücf benefe, xva&  fen,  3ofj.  i o, ^ 7. z 8. 
ber  #£rr  tjor  @naben>@aben       <2Betfert  aberbiefe2fnjal)lfebt 

in  eueb  gefeget,  ba  tbr  noeb  in  gering,  unb  (?<ft  wobl  eine  gröf* 

eurer  f  inbfieften  ginfalt  wäret,  fere  Slnjabf  jtnben  moebfen,  bie 

unb  wie  erfreulieb  e^  mir  ifi,  wan  mitS)ema$  bk  2öeft  lieb  ge* 

teft  an  bm  erwaebfenen  ©cbülern  wonnen,  bem  gleifcb  ©eborfant 

feften  unb  fpübren  fan,  baß  bk  ju  leiten  in  feinen  Süflen,  welcfte$ 

gurebt  &öttt$  in  ibren  £er£en  boeft,  wofern  eö  niebrbureb  ber§* 

fXaum  unb  $la|  bef  ommen  bat,  liefte  35uf]e  in  einem  beftern@mn 

ben  böfen  Stiften  unb  SSegierben  unb  Sebenö*3)erdnDeuing  noeft 

M  Sletföx*  Sßiberjfanb,  ju  biefFeitbero@rabfomt,f<>tftut 

Äf  ©ÜCteS 


159 


160    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

254  C£r.  £>0cTs,  eines  Qcfculmeiffer*/ 

©Otf  eg  2Bort  in  £etL  ©cbrifft  Den  reifen  ^Beinfiocf  €ljriffurfi 

Den  2lu$fprucb  folcber©cftalfü*  3£funiin  farmer  ^efc&er* 

Der  fokbe/  unD  ijt  unD  bleibt  über  einigung  riacb  feinem  ©ebot  unD 

üBeunbngfcrrige/fleif(ilic69e(in*  bcfeljf/  in  freiwilligem  ©ebor* 

te  SWmMxn  Der  Jludfprucb  alfp/  fam  einverleiben  ju  (affen/  ju  ej* 

wie  fotebetf. an  »ielen  Orten  to  nem  fcyc&cbarcn  Sieben/  Der 

^eiliger  ©cbrifft  fan  naefcgefe*  grüßte  tratftjum  ewigen  &ben/ 

tynn>erDen/aW9Wm.8/*.7.8.  *ö£rr  3£fu  Du  bift  ja  unfer 

aucb  9?6m.  4,  20.  *i.  @al.  f/  Bräutigam/  Du  bfllija  Diefeöin 

i9.zo,@af.<^7.8.?.  (£pbef.5/  Deinem  feeftgm'acbenDeq  2Bort 

3.4.  r6.<£olof.3/f.&7*8. un&  wdWffafe  unbimö  fo  freunDIicj) 

an  liefen  anDern  Orten  mefor.  eingelaDenunDgefprocben:Ste* 

2lu$   angcfübiten    SeugnufTen  £e  icfc>  fle^e  vor  Der  C^ur 

•ÖeiL  ©grifft  fan  gefeben  mu  vnb  Wopfe  <tn,  fo  jemand 

Den,  road  Die  $kbe  Diefer  2Beff/  meine  Stimme  f>oren  wirb/ 

in  2lugenlu|l>  Sleifcbedlufl  unD  unD  Die  <E£ur  rtufc^uii/  311 

fcoffcirtigem  ?eben  »or  ein  <2Bein^  t>em  werDe  icb  eingeben  tinö 

fiocf  ift/ reader  fcorftrucbtbrin*  t>46  2tbertDmal>i  mit  ifym 

get;  er  bringet  feine  gruebt  jum  galten,  unb  er  mit  mir, 
eroigen  {eben/  Dann  ibr  %Qein*       2lcb  Dag  folcl)e  ÖebefcTSeref* 

fioef  i(t  DedSOüeinflocfdjuQSo*  nigung  aucb  bei;  und  gefebeben 

Dom/  nnD  DonDemSIcFerjuÖo*  mochte/  flopfeDann  liebfler3@> 

morra;  ibre  Trauben  tfnD  ©alle/  fu  bei;  und  alien  an,  an  Der  3J)ii* 

«nD  baben  bittere  beeren,  ibr  re  unferd  *iöer£end.   2lcb  möcb* 

2Bein  ift  $)racben<@ijft,  unb  fen  Docfc  Diejenige;  Die  Die  SHSeft 

routiger  OtUxn  ©alle/  1  SSucfr  in  Slugenluft,  gfeifdjedluft  unD 

9i)?ofe  32/  3  2.  f)öffdrtigem  icbm  Ikb  geroonen/ 

UnD  ob  ed  gfeieb  (eben  noelj  Deine  (Stinte  Wren;  aufmachen/ 

niebt  fo  roeit  jum  Verfall  font*  *>om  ©unDemJagcr  auffielen/ 

men/Daf?  man  folebe  grobe  2£er*  unD  Dir  ibre  «öertjend^bürauf* 

cf e  Ded  gleifcbed  »ollbracbt/  roo*  ff>un,  Der  Qföelt  abfagen,  unD  Dir 

doii  in  angefügten  geugnüffen  nacfrfolcjen  in  Mr  unD  Jeben/ 

$eil.  ©grifft  tiielDung  gefebe*  hierzu  roolle  Der  gnaDenreidje 

l>en/  fo  ifl  Dod)  Die  Seit  Die  man  ©Ott 'Den  ©egen  geben, 
nacb  feinedgleifdjed  £u|icn  jufc*       Söann  mir  betraebten,  Die 

ben  angemenDet/  niebt  ju  feiner  bolDfeelige  unD  gnaDenreicbe,  ja 

(Seelen  £ct>l  unD  ©eeligf  eit  an*  liebreiche  SinfaDung  Deö  £>£rrn 

öeroenDct  roorDen,  unD  roare  ja  3£fu  w  «Ue  9)?enfcben;  mefebe 

ÜSöcblt  n6tl)ig   Dom  (SünDen*  er  in  feinem  ^eftamentlicbeo 

©ijlaf  (iiiftuft^eii/  «i)D  Hc^  in  Sßillcn  fopiclfdltig  (?interlaffen; 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  33  161 

<£rn|fWc&e  «Ermahnung  <w  feint  Qcbölcr  ic.    zt$ 

ic&  ttM'Q  Der  f  urge  nacb  mir  etliche  unD  truefnefe  fte  mit  ibrem  £aar, 

dnftibren:  erjMi*#  ©totlft.  ii/  unD  Füfiete  feine  Süjfe,  unDfal* 

28. 29. 30.  rufft  er  mir  unD  aU  bttt  jie  mit  ©alben.    Sftun lie* 

len  €0?cnfdf>en  su>  un6  fpriebt:  6ea  ilinDer/  Die  ibr  ju  eurem 

ÄOrtimt  6er  3»  nur  alle,  &ie  93erjfanD  unD  Saferen  fommen/ 

i^r  mu^feh'g   mtt>  belfert  beDencfet  Dfefed  bei)  *uc&  felbfo 

fey&/icbwiUeucberqta'cFen/  ©jriflud  ruffet  alle  mubfe'tee 

nehmet  auf  eu&  mein  3ocb  unD  belaDene  ju  (Id);  unD  mir  ftnt) 

im&  lernet  vtn  mit,  bann  ja  alle  müfefelig  unD  mit  @ün* 

idb  bin  fhnffmftti>ik/  unb  Den  belaDen,  $>ann  wer  Da 

von  fatten  fcemut|ug/  (0  weiß  <Sutö  3«  tt>uu;  unt> 

wer&et  x'^r  Kul^c  finden  vor  t^ufcs  niefct;  öem  ifjs  Qun* 

eure  Seelen;  &4iFmein  3ocb  fce.  3>ac  4/ 1 7. 

iff  fcnfft;  unt>  meine  &<*#  (Jpriftuö  nötiget  und  folteb* 

ifi  leiebt.  retc^/  aber  er  mill  und  niebt  jmin* 

35r  lieben  Äftiber!  n>tr  wer*  gen;  cd  erforDert  ju  Diefemfom* 

Öen  ja  bier  ton  unferm  @eelen*  men  eisen  frepmilfigen  ©ebor* 

Bräutigam  fo  liebreich  genötf)i<  fam/  Diefoeilenaber  in  feinem  ans 

get  ju  f ommerv  unD  er  mill  mt  Dem  #et)f,  unD  ift  aud)  fein  an* 

erquicken,  unD  mann  mir  fein  Derer  $?ame  unter  Dem  #immef 

3fod)  auf und  nebmen/  unD  #er*  Den  ?0?cn|cben  gegeben;  Darin  mir 

fjend  5)emutb  unD  <§5anfftmutf)  follen  feiig  merDen,   aid  allein 

son  ihm  fernen/  fo  merDen  mir  Durcb  Cbriftunv  er  ift  Dad  im* 

Stube  fi'nDen  t>or  unfere  (Seele,  fcbulDige  £am,  meld;ed  Der  gan* 

unD  fofebe  (Seefen^Xulje  mirDe*  £en  2Be(t©ünDe  getragen/  £r 

mig  jugeniefenfetw;  nun&in*  tft  Die  Q3erftf)nung  für  unfere 

Der!  mad  iflDocbfüffer  aid  Stuft,  unD  Der  gangen  26e(t  (SünDe 

unD  5)emutb  ift  Der  SÜßeg  Da*  morDen,  er  ift  unfer  ©eelen* 

jü;  unD  mad  ift  fcftmerfcücfter  Sßrdutigam,  Der  Dad  wrlobwe 

aid  ^ein,  unD  #od;mutfo  (türmet  menfd)licbe©efd)(ed)t  mieDer  au* 

Da  fcinein.  Ded  &atant  50?acbt  erlöfete,  unö 

2Bie  erquieflieb  mar  ed  Der  miH  fieb  mit  feinem  erlöfcten 

großen  (SimDerrn,  »on  mefeber  SDtcnfcbJtc&en  ©cfcblecbt  i>erfo* 

mir  fefen  ?uca  7.  aid  ibr  Der  »öerr  ben  in  Smigf eit;  fo  folte  ja  auf 

3<£ftfd  Die  fernere  @ünDenla|l  unferer  (Seite  Daf?  Q3erfoben  an 

abgenommen;  unD  ibre  ©eefe  Sbriflum  unfern  ©eefen*Q3rdu* 

nibe  gefunDeiv  jur  feerglicben  tigam;  mie  mir  in  Siebe  mit  ibm 

üöancffagungfagtefteficbjuDed  verlobt  unD  vereinigt  merDen 

*Ö£rrn  3gfii  güffen  nieDer;  unD  möcbten;  unfer  ^auptmeref  linö 

negte  feine  güfie  mit  ordnen  innigfteö  QSerlangen  fei;n;  mo^ 

ft'l  *  nacb 
11 


162     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


2166  <ü)t.  &*&$t  titles  ©cbiilmeijier*, 

nacb  wir  am  erßen  trachten  fok  fö&mOpftr  t>or  mein  utfo  btt 
ten/  ja  eä  folte  un$  mebr  Daran  ganzen  <2jßclt  ©ünOe  worDen/ 
gelegen  fet)n;  alt  an  allem  n?a6   Den  ba|l  Du  unö  autf  Siebe  gege* 
fiebtbar  ift,  er  allein  ift  un$t>on   ben,  ad;  gib  mid)  ifomaucbjum 
<5(Dttgemacbt^  $ur  tPefe*   ©gentfjum  über,  &aß  id)  Durd) 
£ett,3ur<0erccbttgfceit,3ttr  fein  bitter  ScpDen  unD  (Sterben 
^eiligimg  mtfc  3ur  i£rlo*  t>on  meinen  ©ünDcn  gereinigt 
futtg,  1  Sorintl).  r,  30.  £$ift  werbe,  Der  fan  mid;  Durd)  fein 
anDerä  fein  Mittler  jwifdjen  S5I  ut  rein  igen;  unD  id)  mill  mid) 
©Ott  unD  Den  9)?enfd)en,  alä  aud)  fortbin  Diefem  (geelen*21r£t 
nur  aüein  Der  eingebobrne  @of)n  gan£  übergeben  in  gewilligen  ©e* 
©otteä/  (Sbrijkg  3Sfu6; i^im.  borfam;  unD  Die  ©ebote  unD  55e* 
2/4. 5.6.  5)urd)  ibn  baben  wir  fef>(C/  Die  er  mir/  meine  arme  unD 
einen  gugang  jum  33ater/  £pb.  wrwunDete  ©eele  511  freien/  »or* 
2, 17-18.  UnD  wann  wir  mit  fdjreibt/  gutwillig  annebmen; 
Dem  t)erlof)rnen  ©ol>n  red)t  in  fommen  wir  fo  mit  Dem  t>er* 
uns  fd)fagen/   unD  unfern  Zu*  lofyrne  (gobn  in  wabrem  ©lau* 
tfanD  wegen  unferer  begangenen   ben;  f)er^lid;er5Su|]e/  mir  einem 
©ünDen  red)t  ju  «öcrfcen  faffen,   Demütbigen  unD  jerfd)Iagenen 
unD  in  recbter£erßen$  SSufii  Den   #er£en  unD  ©emütbe  511m  Q3a* 
SSorfa^faflTen,  mttDcm  Mtofo  tctf  unD  Dem  @of)n/  fo  folget 
«en  @obn  jum  Q}ater  ju  geben,   hierauf  Die  jwet)te  ginlaDung  De$ 
unD  ju  ibm  fagen :  Vater  tcb  #£rrn  3£fii/   unD  Die  i(t  fo 
£abe   gcfimDiget  in    bem   freunDlicb  unD  gnaDenreid)  alt 
fymmävnbvQrbiv,  icbbm  Die  grfte,  fte  ifl  betrieben  im 
triebt  tvcrtb  ba$  tcb  t>et'n  (gt>angelio  3o()anne$6,37.unD 
©obn  betfje,   macbe  mtcb   lautet  nne  folgt :   Zilee  wa$ 
mir  ale  einen  beiner  ZaQ*   mir  mein  Vater  gibt,  bae 
Joiner,  icb  ergebe  mid)  nun  aufä   fcomtsi*  mir,  unb  wer  31$ 
neue  unter  Deinen  ©eborfanvunD   nur  tome,  fte«  wcr&e  tct> 
fage  nun  Dem  (Satan,  DerSBelt  triebt  binaw  floflen. 
unD  meinem  fleifcb(i%ge|tnten      @o  fomme  Dann  wer  @ün* 
ßigenwillen  ab/  Die  micj)  bieber   Derfjeifjt/  unD  wen  fein  ©um 
Don  Dir  unD  Deiner  ©naDe  baben   Den  *©reul  betrübet/  $u  Dem/ 
äbgewenDet/  acb  ©Ott  fei;  mir   Der  Uinen  t>on  fk\>  weißt/  Der  fiel) 
(günDer  gnaDig/  unD  gib  mir   gebeugt  ju  ibm  begiebet/ wie  wilt 
Den  Mittler  jwifdben  Dir  unD  Den   Du  Dir  im  ik\)te  fief>tl/  unD  Durcl) 
?0?enfcbcn/    Da$    ijl  Dein  lie*   Did)  fefbft  Derfoftren  gej)n;  wilt 
ber  ©obn/  an  Dem  Du  26ol)lge<   Du  Der  ©ünDc  langer  Dienen/  Da 
fallen  baft/  Der  iß  ia  bat  Q3ev*  Did)  ju  retten/  er  erfebienen/  O 

nein! 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  33  163 

igwfjltdbc  iSrm^tmtfff  4rt  feilte  Scfcöler  :c.    2*7. 

min  i  »erlaß  Die  @ünDen*Q3ahn,  $?atthdt  3/  Die  famen  auch  ja 

mein  £eplanD  nimtDie  ©itnDer  SobanneS  kaufte,  roie  aber  So* 

an.  f>anneä  ihr  (SigenroiHigeä  unö 

SSGaS  (int)  nun  bie  £inber*  hochmütiges  Sehen  anfahe,  fo 

nüffen/  Die  unö  fcerbinDern,  Daß  nannteer  fte  öttergejud;te,  unt> 

»irnicbtjuCbritfounfermSee*  fpracbju  ihnen:  Seilet  suunfr 

len*33rdutigam  fommen?  ti^utrecbtfcbaffetie^rncbte 

2)er©atan  (Met  uns  Da$  berBuffe.  2lber  fte  rJ)dten  nicht 

Üteicb  Diefer  2Belt  unD  ibre£err*  95uße,fte  »erachteten  auch  @öt* 

lichfeit  sor,  in  Slugenluft,  glei*  teS  Üvatb  roiDer  ftct>  felbtf,  unö 

fdjeälufi,  unb  ^ojfdrtigem  geben/  liefen  fkh  nicht  taufen,  al$  ju 

unD  wann  roir  Dafi  unferm  fieifcb*  feben  juca  7-    ©er  #©rr  3£* 

ltdjgeftnten  ©genroillen,    Der  fu$  gab  ihnen  auchDenOJathroaS 

nad)  Dem  gall  üon  5ftatur  $um  fte  tbun  folten  Daß  fte  DaScroige 

SBöfen  geneigt  i|i,  Die  «öerrfchafft  Sehen  jinDen  möchten/  Die  26or* 

überladen/  fo  roirb  Daä  kommen  te  ftnD  betrieben  3fohanne$  $♦ 

ju  (£britfo  roenig  gortgang  ge*  unD  lauten  rote  folgt :  Qwcfcet 

rotnnen,  manfomtrooljlforoeit,  in  Der  Qcbrifft  t)4ttn  x^r 

Daß  man  befennet,  DaßSbritfuö  meinet  ityv  ^abt  bas  ewige 

wrallegetforben,  roeld>eä  aud;  ileben  brinnen,  mbfitifte 

eine  lautere  unD  efjeure  <2Dabr*  bie  von  mir3euget,  itnb  i&r 

heititf,  aber  roarum  (Ebritfuö  woltnicbtsumirtommen, 

für  alle  geftorben,  unD  rote  unfere  baß  i>r  bas  Jleben  ^ibett 

$flid)t  Dargegen  ins  Süercf  ge*  mottet,    ©er  hochmütige 

webtet  roerDen  folic,  fold;e$roirD  ©genroille  hielte,  (te  &on(£hrifto 

fogfeicbmtt  beifüget,  unD  lau*  unD  Dem  eroigen  Sehen  ab* 

ut  roie  folgt,  z  doximf).  r ,  1  f.  3d)  befenne  t)on  £erfcen  mit 

Uttberifibarumfttrfieak  Dem  2lpo|W  tyauii,  i^moth. 

le  geworben,  auf  baß  bie  fo  1,  if.  2><tß  e*  je  genüßlich 

b<*  teben,  hinfort  ritebt  tV  w*ty  fap/  unb  ein  treuer 

mn  feibff  leben,  fonbern  wertbee  Wort,  baß3*gfu$ 

öem,  ber  für  fte  geworben  Ctmfius  Kommen  if*  in  We 

iwb  auferffrwben  tfl.  ©iefe  Welt,  bie  Sönber  feltg  w 

SebenSregufn  finDDem  fleifchlicb*  mäcben,  unter  welchen  tcb 

geftnten  ©genroillen  jurot'Der,  l>er  furne^mfJe  bin.    Slber 

unDfo  lang  Der  fleifchlich^gefttue  roeil  Chriftuö  fommen  ijt  Die 

(Stgenrotlle  DieOberhanD  behalt,  ©tinDer  feiig  $u  machen,  fo  muß 

rotrD  U%  kommen  ju  £hri(lo  Der  (SunDer  auch  jtt  £hri(to 

whinDert.  ©ie  ^harifeier  unD  fommen,  roann  er  feiig  roerDen 

©aDucaer/  tvot)oti  roir  lefen  roiü,   kommen  roir  ©tinDer  ju 

Ä  f  3  Chrifio, 


164    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


16%  Cfyr.  3D$cf  0/  tint*  &<hulmeiflcve, 

©)riftO/  Der  f omen  ifl  Die  <Sütt*  Ämter  verfmtilert  wttttn, 

Der  fefig  ju  machen/  fo  fomt  wie  cine  fanne  vtvfamlct 

Das  wrfo&rneigcoaafju  feinem  ihre  Äücblein  unterere 

Wirten/  Der  t>erlof>rne  @rofrf>en  $lä$d,  unbtyrfyabtnicbt 

iß  miebergefunDen/  Der  t>er(oljr>  gewolt. 

ne  <g>o(>n  fomt  mieDer  ju  feinem  SBollen  mir  un$  Durd)  Die 

QJater,  morüber  |tcf)  Die  (gngel  fceplfame  ©nabe  ©ötteS  nid>t 

im  Fimmel  erfreuen/  unD  je  meljr  jüd)ttgen  Iaffen;  Da$  ungöttliclje 

mir  Den  33orfaß  nehmen  uns  mit  2Befen  unD  l)k  meltlicf^e  Stifte  ju 

©jriflo  in  freiwilligem  ©efcofr  verleugnen,  fo  (tnö  mir  ;a  felbfl 

fam  ju  weinigen/  je  mefcrmer*  fcbulD  Dran;  Dag  im$  Der  #grr 

Den  mir  auefr  beftnDcn/  Dag  un$  9>£fuö  mitunter  feine  ©aaDen* 

Die  Singe  Die  un$  nafy  unferm  gfügel  nehmen  fan,  mie  gerner 

fleifcf)(icf)^gefmfen@genmiüenei*  auefr  mofte.    Sie  natürlid)ge* 

m  £uft  maren,  merDen  unä  nun  bofjrnen  ÄinDTein  f offen  aus  erg* 

tint  fernere  Saft  fetjrt/  morüber  mn  Ärdfften  ntdf>t^  tfcun  ju  iforer 

mir  un$  geneigt gnDen  merDen  felbft  Reinigung/  nocf>  jtcfr  fefbjt 

in  ber^(ic6erQ5u(fe  mit  einem  De*  bef  leiben/  fpeifen  unD  trdntfen/ 

müßigen  gugfall  ju  Der  ©na*  nod>  ftcb  felbfl  *>or  allen  miDcr* 

Den^&ür  ju  menDen,  biä  Daö  mdrtigen  anfallen  ju  bemalen, 

»ermunDete  ©emiffen  geljeifef,  ju  Diefem  allen  haben  fteairäci* 

imD  mir  OJulje  finDen  t>or  unferc  genen  Ärdfften  fein  Vermögen, 

(Seelen,  unD  fa(df>e  @eelen<3{u*  ma$  ihnen  mangeft/  Dag  jetgm 

fte  merDen  mir  bei;  Cljrifto  jin*  fte  mit  2Öeinen  anf  Diefeö  <2Bei* 

Den/  mann  mir  ju  il)m  fommen.  nen  rüftrt  Der  Butter  #tx§,  fte 

(gölte  mir  nunDiefe  grageju  reinigtet  jlereicbtifjm W %xi\> 

<£l>eil  merDen/  meifen  tcfr  t>om  Oe/unD  i|t  Der  90? utter  ifjregreu* 

kommen  ju  ©jrijtofdjreibe/  ob  De;  mann  DaöÄinDDiefelbeju  fei* 

mir  Dann  aus  eignen  Ärdfften  ju  ner  Jeib&unD  Seben&'Sftaljrungi 

(Efyrifto  fommen  Finnen/  t&ant*  annehmen  mill/  mill  aber  Dad 

morfe  mit  Sfitin,  mir  fönnen  eö  5?inD  Diefefbe  nicl)f  annehmen/  fo 

nic&t  auä  eigenen  fttafittn,  aber  mirD  Die  Butter  betrübt/  Dann 

Darin  unD  Darmit  ftnb  mir  niebt  jie  meig  Dag  DaDurcl)  Dem  ÄinD 

entfcOulDiget,  eä  fomt  gerinnen  feine  Seibe&unD  ftben&Ärdffte 

aufunfer  2GoDen  oDer  nid)t  abnehmen,  nunfoum>crmögen& 

«EGoIlenan,  Der  #©rr  3<£fu$  alä  Die  natürliche  gebofrrneÄinb* 

legt  ein  3cugnüg  feinet  2Bil(enö  lein  autf  eignen  Ärdfften  fmD/  fo 

ab/  über  3erufafem,  Die  ^Gor^  uimermögenD  finb  mir  auc^  au* 

te  finb  betrieben  £ucaö  Z3/37.  eigenen  Ärdfften  uns  fefbftjureW 

XOU  offt  tyxbt  ufo  Stint  nigen/  mann  mir  aber  unfere 

WitytiäUit 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  33  165 

Igrnfl lufce  grm^mmg  m  fefoe  Schüler  ze*     169 

iftcbtfgfeiterfcnnenwieelenbig  ©naDen^ÖefcOencf  t>on  ©Ott 

tt  mit  utö  befielt  i|t,  unD  jtnt>  unö  flefd>cncfet/  unD  Durcb  un* 

fcegierig  nacfc  Der  t>ernünfftigen  fern  £©rrn  3Sfum  (Sbntfum 

laufern  SSWlcfc  ber  ©naDen/  toit  erworben,  e$  werten  aud[>  we» 

t>k  je#  gebobrne  ÄinDlem.nac&  nig  $;age  unD  (StunDen  toorbep 

tfrrer  9)Hitier  $?ifcb/  fo  jtf  ja  Die*  geben/  Daß  mir  im  leiblieben  unD 

fe  bet)!fame  ©naDe  &ött etf  allen  geift  lieben  anliegen  niebt  nde^t^ 

Qftenfcben  erfebienen ;  (t'nD  wir  baben  auf  DerSöac^  ju  ffe&eiv 

nun  t>on#erßen  willig  tmtf  Durcb  fonDern  wir  werDenalle  Seit  Ur# 

tiefe  #ep{fame@naDeäticb£igen  facbe  f>abett  tm$  mit  QBacfcert 

juIaffenDa^ungötrlid)e2Befen  unD  Sööttn  ju  Der  ©naDetW 

unD  Die  weltlicbe  Juften  ju  t>er*  <£bür  ju  wenDen/  unD  um  ©et* 

leugnen/  unD  holten  gerne  jücfc  fitf  *  unö     ©laubenä  *  Ärdffte 

tig/  gereebt  unD  ©ottfefig  leben  anhalten/   weil  jtcb  täglich 

inDiefer^ßelt/WirbefinDenunö  geinDe  finDen/  Die  wiDer  unfe* 

über  ai\$  eigenen  Ärdfftenbierau  ve  (Seele  flreiten,  gegen  wU 

n>ie  Die  /ejt  gebobrne  ßinDfein/  c&e  wir  aus  eigenen  Ärdjften 

san^fraflftloßti.  unt)ermögenD/  niebt«  Vermögen/   aber  Dureb 

jfoift  infcIcbemguRanD  feinbef*  ©Otte«  £ülff  unD  .$8et$ani> 

fer.Otfittcl,  als  wir  (äffen  unfer  Dermögen  wir  attel 

SJnliegen  mit  deinen/  Vdittm  3)er  #©rr  wolle  m$  erfdfen 

tinb  Sieben  üor  ©Ott  funb  wer*  fcon  allem  Uebef/  unD  augbelfc 

fcen/  er  tan  Den  $?uDen  Ärafft/  fen  ju  feinem  bimmlifeOen  3teidv 

unD  Den  UtwermögenDen  (Star*  weitem  fet>  gbre  &on  Swigfeif 

efe  geben/  unD  sor  folebe  bat  ja  ju  gwigfejt/  Slmen. 

Der  J5€tr  3£fu$  3  (Sebluffef  3f>r  lieben  ÄinDer,  Die  ibrju 

berQ3erbeiffungen in  (einernte*  eurem  93erffanD  unD  3fabrett 

tfammtfiebert  Tillen  frfnterfof*  fommen  fepb/ Die  Siebe  ju  eurem 

fen/  Der  erfc/  bittet,  fcjtur&  (Seelen  #et)l  unD  (SefiflFeit, 

**wb  gegeben/  fu<bctf.  fo  bat  mieb  geDruttgen  eue&  noc& 

werbet  i^r  firt&ert,  Wopffet  t)or  meinem  2lbfcf)ieD  au«  Siebt 

4rt/fowir&eucbm*fgetl?4m  ju  ermabnen;  unterfuebet  eud> 

UnD  m$  wir  Dann  auf  unferQJit*  felbfi,  ob  ibr  im  ©tauben  ju 

ten/  (Sueben  unD  Slnflopffen  Cfaijlo  fommen,  ober  noefc  ju 

empfangen,  Das  iff  lauter  @na*  fommen  willig  fei>D,  finDet  ibr 

De  um  ©naDe/  unD  fofe^eö  f6n<  bet?  eueb/  Da§  tl>r  mit  Dem  Der* 

nen  wir  aueb  unfern  eigenen  lohnen  <Sof>n  00m  93ater  ge# 

^rafften  nic&t  jufebreiben,  fon*  .gangen/  fo  faffet  Den  QSorfafc 

tarn  Der  ©naDe  ©Otteö,  «nt)  mit  Dem  wrfobmen  @ofen  roxi* 

bWbt  alfo  Mt-GMtMf  «m  ^riumSSawju^n,  taffet 


166    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

eud)  trte  SBeft  mit  ibrer  2(ugen>  Jaffen,  er  beiffet  un$  ja  fo  (iefc 

lufl,  gfeifcbetflutf,  unD  froffdrti*  reicfc  fommen,  twe  ibr  au$  fei* 

gem  £eben  nkbt  langer  betören,  nem  SIBortwrnommen,  ©old) 

macbet  eure  $erfcen  (0  J  w>n  fo(*  kommen  bringet  un*  Sid)t,  Der* 

efrer  fallen  Siebe,  unD  twlicbet  geffet  Dod)  Das  Äommea  nicht. 
»nD  wrfobet  eueb  mit  3£fu  un*  goer  in  £iebe  fcbulDiger 

ferm  ©ee(en  Bräutigam,  Der  C^riftop^  2>ocF. 

auä  £iebe  fein  ftben  fur  una  ge* 

NB.  ©er  Srucfer  bat  e$  be?  Dtefem  <StücE  n6tl)ig  erachtet 
te^  21utl)or$  tarnen  be?  jufeßen,  erfllicb,  weil  e$  NfonDerö/ 
oDer  jum  Q)orau$  an  feine  ©cbüfer  gerietet  iff;  (  ob  e$  n>obl 
aOe SWenfcfeen  ohne  2luänabm  angebt,)  fo  i|t  etf  billi«,  Da£  fie 
n>iflfen  n>er  mit  i&nen  reDet,  fo  bataud)  sum  Sintern  Der  liebe  2lu* 
tbor  einen  folgen  guten  SBßanDel  gefubrt,  unD  tl>ut  ti  nocMtt 
feinem  boben  2l(ter/  Daß  e$  nicbt  unerbau(id),  unDibm  nic^tnaefe* 
tbeilig  fepn  rojrD,  Da§  man  feinen  tarnen  roiffe.  ©Ott  gebe, 
Dag  aüe  Di*  e$  iefen,  fit&  einen  ttmrcfltc&en  duften  Darau$fc&6pf* 
fen  mögen. 


&  &  $  $  & 

$  &  &  & 

&  &  & 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  40 


167 


©eiftltcW  flbgoitm.  3?um>  40. 

fymbett  notbige  ©rtteit*2\egdft  fift:  Ämbct* 

I  Regeln,  wie  fid>  ein  Km6  in  fcem  3><wfc  femer  t£U 
tern  311  »erhalten  bat. 

I.  2>e*  tlTorgeitö  bey  unt>  nach  Dem  2tuf#e!?ett. 

fcjf>n?d^e^  mit  Deinen  (Sefc&nn* 
ftern  oDer  anDem,  fuebe  aueb  bet> 
Dem  2lnjieben  gufe  ©eDancfen  ju 
l)aben.  Erinnere  Dieb  an  Da$ 
ÄleiD  Der  (Serecbtigfeit  3£fu, 
tt>elct)e$  Dir  in  3£fu  erroor* 
be«  roorDen,  unD  faffe  Den 
QSorfa^/  cä  an  Diefem  <£age 
Dur*  mutfcrotlltge  ©ünDen  niebt 
SU  befleefen. 

7.  ^ennDuDaöSeficbtunö 
bit  £anDe  u>afd)etf,  fo  fprtr^e 
Daö  SBafter  ntdf>t  in  Der  (Stube 
ftmim. 

8*  S>en  SJÄunD  alle  borgen 
mit  2Baffer  auilüfpuUn  unDDic 
3af)tre  mit  Dem  ginger  abreiben, 
Dienet  jur  grbaitung  Derfelben. 

9.  ^tnn  Dufcie  £aar*  tcm> 
mejb  fo  tritt  mcfyt  mitten  in  Die 
©tube,  fonDern  bty\t\t  in  tint 
gtfe. 

10.  2)a6  borgen  *©ebdt 
tterriebte  niebt  au$  UUfUmißtt 
©eroobnbeit,  fonDern  au$  fyrfc 
lieber  ©anefbarfeitgegen  ©ort, 
Der  Dieb  in  Dtff  vorigen  ^acbtbe* 
bötet  bat,  unD  TUfif>n  Dcmütbifl 
9v  x  M, 


1. 

)d3ebe$  £inb  fo  ba(D  Du 
S  borgend  gercetfet 
roirfl,  fo  ficht  auf/  ja 
gewönne  Diel)  ofyne  n?ecfen  ju 
reebter  geit  aufzumachen,  mw 
ebne  gauDern  t)on  Deinem  Sager 
aufjulkben. 

z.  SBßannDuDaSfBetfewr* 
faffen  ball,  fo  Decfe  Daffelbe  fein 
orDentlicb  roieDer  $tu 

3.  £a§  Deine  erfte  ©cDancfen 
ju  ®ott  gerichtet  fepn,  natf)  Dem 
Tempel  SDaüiDö,  melcber  <Pf. 
13^  18.  fpriebt,  mann  tcb  erroa* 
d?ebinicb  noc&  bet)  Dir,  unD  b#f. 
63,7.  n?ann  icb ermadbe,  fo  reDe 
id)  t>on  Dir. 

4.  Q5iete  Denen  Die  Dir  juerfl 
begegnen,  unD  Deinen  £(tern  unD 
©efebmitfern  timn  guten  0??or^ 
gen,  Docb  niebt  auö  blojfer  &t> 
tvefmbeit,  fonDern  auö  magrer 
Siebe. 

5.  ®emobne  Dieb  Deine  Ski* 
Der  fein  burtig,  aber  Docb  aueb 
orD6ntlic$  anzulegen. 

6.  Slnjlatt  Deö  unnugtn  ©e< 


168     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


320     fynnbctt  nötige  Stttert^&egcltt  fur  *&inbtr. 

an,  t>ag  er  an  Diefem 'Sage  beine  <2ßob(fbattn,  bitte  i(>n  urn  Die 

QSerricbtungcn  fegnen  roolle/  m>  Vergebung  Deiner  ©unDen,  unD 

giß  aucb  niebt  Daö  ©ingen  unD  empale  Did)  feiner  gndDigen 

Sefen  in  Der  SBicbel.  Qxfcbirmung. 

ii.  Sein  borgen  ?5roD  i§       19.  "Sßenn  Du  in  Der  ^flacht 

nid>t  auf  Der  ©äffe,  ober  in  Der  aufmachen  foltejt,  fo  geDencfean 

©d)u(e,  fonDern  bitte  Deine  gl*  ©Ort  unD  feine  ällgcgenroart, 

tern,  Daß  jie  Dir  folebeä  ju  £aufe  unD  bange  eifeln  ©eDantf  en  niebt 

geben.  ncul). 

12.  ©uebe  Darauf  Deine  Q}u*       3.  Äcy  Der  trialjl$cit. 
d)et  jufammen,  unD  fomm  ju       20.  Sßann  Du,  jumal  bit) 
red)tec3eit  in  Die  ©cbule.  fremben  acuten  $u  $if$<  ge&cfo 
2.    2>e*  2tt>cuDe  bey  fcem  fo  f dtninc  unD  n>afc|>e  bic&  Dormer 

e*lafen*geben.  fein  reinlid). 

13.  Iftaeb  Dem  2lbenD*€ffen  21.  Unter  Dem ^dfen  lag  Die 
fefee  Dic^  nid)t  in  einen  SEincfel/  $dnDe  nicht  jur  grDen  bangen, 
Dafelbtf  ju  fcblafen,  fonDern  t>cr*  fabre  aucb  fonft  niebt  Damit  ber* 
rtebte  erjt  Deine  2lbenD^2lnDad)t/  um,  fonDern  laß  fte  jugleicb  mit 
twit  ©ingen/  ^Sdten  unD  Scfen,  Den  äugen  ju  &Ott  empor  ge* 
efie  Du  Dieb  ju  58ette  begiebeft.  riebtet  fegn. 

14.  3^  Mc&  m  e*nem  ^  2Z-  &bne  Dieb  unter  Dem  ®e* 
fonDern  Orte  airä,  oDer  wo  eä  ja  bdt  niebt  a\y  unD  gaffe  niebt  mit 
in  Gegenwart  anDrer  £eute  ge*  Den  SJugen  berum,  fonDern  fei> 
flehen  muß,  fo  fei)  Dabei;  befebei*  anDdcbtig  unD  ehrerbietig  Dor  Der 
Den  unD  fcl;amf>aftig.  t>^i(tden  gWajcftät  ©otteö. 

if.  Q$eftebe$im>eilenbieau&>  23.  SftacbDem  ©ebdtroarte 

gezogenen  ÄleiDer,  ob  etnoaö  M<  biä  anDere,  Die  größer  finb  ibren 

ran  jerriffen  fei),  Damit  e$  bei)  <}Ma$  eingenommen  haben,  a(6 

3eitenau8gebcfferttwDen  föne.  Dann  fefceDicb  aueb  fein  jlill  unD 

16.  2BirfDeineÄ(eiDernicbl  ftttfam  ju  ^ifebe. 

in  Der  ©tube  berum,  fonDern  le>  24.  Ueber  tifebe  fifce  fein  ge* 

ae  jfc  jufammen  an  einen  geroif*  raDe  unD  fftll,  tvacfle  niebt  mit 

fen  Ort,  Damit  Du  fte  borgen*  Dem  ©tubl,  unD  lege  Die  Slrme 

ftub  fllcieb  lieber  pnDen  f  önnefh  niebt  auf  Den  tifeb.  Keffer  unD 

1 7.  fege  Dieb  fein  jücbtig  unD  ©abel  lege  jur  reebten,  bat  £5roD 
geraDe  ins  VStttt,  unD  DecfeDid;  aber  jur  Kncfen  ©eite. 
ttoblju,  2f.  SOieiDe  alleä,  roaä  Den 

18.  Sbe  Du  etnfcfcfdfejt,  fo  ©cbein  eineä  beiflen  unD  unbdn* 
prüfe  Dieb/  roie  Du  Den  ^ag  ju>  Digen  #unger$  bat/  Dabin  gebö* 
gebracht/  Dancf  e  ©Ott  für  feine  ret/  tvenn  man  Die  ©peifen  fo  be* 

gierig 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  40  169 

£tHtbert  ntttyst  &ittcn/&tgeln  fftr  2tfitf  er.     321 

gierig  anfielet/  wenn  man  Der  er*  *e  fein  ©erdufcbe  Dur*  @*ar* 

fte  in  Der  ©Rüffel  if}/  trenn  man  ren  auf  Dem  Heller. 
Daä  35roD  auf  einmal  in  (auter      3  z.  Secfe  Den  geller  weDer 

Riffen  $erf*neiDet/  trenn  man  mir  Dem  Singer  no*  mit  Der 

gcf*winD  unD  gierig  tffet/  mm  3unge  ab,  fabre  au*  ni*t  mit 

man  fd^on  ein  anDer  ©tue?  Der  Sunge  auffer  Dem  SDfunDe 

SSroD  forDert/  Da  man  no*  ni*t  berum.    ©tüfce  Den  (Elenbogen 

hinunter  gegeffen/  tvenn  man  ju  nkbt  auf  Den  <£! jcb/  wenn  Du  Den 

groffe  tyifttn  f*neiDet/  wenn  Söffel  jum  9)?unDe  bringeft. 
man  Den  Löffel  jti  »off  nimmt,      33.  3)a$  ©all}  nimm  niefet 

wenn  man  Den  9)?unD  ju  Doli  mit  Den  gingery  fonDern  mjt  Der 

jtopfet/  it.  $?efierfpifce  au$  Dem  ©alfcgaf . 

26.  bleibe  Dor  Deinem  Orte  34»  ©ic  Anoden  oDer  mi 
in  Der  @*üjFef/  "nD  fep  Der*  fonft übrigbleibet/  wirf ni*tun* 
gnügt  mit  Deni/  m$  Dir  gegeben  ter  bm  <&(*/  ftoffe  fur  au*  nic^e 
wirD;  unD  begehre  ni*t  t>on  at  auf  Datf  ^ifcfc'Su*,  fonDern  lag 
lern  ju  (jaben.  (te  auf  Dem  ÜJanDe  De*  Heller* 

27.  ©iebeni*taufeineäan*  liegen. 

Dern^leüer/ ob  er  etwa  mebialö      1$.  3)a$  £>to*em  in  Den 

Du  befommen  babe;  fonDern  ge*  gäbhen  mit  Dem  Keffer  oDer 

nieffe  Daö  Deine  mit  Sancffa*  (Säbel  tfebtni*t  fein/  unD  tfl  Dem 

gung.  S^nfl^if^  f*<toft*- 

*8.  3§  ni*t  mebr  gleif*      36.  @o  Diel  migfi*  iff,  fo 

anDQ3utter/al$Q3roD/  beiß  aber  enthalte  Di*  Die  Siafe  über  $:if* 

Daö  SSroDnicbt  mit  Den  Safjnen  ju  f*neu£<n,  erforDert  eS  aber 

ab/  fonDern  fcbneiDe  mit  Dem  Die  9fr*,  fa  n>crtDc  Da$  Singe« 

Keffer  orDentli*e^iffen,f(i)nei*  fi*t  etwa^  Dom  %if*e  binweg, 

De  fie  aber  ni*t  Dor  Dem  9)?un*  oDer  balte  Die  £anD  oDer  Die 

De  ab.  @ert>iette  öor;  De$g(ei*enau* 

*9.  gafie  Keffer  unD  Söffet  mnt\  Du  liefert  oDer  £ufteft. 
fein  orDentli*,  unD  büte  Di*/      37»  ©ewöbne  Di*  Dur*aui 

Da£Du  DaäÄleiD  oDer$if*tu*  ni*t  Delicat  unDecfeli*t  jufejW/ 

ni*t  beffeefefi  oDer  Dir  einjubilDe«/  Daß  Du  Did 

30.  3)ie  fette  ginger  leefe  unD  jeneä  ui*t  effen  fönneft. 

ni*t  ab/  fonDern  wif*e  jie  an  $)Und)t  muffen  in  Der  gremDe 

ein  ^u*/  brau*e  aber  fo  Diel  effen  lernen/  m$  fie  ju  #aufe 

mögli*  ift,  Die  ©abel  anftatt  Der  nifyt  fönten, 
ginger.  38.  Sie  auf  Dem  geller  ba* 

31«  Äaue  Die  (gpeifen  mit  benDe  ©peifen  ju  genau  befeben 

j4jgef*lojfenen  kippen,  unD  ma*  oDer  gar  beriefen,  ftttyt  ni*t 

9v  r  1  wobL 


170    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

322    $>\inben  ttotln'gc  Sittcrt^&egcltt  für  Ämöer. 

n?of)(.    ©oltetfDuinDcr  ©pei*  bere  herum  geben  lafiet.     3) 

fe  ein  »öaar  ober  fonfl  etroaö  fin*  «JIBenn  man  Den  Slnfang  tin 

t)cn;  10  tbue  c$  (till  unD  um>cr*  ^rincfcnüber^ifcbemacbct,  ebe 

mercft  bct>  ©eite/  Damit  anDere  Die  Sleltern  ober  Q}ornef)mern 

nicbtjum£cfe(  bewogen  werDen.  getruncfen.     4)   Sßcnn  man 

3?.  ©ooftbuetivaS  aufDen  jugleicb  mit  einem  ^orntbmen 

feller  bcfomfl/  fo  beDancfe  Diel)  Daä  @(a£  an  Den  S)?unD  feget, 

mit  Neigung  Dee  £aupt$.  f )  ^enn  man  trinctet  »ami 

40.  2)ie  jtnocben  nage  nicbt  anDere  nod)  mit  una  reDen.    6) 
mit  Den  ga&nen  ab/  macl;e  aueb  ^tnn  man  Da$  @(a§  etliche 
niebt  ein  (Setöfe,  Da$  SÄarcf  ber*  mal  binter  einanDer  anfeget. 
auä  ju  f (opfen.  4^  33or  unD  nacb  Dem  (£rin* 

41.  gäfcbicftlicb  niebt/  fcafc  efen  pflegt  man  Den  9)?unD  abju* 
jenige  roaS  Du  einmal  auf  Dem  tt>ifcben  Docb  nicbt  mit  ber#anD/ 
Heller  gebabt/  roicDcr  in  Die  fonDern  mit  einem  ^ueb  oDer 
©d;üffel  ju  legen.  ©ermette. 

4*.  ^ßenn  Du  über^ifeb  et*  47.  ©ep  über  %ifcb  Dienfc 

toaö  berlangefl/  fo  büfebieb  Daß  fertig,  tvenn  ttmö  in  Die  ©tube 

Du  bengrmel  niebt  in  bie©cbüf*  binein  ju  boblen,  oDer  fontf  $u 

fef  bangen  (d(fe(i,  oDer  ein  @(a§  tbun  ifif  t>aö  Du  öernebten  fanfh 

umroerffefl  42.  SCenn  Du  fatt  bift,  fo  jle* 

43.  lieber  $ifcb  rebe  niebt  be  obne  foltern  auf,  nimm  Den 
eber  bitf  Du  gefragt  roirfi,  baft  Du  ©tubl  mit,  roünfcbe  eiuegefeg* 
aber  in  Der  £ircbe  oDer  ©cbule  nete  9)?abl$eit,  unD  tritt  bei? 
etwaü  guteägemercfet,  ober  fallt  ©eit  ju  marten  \va$  Dir  befolg 
Dir  ein  feiner  ©prueb  em,  Der  Jen  wirb.  2)ocb  b^  man  (leb 
ftcb  jum  3)ifcurä  febief t,  fo  Darffl  bierinn  nacb  Dem  roaä  gemöbnlicb 
Du  foleben  mobl  Vorbringen,  re*  itf/  ju  richten. 

De«  aber  anbere  xvai  gutetf/  fo  49-  &tö  übrige  33rob  tfeefe 

Jjöre  aufmereffam  ju.  niebt  in  Die  ^afebe,  fonbern  (aß 

44.  <2fienn  Du  trinefen  miff?,  eö  auf  Dem  %ifcbe  liegen.. 

fo  mufi  bu  Feine  ©peifemebr  im  fo.  £be  Du  nacb  ^ifü)*  et« 

SJftunbe  baben,  unD  Dieb  t>orber  n>a$anberä  wrriebteft,  foDancfc 

böflieb  neigen.  t>or  Deinem  ©cböpfer  Der  Diel) 

45.  £$  (lebet  febr  übel;  O  gefpeifrt  unb  gefdttiget  f>at. 
mnn  man  unter  bem  trinefen  n  Äegellt  wic  ricb  cin 
fMtarcfe  Sugc  tbut,  Da§  man  %inX>  in  ^r  e*uie  vertuen 
©ebnaufen  ober  tief  2ltbem  bob*  foil. 

lenmuf?.    2)  2Benn  man  unter  5  *♦  flebcS  $ini>  wann  bu  in 

bem  trinefen  bieStugen  aufan*  i)k  ©cbule  fomjt/  fo  neige  Dieb 

ebrerbietig/ 


GEISTLICHES  MALAZIEN  NO.  40  171 

3>imbert  nötige  Sitteit^Kegelrt  för  Binbcr.     323 

cfcwbfetfflf  unt)  feße  &£cl>  (1  iU  an  59,  (gie&e  mefrr  auf  Did)  felbjl 

Deinen  Ort/  unD  geDencfe  an  Die  als  auf  anDere/  n>o  Du  nkftt  {um 

©egentoart  ©Otteö.  2luffeberül>er  fte  beftellet  btft 

52.  ^EDann  gebatet  roirD,  fo  60.  2Bcnn  Du  nrebt  gefraget 

bcDencfe  Daß  Du  mit  ©Ott  re*  nritfojb  fei)  (Wie/  unD  hilf  anDem 

Defi,  unD  n?enn  65ottc^  333ort  ntebrein,  wenn  fte  ifjre Section  fa* 

geljanDelt  n>irD/  fo  beDencfe,  Daß  gen  follen/  fonDern  (aß  |te  fürftd^ 

@ott  mit  Dir  reDe,  fei)  affo  De*  reDen  unD  antworten. 

mütfrigunD  anDdel)tig.  61.  ©egen  Deine  Sftitfcbute 

73.  2Benn  Du  laut  baten  benoeife  Dieb  tobreich  unD  frieD* 

mu|i,  fo  reDe  langfam  unD  be*  fertig/ janefenkbt  mit ibnen,  ftof* 

Ddci)t(id);  unD  trenn  gelungen  fefie  niebt,  befuDIe  nid)t  mit  Dei* 

n>irD/  fo  fuc&e  nid)tDieanDern  ju  nen  ®ebul>en  oDer  mit  Der  3)m* 

überfcbrei;enoDerDa$erfie2ßort  te  i&re  JUeiDer,  gib  ifjrwn  feine 

ju  fjaben.  55ei)rramen,  unD  üer^at^  Dicj)  in 

54.  @et)  Deinem  Se&rmcijler  alkn  <Stücfen  a(fo  gegen  fit,  mie 
allejeit  geljorfäm,  unD  laß  Dieb  Du  molfeji,  Daß  jieficfc  gegen  Diclj 
niebt  über  einer  @ac&e  etliche  Pcrbalten  foüen> 

mal  Don  if)tn  erinnern.  62.  #üte  Diel)  uor  aütn  nn> 

55.  2ßirft  Du  um  Deiner  Un*  anftdnDigen  groben  (&itttn  unD 
arten  roillen  gejlraft,  io  beroeife  ©ebarDen  in  Der  ©d&ule.  Söa* 
Diel)  tDcDermir  28orten  noefrmit  bin  gefröret,  i)2Benn  man  ft$ 
©ebdrDen  ungeDulDig  unD  mi*  mit  Den  £dnDen  oDer  ganzen 
Derfpenfttg,  fonDern  nimm  e$  $u  Seibe  t>or  gaulfreit  auäreefet.  z) 
Deiner  Q5efferung  an.  ^enn  man  in  Der  ©dwleöbfl 

56.  £üteDid>  in  Der  ©cl)ufe  oDer  anDere  ©acben  iflfet.  3) 
DorDem  fcbdnDlid|)en  plauDern,  *2Bennman  Die#anDoDer2lrm 
DaDurcfr  Du  Dem  ©c&ulmeitfer  auf  De$  StacfcbarS  2M>fel  leget, 
feine  Slrbeit  fernerer  maebfb  Dei*  oDer  unter  Den  5?opf  ftutyt,  oDer 
ne  9)?it|*cf)üler  ärgerft,  unD  Did)  fiel)  mit  Demtfopfe  tjorroartäauf 
unD  anDere  an  Der  ^ufmereffam*  Den  ^ifcfr  leget.  4)  Sßennman 
feit  (jinDcrft.  DiegüffeaufDie^ancf  feget/ODer 

57.  ©ib  aebt  auf  alles  wag  Damit  faarretoDer  baumelt/ oDer 
gereDet  wirD,  (ige  fein  geraDe,  unD  Die  Metrie  über  einanDer  fcbldgt, 
ftelje  Deinen  Sebrer  an.  unD  t>on  jicb  tfreefet/  oDer  pe  int 

r8.  @olft  Du  Deine  Section  (Si^noDer  (Stehen  ju  mettöon 

auffagen/  fo  fe&fage  bat  QMicl)  einanDer  fperrt.   r)2ßennman 

ofyne  ©erdufcb  auf/  ließ  fein  laut,  am  j?opf  fraget*     6)  ^Smn 

Deutlich  unD  langfam,  Daß  man  man  mit  Den  Singern  fpiefetoDer 

alle  <2Borte  unD  @i)lben  wjfe*  Daran  flaubet-    7)  SSSennman 

fren  Fönne.                           3v  r  3  Den 


172     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


3  24    ^imbert  ttfaWgc  ©ttteit^egeln  fur  Ärnöer. 

Den5fr>pfb<flbi>orftcb;balDbin*  Der  ©affe  beruni;  febrepe  aud) 

fer  ficb/  balD  auf  Die  (Scire  men*  nicbt/  fonDern  gebe  (till  unD  cbr* 

bet  unD  Drebet.    8)3JBcnnman  bar. 

ffet  unb  febfaff.  9)  2Benn  man      68.  Q3emeife  Did)  fc&ambafr 

unter  Dein  $tfd>  ober  58ancf  ber*  tig/  unD  tbue  nicbt  öffentlich  t>or 

urn  friecbet.    10)  <2ßenn  man  anDcrn  teufen  Dasjenige;  roa$ 

Dem  preceptor  Den  Övücfen  $u  mananeinemabgefonDertenür* 

Febret.     u)  2Benn  man  Die  te  ju  wricbten  pfleget. 

ÄleiDer  in  Der  <Scbu(e  anDerä  an*      69.  2Iuf  Der  (Straffe  ju  effen 

tbut.    12)  QBennmanficbun*  ifi  unanfidnDig. 

jJdtig  in  Der@di>ule  bezeuget.  70.  ©äffe  nicbt  mit  Den  2(u* 

63.  £alte  Deine  €8üd>er  in*  gen  in  Der  -öö^e  5erum#  laufe  Den 

ttenDig  unD  auämenbigfein  rein  beuten  nicbt  entgegen;  unD  tritt 

unD  faiiber;  febreib  unD  mable  nicbt  mutwillig  in  Den  Äotb/tto 

nicbt  allerlei)  binein;  jerreifie  fie  er  am  Dicftfen  ifi/  oDer  in  eine 

nicbt  unD  üerliebre  feinet  Dawn,  ^fü^e. 

64-  tySm  Dufcbreibe|l;fobe*      71.  SSJann  Duftebeft  ^JferDe 

fubfe  Dieb  nicbt  an  #dnDen  unD  ober  einen  2Bagen  fommen;  fo 

©eftebt  mit  Der  ©inten;  befprü*  tritt  auf  Die  (Seite;  unD  büte 

fceaucbnicbtDamitDen^ifcbunD  Dieb;  Dag  Du  nicbt (ScbaDenneb* 

Die  Q3dncfe;  oDer  Deine  unD  an*  meft;  bdnge  Dieb  niemals  bintea 

Derer  ibre  ÄleiDer.  an  einen  ^agen  an. 

6?.  2Bann  Die  (Scbule  auä      72.  3w  Sßintcr  gebe  nicbt 

iff;  fo  inacbe  fein  gepolteo  fprin*  aufä  ©$/  wirf  anDere  nkbt  mit 

ge  nicbt  tvann  Du  eine  treppe  (Schneebällen;  unD  fabre  nicbt 

herunter  geben  muß/  über  z  oDer  mit  (icDerlicben  Gliben  auf  Den 

3  (Stuffen  bin/  Damit  Du  nicbt  (ScbliWn. 
(S^aDen  nebmeft;  unD  gebe  fite*      73.  3m  (Sommer  baDe  Dieb 

(am  nacb  £aufe.  nicbt  im  2ßaffer  unD  gebe  nicbt 

III.  tüte  ff cb  et*  Ättib  junab*  an  Dafielbe.    £abeaucfr 

auf  t>er  (ßaffc  ver^aUtn  foil,  feinen  ©efalien  am  $?utbroiflen 

66.  Jiebeä  3?inD;  obDug(eicb  unD  freeben  (Spie(et). 

nad)  Der  (Schule  aufTer  Der3luf*       74.  SBWb  nicbt  auf  Dem  2Be^ 

fiebt  Deinem  Sebrm.eifferä  biff;  fo  ge  (leben/  rco  fid)  2eute  janefen 

iff  Docb  &öttan  allen  Orten  ge*  ober  fcblagen  ober  anDere  $3o§* 

gentvdrtig;  DaberDu  Urfacb  baff  feeiten  treiben;  gefeüe  Dieb  nicbt 

aueb  auf  Der  ©äffe  Dieb  t>or  ibm  ju  böfen  Q5uben;  Die  Dieb  wfub* 

unD  feinen  heiligen  Engeln  ju  ren ;  (auf  aueb  nicbt  auf  Den 

febrimen.  Sabrmdrcf  ten  berum ;  (lebe  nicbt 

67.  SKennealfo  nicbt  n>i(D  auf  beo  t^m  Sfftarcftfcbrepern  tfille/ 

unD 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  40  173 


Muntert  nötige  ©ttten^Xegeln  fur  Äm^er.    325 

unD  fiebe  Den  leicbtfertigen  ^än*  rdufcb  unD  afeftf  QMdttern  nacl), 

£en  Hiebt  511,  Dann  Du  lernetf  Da  unD  jciebne  ibn  mit  einem  binein* 

nfc&tö  afö  SSöfeä.  gelegten  fc{)ma(en  langen  Rapier* 

7f.  S^ffe  Dic^  nic&t  auf  Der  eben.  Deren  Du  immer  ettiebe  in 

©äffe  mit  anDern  jfinDem  ju«  Deiner  Riebet  liegen  baben  muft. 

fammen,Daj?  Du  Die  ©trafie  ein*  g0.  <JMauDere  niebt  in  Der 

nebmeft,  lege  auef)  nicl)t  Deinen  5ttvdK/  unD  trenn  anDere  mit  Dir 

2lrm  auf anDerer  if)te  ©cbultern.  piauDern  tvollen,  fo  gib  ibnen  fei* 

76.  SIBann  Dir  jemanD  be--  ne  Sinnt» ort,  ftirtf  Du  unter  Der 

f anteä  öDer  t>ornebme$  begegnet;  gjreDigt  Dorn  ©eblaf  angefoeb* 

fo  iveicbe  ibm  au$,  unD  bücfe  ten,  fo  (lebe  ein  nwnig  auf>  unb 

Dieb  böflieb,  roarte  aber  nici;t  fo  fu*c  Dieb  Deffelben  *u  enrebren. 

lange bi$ er  febon  neben  Dir,  oDer  gI#  q£am  Der9?ame  3efu$ 

gar  febon  vorüber  i(t,fonDern  be*  genennet  oDer  QtbaUt  roirD,  fo 

wife  ihm  folebe  Sbrerbietigfeit,  entbloffe  oDer  neige  Dein  £aupt, 

tuenn  Du  noeb  ein  paar  ©dritte  unD  bejeige  Dieb  ebrerbietig. 

t>on  ibm  bijl  g*.  @afienict)t  in  Derßirc&e 

IV.  Regeln  wie  ftcb  tin  £erum  m^  an&ern  Jeufen  unD 

-Bin*  in  fcer  v>tr{amiim$  ober  ^aite  t>cine  2lugen  in  guter  3udt)t 

*ir$e  verbaltcn  foil.  D  /VDnuna 

77vöebe^inD,bepencfeinDer  %     m  äflnWnWflc  6b 

WamfungoDer ^ireje  an  Die  m  ^  &u  noc^  ^  6*  jn  bet 

Da|Dunacb.DemgSorti:,  Sa&  ^ff  Du noeb Dielme^rfn  Der Äir* 

Dub6rejan,enem^ageger!eb*  ie ju  wrmelDcn. 

M  werben  follejt  84.  ggenn  Du  mft  anDern 

78-  «rmgeDeineqSiebelunD  paar^eifemDieS?trcbeunDau$ 

©efangbuef)    mit,   unD  finge  Der  Äirc&e  ^ühut  ^  fofo(t 

unD  bate  fem  ant>a*tjg  mit.  öu  nicmcmt)  aug  g^tbrciHen 

®enn  auö  Dem  C0?unDe  Der  jun*  Mm  mivm  oDer  befprü^en, 

gen  ÄmDernjiü  (tcb  &Ott  ein  onDernebrbaru.jliUe  fort  geben, 

«ob  jubereiten.  '  v  Äegeln  'w(e  ^  eirt 

79.  Unter  Der  $reDigt  gib  Sint>  fonjf  in  feirKm Vmw 

auf  alles  aebt,  mertf  e  n>aö  au$  Umgänge  $u  verbauen  bar; 

Dem  SW  fcorgejteüet,  unD  wie  8f.  Siebet  5?inD,  (ebe  mit  je* 

öer  sSortrag  eingeleitet  tt>irD;  DermannfrieDticb  unD  einig;  unD 

Celebes  t^u  aueb  in  Deine@cbreib*  (a§  Deine  ganfce  £6flicbf  eit  au$ 

<3:afelauffcbreibenfanjl  ©ebfa*  SDemutb  unD  wahrer  Siebe  Dc8 

ge  ein  unD  anDern  feb6n?@prueb  SRacbtfen  fließen, 

ft  Deiner  Giebel,  Docbobneöe*  8*.  ©efoöbne  Web  in  allen 

Deinen 


174    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


tymbcvt  nötige  Sittctt*Kcgcltt  für  Rätter. 


326 

Deinen  (gaetyen  orDentlid)/  lege 
Deine  SBticber  unDanDerä  anfcu 
nen  gen?i|Ten  Ort,  unD  (a£  e$ 
nicf)t  umnDentftcI)  unD  $erftreuct 
fcerum  lichen 

87.  2Benn  Dieb  Deine  ©tern 
miSfcbicfen  tvolreii/  fo  mercfe  Die 
©aefre  tvoJ)(,  Die  Du  ausrichten 
foüff/  Damit  Du  fie  nicfyt  unrecht 
bejMcji  QBcnn  Du  Dein  ®e* 
fcfrdft  ausgerichtet  M^  fo  forum 
gfeid)  tDtcDer  nadt)  #aufe  unD 
bringe  Slntmort. 

88.  £et)  niemals  muffig  fonDrrrt 
flehe  entmeDer  Deinert  Altern  w 
£anD,  oDer  rtueDerhole  Deine  £ectio* 
jieS,  unb  leine  Da$jeniqeau$tt)enDia, 
toai  Dir  anfqrqehcn  rporDen.  £rite 
t\db  ober,  d<?§  du  nicht  in  qarfliqeu 
ober  eiteln  ^fiebern  fefefl,  oDer  Die 
3eit,  Dafür  Mi  ©oitifieebenfchaffae* 
ben  muff,  mit  Charten  oDcv  Sßihfeln 
»erDerbeit 

89.  20enn  Du  ©elD  befommfl,  fo 
Gib  ei  jemanb  aufjubeben,  Damit  du 
e$  niebt  betliebreil  oner  oernafebetf. 
©ib  oon  Dem  Deiniqcn  qern  9lümofen. 

90.  $£enn  Dir  /rmanD  etwat 
fäeniet,  fo  nimm  e£mit  Der  regten 
•Oanb  an,  unD  bebaneff  Dirt)  höflich. 

91.  5Tominf1  Du  311  jemanD,  Der 
©efDauf  Demlifcbe,  ober  fonft  eN 
nai  lieqen  b*f/  fo  qebe  nicht  fo  nahe 
hinjiif  unD  bleibe  nicht  aOein  in  Der 
®tube. 

92.  gehorche  niemanD  an  Der 
£btir(gnrrtcf)zi/  16.  lauf  auch  nicht 
o(errt)  hinein,  fonDern  flopfe  be* 
fcbefDenrlirb  au,  roarrc  Darauf  biä 
man  Dirt)  hinein  rufet,  unD  bücfe  Dich, 
i&ann  Du  bweirl  getreten,  febmeif? 
auch  ^^e  thür  nicht  fohart  ju. 

.  9*.  äfcrflefle  t*m  (üefubt  nicht 
bet)  Den  beuten  Durch  Sluiifcelrt  oDc r 
Sauet  Üben  \  6co  nicht  ilöcf ijcb/ 


roetin  Du  efmaS  befraget  oiiil;  (aj 
aber  Dieüeuteerfl  au$reDen,  unDfal* 
k  ihnen  nicht  in£  2Port;  antworte 
nic!)t  mit  5Topfnucfeii  oDer  Schütteln, 
fonDern  mit  Deutlichen  unD  befebei? 
Denen  Sßorten. 

94.  feinen  fteoerenft  mache  all* 
lät  etmi  tief  unD  (angfam,  mit  er* 
habenern  ©eftebt.  6rt)arre  nicht  mit 
Den  griffen  311  roeit  hinten  binaüi. 
tfebre  Den  beuten  nicht  Den  föutfen* 
fonbem  baö  9{nqeftcbt  311. 

9s.  tfommr  ein  fremDer  oDer  au» 
ter  jreunD  ing  £aup,  fobc3euaeDich 
höflich  cjeqen  ihn,  beif  ihn  roiQfom* 
men,  biete  ihm  einen  6tuhl  unD  ©ar> 
te  ihm  auf. 

9*.  3m  Riefen,  Dieiniqunq  Der 
Sftafe,  SuSfpeoen  unD  ©ahnen  be* 
pffi(Tiqe  Dich  aöer  möglichen  roobfam 
panbiqfeit.  2ßenDe  Dein  9Inaeficbt 
alsDeun  etmat  aui  Die  Seite,  halt 
Die  £auD  oor,  faffe  DieUufaiifrerfeit 
Der  Öiafc  inä  Schnupftuch/  unD  be* 
frehe  e$  nicht  lange,  !a§Den6pei<bel 
qerabc  herunter  aufDie(£rbe  fallen, 
unD  tritt  mit  Dem  Suffe  Drüber  ?c. 
©crcöhnc  Dich  nicht  an  Da*  beflanDi- 
cc  ftenfpern,  crübeln  in  Der  2ftife/ 
befricies  6Anaufen,  unD  anDer  eefe!» 
haftis  unD  unan|1dnDiqe§  Jßefeu. 
f  97.  ©ehe  niemals  unrlatiq  unD 
fauifch  einher.  6chneiDe  Die  Mergel 
311  rechter  ?eit  ab,  unD  halt  ÄleiDer, 
c^chuh  unD  ©trumpfe  rein  u.  fauber. 

98.  3!n  Reichen  fen  Qtdffiq  unD  be.- 
fcheiDen.  Üacfte  nid)t  üöer  aile^,  <im 
aüerroeniatlen  aber  ü^er  anDerer  Beil« 
te  23ofjheit  oDer  Unqlütf. 

99.  $a\it>u  etroaSoerfprocben,  fo 
fuebe  ti  auch  3"  halten,  unD  hüte  Dich 
por  allen  l'iiqen  unD  Unrrahrheiten. 

100.  SBa^Du  qutei  unD  n)oh!an# 
fldnDiqeS  an  anDern  ^hrilllichen  2eu* 
ten  flebell/  Dag  lr.§  Dit'3um?3orbilDc 
Dienen.  3ft  etira  eine  tucjcnO,  i|I 
etroa  ein  lob,  DemDemfe  naa)/J)hil. 
4/  8. 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  41  175 


tfffßcW  Itagasten.  Sum.  41- 

L  Kegeln,  v$tt  fcem  Veralten  gegen  <S<Dtt* 

r.  ©cbaam  unD  9?eue  t>or  Deinem 

^©encfe/bagjtvffc^enb«  ©cböpjfer;  iven&e  Dieb  mit  ei* 

nnD   Dem    Drepeinigen  nem  jerfcblagenen  Refften  ju 

@k}ffem58unDauföe*  3£fu  C&rtfto  Deinem  einigen 

riebet  fep,  in  meiern  er  t>erfpro*  @naDen;©tubI/  fudbe  in  feinem 

eben  bat  Dieb  ju  lieben  unD  ju  feg*  5B(uf  Dureb  Den  ©lauben  Die 

nen ;  Du  aber  binroieDerum  wr*  Vergebung    Deiner    ^ünDen/ 

pjticbfet/  t^n  ju  lieben  unD  t'bm  unD  faffe  emen  neuen  QJorfdSf 

finDlicb  ju  geboreben.  niebt  mebr  Der  ©ünDe/  fonDem 

2.  gjimm  Diteinmafgnugfa*  3£fum£bri)]umju  Dienen/ unD 
me  3m  Daju,  in  Der  @Me  ^or  Dieb  &urcb  feinen  (Seift  regieren 
Dem  Singejicbte  ©otteö  Dieb  $u  $u  lajfen. 

prüfen,  ob  Du  Mfyt  Da$  aöeö       5.  SBtrp  Du  aber  in  Deinem 

treulieb  unD  beftdnDigbeobacbtet,  ©etuiffen  überfübref/   Daß  Du 

tt>a$  Dein  %auf*Q5unD  son  Dir  jroar  t)(wm  ^auf^unD  noc& 

erforbert?  übDu@ottfinDHel)  md;t  ttiflentlicb  unD  fcorfe&ltd) 

geliebet/  gefürebtet  unD  ibw  ge*  übertreten,   akx  Docb  in  Den 

bord;et.  ^fliebten  Der  ©ottfeltgfeit  juwei* 

3.  2ßirft  Du  in  foleber  9)ru*  len  trage  unD  nadjlaffrggeroefcn/ 
fung  in  Deinem  ©eroiffen  über*  unD  bic  unD  ia  mannigfaltig  ge* 
jeuget,  Dag  Du  Dieb  »on  &Ott  feblet,  fo  fuebe  gfeicbfatö  mit  reu* 
Dureb  roiffentlicbe  ©unDen  mie*  enDem  unD  gläubigem  #er£en 
Derlo^genffen,  unD  3:ro£,  Saul*  Dieb  in  Dem  Sßlute  3Sfu  juroa* 
i)tit,  Ungeborfam,  Sügen,  grecO*  feben  unD  Did)  Ijmfört  tintö  gröf» 
beit  unD  anDere  Dergleichen  Un*  fern  grnfteS  in  feiner  9Jad;foige 
arten  bet?  Dir  jur  £errfebafff f om*  jü  befleiffigen. 

men  (iiffen ;  fo  faume  Dieb  niebt       6.  0D7et>ne  aber  ja  nid^t,  Daf* 

Deinen  %auf<35unD  ju  erneuern.  Du  fofebeS  mit  eigenen  ^rafften 

4.  (Srfenne  \)tm  fünDticbe  auflebten  nwrDefi;  fonDern  bit* 
Unarten  unD  Dein  angebobrneä  te  ©Ott  taglicb  um  feinen  guten 
tiefet  SSerDtf  bert/-mtt  tyvfyityt  ©eift,  Daß  Derfelbe  biintn  auten 

©  i  <3orfafe 


17(5     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

328  3>twt>ert  cbrtyiltcfee  ilcbens^cgelrt  fur  XUnfccr. 

QJörfafc  ftdrcfen  tint)  Did)  un<.  gflen  unD  ^rincfcn  comber  ge* 

ftrdfflicb  bewahren  mode.  ben  lafieft. 

7.  9?ebft  folcbem  tdglicben  13.  £teö  aber  öJortcö  2ßort 
©ebdtroacbe  befldnDig  über  t>tct>  niemals  anDerS,  a(S  mit  ttefffer 
felbft.  $:raue  Deinem  #erfcen  (gbwbietigfeit,  weil  Darinn  Die 
liKcbe  ju  Diel,  Denn  eS  ift  febr  be*  bwbfte  $9?ajeftdt  mit  Dir,  einem 
trüglicb,  babe  acht/  roobin  Detn,e  fo  armen  ©ünDer  reDet. 
©eDancfen  unD  SSegicrDen  ftcb  14.  Sein  reDlicber  3wecf  bct> 
neigen,  unD  bafteSlugcn,  Obren  Deinem  £M6ef>Sefen  muß  Diefcr 
unD  gunge  in  guter  OrDnung*  fei;n,  Daß  Du  alles  einfältig  glau* 

8.  ^immDic&infonDerbeitin  benivoUcft/  was  ftc  lebret,  alle* 
q$)U  Daß  Du  toon  Der  ©ünDe,  tia*  tbun,  was  fie  gebietet,  alles  f>of* 
ju  Du  am  meiften  geneigt  bi|T/  fen,  was  fte  toerbeiffet. 

niebt    überaortbeilet    tverbef?.  1  f.  5?omm  ju  Der  ©ebrifft, 

gltefre  ade  ©elegenbeifen  juDer*  als  einer.  Der  noeb  ganfe  untDif^ 

felben,  unD  fuc!;efteDurcf)Dener*  fenD  ift  m  göttlichen  Singen; 

bdtenen  Q3epftanD  ©OtteS  im*  fo  wirft  Du  am  meinen  Daraus 

mermeftr  ju  entfrdfffen.  lernen.    Qmn  Denen  UnmünDi* 

9.  Sege  Dieb  feinen  2lbenD  ju  gen  mill  es  Der  QSater  im  #im* 
$&tttt,  bis  Du  DeinÖewiffenge*  mel  offenbaren. 

prüfet,  unD  wegen  Der  begange*       16.  Serne  infonDerbeit  3£< 

tien  gebltrftte,  Durcb  gläubige  fum  (£bnftum,  Deinen  lieben 

grgreiffung   Des    Q3erDicnfteS  «SeijlanD/  aus  Der  #.  <5d)rijft 

3Sfu  (EforiftiDicb  mit  ©oft  au«*  beffer  erFennen,  Damit  Du  an  ibn 

geföbaet.  glaubeft,  unD  in  fein  Q3i(D  tw* 

10.  QSefleiffige  Dieb,  ®Ott  fldret  werDeft. 

aufrichtig  ju  fürebten  ntebt  aus  17.  *#rdge  Dir  auS  Der  #. 

fnecbtifd}ergurcT)tDorDer@tra*  ©ebrifft  Die  göttlicben  ©gen* 

fe,  fonDern  aus  finDficber  Siebe,  febafften  tkUn  Dein  ^öerfc. 

Die  jtcb  febeuet  etwas  ju  tbun,  18.  2Bei(@öttein@ei(lifl, 

DaS  Demgefiebten  mißfalle  fönte,  fo  Diene  ibm  im  (Seift  unD  in  Der 

11.  ^ifftDuaber  ©ottt>on  ^Gabvbeit,  unD  fuebe  Dieb  mit 
$erfsen  fürebten  unD  lieben,  fo  ibm  Durd)©fauben  unD  Siebe  ju 
muft  Du  ibn  reebtfennen  lernen;  einem  ©eifte  ju  wrbinDen. 
Daju  Dir  Die  £.  ©grifft  Die  be*  19.  c3H3etI  ©Ott  ewig  unD 
fte  Slnmeifung  gibt.  um>erdnDer(icb  ift/  fo  bange  ibm 

12.  Saß  feinen  'Sag Eingeben,  aueb  mitunwrdnDerlicber^reue 
fca  Du  niebt  etwas  aus  Dem 'Sßort  an,  unD  verleugne  gern  um  fei* 
©otteS  lefeft  unö  betraebteft,  net  willen  Die  Seitlich  unD  w* 
gleid;  wte  Du  feinen  ^agiofone  gdnglidje  Singe. 

20.  2ßeif 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  41  177 

ümbett  cbrtfJKcfce  Jtebette^Retjelit  för  ÄtYrter.  329 

20.  2Beif  er  beilig  i(t,fomu|l  ©Ott  aueb  gern  in  Deinem  £er# 
t)u  Dieb  aueb  t)or  Der  53eflecf  ung  fcen  rcobnen  mill/  fo  lag  eg  Durd) 
Der  @ünDe  beroabren,  roenn  Du  Deinen  ©lauben  reinigen  unD 
mitibmn>i(jt©emeinfd;afftba*  buret)  feinen  @ei|i  beberrfeben; 
ben.  fo  roirD  er  ftct>  Dir  mit  groffer 

21.  2BeilerbarmberfcigunD  greunDliebfeit  unD  Öebe  offene 
gutig  iß/  fo  fafie  ju  ibm  in  aller  babren. 

Deiner  tyotb  ein  gureö  93ertrau*      29.  'SEEanDfe  (feto  in  Der  bti* 

en,  unD  fet)  aud)  gütig  unD  barm*  figen  Slllgegenroart  ©Otteä  mit 

farbig  gegen  Die  glenDen-  einem  tfeten  SlnDencfen  feiner  tit* 

22.  2Beif  er  gerecht  ift  unD  be.  @o  efft  (icb  Deine  ©eDan* 
Da6  ©ute  belohnet/  fo  befleißige  efen  unDSSegierDentton  t'bm  ab* 
Did)  aud)  Dcjfen  raaä  reebt  ijt.  fef)ren/folenae(ietDieDerjui&m# 
SBeil  er  aber  aucbDaS  SBöfebe*  falte  e$  aud)  taufenDmabl  in  et* 
ftraffet,  fo  büte  Did)  üor  Der  nem  <£age  gefiMen. 
(günDe,  twlcbe  Die  (Strafe  nad)  30.  S)en  ^eiligen  tarnen 
tfeb  jiebet.  @Otte$  unD  3£fu  füfcre  nie* 

23.  $ßeil  er  roabrbafftig  $ft,  nia^lö  obne  g^rerbietigfeit  in 
fo  glaube  feinen  Q3erbeiffungen  Deinem  SÖiunDe,  unD  (a§  alled 
unD  furchte  Dieb  t>or  feinen  Srob*  leichtfertige glucben  unD@cf;mö* 
ungen.  ren  ferne  »on  Dir  fepn. 

24.  ^eileraUmddjtig  ift,fö  31.  Unterftcbe  Dieb  niemals 
frage  e$  getroft  auf  feinen  55etj;  ©prücbe  Der  tyÜiQtn  Ocfmfft 
tfanD/  er  roirD  Dir  alle  @cbtt>ie*  auf  eine  eitle  unD  fäcberliebe 
rigfeiten  überminDen  belffen.  «SBeife  ju  migbraueben  unD  ju 

2 f.  SGeifer  allein  tveife  ift,  aerfebren;  ©Ott  roirD  Diefett 

fo  fuebe  bei;  ibm  allein  Die  roab*  $tml  niebt  ungeroeben  (äffen, 
re  3Be#eit#  unD  überlag  Did?       32.  #alte  ©Ott  niebt  nur  in 

gan£  feiner  Regierung.  Deinem  «£er£en  red&t  bod),  roegen 

26.  ^SSeileraün?i|fenDi(l/fö  feiner  unenDlichen  9))acbt,  ©üte 
unterjtebe  Dieb  niebt  Durcb  £eu*  unD  2J3etfb^/  fonDern  fuebe 
cbelei)  ibn  ju  betrügen/  unD  büfe  aueb  folebe  $ocbacbtung  Durcfr 
Did;  aueb  t>or  beimiieben  @ün*  9)?unD  unD  ^batanDen  ^agju 
Den.  fegen. 

27.  <2Beif  er  an  allen  Orten  33.  SSraucbe  Deinen  $?unb 
gegenwärtig  i ft,  fo  roiffe,  Dag  Du  ibn  um  (eine  #ülfe  in  alien  9W* 
aueb  in  Der  ©nfamfeit  niebt  al*  f$en  anjuruffen,  feine  ikbt  ju 
(ein  fet>e(f ,  fonDern  Dag  Dein  fünf*  tubmen,  unD  ibm  für  alle  erjeig* 
tiger  Siebter  alleöfebe  unD  b6re,  te  SBBobltbaten  Demütbigjt  ju 
roaS  Du  reDeft  unD  t>ornebmejh  Dancfen. 

28.  £>a  Der  allgegenrodrtige         @  $  2       34.  Siebte 

12 


178    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

330  bunbtxt  cbnjJU'cbe  £cben6^egelfi  fur  Äfttfcer. 

34.  Siebte  aber  aud)  in  Der  ren  QJefeljl  toollbringefi,   ihren 

tbat  Dem  ^feun  unD Saften  alfo  gud)tigungen  Dicf>unrern>crffeR/ 

ein/  Dag  ©Ott  DaDurcb  t>erf>err*  ifc>re  ©chmaebbeiten  mir  ©cDulD 

lidxt  foerDe.  tragefly  unD  fie  niemals  fcorfefc* 

3f.  ^eilige  Den   ^ag  DeS  lid)  beleiDigeft.    Söaö  alles  bift 

$(£rrn  mit  alier  ©orgfalt,  brin*  Du  auch  Deinen  ©roßuinD  ©tief* 

ge  $n  nicht  mit  (Spielen  unD  £(tern,  QJormunDern  unD  am 

Sftuffiggang,  fonbern  mit  bet(ü  Dem  Q3orgefe£ten  fcbulDig. 
gen  Verrichtungen  ju.  41  ♦  Seinen   ©d)ulmeitfem 

36»  @ef>e  gerne  in  Die  ©cbule  fanfl  Du  Die  9)?uhe  unD  Ereile, 

unDjum©otteSDienft,  Damit  Du  Die  fie  an  Dir  beriefen,  nimmer* 

lerne|t,  n>aS  ju  Deinem  grieDen  mehr  gnugfam  vergelten.   Siebe 

Wenet,  unD  betreffe  Did)  ftttl/auf*  unD  <£hrt  fie  Dal)er/  n>ie  Deinen 

mertffam  unD  ehrerbietig  gegen  leiblichen  Q3ater,  unD  fuche  il)* 

Die  heilige  ©egenmarr  ®Öttö.  nen  ihre  faure  $?übe  Durd>  @c* 

E  Äegcln  von  fcem  12er*  bovfam,8{eif?unD2{ufmercffam> 

balten  gegen  ben  t3cf*ffen.  feit  jlt  twfufien. 

37.  SiebeS  5?mD,  im  Umgan*  42.  gtuifeben  Dir  unD  Deinen 
ge  mit  Deinem  Siächfien,  er  fe»)  ©efcbmijternlaß  niemals  geinD* 
igreunD.  cDcr  geinD,  babe  jeDer*  (cfcafft  unD  3amf  auff ommen. 
jeit  Die  (Ermahnung  *J)ault  t>or.  43.  ©cgen  Deine  $?it*@cbu* 
Saugen:  ©epD  niemanD  nichts  (er  fuche  Dich  freunD(id)  unD 
fcbulDig,  Denn  Da§  if)t  eud[)  unter*  Dienßfertig  ju  beroeifen.  ©wäb* 
einander  liebet.  Dvom.  13,8.  U  aber  nur  Diejenige  ju  Deinen 

38.  SlüeS,  roaS  Du  ttilft,  Da£  greunDen,  Die  ©Ott  furchen 
Dir  Die Seute  tfjun  follen,  DaStbue  unD  anDern  mit  guten  Stempeln 
ihnen  aud).  UnD  roaS  Du  rcilft,  vorgehen. 

ba§  Dir  Die  Seute  nicht  tbun  fof*      44.  2(Ue   böfe    @efeüfd)afift 

len  DaS  tf>ue  iljnen  and)  niefcf.  fliege  unD  meiDe,  a(S  ein  recht 

Sue.  6, 3 1.  gefährlicher  ©trief  Des  ©atanS 

39.  9Wchft  ©Ott  bi#  Du  unD  bitte  &Ott  täglich  Daß  er 
niemanDen  mehr  Siebe  unD  gl)r*  Deine  ©eele  für  Slergerniffen  be* 
erbietigfeit  fcbulDig  als  Deinen  wahre. 

(Eltern,  t>on  wekben  Du  Das  Se>      45.  ©cgen  alte  unD  t>orne(j* 

ben  empfangen  haft,  me  Seute  befuge  Did)  g^erbietig 

40.  ©eine  Siebe  unb  €ljrer*  unD  l)öflid),  unD  fud>e  täglich 
biettgfeit  aber  gegen  Die  (Eltern,  mehr,  alle  grobe  unD  uttanjfdn* 
fanft  Du  Durch  nichts  beffer  an  Dige  Ritten  abzulegen. 

Den  ^ag  legen,  als  Durd)  einen      46.  #üte  Dieb,  Daß  Du  Dieb 

willigen  ©efjorfam,  Daß  Du  i&*  nkfot  an  gremDen,  Sirmen  unD 

©ebrecfclicfren 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  41  179 

&tmbert  cfcrifJltcbe  £.eben*^ftegeht  für  Kinder.  33 x 

@cbred)[icl)cn  t)crfünDtg^,  tf)rcr  ju  betrafen.    S&ejlraffe  eö  aber 

iWttftr  oDer  fte  fonft  frdnefeff ;  aus  Siebe/  mit  groffet  QSefcfrei* 

fonDern  erroeife  Dieb  gegen  ft'e  mit*  Denbeit  unb  Q3orficbtigfeit, 
leibig  unb  Dienfifertig.  s 3-  ©W  mebt  traurig  unb 

47.  ©egen  Deine  greunDeunb  »erbrieglieb  bei;  Den  SeutetT/  fon* 
^[Boblfydter  faß  bet>  aller  ©efe**  t>errt  freunDIicb  Mb  munter,  unb 
genfteit  ein  Dantfbare*  #erij  bit*  Jttar  auä  einet  imrerßc&en  (gm* 
cf  en.  pjinDimg  Der  SreunDWcbfett  unt> 

48.  ©einen  Seinben,  Die  Didj  Sentfeligfeit  ©Otteä* 
auslachen  ober  fonfi  befeibigen,      54.  #aft  Du  jemanb  beleibt^ 
wrgilt  nic&t  956fc$  mit  Sofern/  get;  fo  febdme  bid)  ntcbf,  e$  De* 
nofy  ©e{)elt>£ßort  mit  ©cbelt*  mütfyig  jubefennen  unb  ab^vibit* 
SaSort;  fonbern  bitte  &ött,  tm. 

Dag  er  ibnen  iftre  ©ünbe  i>erge*      ff.  Qiib  niemanb  2lcrgeroi§ 

be,  unb  fte  befefjre;  unfcrtag  feine  bureb  bofe  £anbl!ing/  ftdglfc&e 

©efegenljeit,  innert  ®ute$  ju  ©ebdrben unb  unfeufebe  gar fttge 

tfrun,  auä  ben  #änbett  SleDen.    ©age  fottbe  niemals 

49.  Siebte  eä  für  eine  un&er*  md),  mnn  Du  |le  t>on  anbem 
Diente  gfae,  wenn  bu  um  beiner  geboret  baft/  unb  fdtfme  bieb 
©tiße  unb  ©offegfurefct  nnüen  folgen  Unflfat  De$  ©afanS  n?ie* 
wn  anDern  »erachtet  unb  gefeaf*  ber  in-  Deinen  9)?unD  ju  nehmen* 
fet  tot'rfl.  Serne  Die  ©cfjuiaej)  f6*  ©et)  jufrieDen  mit  Dem, 
(grifft  t>on  ^ugenD  auf  J>oc6  tt>aä  Dir  ©Ott  Durcb  Deine  X£I* 
fcl;dfcen.  tejrn  ju  mnbtt,  unb  ginne  twm 

50.  <3Biü  tin  jornfger  urib  jeDen  obne  9?eibjunb  S9?rßgunff 
rachgieriger  ©ebanefe  in- Dir  auf*  DäS  ©einige. 

tfeigen/  fo  Dampfe  iljnDurcb  Das      5%  £a§  Dicfj  nkbt  gelüflett 

Slnbencf  en  ber  Siebe  unb  ©an  jft*  aud)  nur  Da6  geringste  Deinen  &k 

mutb  3€fu  grifft,  tern  unb  SÄit*©$üfcrn  ober  an*. 

51.  2a£  Dieb  ntebt-  ben  gorn  Dem  Seuten  ju  entroenben,  ober, 
übertuinben,  jemanb  ber  Dir  et*  aon  Dem  ©elbe.  Dafür  Du  ettraö 
mi  jutmber  getban  Ijat,  ju  bölenfofft,  ju  veruntreuen/  e$$u 
©c&elteny  Üjm  S5öfcö  junnm*  bebaften  oDerju&ernafcben.;  Der* 
f*en,  ibn  ju  fcblagen,  ober  auf  gleichen  «einer  Anfang $a£  man* 
anDre  ^ÖSetfe  Dieb  an  $m  surd*  eben  ben  26eg  jum  ©algen  ga& 
eben*  3>e«n©Ottf)atgefagt:  bahnet. 
S)ie?3vaebei|lmeirt/i^tt)iflt)er*  58-  £a|i  bu  &fc&  ^erfubreit 
gelten.  9$m.  ia,  19.  (äffen/  anbtmttmi  ju  entmen* 

52.  SagM'cbntcbeDurcbSOJen*  Den,  £>b\t  unb  anbere  ©acl)en 
fcben^gurcbX"  abbaten  ba$  SBofe  ^u  rauben  ac.  fö  belenne  Deinen 

©*3  Miec 


180    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

33z  Jyunbert  cforiff Itc&e  JLcbetts*T&t$tln  for  'Ikinbtr. 

genfer  mit  maforer  DJeue/  fucbe  III.  Regeln  von  bcm  Vtv? 

C6  ttieber  JuerfefcenODerumSr*  halten  emee  "Bin^ca  gegen 

foflung  ju  bitten/  unb  büte  Did)  P*  f«lbft- 

Dein  fiebetag  für  fold;cm  fcfcdnDIt*  65.  Jiebeö  5tinD,  lerne  bicl) 

djem  galler.  jelbft  reebt  ernennen. 

59.  Q3efleiffige  &tcf>  bertvafj*  66.  2llle$  ©ute/  Da$  Du  an 
ren  2lufriebtigreit/  gewönne  bieb  Dir  finOcft/  ifl  ®öttt$ ;  alle* 
niebt  an  Da$  fc^dnDlid^e  ?ügcti/  SJdfc  aber/  $>tö  Du  in  Dir  finDeft/ 
Dejfcn  sQater  Der  ^eujfel  ift,  iji  Dein  eigen. 

fonbern  rebe  Die  Sßabrbeit  t>on  67.  £Genn  Du  Didf>  o5ne  Ei* 

•Öer&en;  mim  Du  aueb  gfeieb  genliebe  unD  (3el)mercbelet;  reebt 

©cljaDen  unD  Q3erDru§  Da&on  betraebteft;  fo  roirjt  Du  geroafyr 

fcaben  fofteji  twrDen;  Daß  Dein  £er$  toon9?a* 

60.  <2£enn  Du  ettra^  twDer  tur  ein  SlbgrunD  Deä  Q56fen  feo/ 
erjeb  W/  t)«^  bu  uon  anDern  ge*  unD  baf?  fcer  ©aame  aller  Saftet 
fröret;  fo  fege  nichts  Daju ;  Da*  in  Dir  »erborgen  liege;  welcher 
mit  Du  Dem  Sügen*©ef  ft  nid^t  in  nur  auf  ©elegenbeit  märtet/  (>er* 
Die  @tricfe  falleji  t>or  ju  brechen. 

61.  Siebte  unD  taDle  nie*  68.  Bliebe  alfo  alle  ©efegen* 
manb;  offenbare  nicht  Deines  beitenjum&öfen/toieDen^eu* 
greunbe$#eimlieJ)feiten,fet)fein  fei  felbft.  Senn  e$  (inD  lauter 
Q}erldumber,  ©cbmeicbler  unD  Kupplerinnen/  Die  Diel)  in  feine 
ö&renbldfer;  fonDern  reDe  mfyl  ©eroalt  überliefern. 

»on  Deinem  *ftdcbften;  unD  ent*  69.  Seine  unterbliebe  ©eefe 

fcfrulbige  feine  ©ebreeben.  iftbaä  ebelfte  'SJjeil  Deinem  36e* 

62.32)ennanDreil)rer(3cbu(*  fenä;  baljer  muß  Du  aueb  mebt 

unb  anDrer  ©ünben  ftd)  rü^  Dafür  forgen;  alö  für  Den  tferb* 

men;  oDer  über  9>arrenöpoflen  lieben  Seib. 

fachen,  fo  büte  bic();  ba$  Du  Dieb  7°.  ©er  2lbel  Deiner  (Seele 

niebt  Durcb  QÄitmacben   ifrrer  begebet  in  Der  Bereinigung  mit 

©ünben  t^eilbafftig  macbefh  &ött,  Daber  Du  nacb  Derfclben 

63.  ©iebeflDu  efroaS  Q3öfeö  auä  allen  5?rdfften  (treben  muff, 
an  anDern;  fo  feufee  Darüber/  er*  71.  *2Btlfl  Du  aber  mit  ©Ott 
innere  bid)  Daben  Deiner  eigenen  vereiniget  roerben  unb  bleiben/  fo 
gebier/  unb  bitte  &ött,  baf?  er  muft  buDie@ünbc  erntf(id)f)af* 
biebfcor  folgen  Q3erfünDigungen  fen/  unD  Die  fünblicben  9?eigun* 
bercdfyren  trolle.  gen  Deines  #erßenä  in  täglicher 

64.  @ib  jeberman  toaä  ibm  9veu  unb  QJuffe  bdmpfen/  benn 
gebübret/  unb  (af?  Diel)  bureb  Die  Die  fcerrfcbenbe  ©ünDe  fcbeiDet 
beilfame  ©naDe  Qiöttti  jüc&ti*  Dieb  unb  QiOtt  üon  einanber. 
gen;  gerecht  ju  (oben  7z.  2Geil 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  41 


181 


3>iwöert  4)n(lüct)c  ilebette^Kegcln  fur  Ämber.  333 


72.  <2ßet(  aber  ©ort,  Der  ein 
Derjcbtcnt)  geucr  tfo  feine  ©e* 
tnetnfc&afft  mit  einen)  (gunDer 
baben  fan,  ebne  Den  ©littler: 
fo  muft  Du  Diefen  im  tvabren 
@laubenanebmen,unDibm  Dein 
■öer§$ur2Bol)nimj}  einräumen* 

73.  SDßo  aber  Der  QJlittkx, 
3£fu$  Sbriftu*  toofjnet,  ^a 
mfyntt  aueb  fein  ©eitf/  Der  Die 
<gee(e  immermebr  jum  SBüDc 
@Otte$  erneuern 

74.  Riefen  beifigen©eift(ag 
in  Deinem  ^er^en  fren  unD  un* 
gebtnDert  tvüref  en,  fo  ttirD  er  Dei< 
nen  QSerpanD  er(eucbten7  Deinen 
Tillen  ju  ®Ött  tenefen,  unD 
Dein  ©efoijfen  mit  QrieDe  unD 
SreuDe  erfüllen. 

7f.  SnDieferörDnungmuft 
Du  aueb  felbtf  Die  jfräjfte  Deinem 
©emutbö  immermebr  ju  wrbef* 
fern  fueben* 

76.  Q3raucbe  Deinen  L33er* 
flanD  unD  Mn  ©eDäcbtnif?,  et* 
n>a$  nüfc(icbe$  mit  Demfelben  ya 
fajfen  unD  ju  bebalten. 

77.  guDörDertffammfeDirei* 
nen  ©cbafc  Der  grfenntniß  au$ 
Dem  2ßorte  @Otte$,Da$  Dir  Den 
SQBeg  jur  Bereinigung  mit  ©Ott 
jeiget;  ndcbfi  Dem  aber  bemübe 
Dieb  aud)  anDere  nüßliebe  233if^ 
fenfebafften  ju  fernen. 

78.  ©eroöbne  Deinen  SSSiOen, 
äüejeit  Da$  rcabrbafftig  ©uteju 
erfodblen/  unD  Da$  $35öfe  jut>er* 
toerffen. 

79-  bringe  Deine  £inbilbung$» 
Ärafft  in  gute  DtDnung.  33ilDe  Dir 
Die2u|I  Der  2Beani*tliebIi*er,unD 


Das  wahre  CEbriffenthuai  niefit  fchtve* 
rer  ein,  als  fi*  benDeä  in  Der  XW 
bepnDet. 

80.  Herne  bereiten  tocinc  2Iffec> 
ten  unD  ©emütb&2Reigungen  $db> 
men,  Damit  de  Dieb  ni*t  mm  ^claoen 
ma*tn. 

81.  Sßerunrubloe  Dein  (Hemütb 
ntcbf/  roebec  Dur*  Da$  ©erlangen 
na*  irrbif*en  S)tngen(  no*  Durcb  ei» 
tele  Hoffnung,  no*  Dur*  unnüfce 
gur*r,  roeDer  Durch  »eltücne  £rau* 
rigfeit/  no*  Dur*  üppige  greuDe. 

8i.  3orn/giciDunDaBi§öu»fll»nl) 
Jp)enc£er  Der  Seelen,  b"teDi*Dafjt)tt 
ni*t  unter  ihre  ©eroalt  geratbejl. 

85.  £a§  feine  geile  unD  unflätige 
Sülle  in  Deinem  $crfjen  aufzeigen. 
Denn  fle  oerroüllen  %t\b  unD  (geele. 

84.  9Iu$Dert>er&erbten<£igenlK> 
be  entliehen  Dren  £anpM?ajler,  gbr» 
geig/  ©elogeilj  unD  fSBofluii.  $rüfe 
Di*  roobl  ju  n>el*emDuam  meiden 
geneigt  feneil,  unD  fu*e  fol*e  iftei« 
gung  bet)  Seiten  su  untetDrücfen. 

8f.  3*  roebr  Du  Deiner  natrirlr» 
*eu  S^eiounq  f*mei*eiu\  ibr  ihren 
SEBiQen  Idffejl/  unt)  fleüerjarteNl,  De* 
(lo  tnranif*ern>irDfieDi*  beberfrbe. 

86.  ©eine  <*?ee!e  fan  nirgend 
Stube  finDen  als  in  ©Ott.  $e  naher 
Du  Di*  Dur*  Glauben  unD  Hiebe  mit 
ibm  oereinigell/  Deflo  rubiget  totrD 
jte  toeiöen. 

87.  ©Ott  bat  Dir  aber  neb(l  Der 
©eele  au(bt  Deinen  £eib  anvertrauet 
unD  ibn  mit  6innen  \m\>  ©Hebern 
weifjli*  gejieret;  Daher  bi(l  Du  oer» 
bunöen,  auii)  DenfelbengefunD  auer* 
balten/  unD  unbefktft  $u  bewahren. 

88.  @eo  alfo  oor(i*tig^  unD  gib 
Di*  ni*t  in  gefährliche  UmflänDe, 
in  t»ei*en  £eib  unD  ©efunbbeit 
<5*aöen  tenhen  foute. 

89.  ©ercohneDi*  ni*t  roofln|lig, 
unD  wrjdrtle  Deinen  Selb  ni*t  ju 
febr/  fonfl  nürtf  Du  Dein  Se&enlang 

tin 


182    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


334  jyutibcvt  <forifiUd)t  £eben$>Kegelrt  for  2tfiit>er, 


ein  efenber  unD  frdncf lieber  2D?enfcb 
werben. 

90.  ©(tame  Dicf)  niemals,  aucb 
Der  gertngtfen  ülibcrf,  fonDern  (hue 
fie  gern,  unD  fliebc  aid  Die  tyefl,  Den 
fragen  SERiiffiggang. 

91.  -Oanoe  Dem  ©cblaf  nid)t  su 
febr  na*,  Damit  Du  nicbt  in  gaul* 
bcit  qerarbetf. 

92.  Ueberfiifle  Deinen  üeib  nicbt 
mit  aDju  oie'lem  (Jffeil  unD  Xiincfen/ 
5)enn  3J?affigfeit erbdlt©efunDbeit. 

93.  Sliebe  mfonDerbeit  Die  mcbr 
aid  Diebrftbe  Sruntfetibeit,  unD  lag 
Diet)  niemald  bereDen,  mebr  au  trim 
(fen  all  Dir  Mend*  iß. 

94.  ©ebejwbtigunDftöambafftig 
mit  Deinem  fribe  11m,  unD  beDecfe, 
road  Die  9*afur  mill  beDetft  baben, 
«eil  Deine  Sfirbtr  €brifli  ©lieDer 
ftnD,  unDroeil  Dein  üeib  ein  Sempel 
Ded  $).  ©eiRed  feon  fofl. 

9f.  ©(tieft  Dir  ©Ott  an  Deinem 


MB  efroad  ju,  fo  trage  Deine  ©cbmer* 
(Jen  mit  ©eDulr,  unD  glaube;  Da&er 
Dj(b  lieb  babe,  weil  er  Dieb  jücfttiget. 

96.  2Bia  ©Ott  Da§  Du  in  Derzeit 
arm,  franef  unD  Deracbtet  feon  foüfr 
fogeDencfe:  (Sriftber^grr;  ertbue 
road  ibm  roobl  gefallt. 

97.  QJeDencfe  Da§  Du  nicr)t  immer 
in  Diefer  2Belt  leben  roerDejI,  unD 
febiefe  Dieb  bei)  3eit  au  Deinem  Öib> 
fcbieDe. 

98.  ©teile  Dir  Üben  Jag  aid  Den 
legten  üor,  fo  roirD  Dein  lefjfer  Jag 
Did!)  niebt  unoermutbet  überfallen. 

99.  &itte  ©Ott,  Daf  er  Dir  eine 
lebenDige  Ueberaeugung  üon  Der  ©e* 
roi&beit  Der  9lnfer|tebung  Ded  fünft* 
tigen  ©erieb ts unD  Ded  ewigen  Hebend 
geben  rooDe. 

100.  gürc&te  Dieb  atebt  üor  Dem 
$oDe,Denn  bailDuCbriillicb  gelebet/ 
fo  roirtf  Du  aueb  feiig  unD  freuDig 
Rerben  formen. 


ibae  gfilberte  %  23  €  eine«  frommen  Stfttfeea. 
«in  3in0er  unt>  3ün0erin  fce*  ßSrni  3£fu  foil  feyn, 


i#  Vk  tffmereffam  aufDad2Bort     12.  VfitleiDig  gegen  Die  ®tn> 
-"Sbriftt,  2lj).©efA.i6, 14.  1Yi  Den;  i$etr.i,8. 

2.  "Drfinflig  im  ©eifl,  5Hom.  12,     13,  VTücbtern  aum  ^ebat, 
"11.  *~  ivl)etr.4»8. 

CbriRo  gani$  ergeben,  $it.     14.  rybentlicb  in  allen  Singen, 
2,14.  x^  i€or.  14,40. 

u.  praebtigimbeiligenöcbmucF, 
*    <£fai  61, 10. 


Demütb'a  gegen  ©Ott  unD 
Sflenfcben^att.  11,29. 


Erbar  \n 
12,17. 


©ebärDen,  Atom. 


$.  T?rucbtbar  in  guten  2ßercfen, 

A    3ob.ii/  f 
7.  ^laubig  an  Den  £(£rrn  3£» 

^  fum,  SJp.Öef*.  16,  n 
S.  Uimmlifcb  geflnnet,  tybil.  h 

*■•*  20. 

V,  Tmmer  frdfieb  im  £(E3iftft, 

1  Wi!.4i4. 
10.  T£  niftft  unD  reined  />eföe(id, 

*V  TOflttb.5/«. 
it,  T  auter  unD  unanlWffig. 
■^  Mil.i|io. 


uit  unDlod  «on  bembofen 
©eroiffeu,  £ebr.  10,  22. 

17.  "D  ei(b<in©abenDed  ^eiligen 
*v  ©eijledi  1  Cor:  i#4- s. 

18.  Canfftmütbifl/  €Pb-4/32. 

19.  TTreu  Dem  ^)Srren3^fw  ^ 

*   inDenXoDe,Dffenb.  2,10. 

20.  TTntertbanig  unter  einanDer, 
u  ®>bef.f,ii. 

iif  V\7acfer  aUejeit,  Sucii/^. 


22 


Zucbtig  unD-ft^ambaffKa- 
St.  i/  u. 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  15 


183 


©etftlid)cS  Wta$a$tn.  SRum-  15- 

Stvcy  erbauliche  Hkbtx  t  voektye  bcv  (Bottfeltgc  Cfyvu 
ftopr>  Docf ,  [©rf)ultticiftcr  anber@({)ipbarf)]  fernen  lieben 
&d)ülctnf  unb  allen  andern  OtcYte  lefeu ,  3ur  Betrachtung 
^unterlaffen  bat. 

9M  STGcr  nur  bett  lic&err  <3£)tt  IdÖt  walten.   Ober  auf  folgte  9?oteh. 


5 


ein  Sebentffaben  lauft  3«  ©iDe. 


==3 


SKeiK  Pilgerfahrt  i|l  balD 


++■ 


gethan;  5lch  ©Ott,*  mir  ein  ©eleittfmann  fenbe 


E§= 


3Er3jc 


:sr=3£ 


~&==z 


rfczr* 


©er  miefc  erhalt* 


i 


auf  rechter  33ahn,  ©er  bei)  mir  an  Dem  SftuDer  {Ich    38atm  itt>  Den 


=  S 


ESEEfi 


legten  ©türm  auslieft. 

-2.  5» 

©armit  mein  «Schiff lein  Dur$  Die  6c  tf%  Da$  frmtm,  Da$  hier  auf 

2Be0en  grben, 

©er  Sobefcangfl  gerab  m  geh,  ©ie  Silnb  Der  335elt  getragen  hat, 

3«m  SSaterlanb  unö  meine  Seele,  38er*  fterjli$  gl«nbt,  roirb  feelig 

Weit  auf  ihren  Seitdem  feh,  werben , 

Sluf  meinen  geplant)  3(£fum  €6ri(l ,  UnD  bt\)  ©Ott jirtben  grieb'u.  ©nah: 

©er  aucl)  im  XoD  mein  geben  i(h  S)r«m  lag  rct>  meinen  3gfumni(6t( 

3.  SBenn  mir  Der  £obba$£erje  bricht» 

81$  4*©r  mein  ©Ott!  Di§  mein  <$ 


begehren , 
©iefi't  nicht  auf  mein  ©erechtiqfeit; 
3$  t>off  Du  »ir(!  eä  mir  gewahren, 
2lu$  ©nahe  unb  33armherjigf  eit : 
©enn  unfer  eigen  Srommigfeit, 
3(1  tor  Dir  ein  befletfte*  Äleib. 
4. 
©laut ,  ?ieb  unb  Hoffnung  iu  Der* 
mehren., 
&ommt  nicht  aut  eig/ten  Gräften  forf, 
irfj  hoff  aaf  e&rfftora  meinen  £@r> 

reu, 
UnD  auf  fein  unbetrugfid)  'Bort, 
©aß  itf  in  meiner  legten  Steig, 


Sinn  n>iO  \i)  üx  Der  Siebe  faffett , 
©ruber,  ©c&weftem,  mit  2Bei&unft 

Ämb# 
$W  liebe  JreunD,  auef)  Die  mi$  halfen, 
UnD  njir  nicht  wohl  gewogen  fmb; 
3chbitteuch  alle  mn©eDult, 
ffierseihet  mir,  erlaßt  Die  ec&ulb. 

7- 

2Bo  euef)  mein  2Banbet,  Xfjun 
unD  Men, 
3«  ttmß  je  betrübet  hat, 
3cf)  tmö  euch  aUen  gern  vergeben, 
UnD  bitte  (BOtt  Dag  er  in  ©nab 
Un$  anfeh  nnD  gendDig  fei}, 


^&n?*te"£ttant unb©eelen^etf,    uns  aaen  wnfre  <&m\>  mmh. 


184    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


If 4 


(Beifilid)*  titVtt. 


8. 


0lo*  em  Ding  fan  i*  ni*t  oep 
heelen, 
2Ba$  mir  no*  an  Dein  £er*en  liegt; 
e*  finD  Die  jarten  jungen  6eelen,, 
©err  fan  (*  fo  üergefien  ni*t/ 
2Beil  ©atan  thn'n  auf  biefer  2Belt 
«Biel  2Re$  unb  gaflflricf  l)at  gefleat. 

9- 

Um  ihre  (Seelen  m  beflncFeri/ 
Unb  führen  fie  gebunden  fort, 
Sen  breiten  3ßeg ,  bur*  feine  £ücf e  / 
©erabe  na*.  i>efr  ^oaen^pfort; 
3n  ftüraen  fie  in  eroigfeit, 
3n  3^öitn^'/Ouaal  unl)  groffe*  5cit>. 
io. 
€r  (lent  iljn'n  oor  bie  8u(lber$Ui* 
sen, 
€r  (lent  ihn'n  borbie^iebberSBelt, 
Sie  5leif*e&lujl  barauiju  fangen; 
Sur*  ehre,  SBoUutf  ©uth  una 

©elb; 
Surd)  £offarth,  ©eify  SSetrügeren ; 
Sur*  gaifd)I)eit,  ßügen7  #eu*elen. 
ii. 
Sur*  Soffen ,  (Saufen ;  tanjen , 
©Dringen , 
gtu*en  unb  <5*n>oren  ohne  6*eu ,- 
£ei*tfertig'6*er$reb,  gotten  fingen/ 
3u  Spanien  fort  bie  pureren; 
©o  fommtaus  biefem  benno*  fort, 
£a& ,  2Reib  unb  #einbf*aft,  #rreg 
unb9)ftrb. 

12. 

2*  bitte  en*,  ihr  lieben  ^inber, 
Old)  i*  ermahn  unb  bitte  eu*, 
golgt  ni*t  bew  2Bege  fol*er  ©litt* 

ber, 
Erfuhrt  eu*  abüon©0tte$3td*, 
gür*t©£)tt,  unbbitt  ihn  fail)  unb 

fiatt), 
Dag  er  eu*  fuhr  t)cn  re*ten  ffab. 

©Ott  oat  ja  feinen  6or)n  gegeben, 
Ser  fintfern  2Belt  m  einem  2i$t, 
3um  2Beg ,  gnr  Wahrheit  unb  jrtm 

£eben, 
2Ber  ihm  na*folgf,  ber  irret  ni*t; 


(Jr  itf  oom  SSater  aHtfgefanbt, 
3"  führen  un*  in*  23aterlanb. 
14. 
©Ott  fyat  nicht  2u(I  anbemSSefc 
berben , 
Se*  <5ünber*  Xob  gefaltihmni*t, 
(Sr  hat  ni*t  Sujl  an  unferm  <^ter* 

beft, 
$Ro*  ba§  roir  faden  in*  ©cri*t, 
Stur  Unglaub  unb  be*  Jleif*e*  3Biff, 
Sie  bringen  tin*  sum  bögen  3iel. 
15. 
2Bie  i*  au*  ©Otte*  2Bort  »er* 
nommeU/ 
Unb  nnfer  J^eplanb  felöer  fpri*t, 
Saß  ba*  8i*t  in  bie  333elt  feg  fom* 

men, 
Unb  benen  if!  e*  sum  ©eri*t 
erf*ietren,  t>k  mtgintfernufj, 
Verbleiben  ohne  ©laub  unb  35u§: 
j6. 

Sarum  itf  no*  ben  $ttenf*en* 
ftinbern 
Saß  eoanöelinm  bereit; 
2Ber  ni*t  glaubt,  roirb  ft*  felbfl 

üerhinbern, 
3(n  feinem  £enl  unb  6eeK<jfeit; 
SGBer  arg**  thtrt,  berfya§tba*Si*tf 
Unb  oabur*  fallt  er  in*  ©eri*t. 

2Ber  fi*  no*  f)ier  in  3eit  ber  ©na* 
ben, 
Sn  feinem  bofen  (5ünDen*6tanb , 
Sur*  ©Otte*  2Bort  unb  ©eift  laßt 

rathen , 
Sur*  roahre  .$u|?  bie  6ünb  erf  ant , 
Utib  glaubt  an  ebnilmn  unoerrücf tf 
Unb  folgt  ihm  na*,  ber  roirb  erquitf  t. 
18. 
©Ott  n>iü  ihm  feine ^unb  ber^ 
jethen 
(Ehri|7u$,  bur*  fein  ©ere*ttgfeitf 
533irb  ihn  burd)  feinen  ©ei(l  erneuen 
Unb  mkn  an  ba*  ^o*3eit5fleil>: 
Sann  gehet  an  .ber  enget  gttub, 
Senn  (i*  ein  6eel  a«r^5u|  bereit» 
10. 
33fbenft  e*raoll6r  lieben  ^mbet- 
Unb 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  15 


185 


s§fc+*epty& 


t^ 


<B*iftlid)e  fciefccr. 


iff 


lint)  übt  exicf>  in  ©ottfeligfeif; 

£aj?t  eucj)  Die  3Belt  nicfjt  fetjn  ein 

^inDer 
Sin  euta £et)l  unD  6eligfeit, 
(So  werö'l  ihr  bort  In  Emigfeit, 
(Sucf)  freuen  oftne  önaal  unD  EeiD. 

20. 
SBeDenft  e$  micf)  i(fr  Steffen* 
finDer, 
Sie  ifyr  nod)  lebt  in  Eitelfeit, 
S3eDenfc  es  roobl,  ibr  freien  @wn* 

Der, 
UnD  fa§t  euch  ratben  in  Der  Seit; 
Eb  ©Dtt  fein  Sintli?  üon  eu$  roenDt, 
llnD  fein  gerechter  Sorn  anbrennt. 


21. 


$lun  gute  Sftacfjt  Du  liebe  3ugenb# 
ÖOtt  fegne  unD  behüte  eu$'; 
Er  siereenef)  mit  Sucht  unblugenD/ 
UnD  bringe  eud)  $u  feinem  Öleicf). 
^3ut  2Racfct  euch  allen  internem, 
3ungen  unD  Sllten,  ©rojj  unD  Äbüi, 

22. 

BiSßieMein  febenf  ich3um5Ibfcf)eibe 
Ser  lieben  3ngenDaUjug[eicf)s 
UnD  bitte  euci)  rooflt  euef)  bereiten 
3ur  eroigen  greuD  in '©ötte$9tei$: 
Sajjt  2amp  unD  QSefäjj  niebt  leer  fet)n, 
gufltÖHaiiben&ol  mit  XugenD  Drein. 
2  «petri  i/  5  bit  16. 


>£m  anöcr  geiftd'cl?  £ieC>  x>on  felbfgem  Stupor. 

teel  3fcr  ©ünöer  fommt  gegangen. 


T=f- 


= =$:^EFVt- t 


i 


cb  FinDer  roollt  ihr  lieben,    6o  liebt  roaS  Sieben^  roertb, 
233oflt  ihr  ja  greuDe  n  *n,    <So  liebt  roaggreuDe  roertb; 


-S^* 


-3: 


:$::=rz:r 


^r 


Zieht  ©Ott  ,  Das  ho*f?e  ©ut ,    €D?it  ©cift ,  $m  *  ©eel  unD  fffötttft , 


i 


|=53H=== 


SS: 


<So  roirD  euch  folcf)e  liebe 

2. 

Siebt  ihr  Die  Eitelfeiten, 

Siebt  ihr  Des  gleifcbe&Iuff, 
©o  faugt  ihr  fune  SreuDen, 
SluS  falfcber  tyebei  Stuft, 

Vorauf  in  Eroigfeit, 

gofgt3aramer;  Du<MlunD£eiD, 
.2Bo  niebt  in  Seit  Der  ©naDen, 
Sie  6eel  Durd)  <Buj?  befreit. 

S&ir  faDen  £lar  gefebrieben 
föon  einem  reieben  SSarni  , 

JDer  that  fold)  liebe  ubeti/ 

We  lueaS  3etgetan, 
Seht  er  Die  furje  Zeit, 
3n  gleifc&e&liifl  unD  -gveuD, 

UnD  ließ  fein  ^>er$e  wetzen 

3n  lauter  Eitelfeit. 


&■ 


MJ„-£J*j£Ji- 


Erquicfeu#erjunD'S)?ufb. 

4- 

Er  hat  in  Diefem  geben 
S0?it  Purpur  fid)  gcfleiDt, 
S)ocb  er  mu§  2Ibfd)ieD  geben, 
©ein  greuD  währt  ftfrje  Seit 
<5o  balD  nach  feinem  toDt/ 
SefanD  er  fid)  in  Oloth; 
O^iemanD  raDT.t  ihn  erretten 
5Ut$  folder ^pein  unD  £eiD. 

5- 

©rauf  rief  er  um  Erbarmen/ 

§lcf>  Sater  Abraham! 
^omm  Djoc()  unD  hilf  mir  Firmen 
SlusDiefer  groffen  glamm; 

34  bitte  Dieb  Darum, 

2J0  fenDe  Cawruin, 
S0?it  einem  Sropflcin  SSBaffer 
3u  füllen  meine  3ung. 
2  6.  ^eia 


186    THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


I?6 


(Dctftlfctye  ftieöer. 


6, 


£ein  SrofJ  marD  ihm  gegeben , 
211$  Der:  ©TbenfeSoftn! 

©a&Dii  in  Deinem  £eben; 

©ein  ©uttf  ermdblt  sum  &>bn; 
©rum  liebe  ^inDerlein/ 
üafjts  eutf)  ein  SBBarmmg  fet)rt/ 

©erlaßt  t>a$  eitk  Men, 

©a(j  it>r  entgebt  Der  <J)ein. 

7- 

Säum  tfinDer  t>ie  Parabel 

föibt  ^briflu^  felbfi  s«f  ?eftp# 
©mm  haltete  niebt  Dor  gabel/ 
$od)  üor  tin  mm  CD?abv> 

€$  mirD  alfo  ergeb'n , 

Sßarm  t>a^  beriefet  gefcbeb'n/ 
©er  eine  mirt>  fic5  freuen/ 
©er  antue  traurig  (leb«. 
8. 

©ie  Wort  fpriebt  ebritfitf  flarlicfc, 

3H  meit,  Der  SEßeg  i(l  breit, 
Sßßorauf  fo  Diel  gefährlich 
SBanDeln  in  Diefer  3eit# 

3*a({)  Der  SarDammnig  3tt/ 

3n  Quaal,  ^Jein  unD  tlnruft, 
SBorinfte  ftcb  felbtf  tbörlid) 
©tiirjen  Durcb  gleifc&etf  greuD. 
9. 

?D?nn  ließet  mit  (Srjlaunen 

5ln  anDern  Orten  mebr / 
©a|?  (Sbrijlus  mit  Mannen, 
Öftt  feinem  gngel$  £eer; 

SfBirD  fommeft  sum  (Bcric&t, 

Wie  ®Otte$  SBort  aitffpric&t/ 
©a  atfe$  mirD  »ergeben 
$)l\t  Äraren /  ma$  man  (lebt 
10. 

UlrfDann  muffen  erfebeinen 

Soor  feinem  21ngeflcbt/ 
2ia  9)?enfd)en  groj?  uut>  Heine« , 
Uno  fommen  oor  ®ericf)t/ 

UnD  hor'n  Die  öteebnung  an, 

Wa$  jeDer  bat  getban 
3n  feinem  ganjen  Men , 
2Id)  ftinDer  Denft Daran! 
11. 

©ie  ^5iicber  Der  Gemiflen 

2ßerDcnDortaufgetban/ 


fEBorauf  man  f>ier  befliflen, 
SSirD  eSDort  jeigen  an, 

©a$  ^ueb  De$  £eben$  Darni# 

2$irDaucbDa  aufgetban, 
2ßer  Darin  mirD  gefunDen, 
©er  ift  red)t  gliicf lieb  Dran. 
12. 

©at?  £00$  iß  Dem  gefallen 

3u  Sbrifti  recbter£anD/ 
$Mt  anDern  grommen  allen, 
253irD  er  altf  0tbaaf  erfannt; 

33et)  ibm  aebc  an  Die  greub 

3n  aller  (Jmigfeit: 
$ein  3ung  tan  Da  attffpreeberti, 
©ie  greuD  unD  £errlict)feit. 

Sttb  t>a  mirD  (ieblicb  Hingen/ 

©er  gngcl  90?uitc*£bor, 
SOW 3aucÜ)jen  unD  mitgingen/ 
3Birb  geben  Durch  Die  Ztiov, 

3n  3ion$  ©taDt  hinein , 

SBa^^brilli^cbajIeinfeDn, 
2S3o  emig  greuD  unD  3Boane 
2(nf  ibrem  £aupt  n)irD  fepn. 

£<£rr  3Sfu!  treuer  $\vte, 

3dbl  un$$u  Deiner  £erDf 
2tcb  3ieb  unfre  23egierDe 
©ir  naef),  oon  Diefer  (£rD, 

©er  6atan  unD  Die2ä>elt/ 

£aben  ihr  Sfteß  ge(leat, 
ttn$  Don  Dil*  abzuführen/ 
©uret)  3ßoau|l/  <£br  unD  &cw. 
15. 

©0  fang  mir  hier  noeb  leben 

0o  fmo  mir  in  (Befahl'/ 
5lcb  £(£rr  Du  molfi  un^  gebeu 
3u  J£>ülf  Der  ^ngcl  ©it)aar. 

Sieb  fenD  unß  Deinen  ^eiR! 

©a§  er  unö  ^3et)(]anD  lei(l; 
©amit  mir  Dir  reebt  folgen/ 
Satf  un^  Win  ^ovt  anmeipf. 

1,6. 

2Bamt  unfer  $en  mill  manfert 
SBom  fcbmalen  ^eben^pfaö/ 

^0  gib  im$  in  öeDanfert/ 

©aß  folefje  SiRiffetbat 

tln^ 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  15 


187 


an^{ 


(Bäftlidjc  fi^xeöer. 


*f7 


Hol  in  btn$tutt*pfohl, 

SBorbemem  9fti*ter*|hiM, 
SBoremig  f^iUe  fliirjen  , 
2)rum  bait  uns  auf  Dem  $fab. 
17. 

Sßann  uns  bit  2Belt  mit  prangen, 

SRit-Ooffart,  glcifc^e^fufl, 
3n  it)ieiR^  »in  fangen, 
©0  M'ucf  in  unfre  SBruft# 

Wa$  bortinOürnigfeit, 

SJör  Jammer,  £imai  unl>  Seil)/ 
3luffol*e?urjegreuben, 
SBirb  eroig  fepn  bereit. 
18. 

^3ffans  bu  in  unfre  £enen 

S)ic  roabre  Demutbein, 
3ünD  an  bie  (BlaubenS  ßenen 
Dajj  aller  falfcf>e  @*em 

Sep  uns  merbe»ermeib, 

Unb  berSÖSeltSuftunbSreub, 
STOitSemutt)  iiberrounben, 
Dm**  (Stauben*  ©iegim'Strett. 
19. 

<$ib  ba§  un&  beine  Siebe 

£>  6eeIeo*^5raufiflamJ 
Sieb  Siebes  Uifprung  gfebe, 
Da§  beine  Siebes  glamm 

DaS  #er$  in  uns  entjünb, 

SBobur*  mir  äffe  ©unb, 
3a  aifeS  mo*ten  haften, 
5BaSni*tmitbirüerbinb. 
20. 

$1*  SÖater  all  W  tugenb » 

Die  bir  gefdöta  ftnb , 
9it  uns  unb  au*  ber  3ugenb, 
Die  no*  unmunbig  jtnb, 

Sjamitaffbiepf  (?rb 

Dem  iÄetcö  fm  ©erb  »ermebrt, 


Unb  bafe  na*  beinern  Witten 
Sein  $am  geheiligt  toerD. 
21. 
Unb  weil  auf  biefer  (£rbctt 
Der  f*male  Fimmels  Sßeg 
Sßofltrubfal  imb  $5ef*merbeiu 
&n  (Ereuß  unb  S^ibenS  ©tes ; 
©o  gib  0  J5g«R3l  (Sebult, 
Unb  f*enf  uns  beine  «Onlb, 
€r!6§  uni  üoii  bem  $öf?en, 
Vergib  uns  unfre  ©*ulb, 
22. 
2Bo  mir  auf  biefem  2Bege 
Sluf  ©ett  getreten  fetm, 
Unb  bur*  M  gleif*e£  SBegc 
©etinfligtmbie©ünbj 
SBie  mir  muffen  geflebn, 
Da§  es  gar  oft  gef*eb'n/ 
3Bobur*  mir  bi*  betrubef , 
Unb  beine  ©traf  »erbient. 

Sift  ©Ott  unb  %akt  f*one ! 
Vergib  bieSKiffetbat, 
Dur*  ^brilium  beinerti  ©oljne/ 
Unb  gib  uns  bie(Benab, 
Daj?  uns  fein  Sreu$  unb  $lotf)t 
3a  war  es  au*  ber  tob, 
CÖon  beiner  Siebe  f*eibe 
£luf  biefem  Seibens  $fab. 
24. 
%r\tn,  Sob,  JJJreij},  bort  obett/ 
6eo  (&D££  im  bd*flen  t&ron, 
Denfoflen  mir  att  loben, 
Unb  (Sbriflo  feinem  ©ob«, 
©ammt  bem  heiligen  &c\ft, 
Der  unfer  £1  dfler  be$t, 
Der  bring  uns  äff  jufammen, 
£r  fep  allein  geprei&t. 

<£irt  erwccöicl)  £iefc  x>or  fcie  Ifet>e  jfugenfc;  öte  2Uten  \p» 
ben  fiel;  m'cfyt  a{i6$ufct?lte|feit. 


Vftel  Sflfe  Sföenfcben  muffen  fferben. 
£Eromm  fepn  iflein  ©*a$  ber3u* 
ö  genb, 

3re  3ier  unb  befle  #ron ; 
^etUgfeit  unb  maftreXugenb, 


bleibet  nimmer  o&neSoftrt: 
SEBerffe  in  bertbat  bellet, 
3d  f*on  rei*  unb  flua  unb  f*dn/ 
Ohne  (le  lein  <&utb  maS  nwjet, 
$lffes  muf?  ju  öranbe  gebn. 
vi  3  2,  goßer 


188     THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


T?8 


(Bcifllicfye  Hiebet. 


Q. 


3Bcr  »erlangt  auf  Diefer  erDen 
6d)6n  unt>  reicf)  unD  flug  3«  fenn, 
*H$erauch  einfl  n>i(TfcItg  roerDen, 
5D?u&  cor  allen  Dingen,  fein 
ülad)  Der  roabrengrommfeit  laufen, 
UnD  baß  fotflid)  perlen  SKeicfc 
Cic()  sum  ©gentium  erfaufen, 
©0  n>irD  ihm  fein  2Belt<finD  gleich. 

ermuf?  feinen  ©Dtt  erfennen, 
UnD  Dor  il)m  m  ebrfurd)t  (lehn, 
föegen  ihm- in  %\ebt  breimm, 
UnD  auf  feinen  5ßegen  gebn; 
(butt*  tbun  unD  bofeS  baffen, 
6i(j)  bep.anDren  unD  aQein, 
S5eo  Dem  Reifen  finDen  laflen 
£)bne  Jdlfd)  uoö  £eitd)el:fd)em. 

£r  mu§  fid)  in  ®Dtteß  SBiaett 
©Riefen  mittSelafienbeit, 
UnD  nach  $?oglid)feit  erfüllen, 
9ßa$  Qyött  üon  ©eDult  gebeut, 
CaureS  muß  er  n)iötg  tragen, 
er  mu§  fei)n  getrofl  im  £eiD, 
UnD  Dann  aud)  bei)  guten  £ageti 
Sieben  ni$t  Die  eitelfeit. 

(?r  mu§  alle  Sftenfc&en  ehren/ 
er  mu&  Dienen  jeDerman; 
er  mufj  feinen  Stabilen  lehren 
UnD  erbauen  roie  er  fan ; 
Ueber  Äranfe  jld)  erbarmen, 
SeDem  helfen  aus  Der  Sftotb;  ■ 
UnD  aud)  roifliglich  Den  Ülrmen 
Xheilen  mit  Don  feinem  93roD. 
6. 

er  mu§  aud)  fein  #inD  betrüben , 
UnD  nicht  nur  Die  guten  greiinD, 
ConDern  aud)  Die  geinbe  Hebert, 
Ob  fie's  fcfjon  nicht  roürDig  fepn. 


thutman  niefrt  nadj  feinem  2Giu"en, 
&b  muj?  er  nia)t  neiDifd)  feort ; 
(BonDern  feinen  llnmutb  flillen, 
UnD  fein  ©roflen  lajfen  ein. 

7 

er  muf?  fid)  DerbunDen  achten 
Sftaafj  3u  halten  in  Dem  9tubm; 
er  muf}  bei)  Der  Arbeit  trauten 
etman  nicht  jubiel  ju  thun  ; 
er  mu§  feinem  $ub  Daß  sterben 
9J?it  Derpraffen  nicht  au  jiehn , 
Sftoch  mit  Sßoüufl  ftcf>  DerDerben; 
©onDern  folcfje  Singe  fliebn. 
8. 

er  mu§  Die  Effecten  mnaen, 
3orn,  .^etrübni^^ngdunDJreuD, 
5)?uf?  er  in  Die  ©djranfen  bun* 

gen, 
ÜBiggunfl,  ^itterfeit  unD  &eiD, 
9)?u§  er  immer  Don  ficf>  treiben, 
3)?utbn)ifl,  6pielen,^arrenthe9, 
CÜ?uß  er  laffen  öon  ftd)  bleiben, 
Senn  et  i(l  fein  ehe  Dabei). 
9. 

Silsbenn  roerben  Die  @ebatl)en 
©nug  polit  unD  höflich  feon, 
SD?an  roirb  auc^  oerforget  roerben 
5D?it  Der  SftotbDurft  insgemein, 
2Bei§beit  roirD  aud)  nicht  gebrechen, 
<&Ött  roirD  felbflen  machen  flug, 
UnD  man  roirD  fo  fdnnen  fprechen, 
SBer  ©Ott  bat,  hataüeß  gnug. 
10. 

Jpore  Denn  Du  roertbe  3"9^nD ! 
Senfe  Diefen  Singen  nach; 
golge  Doch  unD  traebt  nad)  £ugenb, 
2Bdhle  JreuD  für  Ungemach: 
<&ti)au  Die  ganje  5Delt  vergebet, 
UnD  aü"  ihre  £ufl  unD  JreuD; 
Slber  roer  fromm  if?  beftebetv 
3mmer  unD  in  eroigfeit. 


t$peun& 


GEISTLICHES  MAGAZIEN  NO.  15  189 

Sreunb  efjttffopf)  <5aur, 

foalte  mir  ju  gut  bag  icf>  fret)mut()ig  mit  t>ttr  rebe,  «SftadjDe* 
er  me  id)  fd)on  &erfd)ieDene  Safyre  l>er  beine  3eitung  befcm* 
men  unb  aucf>  fcfyon  etliche  mal  fc^one  <Sef(iceict?^llieOer  in  unb 
mit  Dem  Wftaswm  bekommen,  abfonDerÜ#  lefctirtrroicfyeneS 
tXcv^jal)re  (Befdjcnf  f  fur  n>cfdE)e^  idj)  mid)  fdfrufbfg  bejtnbe 
meinen  Qant  Dafür  abjuftatten :  Sa  mir  nun  biefer  pterin  be* 
fmDüdje  fd)6ne  Eifc^öJefang  ju  Rauben  fommen  unb  Darum 
mir  bte  Sreptjeit  genommen  Dir  foldjeS  ju  fdnefen  mit  Sreunö 
^^^^  ®^/  tyoffenbe  Du  werbe!*  felbigeS  wenn  ©elegen* 
fyeit  unb  Ütaum  in  einem  tTi<x$a$iem25lat  mochte  fci;n,  fold;c$ 
mit  einrücken;  rocldjeä  l>offe  Don  tiefen  3)}enfcf)en  würbe  DanF* 
barfidjjt  angenommen  werben/ allein  fcfconeS  StucE  eines  flla? 
t$a3i'ett*23late. 

©tefcö 


»on  beinern  greunb  unb  2B05lnHinfc$er 


«to 


190   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


1 60  <Bciftlid)e  Mcbtv. 

i£in  fd)in  Ctfd^<5cfang  nad)  tern  <Effbi, 

SM.  ®OZZ  tob  ein  (Beritt  jur  €n>igfeit. 


Offcermal  un$  beine  ©lite 
<X  Sluf  ganj  wunderbar«  2ßeifj/ 
tlnfre  $fli<f)t  führt  $u  ©emütbe 
jDurcfc  Den  <5egen  in  Der  ©peifc 
S)ie  Du  un$  f>afi  Dorgetfrecfct, 
Uni)  Damit  in  un$  crroecfet 
€inen  junger  ££rr  nacj)  Dir. 

Ste  grog  i|l  Deine  greunDlidjfeit, 
SBie  herrlich  Deine  Quite; 
S)ie  Da  Derforgt  $u  jeDertfit 
Sen  £eib  unD  Datf  ©emtftbö. 
£)u  2eben^5remiDu.^?enfc()en£u(!, 
2)u  bafl  tin^  allen  Matt)  gemußt/ 
UnD  un$  feljr  tx>ol>I  gelabet. 


S)e$  ßimmete  5en(ler  offnefl  Du 
UnD  fchenffl  im*  milDen  Siegen ; 
S>u  (fließt  Die  <£rDen  auf  unD  ju, 
UnD  cjteb|t  uns  Deinen  (5egen  : 
Sie  Äo(l  i(l  Da  auf  Dein  @ebei§, 
2Ben  folteDaä  ju  Deinem  $reiti/ 
D$aterf  ai$t  beroegen ! 


Sem  Siebe  gibfl  t>u  gutter  fatf, 
ltnD  fpeifeft  auch  Die  Waben, 
2Bann  fie  nod)  blo(?,  jung,  fcf>n>ac^ 

unD  matt/ 
UnD  feine  Sfta&rung  baben: 


J&©t,Dii  tbufl  auf  Die  mifDe  £auD 
UnD  fattiaeft  t>a$  ganje  t?ano 
3»it  groffem  SBoblgefallen. 

3ür  folche  ©utthat  mollen  air, 
5Bir  liebe  tfinDer  muffen 
5ßon  gamer  ©eelen  Danfen  Dir, 
UnD  unfer  $?abljeit  fchlieflen 
Wt  einem  S)anf  unD  £ob*geDicbf , 
£>  treuer  ©Ott!  Derftfcmäh  e$  ni(J)f, 
iai  etf  Dir  Wohlgefallen. 

<>. 

Sßergieb  im*  unfre  Sftiffetbaf , 
UnD  gibmaSroir  begehren; 
(Schaffung  o&ater!  fernem  Watt), 
£>a§  roir  un$  efcrlid)  ndftoen. 
5öerlet)f>e  fiinftig  gute  3eif, 
©Wtf/  Nahrung,  grieD unD <£inig> 

feit, 
©efunDtjdt,  J&epl  unD  ©egen. 

7« 

£a§  enDKdj  6ep  De$2amtne$£ifdj, 
3n  Deinem  9teicf)  mtfefien, 
2Bo  taufenD  ®aabm  mi!D  unD  frifty  f 
Du  felb(l  mtfroirff  jumeffen: 
35a  mirD  man  fchmecfen  $reub  unD 

UnDroir,  £(£rr,  roof/en  nimmermehr 
3«  pt-eijfen  M$  aufhören. 


#   X   ft   & 


TRANSLATION  OF  THE 

GEISTLICHES   MAGAZIEN 


SPIRITUAL   MAGAZINE 

Number    33 

Copy  of  a  letter  lovingly  dedicated  by  the  school- 
master, Christopher  Dock,  to  those  of  his  pupils 
who  are  still  living,  for  their  teaching  and 
admonition. 

To  all  servants  and  elders,  fathers  and  mothers, 
as  well  as  their  children  and  relatives,  I  wish  in 
greeting  that  the  God  of  Peace  may  rule  our  hearts 
and  minds  and  lead  us  to  God-fearing  lives,  to  do  as 
he  bids  through  Jesus  Christ,  to  whom  be  honor 
from  everlasting  to  everlasting.  Amen. 
Beloved  in  the  Lord  : 

Regarding  the  cause  of  my  writing  this,  I  do  it 
from  urgent  love  of  cheering  and  lovingly  warning 
all  those  of  my  pupils  who  may  be  still  living,  as  I 
cannot  know  how  soon  I  shall  put  off  this  earthly 
tabernacle.  O,  dear  children,  how  I  rejoice  when  I 
think  what  blessings  the  Lord  laid  within  you  when 
you  were  simple-minded  babes,  and  what  joy  it  is  to 
me  to  see  in  my  grown  pupils  that  the  fear  of  God 
has  found  lodgment  within  you  to  grow,  to  withstand 
the  evil  lusts  and  desires  of  the  flesh,  and  to  accept 
gladly  the  right  to  become  pupils  in  Christ's  school, 
to  prepare  and  be  prepared,  to  take  up  Christ's 
cross  and  as  lambs  to  follow  the  Shepherd  of  your 
souls  in  precept  and  example,  to  render  yourselves 
obedient  and  continue  to  do  so!     To  such  will  be 

13  ft  193 


194   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


given,  if  they  remain  true  to  the  end,  what  the  Lord 
Jesus  has  promised  them.    (John  x,  27,  28.) 

But  as  the  number  of  these  is  very  small,  and 
there  are  probably  a  great  many  who  with  Demas 
have  learned  to  love  the  world,  obedient  to  the  flesh 
in  its  desires;  for  these,  unless  they  do  not  repent 
this  side  of  the  grave,  God's  word  in  Holy  Scripture 
may  be  found  in  many  places  referring  to  the  non- 
repentant,  and  it  remains  forever  for  all  such  carnal 
ones  as  it  is  written  in  Romans  viii,  6,  7,  8 ;  Romans 
vi,  20,  21 ;  Gal.  v,  19,  20 ;  Gal.  vi,  7,  8,  9 ;  Ephes.  v,  3, 
4,  5,  6 ;  Colos.  iii,  5,  6,  7,  8,  and  in  many  other  places. 
From  these  references  it  may  be  seen  what  sort  of 
vine  is  this  love  of  the  world,  with  the  lusts  of  the 
eye,  the  lust  of  the  flesh,  and  an  arrogant  life.  It 
bears  no  fruit  of  eternal  life,  for  it  is  the  vine  of 
Sodom  and  of  the  fields  of  Gomorrah.  Their  grapes 
are  grapes  of  gall,  their  clusters  are  bitter,  their 
wine  is  the  poison  of  dragons,  and  the  cruel  venom 
of  asps.    Deut.  xxxii,  32. 

And  although  it  has  not  gone  so  far  as  Holy 
Writ  describes,  }^et  the  time  spent  in  pursuit  of 
worldly  desires  is  not  spent  for  the  good  of  our 
souls,  and  it  is  high  time  to  awake  from  sinful  slum- 
ber, and  be  entered  into  the  vine  of  Christ  Jesus  in 
sincere  love,  according  to  his  command ;  to  become 
a  fruitful  vine  that  bears  the  fruit  of  eternal  life. 
For  thou,  Lord  Jesus,  art  our  bridegroom  and  hast 
promised  this  in  Thy  redeeming  word  and  so  kindly 
invited  us  and  said : 

O  that  such  union  in  love  might  come  to  us. 
Then  knock  at  the  door  of  all  of  our  hearts,  dearest 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  33  195 

Jesus.  O  that  those  who  have  learned  to  love  the 
world  through  the  lust  of  the  eye,  the  lust  of  the 
flesh,  and  arrogance  of  heart,  might  hear  Thy  voice, 
awake,  arise  from  sin,  and  open  the  door  of  their 
heart,  abandon  the  world  and  follow  Thee  in  precept 
and  in  example.  May  the  gracious  God  add  his 
blessing  unto  this. 

When  we  look  upon  the  kind,  gracious  and  lov- 
ing invitation  of  the  Lord  Jesus  to  all  men  which 
He  leaves  so  manifold  in  His  will  and  testament, 
thus  in  Matth.  xi,  28,  29,  30,  He  calls  to  me  and  to  all 
mankind:  "Come  unto  Me  all  ye  that  labor  and  are 
heavy  laden,  and  I  will  give  you  rest.  Take  My 
yoke  upon  you,  and  learn  of  Me,  for  I  am  meek  and 
lowly  in  heart,  and  ye  shall  find  rest  unto  your  souls. 
For  My  yoke  is  easy  and  My  burden  is  light." 

Ye  dear  children !  we  are  here  so  lovingly  invited 
to  come  by  the  Bridegroom  of  our  soul,  and  He  is 
willing  to  refresh  us,  and  if  we  take  up  His  yoke 
and  learn  humility  and  gentleness  of  heart  from 
Him  we  shall  find  rest  in  our  soul,  which  rest  may 
be  enjoyed  forever.  Now,  children,  what  is  sweeter 
than  rest?  And  humility  is  the  road  toward  it. 
And  what  is  more  painful  than  sorrow  ?  And  vanity 
plunges  us  into  it. 

How  refreshing  it  was  to  the  great  sinner  of 
whom  we  read  in  Luke  vii,  when  the  Lord  Jesus 
took  from  her  the  great  weight  of  sin,  and  her  soul 
found  rest.  Truly  grateful,  she  sat  down  at  Jesus 's 
feet  and  moistened  His  feet  with  tears  and  dried 
them  with  her  hair,  and  kissed  His  feet  and  anointed 
them  with  ointment.    Now,  dear  children,  that  you 


196   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 


have  reached  the  years  of  maturity,  consider  this 
yourselves.  Christ  calls  all  the  weary  and  heavy 
laden  to  Himself,  and  we  are  all  weary  and  laden 
with  sin ;  therefore  "  to  him  that  knoweth  to  do  good, 
and  doeth  it  not,  to  him  it  is  sin."  (James  iv,  17.) 
Christ  invites  us  so  lovingly,  but  he  will  not  force 
us ;  we  need  for  this  coming  a  free  obedience.  For 
in  no  one  else  is  salvation,  and  no  other  name  under 
heaven  is  given  us  in  which  to  seek  salvation,  than 
that  of  Christ.  He  is  the  innocent  lamb  that  bore 
the  sins  of  the  whole  world.  He  is  the  propitiation 
for  our  sins  and  those  of  the  whole  world.  He  is  the 
bridegroom  of  our  souls  who  redeemed  the  lost 
human  race  from  the  power  of  Satan,  and  will  be- 
troth Himself  in  all  eternity  with  His  redeemed 
human  race.  Therefore  our  betrothal  to  Christ,  our 
soul's  bridegroom,  is  the  great  work  and  desire  of 
our  life,  the  chief  thing  for  us  to  aim  at.  Yea,  we 
should  desire  it  more  than  all  that  is  visible,  for  He 
alone  of  God  is  made  unto  us,  wisdom,  and  right- 
eousness, and  sanctification,  and  redemption.  (I 
Corinth,  i,  30.)  There  is  no  other  mediator  between 
God  and  man,  than  the  own  Son  of  God,  Christ 
Jesus.  (I  Tim.  ii,  4,  5,  6.)  Through  Him  we  have 
access  to  the  Father.  (Ephes.  ii,  17, 18.)  And  if  we, 
with  the  prodigal  son,  look  into  ourselves  and 
rightly  rue  our  condition  from  past  sins,  and  in  true 
repentance  resolve,  with  the  prodigal  son,  to  return 
to  the  Father  and  say:  " Father,  I  have  sinned 
against  heaven,  and  in  Thy  sight,  and  am  not 
worthy  to  be  called  Thy  son ;  take  me  as  one  of  Thy 
hired  servants.    I  submit  anew  to  Thee,  and  break 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  33  197 

with  Satan,  the  world  and  my  flesh-loving  selfish- 
ness, that  until  now  have  turned  me  from  Thee  and 
Thy  grace.  O  God,  be  merciful  to  me,  a  sinner,  and 
give  me  the  mediator  between  Thee  and  men,  that 
is  Thy  dear  Son,  in  whom  Thou  art  well  pleased. 
For  He  is  the  peace-offering  for  my  sins  and  those 
of  the  whole  world.  Him  hast  Thou  given  us  in  love, 
commit  me  to  His  care  as  His  own,  that  I  may  be 
cleansed  of  my  sins  through  His  bitter  sufferings 
and  death.  His  blood  can  wash  me  of  my  sins,  and 
I  shall  henceforth  willingly  and  obediently  submit 
to  this  soul's  physician,  and  accept  willingly  all 
commands  and  orders  that  He  gives  me  to  heal  my 
poor  wounded  soul. "  If  we  come  thus  like  the  prod- 
igal son  before  the  Father,  humble  and  crushed,  and 
to  the  Son,  then  will  follow  the  second  invitation  of 
the  Lord  Jesus,  and  it  is  as  lovely  and  gracious  as 
the  first.  It  is  described  in  St.  John  vi,  37,  and  reads 
as  follows:  "All  that  the  Father  givest  Me  shall 
come  to  Me,  and  him  that  cometh  to  Me  I  will  in  no 
wise  cast  out." 

Come,  then,  sinners,  and  those  who  sorrow  on 
account  of  their  sins,  to  Him  who  turns  no  one  away 
who  comes  in  the  humility  of  heart.  Why  wilt  thou 
stand  in  thine  own  light,  and  thus  be  lost?  Wilt 
thou  longer  serve  sin,  when  He  appeared  to  save 
thee  ?  Oh,  no.  Leave  the  path  of  sin.  My  Saviour 
loveth  sinful  men. 

Now  what  hindrances  prevent  our  coming  to 
Christ,  our  soul's  bridegroom'? 

Satan  places  before  us  the  kingdom  of  this  world, 
pleasures  of  the  eye,  of  the  flesh  and  vain  life,  and 


198   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

if  we  abandon  ourselves  to  our  flesh-loving  selfish- 
ness that  since  the  fall  is  inclined  toward  the  bad, 
the  coming  to  Christ  will  advance  but  slowly.  We 
probably  reach  the  point  of  realizing  that  Christ 
died  for  all,  which  is  a  pure  and  precious  truth,  but 
why  Christ  died  for  all,  and  what  our  conduct  should 
be,  is  also  added.  (II  Corinth,  v,  15.)  And  that 
He  died  for  all,  that  they  which  live  should  not 
henceforth  live  unto  themselves,  but  unto  Him 
which  died  for  them,  and  rose  again.  These  rules 
of  conduct  are  contrary  to  flesh-loving  selfishness, 
and  so  long  as  this  is  in  control,  the  coming  to  Christ 
is  prevented.  The  Pharisees  and  Sadducees  of 
whom  we  read  in  Matth.  iii,  came  also  to  John  the 
Baptist,  but  when  he  saw  their  selfish  and  vain  lives 
he  called  them  a  generation  of  vipers  and  said  unto 
them:  " Bring  forth  fruits  meet  for  repentance.' ' 
But  they  did  not  repent,  they  despised  also  God's 
advice  and  were  not  baptised,  as  may  be  seen  in 
Luke  vii.  The  Lord  Jesus  also  advised  them  what 
to  do  to  find  eternal  life;  the  words  are  given  in 
John  v,  and  read  as  follows:  " Search  the  Script- 
ures, for  in  them  ye  think  ye  have  eternal  life ;  and 
they  are  they  which  testify  of  me.  And  ye  will  not 
come  to  me,  that  ye  might  have  life."  Vain  selfish- 
ness kept  them  from  Christ  and  eternal  life. 

I  confess  from  all  my  heart,  with  the  Apostle 
Paul,  (I  Tim.  i,  15)  :  "This  is  a  faithful  saying,  and 
worthy  of  all  acceptation,  that  Christ  Jesus  came 
into  the  world  to  save  sinners ;  of  whom  I  am  chief." 
But  because  Christ  came  to  bless  sinners,  the  sinner 
must  also  come  to  Christ  if  he  would  be  saved.    Just 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  33  199 

as  we  sinners  go  to  Christ  who  came  to  redeem  sin- 
ners, so  the  lost  sheep  comes  to  its  shepherd,  the  lost 
coin  is  found,  the  prodigal  son  returns  to  his  father, 
at  which  the  angels  in  heaven  rejoice,  and  the  more 
we  determine  to  unite  ourselves  with  Christ  by  will- 
ing obedience,  the  more  we  shall  find  that  those  things 
which  pleased  our  fleshly  selfishness  become  now  a 
heavy  burden,  which  causes  us  to  turn  toward  the 
door  of  repentance  with  suppliant  kneeling  until  the 
wounded  conscience  is  healed  and  we  find  rest  for 
our  souls,  which  rest  we  shall  find  with  Christ  if  we 
go  to  Him. 

As  I  am  writing  of  coming  to  Christ,  if  the  ques- 
tion should  be  asked  me,  whether  we  can  do  this  of 
our  own  strength,  I  answer,  No.  We  cannot  do  it 
of  our  own  strength,  but  this  does  not  excuse  us,  for 
it  depends  upon  our  willingness.  The  Lord  Jesus 
expresses  his  willingness  for  Jerusalem ;  the  words 
are  given  in  Matth.  xxiii,  37:  "How  often  would  I 
have  gathered  thy  children  together,  even  as  a  hen 
gathereth  her  chickens  under  her  wings,  and  ye 
would  not!" 

If  we  will  not  be  chastised  by  the  healing  grace 
of  God,  turning  from  ungodly  conduct  and  worldly 
desires,  it  is  our  own  fault  that  the  Lord  Jesus  can- 
not take  us  under  His  wings  of  grace,  however 
gladly  He  would  do  it.  Natural  born  little  ones  can 
do  nothing  for  their  own  cleansing,  nor  clothe  them- 
selves, nor  eat  and  drink,  nor  protect  themselves 
from  harm.  For  all  this  they  have  no  power  within 
themselves.  What  they  require  they  indicate  by 
crying.    This  crying  touches  the  mother's  heart,  she 


200   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

cleanses  it,  offers  it  her  breast,  and  it  is  the  mother's 
joy  when  the  child  accepts  it  for  its  body's  and  life's 
nourishment.  But  if  the  child  does  not  accept  it  the 
mother  is  sad,  for  she  knows  that  then  the  body's 
and  life's  strength  of  the  child  will  diminish.  Now 
as  helpless  as  new  born  babes  are  we  to  cleanse  our- 
selves, but  if  we  recognize  our  worthlessness  and 
how  wretched  we  are  and  are  eager  for  the  same 
pure  milk  of  grace,  as  the  new  born  child  for  its 
mother's  milk,  this  healing  grace  of  God  is  available 
for  every  man.  If  we  are  willing  to  be  chastised  by 
the  wholesome  grace  of  God,  to  leave  our  ungodly 
conduct  and  worldly  desires,  and  would  fain  live 
piously,  righteously  and  godf  earingly  in  this  world, 
we  are  of  our  own  strength  as  unable  to  do  this  as 
the  new  born  child.  But  in  this  condition  there  is 
no  better  means  than  to  express  our  need  with  cry- 
ing, begging  and  pleading  before  God.  He  can  give 
to  the  weary  strength,  and  to  the  weak  power.  For 
such  the  Lord  Jesus  has  left  in  His  Testament  three 
keys.  The  first,  ask  and  it  shall  be  given  unto  you ; 
seek  and  ye  shall  find ;  knock  and  it  shall  be  opened 
unto  you.  And  what  we  receive  for  our  asking, 
seeking  and  knocking,  that  is  pure  grace  upon  grace, 
and  this  we  cannot  ascribe  to  our  own  strength,  but 
to  the  grace  of  God;  and  so  blessedness  remains  a 
gift  of  grace  from  God,  attained  through  our  Lord 
Jesus  Christ.  Few  days  and  hours  pass  that  we 
have  not  need  to  be  watchful  in  bodily  or  spiritual 
needs.  We  need  at  all  times  to  turn  with  watching 
and  praying  to  the  door  of  grace  and  beg  for 
strength  of  spirit  and  of  faith.    For  daily  we  find 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  33  201 

enemies  that  war  against  our  soul,  against  whom  of 
our  own  strength  we  can  do  nothing,  but  by  God's 
help  we  can  do  everything. 

May  the  Lord  deliver  us  from  all  evil,  and  help 
us  to  His  heavenly  kingdom,  to  whom  be  glory  from 
everlasting  to  everlasting.    Amen. 

Dear  children,  who  have  come  to  the  years  of 
understanding.  Love  for  your  souls  and  for  your 
souls'  salvation  has  led  me  to  admonish  you  before 
my  departure.  Examine  yourselves,  if  you  have 
come  in  faith  to  Christ  or  are  still  willing  to  come. 
If  you  discover  that,  with  the  prodigal  son,  you  have 
gone  from  the  Father,  determine,  with  the  prodigal 
son,  to  come  to  him  again.  Let  the  world  no  longer 
deceive  you  with  pleasures  of  the  eye  and  of  the  flesh 
and  vain  living.  Free  your  hearts  from  such  false 
love,  and  love  and  betroth  yourselves  with  Jesus,  our 
soul's  Bridegroom,  who  for  love  gave  His  life.  He 
calls  to  us  lovingly  to  come,  as  ye  have  read  in  his 
words.  Such  coming  brings  us  light.  Do  not  forget 
to  come. 

Yours  in  love, 

Christopher  Dock. 


N.B. — The  publisher  has  considered  it  desirable  to  affix  the  author's 
name  of  this  contribution:  first,  because  it  is  chiefly  addressed  to  his 
pupils  (although  it  concerns  all  men  without  exception).  So  it  is  meet 
that  they  know  who  speaks  to  them.  Secondly,  the  dear  author  has  led 
such  a  good  life,  and  does  yet  in  his  great  age,  that  it  is  not  unprofitable 
nor  detrimental  to  him  that  his  name  be  known.  God  grant  that  all 
who  read  the  letter  may  put  it  to  real  use. 


202  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

SPIRITUAL   MAGAZINE 

Number   40 


A  Hundred  Necessary  Rules  of  Conduct  for  Children 

I.     Rules  for  the  Conduct  of  a  Child  in  the 
House  of  its  Parents 

a.  In  the  morning,  during  and  after  rising 

1. — Dear  child,  as  soon  as  you  are  called  in  the 
morning,  arise;  indeed,  accustom  yourself  to 
" awaken "  at  the  proper  time  without  being  called, 
and  to  rise  without  loitering. 

2. — When  you  have  left  your  bed,  turn  back  the 
covers. 

3. — Let  your  first  thoughts  be  turned  toward 
God,  after  the  example  of  David,  who  (Psalm 
cxxxix,  18)  saith:  "When  I  awake,  I  am  still  with 
Thee,"  and  (Psalm  lxiii,  6)  "I  remember  Thee  upon 
my  bed  and  meditate  on  Thee  in  the  night  watches.' ' 

4. — Bid  a  good  morning  to  those  whom  you  meet 
first  and  to  your  parents,  sisters  and  brothers ;  not 
from  mere  habit,  but  do  it  out  of  true  love. 

5. — Accustom  yourself  to  dress  quickly,  but  at 
the  same  time  neatly. 

6. — Instead  of  idle  talk  with  your  sisters  and 

brothers,  seek  while  dressing  to  have  good  thoughts. 

Remember  the  garb  of  righteousness  in  Jesus  that 

has  come  to  you  through  Jesus,  and  resolve  this  day 

not  to  sully  it  by  deliberate  sinning. 

202 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  40  203 

7. — When  you  wash  your  face  and  hands,  do  not 
splash  water  about  the  room. 

8. — Rinsing  the  mouth  with  water  each  morning 
and  rubbing  the  teeth  with  the  fingers  serves  to  pre- 
serve the  teeth. 

9. — In  combing  your  hair  do  not  stand  in  the 
middle  of  the  room,  but  in  a  corner. 

10. — Your  morning  prayer  should  be  said,  not 
as  a  matter  of  an  indifferent  habit,  but  in  fervent 
gratitude  to  God,  who  has  guarded  you  during  the 
night ;  pray  him  humbly  to  bless  your  actions  this 
day ;  neither  forget  to  sing,  and  to  read  the  Bible. 

11. — Do  not  eat  your  breakfast  on  the  street  or 
in  school ;  but  ask  your  parents  to  give  it  to  you  at 
home. 

12. — Then  gather  up  your  books  and  come  to 
school  in  proper  time. 

b.  In  the  evening,  on  retiring 

13. — After  supper  do  not  sit  down  in  a  corner  to 
sleep,  but  attend  to  your  evening  devotions — song, 
prayer  and  reading,  before  retiring. 

14. — Undress  in  a  private  place ;  or  if  it  must  be 
done  in  the  presence  of  others,  be  modest  and  re- 
tiring. 

15. — Examine  occasionally  the  clothing  you  take 
off,  for  possible  rents,  that  they  may  be  mended 
betimes. 

16. — Do  not  scatter  your  clothes  about  the  room, 
but  lay  them  together  in  a  definite  place,  that  you 
may  readily  find  them  in  the  morning. 


204   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

17. — Lie  down  decently  and  straight,  and  cover 
yourself  up  well. 

18. — Before  you  go  to  sleep,  consider  how  you 
have  spent  the  day;  thank  God  for  His  blessings; 
pray  for  the  forgiveness  of  your  sins  and  commend 
yourself  to  His  gracious  care. 

19. — If  you  should  wake  during  the  night,  think 
of  God  and  His  omnipresence,  and  cherish  not  evil 
thoughts. 

c.  At  meals 

20. — When  you  go  to  the  table,  especially  among 
strangers,  first  wash,  and  comb  your  hair. 

21. — During  grace,  do  not  let  your  hands  dangle, 
or  move  them  otherwise,  but  let  them,  with  your 
eyes,  be  raised  to  God. 

22. — Do  not  lean  during  grace,  and  do  not  let 
your  eyes  roam  about,  but  be  attentive  and  reverent 
before  the  holy  majesty  of  God. 

23. — After  grace  wait  until  others  older  than 
yourself  sit  down,  then  be  seated  quietly  and  mod- 
estly. 

24. — During  the  meal,  sit  straight  and  still,  do 
not  wiggle  your  chair,  and  do  not  put  your  arms  on 
the  table.  Place  your  knife  and  fork  at  the  right 
side,  bread  at  the  left  of  your  plate. 

25. — Avoid  everything  that  indicates  excessive 
hunger,  such  as  looking  greedily  at  food ;  being  the 
first  one  in  the  dish;  cutting  one's  bread  all  into 
pieces  at  once ;  eating  fast  and  greedily ;  asking  for 
another  piece  of  bread  before  the  first  is  eaten ;  cut- 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  XO.  4" 

ting  too  large  pieces:  taking  one's  spoon  too  full; 
filling  the  mouth  too  full :  &c. 

26. — Keep  to  your  side  of  the  dish,  and  be  satis- 
fied with  that  which  is  given  you:  do  not  want  some 
of  everything. 

27. — Do  not  look  at  some  other  person's  plate,  to 
see  if  he  has  more  than  you.  but  enjoy  your  own 
with  gratitude. 

28. — Do  not  eat  more  meat  and  butter  than 
bread.  Do  not  bite  the  bread  with  your  teeth,  but 
cut  i^roper  mouthf uls  with  your  knife :  do  not.  how- 
ever, cut  them  in  front  of  your  mouth. 

29. — Take  proper  hold  of  your  knife  and  spoon, 
and  be  careful  not  to  soil  your  clothes  or  the  table- 
cloth. 

30. — Do  not  lick  your  greasy  fingers,  but  wipe 
them  on  a  cloth.  Use  your  fork  instead  of  your 
fingers  whenever  possible. 

31. — Chew  your  food  with  closed  lips,  and  do  not 
make  a  noise  by  scraping  your  plate. 

32. — Do  not  lick  your  plate  with  your  tongue  or 
finger,  nor  lick  the  outside  of  your  mouth.  Do  not 
rest  your  elbow  on  the  table  when  you  carry  your 
spoon  to  your  mouth. 

33. — Take  the  salt  from  the  salt  cellar,  not  with 
your  fingers,  but  with  the  tip  of  your  knife. 

34. — Do  not  throw  bones  or  other  remains  under 
the  table,  nor  push  them  on  the  tablecloth :  but  leave 
them  on  the  edge  of  your  plate. 

35. — Picking  your  teeth  with  a  knife  or  fork  is 
illbred,  and  injurious  to  the  gums. 

36. — Avoid  if  possible  blowing  your  nose  at  the 


206   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

table.  If  it  is  necessary  turn  your  face  from  the 
table  or  hold  your  hand  or  napkin  before  it.  The 
same  when  you  sneeze  or  cough. 

37. — Do  not  form  the  habit  of  being  dainty  or 
choice,  or  of  imagining  you  cannot  eat  this  or  that. 
Many  are  forced  to  eat  abroad  what  they  could  not 
eat  at  home. 

38. — It  is  bad  form  to  look  too  carefully  at  the 
food  put  upon  your  plate,  or  worse  yet,  to  smell  it. 
If  you  should  find  a  hair  or  anything  else  in  your 
food,  put  it  away  quietly  that  others  may  not  be 
disgusted. 

39. — As  often  as  something  is  put  upon  your 
plate,  acknowledge  it  by  a  nod  of  the  head. 

40. — Do  not  gnaw  bones  with  your  teeth,  neither 
make  a  noise  trying  to  knock  the  marrow  out  of 
them. 

41. — It  is  not  proper  to  replace  in  the  dish  what 
is  already  on  your  plate. 

42. — When  you  reach  across  the  table  for  some- 
thing, be  careful  not  to  dip  your  sleeve  in  the  dishes 
or  upset  a  glass. 

43. — At  the  table  do  not  speak  until  you  are 
asked,  but  if  you  have  learned  something  desirable 
at  church  or  school,  or  if  you  think  of  a  passage  of 
Scripture  relevant  to  the  subject,  you  may  tell  it; 
but  if  others  discuss  something  good,  listen  atten- 
tively. 

44. — When  you  drink,  you  must  have  no  food  in 
your  mouth,  and  must  incline  your  head  politely 
before  you  drink. 

45. — It  is  very  bad  form:   (1)   To  drink  such 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  40  207 

large  draughts  that  one  must  snort  or  take  a  deep 
breath.  (2)  To  look  from  one  person  to  another 
while  drinking.  (3)  To  begin  drinking  before  one's 
parents  or  distinguished  persons  have  drunk.  (4)  To 
drink  simultaneously  with  a  distinguished  person. 
(5)  To  drink  while  some  one  is  addressing  you.  (6) 
To  put  the  glass  to  the  lips  several  times  in  succes- 
sion. 

46. — Before  and  after  drinking  it  is  customary 
to  wipe  the  mouth,  not  with  the  hand,  but  with  a 
napkin  or  cloth.  $ 

47. — At  the  table  be  willing  to  fetch  things  into 
the  room  or  do  other  services  that  you  can. 

48. — When  you  are  satisfied,  rise  without  clatter, 
pick  up  your  chair,  wish  a  " blessed  repast' '  and 
step  aside  to  wait  for  commands.  But  in  this  matter 
we  must  be  guided  by  custom. 

49. — The  bread  that  is  left  over,  do  not  put  into 
your  pocket.    Let  it  lie  on  the  table. 

50. — Before  proceeding  to  anything  else,  after 
eating,  give  thanks  to  your  Creator  who  has  fed  and 
satisfied  you. 

II.     Rules  of  Conduct  for  a  Child  at  School 

51. — Dear  child,  when  you  enter  the  school,  bow 
respectfully  and  taking  your  place  quietly,  think  of 
the  presence  of  God. 

52. — During  prayers,  and  at  the  mention  of 
God's  word,  remember  that  God  speaks  with  you, 
and  be  reverent  and  attentive. 

53. — If  you  are  called  upon  to  pray  aloud,  speak 


208   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

slowly  and  thoughtfully,  and  in  singing  do  not  try 
to  outscream  the  others  or  have  the  first  word. 

54. — Always  be  obedient  to  your  teacher  and  do 
not  cause  him  to  remind  you  of  the  same  thing 
many  times. 

55. — If  you  are  punished  for  your  naughtiness 
do  not  express  impatience  in  words  or  manner,  but 
accept  your  punishment  for  your  improvement. 

56. — At  school  avoid  this  scandalous  talking,  by 
which  you  make  your  teacher's  work  more  difficult, 
annoy  other  pupils  and  disturb  the  attention  of 
yourself  and  others. 

57. — Attend  to  all  that  is  told,  sit  up  straight 
and  look  at  your  teacher. 

58. — If  you  are  to  recite  your  lesson,  open  your 
book  without  noise,  read  loudly,  slowly  and  dis- 
tinctly, that  every  word  and  syllable  may  be  under- 
stood. 

59. — Attend  more  to  yourself  than  to  others  un- 
less you  are  appointed  monitor. 

60. — If  you  are  not  asked,  keep  quiet  and  do  not 
prompt  others.  Let  them  speak  and  answer  for 
themselves. 

61. — Toward  your  fellows  act  lovingly  and 
peacefully ;  do  not  quarrel  with  them,  hit  them,  dirty 
their  clothes  with  your  shoes  or  ink  nor  give  them 
nick-names.  Act  toward  them  always  as  you  would 
have  them  act  toward  you. 

62. — Avoid  all  improper,  vulgar  habits  or  actions 
at  school.  Such  as,  (1)  Stretching  with  laziness  the 
hands  or  the  whole  body.  (2)  Eating  fruit  or 
other  things  in  school.     (3)  Leaning  one's  hand  or 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  40  209 

arm  on  a  neighbor's  shoulder,  leaning  the  head  on 
the  hand  or  laying  it  on  the  desk.  (4)  Putting  one's 
feet  on  the  bench  or  letting  them  dangle  or  scrape, 
crossing  the  legs  or  spreading  them  too  far  apart  in 
sitting  or  standing.  (5)  Scratching  the  head.  (6) 
Playing  with  the  fingers  or  chewing  them.  (7) 
Turning  the  head  in  all  directions.  (8)  Sitting  and 
sleeping.  (9)  Crawling  under  benches  or  desks. 
(10)  Turning  the  back  upon  the  teacher.  (11) 
Changing  one's  clothes  in  school.  (12)  Acting  inde- 
cently in  school. 

63. — Keep  your  books  clean  inside  and  out;  do 
not  scribble  or  draw  in  them;  do  not  lose  or  tear 
them. 

64. — In  writing  do  not  soil  your  hands  and  face 
with  ink,  and  do  not  spatter  the  ink  on  the  desk  or 
on  your  or  other  children's  clothes. 

65. — When  school  is  out  do  not  make  a  clatter. 
In  going  down  stairs  do  not  jump  two  or  three  steps 
at  a  time,  lest  you  hurt  yourself.    Gro  quietly  home. 

III.     Conduct  of  a  Child  on  the  Street 

66. — Dear  child,  although  when  out  of  school  you 
are  beyond  the  observation  of  your  teacher,  remem- 
ber that  God  is  everywhere,  and  that  you  must  even 
on  the  street  fear  Him  and  His  holy  angels. 

67. — Therefore  do  not  run  about  wildly  on  the 
street  and  shout,  but  walk  quietly  and  demurely. 

68. — Act  modestly,  and  do  not  do  before  other 
people  what  it  is  customary  to  do  privately. 

69. — It  is  improper  to  eat  on  the  street. 

14 


210  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

70. — Do  not  walk  along  looking  at  the  sky,  do 
not  run  against  people,  do  not  tread  where  the  mud 
is  thickest  or  in  puddles. 

71. — When  you  see  a  wagon  coining,  step  aside 
and  avoid  danger.  Never  hang  on  the  back  of  a 
wagon. 

72. — In  the  winter  do  not  go  upon  the  ice,  do  not 
snow-ball  others,  and  do  not  go  sledding  with  dis- 
orderly boys. 

73. — In  summer  do  not  bathe  in  the  water  or  go 
too  near  it.  Do  not  take  pleasure  in  pranks  or  inde- 
cent games. 

74. — Do  not  stop  where  people  are  quarreling  or 
fighting  or  doing  other  wicked  things.  Do  not  asso- 
ciate with  bad  boys  who  will  lead  you  astray.  Do 
not  run  about  at  fairs,  nor  stand  before  mounte- 
banks, nor  watch  lewd  dancing,  for  you  can  learn 
only  wickedness. 

75. — Do  not  join  hands  with  other  children  on 
the  street  and  block  the  way.  Neither  put  your  arm 
on  another's  shoulder. 

76. — When  you  meet  some  one  you  know,  step 
aside  and  bow  politely,  but  do  not  wait  until  he  is 
beside  you  or  past  you.  Show  your  respect  while  a 
few  steps  in  front  of  him. 

IV.     Conduct  in  Meeting  or  Church 

77. — Dear  child,  in  meeting  or  church  think  of 
the  sacred  presence  of  God,  and  remember  that  you 
shall  be  judged  according  to  the  word  you  have 
heard  that  day. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  40  211 

78. — Bring  your  Bible  and  hymn  book  with  you 
and  pray  and  sing  attentively,  for  from  the  mouths 
of  young  children  God  will  perfect  praise. 

79. — Listen  carefully  to  the  sermon.  Note  the 
text  and  the  divisions.  These  you  may  also  write  on 
your  slate.  Open  your  Bible  quietly  to  the  refer- 
ences given  and  mark  the  place  with  a  narrow  strip 
of  paper,  of  which  you  should  always  have  several 
in  your  Bible. 

80. — Do  not  talk  during  the  sermon,  and  if  others 
talk  to  you,  do  not  answer.  If  you  are  sleepy,  stand 
up  a  little  while  and  try  to  keep  it  off. 

81. — When  the  name  of  Jesus  is  mentioned  un- 
cover or  incline  your  head  and  show  yourself 
reverent. 

82. — Do  not  gaze  about  you  at  church,  but  keep 
your  eyes  under  good  discipline  and  control. 

83. — All  improper  habits  that  you  must  avoid 
at  school,  as  given  in  No.  62,  you  must  avoid  still 
more  diligently  at  church. 

84. — If  you  enter  or  leave  church  in  couples  you 
must  not  purposely  elbow,  push,  or  stare  at  others, 
but  walk  out  quietly  and  modestly. 

V.     General  rules  of  Conduct 

85. — Dear  child,  live  in  peace  and  unity  with 
every  one,  and  let  all  your  politeness  emanate  from 
pure  love  of  your  neighbor. 

86. — Practice  order  in  all  things ;  lay  your  books 
and  other  belongings  in  their  proper  places  and  do 
not  let  them  lie  carelessly  about. 


212   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

87. — When  you  are  sent  on  errands  by  your 
parents,  pay  attention,  that  you  may  discharge  your 
errand  properly.  When  you  have  done  your  errand, 
come  straight  home  and  report  the  answer. 

88. — Be  never  idle,  and  either  help  your  parents 
or  study  your  lessons.  But  beware  of  reading  in 
indecent  or  idle  books,  or  wasting  the  time,  for  which 
you  are  accountable  to  God,  with  cards  or  dice. 

89. — When  you  are  given  money,  hand  it  to  some 
one  to  save  for  you,  that  you  may  not  lose  or  squan- 
der it.    Cheerfully  give  alms  with  your  money. 

90. — When  you  are  given  anything,  take  it  with 
your  right  hand,  and  thank  the  giver  politely. 

91. — When  you  happen  to  go  where  some  one  has 
left  money  or  other  things  lying  on  the  table,  do  not 
go  too  close  and  do  not  remain  alone  in  the  room. 

92. — Do  not  listen  at  the  door  (Sirach  xxi,  26). 
Do  not  run  in  quickly,  but  knock  modestly,  and  wait 
until  you  are  asked  in,  then  bow  as  you  enter,  and  do 
not  slam  the  door. 

93. — Do  not  distort  your  face  before  people  with 
frowning  or  sour  looks.  Do  not  be  sulky  when  you 
are  asked  a  question,  but  let  others  finish  talking 
and  do  not  interrupt  them.  Do  not  answer  by  shak- 
ing or  nodding  your  head,  but  with  distinct,  modest 
words. 

94. — Make  your  bow  somewhat  slowly  and  deep, 
with  uplifted  face.  Do  not  thrust  your  feet  too  far 
behind.  Turn  your  face  toward  people,  not  your 
back. 

95. — When  a  stranger  or  friend  comes  to  the 
house,  be  polite,  offer  him  a  chair,  bid  him  welcome, 
and  wait  upon  him. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  40  213 

96. — In  sneezing,  blowing  your  nose,  spitting 
and  yawning,  exercise  all  possible  decency.  Turn 
your  face  aside,  bold  your  band  before  it,  take  tbe 
discbarge  from  tbe  nose  into  a  bandkercbief  and  do 
not  look  at  it  long ;  spit  straigbt  down,  and  put  your 
foot  on  it,  &c.  Do  not  form  a  babit  of  constantly 
clearing  tbe  tbroat,  digging  tbe  nose,  violent  pant- 
ing, and  otber  disgusting  and  indecent  ways. 

97. — Never  appear  among  people  looking  inde- 
cent or  dirty.  Cut  your  nails  at  tbe  proper  time, 
and  keep  your  clotbes,  sboes,  and  stockings  neat  and 
clean. 

98. — In  laugbing  be  moderate  and  civil.  Do  not 
laugb  at  everything,  but  especially  not  at  tbe  wick- 
edness or  misfortune  of  otbers. 

99. — Wben  you  bave  made  a  promise,  try  to  keep 
it,  and  beware  of  all  lying  and  untruth. 

100. — Whatever  you  see  in  otber  Cbristian  peo- 
ple tbat  is  good  and  proper,  let  it  serve  you  as  a 
model.  If  tbere  be  any  virtue  and  if  tbere  be  any 
praise,  tbink  on  tbese  things.     (Pbil.  iv,  8.) 


214  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE 

Number   41 
A  Hundred  Christian  Rules  for  Children 


SECOND    PART 


I.     Rules  Concerning  Conduct  Toward  God 

1. — Consider  that  between  thee  and  the  triune 
God  there  is  a  covenant  established  in  which  he  hath 
promised  to  love  and  bless  thee,  but  that  thou  also 
art  bound  to  love  and  obey  Him  implicitly. 

2. — Take  time  to  consider  alone  and  in  the  pres- 
ence of  God  whether  thou  hast  faithfully  and  con- 
stantly observed  what  thy  baptismal  covenant  re- 
quires of  thee :  whether  thou  hast  loved  God  simply, 
feared  and  obeyed  Him. 

3. — If  such  meditation  convinces  thee  that  thou 
hast  torn  thyself  from  God  through  conscious  sin, 
that  stubbornness,  laziness,  disobedience,  lying,  im- 
pudence and  other  such  misdemeanors  have  been 
allowed  to  rule  thee,  do  not  neglect  renewing  thy 
covenant. 

4.  Admit  thy  sinful  acts  and  inborn  deep- 
seated  corruption  most  heartily  before  thy  Creator ; 
turn  with  a  contrite  heart  to  Jesus  Christ  thine 
only  mercy  seat,  seek  through  faith  forgiveness  of 
sin  in  his  blood,  and  make  a  new  resolve  to  sin  no 
more,  but  to  serve  Jesus  Christ  and  be  ruled  by  His 
spirit. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  41  215 

5. — But  being  convinced  that  thou  hast  not 
broken  thy  covenant  consciously  and  intentionally, 
yet  that  thou  hast  occasionally  been  slow  and  care- 
less in  thy  Christian  duties,  and  hast  frequently 
failed  here  and  there,  then  seek  also  with  repentant 
and  believing  heart  to  wash  in  the  blood  of  Jesus 
and  henceforth  to  be  more  earnest  in  following  him. 

6. — But  do  not  consider  that  thou  canst  do  all 
this  of  thine  own  power.  Pray  God  daily  to 
strengthen  thy  good  intent  and  to  preserve  thee 
sinless. 

7. — Beside  such  daily  prayers,  watch  constantly 
over  thyself.  Do  not  trust  thy  heart  too  much,  for 
it  is  very  deceiving.  Be  careful  which  way  thy 
thoughts  and  desires  tend,  and  keep  eyes,  ears  and 
tongue  in  good  control. 

8. — Take  particular  care  that  the  sin  to  which 
thou  art  most  prone  shall  not  conquer  thee.  Flee 
every  opportunity  of  committing  it,  and  seek  by  the 
help  of  God  to  weaken  it  constantly. 

9. — Never  lie  down  at  night  before  thou  hast 
examined  thy  conscience  and  reconciled  thyself  with 
God  for  thy  errors,  through  Jesus  Christ. 

10. — Be  diligent  to  fear  God  uprightly ;  not  from 
slavish  fear  of  future  punishment,  but  from  filial 
love  that  avoids  doing  anything  to  displease  the 
beloved. 

11. — But  to  love  God  aright,  thou  must  know 
Him,  and  for  this  Holy  Script  is  thy  guide. 

12. — Let  not  a  day  pass  without  reading  and 
considering  some  part  of  Scripture,  as  thou  wouldst 
not  go  a  day  without  food  or  drink. 


216   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

13. — But  never  read  God's  word  excepting  with 
great  reverence,  for  in  it  the  highest  majesty  speak- 
eth  to  thee,  a  poor  sinner. 

14. — Thine  honest  purpose  in  reading  the  Bible 
must  be  to  believe  implicitly  all  that  it  tells,  to  do  all 
that  it  commands,  and  to  hope  all  that  it  promises. 

15. — Approach  Scripture  as  one  wholly  ignorant 
of  spiritual  things,  and  thou  wilt  learn  most,  for  to 
the  untutored  the  Father  in  Heaven  will  reveal 
Himself. 

16. — Learn  especially  through  Scripture  to  know 
Jesus  Christ,  thy  dear  Savior,  that  thou  mayest  be- 
lieve in  Him  and  understand  Him. 

17. — Impress  deeply  upon  thy  heart  the  divine 
qualities  taught  in  the  Scriptures. 

18. — As  God  is  a  spirit,  serve  Him  in  spirit  and 
in  truth,  and  seek  to  unify  His  spirit  and  thine 
through  faith  and  love. 

19. — Because  God  is  eternal  and  immutable, 
cleave  to  Him  with  unchanging  faith,  and  gladly 
give  up  for  Him  temporal  and  perishable  things. 

20. — Because  He  is  holy,  thou  must  guard  thyself 
from  taint  if  thou  wouldst  have  communion  with 
Him. 

21. — Because  He  is  merciful  and  good,  trust  Him 
in  all  thy  trouble,  and  be  thou  also  good  and  merciful 
to  the  wretched. 

22. — Because  He  is  just,  and  rewards  righteous- 
ness, pursue  thou  righteousness.  But  because  He 
also  punishes  sin,  avoid  sin,  which  merits  punish- 
ment. 

23. — Because  He  is  truthful,  believe  His  prom- 
ises and  fear  His  warnings. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  41  217 

24. — Because  He  is  omnipotent,  trust  His  help, 
for  He  will  help  thee  to  overcome  difficulty. 

25. — Because  He  alone  is  wise,  depend  on  Him 
alone  for  pure  wisdom,  and  abandon  thyself  wholly 
to  His  guidance. 

26. — Because  He  is  omniscient,  do  not  dare  to 
deceive  Him  by  simulation,  and  beware  of  secret 
sin. 

27. — Because  He  is  omnipresent,  know  that  in 
solitude  thou  art  not  alone;  that  the  future  Judge 
seeth  and  heareth  all  that  thou  thinkest  and  doest. 

28. — As  the  omnipresent  God  loveth  to  dwell  in 
thy  heart,  let  it  be  cleansed  by  thy  faith  and  ruled  by 
His  Spirit.    Then  will  He  reveal  Himself  to  thee. 

29. — Walk  ever  in  the  sacred  presence  of  God, 
constantly  remembering  his  love.  Whenever  thy 
thoughts  and  desires  turn  from  Him,  turn  them 
back  to  Him,  even  if  it  is  a  thousand  times  in  one 
day. 

30. — Never  speak  the  sacred  name  of  God  or 
Jesus  except  with  reverence,  and  let  all  careless 
swearing  and  cursing  be  far  from  thy  thoughts. 

31. — Never  dare  to  turn  passages  of  Holy  Script 
to  idle  or  laughable  use.  God  will  not  leave  this 
sacrilege  unpunished. 

32. — Not  only  esteem  God  highly  in  thy  heart  for 
His  infinite  power,  goodness  and  wisdom,  but  seek 
also  to  express  thy  esteem  in  words  and  deeds. 

33. — Employ  thy  mouth  to  call  for  His  help  in 
trouble,  to  praise  His  love,  and  to  thank  Him  for  all 
His  benefits. 

34. — But  so  shape  thy  deeds  also,  that  God  may 
be  glorified  in  them. 


218   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

35. — Sanctify  the  Lord's  day  with  great  care, 
and  do  not  spend  it  in  games  and  idling,  but  in 
sacred  exercises. 

36. — Love  to  go  to  school  and  church,  that  thou 
mayest  learn  what  is  good  for  thy  peace,  and  show 
thyself  quiet,  attentive  and  respectful  in  the  sacred 
presence  of  God.  ' 

II.     Rules  of  Conduct  Toward 
One's  Neighbor 

37. — Dear  child,  in  thy  intercourse  with  thy 
neighbor,  be  he  friend  or  foe,  keep  ever  the  teach- 
ings before  thee  of  St.  Paul :  Owe  no  man  anything, 
but  to  love  one  another.     (Rom.  xiii,  8.) 

38. — All  that  thou  wouldst  have  others  do  to 
thee,  do  also  to  them.  And  what  thou  wouldst  not 
have  others  do  to  thee,  do  not  to  them.  (Luke  vi,  31.) 

39. — Next  to  God  thou  art  owing  none  more  love 
and  honor  than  thy  parents,  from  whom  thou  hast 
obtained  life. 

40. — But  thy  love  for  thy  parents  cannot  be  bet- 
ter expressed  than  by  a  willing  obedience,  doing 
their  bidding,  accepting  their  punishments,  bearing 
their  weaknesses  with  patience,  and  never  intention- 
ally offending  them.  All  this  thou  also  owest  to  thy 
grandparents,  step-parents,  guardians  and  other 
superiors. 

41. — Thy  teachers'  trouble  and  faithfulness  thou 
canst  never  fully  repay.  Love  and  honor  them 
therefore,  as  thy  own  father,  and  seek  to  lighten 
their  heavy  burden  by  obedience,  diligence  and 
attention. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  41  219 

42. — Between  thee  and  thy  sisters  and  brothers 
never  allow  quarrel  and  enmity  to  arise. 

43. — Seek  to  be  pleasant  and  helpful  to  thy 
fellow  pupils.  But  seek  as  thy  friends  only  those 
that  fear  God  and  set  others  a  good  example. 

44. — Avoid  all  bad  company,  as  a  very  dangerous 
wile  of  Satan,  and  pray  God  daily  to  preserve  thy 
soul  from  evil. 

45. — Toward  the  aged  and  distinguished  persons 
be  respectful  and  polite,  and  seek  daily  to  put  aside 
all  coarse  and  improper  conduct. 

46. — Guard  against  offending  strangers,  the  poor 
and  the  helpless,  and  do  not  mock  them,  but  treat 
them  with  sympathy  and  helpfulness. 

47. — At  every  opportunity  exhibit  toward  thy 
friends  and  benefactors  a  grateful  heart. 

48. — To  your  enemies  who  laugh  at  thee  or  other- 
wise offend  thee,  do  not  return  evil  for  evil,  nor 
insult  for  insult,  but  pray  God  rather  to  forgive 
their  sin  and  to  convert  them,  and  miss  no  oppor- 
tunity of  doing  them  good. 

49. — Consider  it  an  undeserved  honor  to  be  de- 
spised and  hated  for  thy  quiet  and  God-fearing  way. 
Learn  from  thy  youth  to  esteem  the  disgrace  of 
Christ. 

50. — If  an  angry  or  revengeful  thought  tries  to 
arise  in  thee,  subdue  it  by  the  thought  of  the  love 
and  gentleness  of  Jesus  Christ. 

51. — Do  not  let  wrath  induce  thee  to  rebuke  any 
one  who  has  done  thee  wrong,  to  wish  him  ill,  to 
strike  him  or  in  any  other  way  to  avenge  thyself. 
For  God  hath  said :  Vengeance  is  mine ;  I  will  repay. 
(Romans  xii,  19.) 


220   THE  WOKKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

52. — Let  not  the  fear  of  man  prevent  thee  from 
punishing  evil.  But  punish  it  out  of  love,  with  great 
care  and  modesty. 

53. — Be  not  sad  and  morose  among  strangers,  but 
friendly  and  cheerful,  and  that  from  an  inward 
sense  of  the  friendliness  and  grace  of  God. 

54. — If  thou  hast  offended  some  one,  be  not 
ashamed  humbly  to  admit  it  and  to  apologize. 

55. — Offend  no  one  by  wrong  actions,  ugly  man- 
ners or  unchaste,  nasty  speeches.  Never  repeat  such 
things  when  thou  hast  heard  them  from  others,  and 
be  ashamed  to  take  such  filth  of  Satan  into  thy 
mouth. 

56. — Be  satisfied  with  that  which  God  gives  thee 
through  thy  parents,  and  begrudge  no  one  his  own. 

57. — Yield  to  no  temptation  to  take  the  last  thing 
from  thy  parents  or  fellow  pupils,  or  to  appropriate 
money  given  thee  to  do  an  errand  for  thy  own  use. 
Such  beginnings  have  shown  many  the  way  to  the 
gallows. 

58. — If  thou  hast  been  tempted  to  take  from 
others  fruit  or  other  things,  admit  thy  fault  in  true 
penitence,  seek  to  replace  it,  and  guard  thyself  all 
thy  life  against  this  abominable  vice. 

59. — Practice  true  uprightness,  do  not  learn  to 
lie,  for  the  Devil  is  the  father  of  lies.  Speak  the 
truth  from  thy  heart,  even  if  it  bring  thee  loss  and 
annoyance. 

60. — In  repeating  what  others  have  told  thee,  add 
nothing,  lest  thou  enter  the  net  of  the  spirit  of  lies. 

61. — Judge  and  censure  no  one.  Do  not  reveal 
thy  friend's  secrets.    Be  no  slanderer,  flatterer  or 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  41  221 

tell-tale ;  speak  well  of  thy  neighbor  and  excuse  his 
weaknesses. 

62. — When  others  boast  of  their  sins  at  school 
and  elsewhere,  and  laugh  at  foolish  pranks,  beware 
of  participating  in  their  sin  and  compromising  thy- 
self. 

63. — Seeing  something  wicked  in  others,  sigh 
over  it,  think  meanwhile  of  thine  own  faults,  and 
pray  God  to  deliver  thee  from  such  sins. 

64. — Give  every  one  his  due  and  let  the  whole- 
some grace  of  God  chasten  thee  to  live  justly. 

III.     Rules  of  Conduct  of  a  Child 
Toward  Himself 

65. — Dear  child,  learn  to  know  thyself  aright. 

66. — All  the  good  thou  findest  in  thyself  is  of 
God ;  but  all  the  wicked  is  thy  own. 

67. — If  thou  observe  thyself  without  self-love  or 
flattery  thou  shalt  find  that  thy  heart  is  by  nature 
an  abyss  of  sin,  and  that  the  seed  of  all  vice  lies 
hidden  within  thee  only  awaiting  the  chance  of 
breaking  loose. 

68. — Therefore  flee  all  opportunities  of  wrong  as 
the  Devil  himself,  for  they  are  all  go-betweens  that 
deliver  thee  into  his  power. 

69. — Thy  immortal  soul  is  the  noblest  part  of  thy 
being,  therefore  thou  must  take  more  care  of  it  than 
of  thy  mortal  body. 

70. — The  nobility  of  thy  soul  consists  in  its  union 
with  God,  for  which  thou  must  strive  with  all  thy 
strength. 


222   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

71. — But  to  be  and  remain  united  with  God  thou 
must  earnestly  hate  sin,  and  dampen  the  sinful  in- 
clinations of  thy  heart  with  daily  penitence,  for  pre- 
vailing sin  separates  thee  from  God. 

72. — But  as  God,  who  is  a  consuming  fire,  can 
have  nothing  in  common  with  a  sinner,  thou  must 
turn  to  the  Mediator  in  full  faith  and  take  Him  into 
thy  heart. 

73. — Where  the  Mediator,  Jesus  Christ,  dwelleth, 
there  is  also  His  Spirit,  that  is  ever  renewing  the 
soul  into  an  image  of  God. 

74. — Let  this  Holy  Ghost  work  in  thy  spirit,  and 
it  will  ever  enlighten  thy  understanding,  turn  thy 
will  to  God,  and  fill  thy  conscience  with  peace  and 
joy. 

75. — In  this  order  must  thou  seek  ever  to  renew 
the  strength  of  thy  spirit. 

76. — Employ  thy  understanding  and  memory  to 
grasp  and  retain  something  useful. 

77. — First  of  all  gather  a  treasure  of  learning 
from  the  word  of  God,  that  shows  thee  the  way  to 
reconciliation  with  God.  Besides  this,  endeavor  to 
learn  other  useful  knowledge. 

78. — Accustom  thy  will  ever  to  choose  what  is 
good,  and  to  discard  what  is  evil. 

79. — Accustom  thy  imagination  to  proper  form. 
Do  not  imagine  the  joys  of  the  world  lovelier  and 
true  Christianity  more  difficult  than  they  really  are. 

80. — Learn  betimes  to  curb  thy  affections  and 
emotions  that  they  do  not  enslave  thee. 

81. — Do  not  disturb  thine  emotions  bv  a  desire 
for  earthly  things,  vain  hopes,  unprofitable  fear, 
neither  by  worldly  sorrow  nor  excessive  joy. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  41  223 

82. — Anger,  envy  and  jealousy  are  tormentors  of 
the  soul.    Beware  of  their  power. 

83. — Let  no  rank  or  improper  lusts  arise  in  thy 
heart,  for  they  destroy  body  and  soul. 

84. — From  wicked  self-love  arise  three  chief 
vices,  ambition,  avarice  and  lust.  Discover  to  which 
of  these  thou  art  most  inclined,  and  seek  to  suppress 
such  tendency  betimes. 

85. — The  more  thou  dost  flatter  thy  natural  in- 
clination, give  it  its  own  free  will,  and  pamper  it,  the 
more  tyrannical  will  it  become. 

86. — Thy  soul  can  find  rest  nowhere  except  in 
God.  The  closer  thou  dost  approach  Him  in  faith 
and  love,  the  more  peaceful  it  will  become. 

87. — But  God  has  given  thee  beside  a  soul,  also  a 
"body,  and  has  wisely  endowed  it  with  members  and 
senses.  Therefore  thou  art  bound  to  keep  it  sound 
and  untainted. 

88. — Be  therefore  careful,  and  do  not  expose  thy- 
self to  dangers  that  menace  body  and  health. 

89. — Do  not  accustom  thyself  to  luxury  and  do 
not  pamper  thy  body,  or  thou  shalt  be  a  wretched 
and  sickly  being  all  thy  life. 

90. — Never  be  ashamed  even  of  the  lowliest  work, 
and  flee  idleness  as  thou  wouldst  flee  from  the 
plague. 

91. — Do  not  love  sleep  too  much,  lest  thou  become 
lazy. 

92. — Do  not  fill  thyself  with  too  much  food  and 
drink,  for  moderation  preserves  health. 

93. — Avoid  especially  drunkenness,  which  is 
more  than  beastly,  and  never  allow  thyself  to  be  led 
to  drink  more  than  is  needed. 


224   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

94. — Carry  thy  body  decently  and  modestly,  and 
cover  what  nature  meant  to  be  covered,  for  thy 
members  are  Christ's  members,  and  thy  body  is  a 
temple  of  the  Holy  Ghost. 

95. — If  God  sends  a  visitation  to  thy  body,  bear 
thy  pains  with  patience,  and  believe  that  God  loveth 
thee  because  he  chasteneth. 

96. — If  God  wills  that  thou  shalt  be  poor,  sick 
and  despised  in  the  world,  think,  "He  is  the  Lord, 
may  He  do  as  it  pleaseth  Him." 

97. — Remember  thou  shalt  not  always  live  in  this 
world,  and  prepare  betimes  for  thy  departure. 

98. — Look  upon  each  day  as  thy  last,  then  the  last 
day  will  not  find  thee  unprepared. 

99. — Pray  God  to  give  thee  a  definite  conviction 
of  the  certainty  of  resurrection,  judgment  and  eter- 
nal life. 

100. — Pear  not  death,  for  if  thou  hast  lived  a 
Christian  life,  thou  canst  die  blessed  and  happy. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  41  225 


THE   GOLDEN  A.  B.  C.   OF   A 
PIOUS    CHILD 

A  disciple  of  the  Lord  Jesus  shall  be : 

1. — Attentive  to  the  word  of  Christ.    Acts  xvi,  14. 

2. — Fervent  in  spirit.    Romans  xii,  11. 

3. — Submissive  to  Christ.    Titus  ii,  14. 

4. — Humble  toward  God  and  man.    Matth.  xi,  29. 

5. — Honest  in  demeanor.    Romans  xii,  17. 

6. — Fruitful  in  good  deeds.    John  xi,  5. 

7. — Believing  in  the  Lord  Jesus.     Acts  xvi,  15. 

8. — Heavenly  in  spirit.    Philip  iii,  20. 

9. — Ever  rejoicing  in  the  Lord.    Philip  iv,  4. 
10. — Chaste  and  pure  in  heart.    Matth.  v,  8. 
11. — Sincere  and  without  offence.    Philip  i,  10. 
12. — Compassionate  to  the  unfortunate.    I  Peter  iii,  8. 
13. — Sober  for  prayer.    I  Peter  iv,  8. 
14. — Proper  in  all  things.    I  Cor.  xiv,  40. 
15. — Resplendent  in  sacred  ornaments.    Isaiah  lxi,  10. 
16. — Sprinkled  from  an  evil  conscience.    Hebr.  x,  22. 
17.— Rich  in  gifts  of  the  Holy  Spirit.    I  Cor.  i,  4,  5. 
18.— Tender-hearted.    Ephes.  iv,  32. 
19. — Faithful  to  Jesus  unto  death.    Rev.  ii,  10. 
20. — Submitting  one  to  another.    Ephes.  v,  21. 
21. — Valiant  at  all  times.    Luke  xxi,  36. 
22. — Sober  and  modest.    Titus  ii,  12. 


15 


226   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

SPIRITUAL   MAGAZINE 

Part  II,  Number  15 

Two  Edifying  Hymns,  which  the  Godfearing  Chris- 
topher Dock  (schoolmaster  on  the  Skippack) 
has  left  to  his  pupils  and  all  others  that  read 
them,  for  contemplation. 

Tune  :  Who  Only  Letteth  God  Command;  or  to  the  follow- 
ing notes : 

(Meter  and  Rhyme  like  "Dying  Song.") 

1. 

The  thread  of  my  life  runs  to  an  end, 

My  pilgrimage  is  soon  over ; 

Lord,  send  me  an  angel 

To  guide  me  to  the  heavenly  Canaan. 

Who  stands  beside  me  at  the  rudder 

When  I  ride  through  the  final  storm  ? 

2. 
That  my  little  boat  may  pass 
Straight  through  the  waves  of  death 's  anguish, 
To  Canaan,  and  my  soul  may  look 
Intent  upon  her  guiding  star, 
Upon  my  Savior,  Jesus  Christ,  who 
In  death  still  my  life  shall  be. 

3. 

0  Lord,  my  God,  this  is  my  prayer, 
Look  not  upon  my  righteousness. 

1  hope  that  Thou  wilt  keep  me 
By  Thy  grace  and  mercy. 
For  our  own  righteousness  is 
Before  Thee  as  a  filthy  rag. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  15  227 

4. 
To  increase  faith,  love,  hope, 
Does  not  lie  within  the  power  of  man. 
I  trust  in  Christ  my  Lord 
And  in  His  unfailing  Word. 
This,  upon  my  last  journey,  shall  be 
The  draught  of  life,  the  food  of  soul. 

5. 
He  is  the  lamb,  that  here  on  earth 
Hath  borne  the  sin  of  the  world ; 
He  that  heartily  believes  shall  be  saved, 
And  find  with  God  peace  and  grace. 
Thus,  I  will  cling  to  Jesus  when  death 
Shall  rend  my  heart  asunder. 

6. 
Now  will  I  say  in  love,  brothers  and  sisters, 
Wife  and  child,  every  friend  that's  dear, 
Also  those  that  we  do  hate, 
Or  are  turned  against  me ; 
Pray  you  all,  forbear, 
Forgive  and  spare  the  debt. 

7. 
Where  you  my  manner,  act  and  life, 
In  something  have  offended, 
I  will  gladly  forgive  all  of  you 
And  pray  God  that  He,  in  mercy, 
Will  look  upon  us  and  be  gracious, 
And  forgive  us  all  our  sin. 

8. 
Yet  one  thing  more  I  can 't  conceal, 
It  still  weighs  upon  my  heart ; 
It  is  the  tender  souls  of  youth, 
These  I  must  in  memory  cherish. 
Because  Satan  in  this  world  hath  laid  for  them 
Many  nets,  stumbling  blocks  and  snares. 


228   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

9. 
These  entangle  their  souls 
And  lead  them  forth  in  chains 
Along  the  broad  path  through  his  treachery, 
Direct  to  the  gate  of  Hell, 
To  steep  them  throughout  Eternity 
In  anguish,  pain  and  great  torment. 

10. 
He  exalts  for  them  the  lusts  of  the  eye, 
The  love  of  the  world,  through  which 
They  may  feed  the  lusts  of  the  flesh, 
Through  fame,  sensuality,  success  and  wealth, 
Through  vanity,  avarice,  deceit ; 
Through  guile,  lying,  and  hypocrisy ; 

11. 
By  eating,  drinking,  dancing,  carousing, 
Swearing  and  cursing  without  restraint ; 
By  singing  frivolous,  vulgar,  wicked  songs, 
By  spreading  sensuality. 
Then  from  these  proceed  hatred, 
Jealously,  envy,  enmity,  war  and  murder. 

12. 
I  pray  you,  dear  children, 
0,  I  admonish  and  beg  you, 
Go  not  in  the  way  of  sinful  men, 
It  leads  you  away  from  God  's  kingdom ; 
Fear  God  and  beseech  Him  early  and  late 
To  lead  you  along  the  right  path. 

13. 
Hath  not  God  given  His  Son, 
As  a  light  for  this  dark  world; 
As  the  way  of  truth  and  life  1 
Whoever  follows  His  footsteps  will  not  err. 
He  alone  is  the  right  pathway 
That  leadeth  to  the  heavenly  Canaan. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  15  229 

14. 

God  taketh  no  pleasure  in  destruction, 
The  sinner's  death  doth  not  please  Him. 
He  hath  no  joy  in  our  death 
Nor  our  falling  into  judgment. 
Unbelief  and  the  lusts  of  the  flesh 
Alone  bring  us  to  a  bitter  end. 

15. 

As  I  have  learned  from  God's  word, 
And  as  our  Savior  Himself  says ; 
That  light  has  come  into  the  world 
And  appeared  as  a  condemnation 
To  those  who  in  darkness 
Walk  without  faith  and  penitence. 

16. 
Therefore  for  the  children  of  men 
The  Gospel  is  still  prepared ; 
Who  believeth  not,  will  be  guilty 
Of  neglecting  his  own  salvation. 
He  that  doeth  evil  hateth  the  light, 
And  thereby  he  falls  into  judgment. 

17. 
Who  here  in  time  of  grace, 
In  his  awful  state  of  sin, 
Through  God 's  word  and  spirit  takes 
In  true  repentance,  admits  his  sin, 
And  believes  in  Christ  unerringly 
And  follows  Him,  will  be  comforted. 

18. 
God  is  willing  to  forgive  his  sin. 
Christ,  through  His  righteousness, 
Will  renew  him  through  His  spirit, 
And  clothe  him  with  the  wedding  garment. 
Then  begins  the  rejoicing  of  the  angels, 
When  one  soul  is  willing  to  repent. 


230   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

19. 
Consider  well,  dear  children, 
And  practice  godliness; 
Let  not  the  world  be  a  hindrance  to  you 
In  your  salvation  and  blessedness. 
Then  you  will  yonder  in  eternity, 
Rejoice  without  pain  or  sorrow. 

20. 
Consider  it  also,  ye  children  of  men 
Who  still  live  in  vanity ; 
Consider  it  well,  ye  fearless  sinners, 
And  take  counsel  in  time, 
Before  God  turns  His  face  away  from  you, 
And  His  righteous  wrath  is  kindled. 

21. 
Now,  good-night,  ye  dear  youth, 
God  bless  and  keep  you. 
May  He  adorn  you  with  modesty  and  virtue, 
And  lead  you  to  His  kingdom. 
Good-night,  to  all  of  you  together, 
Young  and  old,  large  and  small. 

22. 
This  little  hymn  I  give  in  parting 
To  all  my  dear  pupils, 
And  beg  you  to  prepare 
For  eternal  joy  in  God  's  kingdom. 
Let  lamp  and  vessel  not  be  empty, 
Pour  the  oil  of  faith  into  them  with  virtue. 

II  Peter  i,  5  to  16. 

Verse  8  on  Manuscript  omitted: 

Mark  well,  I  mean  to  say 

That  my  prayer  is  to  Jesus  only. 

What  concerns  Jew,  Turk  and  Gentile, 

These  I  never  have  offended. 

I  wish  for  them  a  view  that's  clear, 

To  see  the  Light  of  Life  in  God's  Word. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  15  231 

ANOTHER   SPIRITUAL   SONG 

by  the  same  Author1 
Tune:   Ye  Sinners  Come. 

1. 

0,  children,  would  you  cherish 

A  worthy  lasting  love  ? 
The  good  that  does  not  perish 

Is  only  found  above. 
Seek  God,  the  highest  goal, 
With  spirit  and  with  soul, 

Then  you  will  find  a  rapture 
The  heart  cannot  control. 

2. 

Is  indolence  a  pleasure  ? 

Does  worldliness  allure  ? 
Then  know  that  short  the  measure, 

For  life  is  never  sure, 
And  through  eternity, 
The  soul  will  ever  be, 

The  time  for  pardon  wasted, 
In  wof ul  misery. 

3. 

Saint  Luke  has  plainly  written 

About  a  man  of  pride — 
With  riches  was  he  smitten, 

And  worldliness  beside — 


1  In  Governor  Pennypacker's  "  Historical  and  Biographical  Sketches," 
p.  148  ff,  the  following  translation  is  given.  In  the  translation  the 
Governor  says :  "  The  effort  has  been  made  to  preserve  the  thought, 
versification,  metre  and  rhyme — a  somewhat  difficult  task."  The  task 
has  been  so  artfully  performed  that  it  seemed  best  to  give  it  in  this 
interesting  form. 


232   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

He  lived  a  little  while, 
Luxurious  in  style, 

And  fixed  his  heart  on  pleasures 
That  only  do  beguile. 

4. 

In  purple  was  he  clothed, 
The  whiles  he  lived  on  earth, 

Soon  vanities  were  loathed 
And  pride  of  little  worth. 

Death  put  an  end  to  gain — 

He  found  himself  in  pain — 
And  from  the  direst  sorrow 

He  ne  'er  was  free  again. 

5. 
Then  piteous  was  his  wailing 

To  Father  Abraham ; 
' '  O  come  and  help  me  failing 

In  this  tormenting  flame — 
If  I  could  only  sip — 
If  Lazarus  would  drip 

A  little  drop  of  water 
Upon  my  parching  lip. 


No  hope  to  him  was  given, 
No  answer  from  the  Lord 

To  say  that  he  was  living 
Choose  good  for  his  reward. 

And  so,  beloved  child, 

Take  this  for  warning  mild, 
Abandon  idle  living, 

To  good  be  reconciled. 

7. 
It  is  a  truthful  story 

As  Christ  Himself  does  teach, 
Not  simply  allegory, 

Or  other  idle  speech, 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  15  233 

And  also  can  we  say- 
That  on  the  judgment  day 
The  one  will  be  rejoicing, 
The  other  mourning  stay. 

8. 
Christ  tells  us  very  plainly 

The  gate  is  open  wide 
And  many  enter  vainly 

In  worldliness  and  pride ; 
The  way  is  very  broad, 
It  is  an  easy  road, 

Which  leadeth  to  destruction 
And  sorrow's  dread  abode. 

9. 
We  read  with  greatest  wonder 

In  many  places  more, 
That  Christ  with  trumpet  's  thunder, 

While  angels  round  Him  soar, 
Will  come  upon  that  day, 
The  Holy  Scriptures  say, 

When  everything  material 
Will  crash  and  pass  away. 

10. 
And  then  must  all  assemble 

To  meet  His  searching  glance, 
Both  strong  and  weak  will  tremble 

To  see  that  countenance, 
The  reckoning  to  hear, 
What  each  in  his  career 

Has  done  of  good  or  evil — 
Oh,  children,  think  and  fear. 

11. 

Our  secret  inclinations 

Will  then  be  open  thrown, 
Our  strongest  aspirations 

Will  in  the  light  be  shown, 


234  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

And  he  who  then  with  heed, 
The  Book  of  Life  can  read, 

And  find  his  name  there  written, 
Is  fortunate  indeed. 

12. 
He  who  is  so  appointed 

Aside  at  Christ's  right  hand, 
Along  with  the  anointed, 

Among  the  sheep  will  stand, 
To  him  great  joy  will  be 
For  all  eternity, 

No  tongue  can  give  description 
Of  his  felicity. 

13. 
While  bells  are  softly  ringing, 

The  angel  music  choir 
With  chanting  and  with  singing, 

Will  enter  through  the  door 
To  Zion  's  golden  town, 
On  mortals  looking  down, 

And  every  lamb  of  Jesus 
Shall  then  receive  his  crown. 

14. 

Oh,  truest  shepherd  Jesus ! 

Count  us  among  Thine  own, 
Come  quickly  and  release  us, 

Amid  enticements  thrown, 
For  here  does  Satan  old 
His  wicked  nets  unfold 

And  ever  seek  to  win  us 
With  honors  and  with  gold. 

15. 
As  long  as  we  are  living 

Is  danger  ever  here, 
Unless  assistance  giving 

Thy  helping  hand  be  near. 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  15  235 

Thy  Holy  Spirit  send, 
That  He  support  may  lend, 
So  that  we  faithful  follow 
Thy  word  unto  the  end. 

16. 
Whene  'er  our  hearts  are  sinking 

Within  the  narrow  way, 
Assist  us  then  in  thinking 

That  any  wish  to  stray 
May,  from  Thy  judgment  stool 
Into  the  fiery  pool, 

Us  hurl  below  forever, 
Where  waters  never  cool. 

17. 
Whenever  earthly  rapture, 

Or  arrogance  or  lust, 
Shall  with  allurements  capture, 

Oh !  help  us  to  distrust — 
Enable  us  to  see 
What  endless  misery 

For  transitory  pleasures 
Will  ever  ready  be. 

18. 
Oh,  let  us  be  o  'erflowing 

With  true  humility ; 
The  lamp  of  faith  be  glowing 

That  all  of  us  may  see 
False  glimmerings  to  shun : 
The  world  be  overdone ; 

The  victory  o  'er  fleshly  things 
By  lowliness  be  won. 

19. 

Oh !  send  us  from  above, 

Thou  Bridegroom  of  the  soul ! 
Thou  source  of  purest  love ! 

A  living  burning  coal 


236  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

To  kindle  in  the  heart 
The  fear  of  Satan's  art 

That  all  things  may  be  hateful 
Which  would  from  Thee  us  part. 

20. 
The  virtuous,  oh  Father ! 

Acceptable  to  Thee, 
And  all  the  children  gather 

Who  still  unready  be 
That,  spread  on  every  side, 
Thy  kingdom  may  be  wide, 

And  that  Thy  will  be  followed, 
Thy  name  be  glorified. 

21. 
And  since  the  way  to  Jordan, 

The  long  and  narrow  road, 
Is  full  of  toil  and  burden, 

The  Cross  a  weary  load, 
Oh,  give  us  patience,  Lord, 
Thy  precious  help  afford, 

Withhold  not  from  our  failings 
Thy  sweet  forgiving  word. 

22. 
If  we  the  way  pursuing 

Should  ever  turn  aside 
Unto  our  own  undoing, 

Induced  by  worldly  pride, 
As  oft  indeed  has  been, 
And  for  the  grievous  sin 

Might  punishment  severest 
Deservedly  begin. 

23. 
Oh,  God,  and  glorious  Father, 

Our  failures  do  not  heed, 
But  for  Thy  Son's  sake  rather 

Be  merciful  indeed, 


SPIRITUAL  MAGAZINE  NO.  15  237 

So  that  when  sorrows  toss 
No  earthly  trial  or  loss, 

Not  even  death,  itself,  can 
Divide  us  from  the  cross. 

24. 

Then  praise  to  God  above 

Upon  the  highest  throne, 
To  Him  we  offer  love, 

To  Christ  His  blessed  Son, 
And  to  the  Holy  Ghost, 
In  whom  we  place  our  trust, 

They  bring  at  last  together 
The  pious  and  the  just. 


SCHRIFTEN 

WITH  TRANSLATION 


*5  4\!a?;T  Kräfte**;» 


5>v  ^i"V§  £. 


5^ 


31 


!^il 


=*:  •^■<- 


•A      S.   - 


:  k^Ä; 


^  ^ 


y* 


H*?* 


V 


^ 


8- 


i-i  s> 


^ 


^ 


•=1      '  ;     «O^  ^ 

s  u  *  rv  a 


\  '* 


Ai6CbC^AA/^/V  y  vl  /. '  •* .  NSEKD 


.!__* ~- 


i 


nsßfc- 

mm 


^3  33  £3 


Äs 


-•■»->••  *^tj 


TRANSLATION   OF   THE 

SCHRIFTEN 


Upon  God  's  grace  and  tender  blessing 
Everything  is  wholly  and  entirely  dependent ; 
And  without  Heaven  's  help  and  favor 
All  the  efforts  of  men  are  in  vain. 
Therefore,  continue  in  the  fear  of  the  Lord 
And  cling  to  it  throughout  thy  life, 
Because  it  brings  understanding  and  wisdom; 
Also  cause  all  things  to  prosper  well. 

B. 

Consider  well  in  all  things 

Which  thou  hast  to  do  in  this  world ; 

That  God  who  hears  and  sees  everything 

Also  sees  what  is  done  by  thee. 

And  that  thou  must  of  thy  deeds  and  life 

Render  an  account  on  the  judgment  day. 

Therefore  strive  by  day  and  by  night 

To  keep,  indeed,  thy  conscience  well. 

C. 

Cross,  discomfort,  distress  and  trouble 
Are  well  known  to  the  pious  on  earth ; 
Therefore,  be  comforted  and  undaunted 
If,  at  times,  thou  too  art  troubled. 
God  sends  thee  the  pang  of  the  cross 
After  the  manner  of  the  fathers,  and  for  thy  good, 
That  the  world  may  displease  thee 
And  may  not  keep  thee  out  of  Heaven. 
16  241 


242   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

D. 

Humility  is  a  lofty  virtue 

The  charm  of  old  age  and  the  adornment  of  youth, 

It  leads  mankind  heavenward. 

Therefore  remain  ever  devoted  to  it. 

Why  should  man,  the  little  worm,  be  proud 

Who  has  received  his  possessions  from  God, 

Whom  every  disease  promptly  disfigures 

And  whom  death  strikes  to  earth  ? 

E. 

Honor  every  man  according  to  his  rank, 

If  thou  wouldst  turn  love  and  praise  upon  thyself ; 

Especially,  fear  and  love  at  all  times 

Teachers  and  those  in  authority. 

Gray  hairs  with  equal  measure 

Let  honor  be  given  by  thee. 

Who  does  not  strive  to  do  this, 

Is  himself  not  worthy  of  honor. 

F. 

Idling  is  a  wicked  life 
To  which  no  man  should  submit  himself. 
Sloth  weakens  mind  and  spirit, 
On  the  contrary,  work  is  very  good. 
One  must  consider  St.  Paul  's  words, 
That  who  would  not  work  should  not  eat ; 
Therefore,  let  each  one  follow  the  calling 
For  which  God  the  Lord  created  him. 

G. 

Avarice  is  the  root  of  all  evil ; 
Let  it  by  no  means  oppress  thee, 
Because  it  leads  the  soul  from  God, 
And  leads  many  into  destruction. 


TKANSLATION  OF  THE  SCHRIFTEN      243 

What  the  hand  of  the  Highest  has  given  thee 
Use  that  aright  and  be  content. 
Be  pious  and  adhere  to  honesty, 
Then  great  joy  is  prepared  for  thee. 

H. 

Whole-souledness  in  right  things 

Causes  them  ultimately  to  succeed. 

Perseverance  in  the  right  track 

Is  indeed  becoming  to  good  Christians. 

We  shall  fear  God  and  not  inquire 

What  weak  man  may  say ; 

But  he  who  has  God  for  a  friend 

Is  a  man  whom  no  one  injures. 

J. 

The  more  thy  enemies  envy  thee 
The  more  shalt  thou  avoid  the  bad, 
The  more  thou  art  despised  and  hated, 
The  more  be  armed  with  understanding. 
A  pious  man  will  remain  upright, 
No  matter  what  hate  and  envy  do  to  him ; 
He  who  stands  well  with  his  Creator 
Is  a  man  who  never  sinks. 


K. 

Skill  and  understanding  are  precious  gifts. 

Thou,  too,  shalt  strive  to  gain  them, 

Especially  in  the  time  of  youth. 

When  everything  is  easily  learned. 

If  God  has  given  thee  a  pound, 

Then  shall  it  not  be  hid  by  thee. 

Use  it  to  the  glory  of  God, 

That  thy  neighbor  may  have  use  of  thee. 


244  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

L. 
Let  love  possess  thy  heart, 
Let  love  ever  enkindle  thee : 
Not  love  that  burns  in  lewdness 
And  runs  after  base  lust. 
The  love  of  God  shall  impel  thee 
That  thou  mayst  avoid  evil, 
That  thou  lovest  thy  neighbor  as  thyself 
And  bearest  thy  cross  patiently. 

M. 
With  moderation  it  is  easy  to  thrive. 
Poverty  causes  her  no  fear, 
Because  she  does  away  with  extravagance, 
And  keeps  everything  only  according  to  need. 
Health  stands  at  her  side, 
Let  her  prepare  also  thy  table, 
And  share  with  her  thy  food  and  drink. 
Then  thou  wilt  grow  old  and  rarely  ill. 

N. 
Envy  is  a  poison  and  rust  of  souls 
That  alone  enjoys  to  torture  itself. 
Therefore  look  to  it  with  all  diligence, 
Bar  for  it  the  door  of  thy  heart. 
Let  God  's  distribution  satisfy  thee ; 
He  does  not  give  all  to  every  one, 
He  does  not  give  all  in  one  place, 
He  gives  one  thing  here,  another  there. 

But  godliness  with  contentment  is  great  gain.    I  Tim.  vi,  6. 

0. 
To  live  in  a  house  without  order 
Will  never  make  a  rich  man, 
Therefore  take  care  of  thy  servants. 
See  what  each  does  and  follows, 


TRANSLATION  OF  THE  SCHRIFTEN      245 

Let  them  not  exercise  play  and  impertinence, 
Let  them  stay  at  home  at  night, 
Let  there  be  heard  God's  word  and  prayer. 
What  will  follow  ?    Blessing  will  come. 

Ye  fathers,  provoke  not  your  children  to  wrath:  but  bring 
them  up  in  the  nurture  and  admonition  of  the  Lord.  Ephes. 
vi,  4. 

Make  yourselves  purses  that  do  not  grow  old.  A  treasure 
that  never  diminishes  in  Heaven,  where  no  thief  breaks  through 
and  no  moth  corrupts. 

P. 

False  display  in  gestures,  actions,  words, 

Surely  are  injurious  everywhere ; 

Likewise  defiance  and  insolence 

Have  deprived  many  a  man  of  his  possessions. 

Therefore  be  in  all  things  modest. 

Dress  according  to  thy  rank, 

Estimate  not  too  high  nor  too  low, 

The  middle  road  is  just  right. 

God  resisteth  the  proud,  but  giveth  grace  unto  the  humble. 
James  iv,  6. 

Q. 

Torment  follows  a  life  of  lust; 

Who  then  would  strive  for  such  ? 

After  a  joy  that  is  short  and  slight 

Follows  long  misery  and  bitter  pain. 

O  how  much  better  to  avoid  in  the  first  place 

Than  afterward  to  suffer  such  great  agony ! 

God  let  me  stand  by  virtue, 

And  avoid  base  lust. 

Set  your  affections  on  things  above,  not  on  things  on  the 
earth.    Coloss.  iii,  2. 

(Short  Summary  of  the  150th  Psalm.) 


246   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

And  the  world  passeth  away,  and  the  lust  thereof:  but  he 
that  doeth  the  will  of  God  abidcth  forever.    I  John  ii,  17. 

R. 

Revenge  is  a  thing  that  God  will  take ; 

Therefore  thou  shalt  leave  it  to  Him. 

If  they  do  thee  wrong  and  take  advantage  of  thee, 

Commend  it  to  God,  but  in  such  form 

That  thou  immediately  layest  hate  away 

And  leavest  gentleness  in  thy  heart. 

Forgive,  for  God  forgives  thee  also 

And  charges  thee  to  do  the  same. 

Dearly  beloved,  avenge  not  yourselves.    Romans  xii,  19. 

S. 
Provide,  but  provide  in  such  a  way 
That  thou  canst  leave  it  to  God. 
Exercise  everywhere  industry  and  good  sense, 
Place  the  outcome  in  God's  hand. 
Thou  must  not  let  thy  courage  fail, 
Though  now  and  then  things  go  wrong ; 
Who  only  can  hope  firmly  in  God 
Will  remain  an  unsullied  man. 

Cast  thy  burden  upon  the  Lord,  and  He  shall  sustain  thee: 
He  shall  never  suffer  the  righteous  to  be  moved.    Psalm  lv,  22. 

T. 
Fidelity  is  rare  in  these  times 
And  deceit  is  found  on  every  hand ; 
Therefore  guard  thyself  well, 
And  be  cautious  in  confiding. 
An  attorney  often  leaves  undone 
What  is  to  thee  most  important, 
And  no  errand  is  so  satisfactory 
As  the  one  we  attend  to  ourselves. 


TRANSLATION  OF  THE  SCHRIFTEN      247 

Take  ye  heed  every  one  of  his  neighbor,  and  trust  ye  not  in 
any  brother.    Jeremiah  ix,  4. 

U. 

Dissension  and  wrangling  are  fellows 

Which  cause  great  wrath  and  anger. 

Folks  swear  and  scold, 

Men  are  degraded,  conscience  dulled; 

Therefore,  thou  shalt  flee  from  quarrel  and  dissension. 

Nor  drag  everything  into  court. 

Further,  if  thou  art  angry, 

Do  nothing  rash  with  mouth  or  hand. 

If  it  be  possible,  as  much  as  lieth  in  you,  live  peaceably  with 
all  men.     Eomans  xii,  18. 

V. 

Depend  not  upon  the  strength  of  men, 

For  the  flesh  is  but  a  weak  thing ; 

Who  seeks  protection  in  it 

Such  a  man  will  be  accursed, 

But  who  depends  upon  God 

And  submits  himself  wholly  to  Him, 

Will  be  blessed  here  in  time 

And  also  in  eternity  hereafter. — Jerem.  xvii,  5,  7. 

The  name  of  the  Lord  is  a  strong  tower:  the  righteous 
runneth  into  it,  and  is  safe.    Prov.  xviii,  10. 

W. 

To  be  truthful  and  act  righteously 

Is  becoming  to  young  and  old. 

Avoid  hypocrisy  and  false  appearance, 

Let  mouth  and  heart  be  together, 

The  devil  is  the  father  of  lies ; 

Therefore  flee  from  them  as  from  an  adder. 

Truth  will  endure  forever, 

Lies  will  perish. 


248   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

Wherefore  putting  aicay  lying,  speak  every  man  truth  with 
his  neighbors:  for  we  are  members  one  of  another.  Ephes. 
iv,  25. 

X. 

Xantippe  was  in  olden  times 

A  bad  woman,  scolding  and  quarrelling ; 

But  Socrates,  her  wise  husband, 

Accepted  it  as  a  pastime. 

Pray  to  the  founder  of  marriage, 

When  thou  wilt  enter  upon  the  marriage  state, 

That  He  may  be  thy  best  support, 

Then  will  there  be  joy  and  blessing  in  it. 

Y. 

Exercise  diligently  and  with  pity 
Charity  toward  pious  poor, 
Who  giveth  to  the  poor  lendeth  to  God, 
And  is  protected  from  distress  and  ridicule. 
The  wretched  are  not  to  be  despised, 
God  can  alter  thy  affairs. 
Fortune  is  round,  it  loves  unrest, 
Who  builds  on  it  builds  on  sand. 

Z. 

Finally,  live  so  upon  the  earth 

That  thou  mayest  become  a  citizen  of  Heaven. 

What  thou  seest  here,  far  and  wide, 

Is  all  pure  vanity. 

Death  will  not  forget  thee, 

Keep  it  constantly  in  mind. 

Which  perhaps  to-day 

May  hit  thee  with  his  arrow. 


Who  would  learn  to  read  and  write 
Must  at  first  abide  by  A.  B.  C. 
And  become  well  acquainted  with  this, 
Then  learning  will  progress  well. 


<^ 


W 


TRANSLATION  OF  THE  SCHRIFTEN      249 

The  copy  has  many  good  teachings 

For  thee  and  me  and  others  also. 

It  is  instructive. 

Employ  it  for  thy  instruction 

And  the  glory  of  the  one  God. 

Otherwise,  none 

But  God  deserves  the  glory. 

For  all  the  good  that  we  have, 
By  which  we  refresh  body  and  soul, 
Comes  from  the  Giver  of  good  gifts. 
The  good  that  we  enjoy  from  God 
Must  flow  back  into  its  first  source. 

In  heartfelt  humility 
And  childlike  obedience 
To  praise  God  at  all  times 
For  His  great  goodness, 
Grace  and  mercy. 

Then  our  gifts  remain  pure 
When  they  flow  back 
To  the  spring  from  which 
They  came. 

Bless  the  Lord,  0  my  soul;  and  all  that  is  within  me,  bless 
His  holy  name.  Bless  the  Lord,  0  my  soul,  and  forget  not  all 
His  benefits.    Psalm  ciii. 

1768,  July  18. 

Peace  be  to  the  brethren;  love  and  faith  from 
God  our  Father  and  the  Lord  Jesus  Christ. 

Let  this  mind  be  in  you,  which  was  also  in  Jesus 
Christ ;  who  being  in  the  form  of  God,  thought  it  not 
robbery  to  be  equal  with  God.  But  made  Himself  of 
no  reputation,  and  took  upon  Him  the  form  of  a 
servant,  and  was  made  in  the  likeness  of  men :    And 


250   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

being  found  in  fashion  as  a  man,  He  humbled  Him- 
self, and  became  obedient  unto  death,  even  the  death 
of  the  cross. 

Wherefore  God  also  hath  highly  exalted  Him, 
and  given  Him  a  name  which  is  above  every  name : 
That  at  the  name  of  Jesus  every  knee  should  bow, 
of  things  in  heaven,  and  things  in  earth,  and  things 
under  the  earth ;  And  that  every  tongue  should  con- 
fess that  Jesus  Christ  is  Lord,  to  the  glory  of  God 
the  Father.  Wherefore,  my  beloved,  as  ye  have 
always  obeyed,  not  as  in  my  presence  only,  but  now 
much  more  in  my  absence,  work  out  your  own  salva- 
tion with  fear  and  trembling.  For  it  is  God  which 
worketh  in  you  both  to  will  and  to  do  of  His  good 
pleasure.  (I  Phil,  ii,  5-13.) 

For  consider  him  that  endureth  such  contradic- 
tion of  sinners  against  himself,  lest  ye  be  wearied 
and  faint  in  your  minds.  Ye  have  not  yet  resisted 
unto  blood,  striving  against  sin.  (Hebrews  xii,  3,  4.) 

Repent 

Consider  what  thou  must  flee,  that  is,  all  sin; 
what  thou  must  do,  the  commandments  of  God ; 
what  thou  must  fear,  the  cross,  death  and  eternal 
damnation;  what  thou  must  desire  and  hope  for, 
spiritual  things  in  this  life  and  eternal  things  in 
the  life  to  come ;  attentiveness  in  prayer,  patience  in 
misfortune,  unity  of  heart  and  word,  a  good  con- 
science with  every  act.  Such  a  life  stands  the  test 
before  God  and  man.  As  thou  believest  thou  livest. 
As  thou  livest  thou  diest.  As  thou  diest  thou  f  arest. 
As  thou  f arest  thou  remainest. 


-  : 


I  *     ,     v  - 


-  i 


s  - 


4 


-Mk  \*>!^  55^W  .^s. 


TRANSLATION  OF  THE  SCHRIFTEN      251 

Help  then,  dear  Lord,  that  we  so  believe  and 
live  that  we  need  not  fear  to  die.  Time  passes  away. 
Where  does  it  lead  our  footsteps'?  Are  we  on  the 
right  path  to  the  heavenly  Canaan  ?  A  stork  and  a 
crane  are  prepared.  They  point  to  their  time.  Like- 
wise the  swallow  and  the  turtle-dove  do  not  let 
themselves  be  robbed  of  their  time.  The  little  ani- 
mal and  the  like  teach  us  a  nice  lesson,  how  we  in  the 
time  of  grace  should  gather  for  eternity.  Motto  25. 
For  one  sees  it  and  finds  it  recorded  how  great  a 
factor  time  is.  Therefore  guard  it  well  and  be  dili- 
gent in  seeing  how  the  same  is  spent  in  order  that 
thou  mayest  enter  into  His  rest. 

And  when  he  had  called  the  people  unto  Him 
with  His  disciples  also,  He  said  unto  them,  as  fol- 
lows :  Whosoever  will  come  after  Me,  let  him  deny 
himself,  and  take  up  his  cross,  and  follow  Me.  For 
whosoever  will  save  his  life  shall  lose  it ;  but  who- 
soever shall  lose  his  life  for  My  sake  and  the  Gos- 
pel's  sake  the  same  shall  save  it.  For  what  shall  it 
profit  a  man,  if  he  shall  gain  the  whole  world,  and 
lose  his  own  soul?  Or  what  shall  a  man  give  in 
exchange  for  his  soul  ?  Whoever  therefore  shall  be 
ashamed  of  Me  and  of  My  words  in  this  adulterous 
and  sinful  generation,  of  him  also  shall  the  Son  of 
man  be  ashamed,  when  He  cometh  in  the  glory  of 
His  Father  with  the  holy  angels.  (Mark  viii,  34,  35, 
36,  37,  38.) 

Oh,  my  God,  help  us  to  live  a  Christian  life  and 
to  die  a  blessed  death,  for  a  Christian  life  and  a 
blessed  death  are  sufficient  rewards  here  upon  this 
earth. 


252   THE  WOBKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

To  follow  Jesus  in  precept  and  example  merits 
the  greatest  gain,  eternal  life. 

Christ,  our  Head  and  King,  we  should  follow 
obediently  in  word  and  deed.  We  should  renounce 
our  own  unregenerated  life  and  restrain  it.  We 
should  take  up  willingly  the  cross  of  Christ  and 
not  be  ashamed  to  follow  Him.  Oh,  dear  Jesus,  sup- 
port us  and  grant  us  Thy  spirit  and  power.  Oh, 
help  us  to  overcome  all  that  would  bind  us  to  this 
world.  What  does  it  amount  to  if  we  achieve  great 
success  through  which  the  soul  is  lost  ?  What  does 
it  amount  to  if  we  love  the  world  with  all  its  splendor 
and  despise  humility?  This  militates  against  the 
glory  of  Christ.    It  reaps  its  reward  accordingly. 

But  whoever  in  the  time  of  grace  feels  his  many 
short-comings,  that  he  is  heavily  laden  with  sin,  will 
enter  with  the  lost  son,  in  true  penitence,  the  throne 
of  grace.  What  heretofore  was  to  him  a  joy,  that 
now  is  for  him  a  heartfelt  sorrow  and  sadness.  He 
will  now  gladly  renounce  the  world  and  carry  the 
cross  for  Christ.  He  who  can  thus  surrender  him- 
self to  God,  him  will  God  help  from  death  into  life. 

Let  God  arise,  let  His  enemies  be  scattered ;  let 
them  also  that  hate  Him  flee  before  Him.  As  smoke 
is  driven  away,  so  drive  them  away :  as  wax  melteth 
before  the  fire,  so  let  the  wicked  perish  at  the  pres- 
ence of  God.  But  let  the  righteous  be  glad ;  let  them 
rejoice  before  God:  yea,  let  them  exceedingly  re- 
joice. (Psalm  lxviii,  1,  2,  3.) 

Joy  and  love  for  each  task,  maketh  light  all  effort 

and  labor. 

Jacob  Harley. 

His  signature,  February  7,  1798. 


pI£e 


l#l',*48   XL     L-      Kl     *s>.  —  *■*  . 


MAR 


^ 


w  ^ 


ze*m*£ 


£  &*  **  *  *  *  *  3i<  *  *  *L  *  *  *  *•'  **  *•  * 

-"""    ;s -  'k: - — ; ■■         -    -v-'— "-t"-" -•■   ■  - —  ■ *— — 


HYMNS 

WITH  TRANSLATION 


HYMNS 

WITH   TRANSLATION 


l. 

Ihr  sünder  kommt  gegangen, 
Seht  euren  Jesum  an, 
Wie  schmerzlich  er  thut  hangen 
Am  harten  creutzes-stamm, 
Erschrecklich  zugericht, 
Sein  göttlich  angesicht, 
Mit  bhit  ganz  übermahlet, 
Gleich  keinem  menschen  nicht. 


2. 

Vom  haupt  bis  zu  den  füssen 
Ist  Jesus  ganz  zerfetzt, 
Am  ganzen  leib  zerrissen, 
All  glieder  sind  verletzt ; 
Betrachts,  o  menschen  kind, 
Das  machen  unsre  sünd, 
Ja,  ja,  die  sünd  alleine, 
Jesum  ans  creutze  bind't. 


Seht  Jesum  fällt  in  zügen, 
Der  kräften  ganz  beraubt, 
Dem  tod  muszt  unterliegen, 
Er  neiget  schon  sein  haupt ; 
Die  sonn  und  auch  der  mond 
Verfinstert  sich  auch  schon ; 
Mit  schmerzen  thut  er  büssen 
Der  sünden  straf  und  lohn. 
255 


256  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

4. 

Darum,  ihr  Christen  alle, 

Bedenket  diese  zeit, 

Man  tränket  ihn  mit  galle, 

In  seinem  grossen  leid ; 

Durch  dornen,  spott  und  höhn, 

Erwirbt  er  eine  krön, 

Die  tragen  wir  mit  freuden 

Als  eine  beut  davon. 


5. 

Ach  Jesu,  lasz  dein  leiden, 

Dein  bittre  todes-pein 

An  mir,  wann  ich  musz  scheiden, 

Nur  nicht  verloren  seyn, 

Dein  gnad  sich  zu  uns  wend, 

An  meinem  letzten  end, 

Und  wann  ich  geh  von  hinnen, 

So  reich  mir  deine  händ. 


6. 

Ach  Jesu,  lasz  mir  werden 
Ein  solches  tröpflein  blut, 
Das  auf  der  blossen  erden, 
Am  creutz,  dort  liegen  thut ; 
Dis  rosenfarbig  blut, 
Das  komme  mir  zu  gut, 
Wann  sich  einmal  mein'  seele, 
Vom  leibe  scheiden  thut. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  257 

1. 
Ye  sinners  come  along, 
Your  Jesus  to  behold, 
How  He  in  pain  doth  hang 
Upon  the  cross 's  cruel  stem, 
Disfigured  in  a  dreadful  way, 
His  godlike  countenance 
With  blood  is  sprinkled  over, 
Unlike  to  any  human  creature. 

2. 
From  head  to  foot 
Is  Jesus  mangled  so, 
His  body  is  wholly  racked, 
All  his  limbs  are  wounded, 
Behold,  oh  child  of  man, 
This  is  due  to  our  sins, 
Yea,  yea,  He  through  sin  alone 
Upon  the  cross  doth  hang. 

3. 
See  Jesus  draw  his  dying  gasps, 
Of  powers  all  bereft, 
To  death  He  must  succumb. 
He  now  doth  bow  His  head ; 
The  sun  and  e'en  the  moon 
Are  with  darkness  overcast ; 
In  pain  He  now  doth  reap 
The  penalty,  the  reward  of  sin 

4. 

Therefore,  ye  Christians  all, 
Be  mindful  of  this  time, 
They  moist  His  tongue  with  gall, 
In  His  great  suffering ; 
Through  thorns,  scoffs  and  scorn, 
He  wins  the  heavenly  crown, 
These  we  shall  bear  with  joy, 
A  trophy  of  His  victory. 
17 


258   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

5. 
Oh,  Jesus,  let  Thy  sorrow, 
Thy  bitter  pain  of  death 
On  me,  when  I  must  part, 
Be  not  in  vain. 
Grant  to  us  Thy  grace, 
When  life's  end  draws  nigh, 
And  when  I  pass  death's  dark  vale, 
Then  lend  to  me  Thy  guiding  hand. 

6. 
Oh  Jesus,  give  to  me 
Such  a  little  drop  of  blood 
As  there  upon  the  naked  earth, 
At  the  cross  doth  lie ; 
May  this  rose-colored  blood, 
Come  to  me  a  sacred  boon, 
When  once  this  soul  of  mine, 
Shall  leave  behind  this  mortal  coil. 


HYMNS  WITH  TEANSLATION  259 

1. 

Süsser  Christ, 

Der  du  bist 

Meine  wonne, 

Du  bist  meines  herzens  lust, 

Ich  trag  dich  an  meiner  brüst, 

0  du  schöne  himmels-sonne. 

2. 

Du  hast  dich 

Ja  für  mich, 

Lassen  tödten, 

Und  dein  rosen-f  arbes  blut 

Ist  für  meine  seele  gut, 

Wenn  sie  kämpft  in  höchsten  nöthen. 

3. 

Drum,  o  schätz, 

Lasz  mich  platz 

Bey  dir  finden,  . 

Hast  du  doch  die  Seligkeit 

Auch  für  mich,  dein  kind,  bereit, 

Und  bezahlt  für  meine  sünden. 

4. 
Sprichst  du  nicht : 
Dein  gesicht 
Blickt  auf  arme, 
Das  ist,  wie  ein  vater  thut, 
Ueber  das  geplagte  gut, 
Sich  zu  rechter  zeit  erbarme. 

5. 

Ist  nicht  kund, 
.    Dasz  dein  mund 
Dem  verziehen, 
Der  im  tempel  reue  trug, 
Und  mit  weh  ans  herze  schlug ; 
Soll  ich  dann  nun  vor  dir  fliehen. 


260  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

6. 
Nein,  auf  dich 
Grund  ich  mich, 
Du  kanst  retten, 

Wenn  mich  gleich  der  blasse  tod, 
Wenn  mich  hölle,  quaal  und  noth, 
Allbereit  gefangen  hätten. 

7. 
Nimm  mich  auf, 
Wenn  mein  lauf 
Wird  geschlossen, 
Lasz  in  deiner  seiten  schrein 
Meine  seele  sicher  seyn, 
Weil  dein  blut  für  mich  vergossen. 

8. 
Fort,  o  weit, 
Mir  gefällt 
Nichts  auf  erden, 
Leid  ist  in  der  eitelkeit, 
Lust  ist  in  der  Seligkeit; 
Jesu,  lasz  mich  selig  werden. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  261 

1. 

Delightful  Christ, 

Thou  which  art 

My  pleasure, 

Thou  art  the  joy  of  my  heart, 

I  bear  Thee  in  my  bosom, 

Oh  thou  beautiful  light  of  heaven. 

2. 

Thou  hast  Thyself, 

Yea,  for  me, 

Let  be  crucified. 

And  Thy  rose-colored  blood, 

Is  my  soul's  consolation, 

When  it  strives  in  greatest  needs. 

3. 
Thus,  0  treasure. 
Let  me  find 
Room  with  Thee, 
As  Thou  hast  redemption  free, 
E  'en  for  me,  Thy  child,  prepared 
And  paid  the  debt  for  all  my  sins. 

4. 
Say'st  Thou  not 
Thy  countenance 
Beholds  the  poor  ? 
Just  as  doth  a  father, 
Over  his  molested  lot, 
Look  betimes  in  pity. 

5. 

I  can't  conceive 

That  only  Thy  tongue 

Spoke  to  him  forgiveness 

Who  repentance  felt  within  the  temple, 

And  in  sorrow  smote  his  breast. 


262   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

G. 
Nay,  on  Thee 
I  rely, 

Thou  canst  save, 
Even  though  blanched  death, 
E  'en  though  hell,  pain  and  torment, 
Me  within  their  jaws  hold  fast. 

7. 
Take  me  up, 
When  my  life, 
Will  meet  its  close, 
Let  within  Thy  silken  shrine, 
My  soul  rest  in  safety, 
For  Thy  blood  for  me  was  shed. 

8. 
Go,  oh  world, 
Me  doth  please 
Naught  upon  this  earth, 
Sorrow  lurks  in  vanity, 
Joy  abounds  in  blessedness ; 
Jesus,  grant  me  Thy  salvation. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  263 

DAS   GÜLDENE  A.  B.  C. 

Mel.  Psalm  cxxxiv. 

1. 

Allein  auf  Gott  setz  dein  vertraun, 
Auf  menschen  hülf  sollt  du  nicht  baun, 
Gott  ists  allein  der  glauben  hält, 
Sonst  ist  kein  glaub  mehr  in  der  weit. 


Bewahr  dein  ehr,  hüt  dich  für  schand, 
Ehr  is  fürwahr  dein  höchstes  pf and ; 
Wirst  du  die  schanz  einmal  versehn, 
So  ists  nun  deine  ehr  geschehn. 

3. 

Clan3  nicht  zu  veil,  sodern  hör  mehr, 
Das  wird  dir  bring 'n  lob,  preis  und  ehr; 
Mit  schweigen  sich  verredt  niemand, 
Claffen  bringt  manchen  in  sünd  und  schand. 

4. 

Dem  grossen  weich,  acht  dich  gering, 
Das  er  dich  nicht  in  Unglück  bring ; 
Dem  kleinen  auch  kein  unrecht  thu, 
So  bleibst  du  stets  in  rast  und  ruhe. 


Erheb  dich  nicht  mit  stolzem  muth, 
Wann  du  bekommen  hast  grosz  gut ; 
Es  ist  dir  nicht  darum  gegeb  ,n, 
Das  du  dich  dadurch  sollt  erheben. 


264  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

6. 

Frömmig  keit  lasz  gefallen  dir, 
Vielmehr  dann  gold,  das  glaub  du  mir ; 
Wann  geld  und  gut  sich  von  dir  scheidt, 
So  weicht  doch  nicht  die  frömmigkeit. 

7. 

Gedenk  der  arm'n  zu  aller  frist 
Wann  du  von  Gott  gesegnet  bist, 
Sorst  dir  das  widerfahren  kann, 
Was  Christus  sagt  von  reichen  Man. 

8. 

Hat  dir  jemand  was  guts  gethan, 
Da  sollt  du  allzeit  denken  an ; 
Es  soll  dir  seyn  von  herzen  leid, 
An  dis  zu  spür'n  Undankbarkeit. 

9. 

In  deiner  jugend  sollt  du  dich 
Zur  arbeit  halten  fleissig  lieh ; 
Hernach  gar  schwer  die  arbeit  ist, 
Wann  du  zum  alter  kommen  bist. 

10. 

Kehr  dich  auch  nicht  an  jedermann, 
Der  dir  vor  auger  dienen  kann ; 
Nicht  alles  geht  von  herzensgrund, 
Was  schön  und  lieblicht  redt  der  mund. 

11. 

Lasz  kein  Unfall  verdrieszen  dich, 
Wann  das  glück  gehet  hinter  sich ; 
Anfang  und  ende  sind  nicht  gleich, 
Wie  solches  gar  offt  findet  sich. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  265 

12. 

Mäszig  im  zorn  sey  allezeit 
Nur  klein  ursach  erheb  kein  streit ; 
Durch  zorn  das  herze  wird  verblendt, 
Das  niemand  recht  damit  erkennt. 

13. 

Nicht  schäm  dich,  rath  ich  allermeist, 
Das  mann  dich  lehr  waz  du  nicht  weiszt, 
Wer  etwas  kann,  den  hält  man  werth, 
Der  ungeschicht 'n  niemand  begehrt. 

14. 

0  merk,  so  oiner  führt  ein  klag 
Für  dir,  dasz  du  so  bald  der  sag 
Nicht  glaubest,  auch  nicht  richest  fort, 
Sondern  hörest  des  audern  wort. 

15. 

Pracht  und  hoffart  meid  überall, 
Das  du  nicht  kommest  in  Unfall ; 
Mancher  war  ein  behaltner  mann, 
Hatt'er  hoffart  und  pracht  gelahn. 

16. 

Quat  von  niemand  gedenk  noch  Sprech, 
Dann  kein  mensch  lebet  ohn  gebrech ; 
Eedest  du  all's  nach  dienern  wilTn, 
Man  wird  dich  bald  wieder  stillen. 

17. 

Ruf  Gott  in  allen  nöthen  an, 
Er  wird  gewisz  bey  dir  stahn ; 
Er  hilft  ein  jeden  aus  der  noth, 
Der  nur  nach  seinem  willen  thut. 


266   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

18. 

Sieh  dich  wohl  für,  zeit  ist  bös. 

Die  weit  ist  falsch  und  sehr  gottlos ; 

Willt  du  der  weit  sehr  hangen  an, 

Ohn  schad  und  schand  kommst  nicht  davon. 

19. 

Tracht  stets  darnach  was  recht  gethan, 
Ob  dich  schon  nicht  lobt  jedermann ; 
Es  kans  doch  niemand  machen  so, 
Das  jedermann  gefallen  thu. 

20. 

Verlasz  dich  nicht  auf  irrdisch  ding, 
All  seitlich  gut  verschwind  gering; 
Darum  der  mensch  gar  weislich  thut, 
Der  allein  sucht  das  ewig  gut. 

21. 

Wann  jemand  mit  dir  hadern  will, 
So  rath  ich  das  du  schweigest  still ; 
Und  ihm  nicht  hilfest  auf  die  bahn 
Da  er  gern  wollt  ein  ursach  han. 

22. 

Xerxes  verliesz  sich  auf  sein  heer, 
Darab  ward  er  geschlagen  sehr ; 
So  du  muszt  kriegen,  Gott  vertrau, 
Sonst  allezeit  den  frieden  ban. 

23. 

Ye  läng'r  je  mehr  kehr  dich  zu  Gutt, 
Dasz  du  nicht  kriegst  des  teuf  eis  spott ; 
Der  mensch  ein  solchen  lohn  wird  han, 
Wie  er  im  leben  hat  gethan. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  267 

24. 
Zier  all  dein  thun  mit  redlichkeit. 
Bedenk  zum  end  den  letzten  b  'scheid ; 
Dann  vor  gethan  nnd  nach  bedacht. 
Hat  manchen  in  grosz  leid  gebracht. 


268   THE  "WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

THE   GOLDEN  A.  B.  C. 

Mel.  Psalm  cxxxiv. 

1. 

Put  thy  trust  in  God  alone, 
On  the  help  of  men  thou  shalt  not  rely, 
It  is  only  God  whose  faith  doth  hold, 
No  other  trust  is  there  on  earth. 

2. 

Guard  thine  honor,  avoid  shame ; 
Honor  is  indeed  the  greatest  gain ; 
If  thou  should 'st  miss  a  single  chance, 
Then  wilt  thine  honor  pass  away. 


Talk  not  too  much,  but  listen  more, 
It  will  bring  thee  glory,  honor,  praise, 
With  silence  no  one  makes  a  slip, 
Gabbling  leads  many  into  sin  and  shame. 

4. 

To  the  great  give  way,  be  humble, 
That  they  bring  thee  not  into  trouble ; 
To  the  lowly  also  do  no  harm, 
Then  thou  wilt  always  be  in  peace  and  rest. 

5. 

Be  not  puffed  up  with  lofty  pride, 
If  thou  hast  gained  a  great  success ; 
It  was  not  given  with  that  intent, 
That  thou  should 'st  thus  exult  thyself. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  269 

6. 

Let  piety  be  thy  satisfaction, 
It 's  more  than  gold,  believe  me  true ; 
Though  riches  and  honor  part  from  thee, 
Yet  abideth  still  true  piety. 

7. 

At  all  times,  be  mindful  of  the  poor, 
If  thou  hast  been  blest  by  God, 
Or  thou  mayest  have  the  fate 
That  Christ  ascribes  to  the  rich  man. 

8. 

If  any  one  hath  done  good  by  thee, 
Of  him  shalt  thou  ever  mindful  be ; 
A  heartfelt  sorrow  shall  come  to  thee 
If  thou  shalt  show  ingratitude. 


In  thy  youth  thou  shalt  keep 
Thyself  at  labor  with  all  zeal ; 
Hereafter  labor  will  be  o  'erhard, 
When  thou  shalt  be  of  ripe  old  age. 

10. 

Be  not  disturbed  by  every  one 
Who  claims  before  thine  eyes  to  serve  thee ; 
Not  all  proceeds  from  a  true  heart. 
However  sweet  and  lovely  speaks  the  tongue. 

11. 

Let  not  misfortune  trouble  thee, 
When  success  doth  withdraw  itself ; 
Beginning  and  end  are  not  the  same, 
As  one  hath  often  noticed  this. 


270  THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

12. 

Always  be  moderate  in  anger, 
Let  no  small  cause  create  some  strife ; 
Through  anger  the  heart  becometh  blind 
That  no  one  knows  himself  aright. 

13. 

Be  not  ashamed,  is  my  best  advice, 
If  one  doth  teach  thee  something  new ; 
Him  wrho  knows,  one  doth  prize, 
The  foolish  all  do  despise. 

14. 

Oh  consider,  if  one  makes  complaint 
Before  thee,  not  to  believe  too  soon, 
Nor  pass  a  hasty  judgment, 
But  hear  also  the  defendant's  word. 


15. 

Pomp  and  arrogance  avoid  always, 
That  thou  may'st  not  fall  into  disgrace; 
Many  a  man  was  high  esteemed 
If  he  disdained  haughtiness  and  display. 

16. 

Neither  speak  nor  think  of  any  one  evil, 
For  no  one  lives  without  a  break ; 
If  thou  shouldst  speak  without  restraint 
One  could  soon  put  thee  to  silence. 

17. 

Call  upon  God  in  every  time  of  trouble, 
He  will  indeed  be  thy  help  and  strength ; 
He  leadeth  each  one  out  of  anguish, 
Who  only  doth  His  righteous  will. 


HYMNS  WITH  TRANSLATION  271 

18. 

Provide  for  thyself,  the  time  is  evil, 
The  world  is  full  of  deceit  and  godlessness ; 
Wilt  thou  cling  to  worldly  things, 
Harm  and  shame  thou  canst  not  escape. 

19. 

Always  seek  to  do  what 's  right, 
Even  if  not  all  do  praise  thee ; 
For  no  one  can  act  in  such  a  way, 
That  each  and  all  are  pleased  thereby. 

20. 

Rely  not  on  earthly  things, 
All  temporal  joy  fades  to  naught ; 
Thus  the  man  who  wise  would  be, 
Seeks  alone  the  eternal  good. 

21. 

Should  some  one  wish  to  strive  with  thee, 
I  advise  you  keep  in  silence  still ; 
And  do  not  help  him  on  the  track, 
Or  give  him  cause  for  acting  thus. 

22. 

Xerxes  put  his  trust  in  armies, 
Therefore  he  was  beaten  sadly ; 
If  thou  must  strive,  trust  in  God, 
Then  always  seek  the  paths  of  peace. 

23. 

The  more  thy  days  the  more  turn  to  God, 
Lest  thou  fall  into  Satan  's  scorn ; 
Man  will  always  have  such  reward 
As  he  in  life  in  deeds  hath  done. 


272   THE  WORKS  OF  CHRISTOPHER  DOCK 

24. 

Deck  all  thy  acts  with  probity, 
Consider  ever  the  end  of  life ; 
Hasty  acting  and  after  thought, 
Have  many  men  to  sorrow  brought. 


THE  END.